Home

Ektron CMS400 User Manual - Ektron Product Documentation

1. Paste the clipboard s contents as plain Copying from text That is all HTML tags including Microsoft Word on images are stripped out page 493 Paste Plain Text This button is helpful when you want to eliminate HTML formatting from the copied text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 487 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Launch the Search and Replace dialog Finding and box The dialog searches for and lets Replacing Text on you optionally replace text that you page 495 specify F Ctrl P Print the editor content Bom ome ittneettrconent wf Und Ctrl Z Reverse the most recent action as if it ngo never occurred You can undo as many actions as you wish 4 Find and Replace Et Begin spell checker Checking Spelling Insert a bookmark anchor Using Bookmarks a Change information about a hyperlink Using Hyperlinks Add edit Hyperlink on page 524 Remove a hyperlink Removing a Remove Hyperlink Hyperlink on page 528 aa Insert a library file Adding a Library K Library File to Content on page 150 E Eaa Create a wiki link Using Ektron Add Wiki Link CMS400 NET s Wiki Feature on page 785 Tranelaie Translate content into another language Translating Content to Another Language on page 59 Insert a horizontal line Horizontal Line Ektron CMS400 NET
2. ccccesssecsssseseeeseeseseeseeseeseeneesenseeses 318 OS E AE E E ETE Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 v Adding a BIO sssini aaa sien 323 Biog Frop rllGS oirnn aaa 325 Language Support s sosssissscscsnsisininninicnnninnsnnuninnuni nnana 343 UN a Blusur 343 Searching BlOgS sannsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnm nnna 344 Subscribing Unsubscribing to a BlOG ccccsessseeeeseeseeeeeeess 344 ey ana cation EA E A EA 348 Blod COMMENTS siressa Eaa 357 Adding or Editing Blog posts with Windows Live Writer 365 My WorkSpace ccssecescceseeeseeeseceeesesssseees OL Pere tiyg a to E neon A tee rr eer monensin E 372 EN E E E E E 383 Message BOIU isro 390 Ba E e lt E IE PE E EE A E AE E E A ee eneeee 393 So Ta aii tla ha GrOUDS suiii a 405 OS iiai a 408 FO OS EOE E A E E E DOR E E E 410 Web Site Navigation AidS cccsseeseeeeseees 417 Working with Collections ccccssecessecenseeeseceeesenees 417 Finding Collections s seircwisreasi 418 Viewing a Collection ccccccsesececesseeeeeesseeseesseeeseeseeeseenseees 421 Creating a Collection nnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn a 423 Editing Content in a Collection cesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 431 Reordering Collections LiSt cccsssseeesssseeeceesseeeeeeneeesees 432 Editing Collection Information ccccccsssse
3. ol saat A La ae aR HTML Content and Assets can be displayed on the site when a developer adds the CommunityDocuments server control to a Community Web site For additional information on the CommunityDocuments server control see the Developer Manual section Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Server Controls gt Community Platform Server Controls gt CommunityDocuments Server Control Adding Folders to My Workspace gt gt Documents You can add subfolders in the Documents area to help you sort assets and content into categories The subfolders represent a taxonomy of the items contained in the documents area To add subfolders follow these steps 1 In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Documents Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 373 My Workspace 2 Click the Manage Folder button yz 3 The Add Folder box appears 4 Enter a Name for the folder 5 Click the Add button Add 6 When the page refreshes it opens to the newly added folder Documents Workspace Test Folder 0 No subcategory exists iz Edit a Folder Name in My Workspace gt gt Documents Sometimes it is necessary to change the name of folder in the My Workspace gt gt Documents area To accomplish this follow these steps 1 In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Documents 2 Click the folder s Edit button 421 This button is located to the left o
4. Language ID Status 2 amp Snir E About Us d 35 A 2 28 2007 9 06 1 Careers About Us Index 4 276 A 4 4 2006 3 28 17 Oe ores relic Business Practices d 84 A 8 8 2006 5 55 50 Why Choose Ektron 4 64 A 8 8 2006 5 56 50 In this chapter you learn about adding editing publishing and deleting content through the following subtopics Permissions and Approvals are explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual e Viewing a Folder on page 30 e Workarea Toolbar Buttons on page 64 e Deleting a Folder on page 40 e Viewing Content on page 40 e Expanding the Content Area on page 47 e Adding HTML Content on page 48 e Editing HTML Content on page 52 e Deleting Content on page 60 e Workarea Toolbar Buttons on page 64 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 29 Viewing a Folder Viewing a Folder To view any folder under the content folder follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea as described in Site Preview on page 14 2 Click Content from the left lower side of the Workarea My Workspace p Modu x 3 All content in the root folder and the selected language appear in the right frame Subfolders appear in the upper left frame NOTE The View menu option lets you filter content by type For example you can set it to view only HTML content Therefore you may only s
5. cccsssseeeceeseeeseeeeees 574 Section 508 TaDleS sssini ana 576 Working with HTML Forims cccccssseseseeseeeeeseeeeeeeaeeenees 580 Overview of Form Processing ccssssscccsssseeseeesseesseeseenseeees 582 The Structure of Form Data cccccccssssseeeseeseeesseeseeeseeenees 582 Creating a New FOrM sasssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnm nnna 582 Creating a Form s Conte nt cccccccssseeeesesseeceesseeeseeneeeseoees 591 Form AUN ssc here ee teresa aaa 596 o O ne EEE nen eatieig ay esecancantapyeayeeeneseeies 596 Editing a Formi Field Weetpeerne anne e sete te eennel eet sen ncer seeen neste a 618 Inserting or Editing Buttons on the Form cccceeeeseeeees 619 Implementing a Form on a Web Page cccsssseseeseeeenneenees 621 Assigning a Task tO a Form 2 cccccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeneees 621 Viewing Form RepotrtS asssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 624 Viewing Form INfOrmatiOn cccccccsesesseeeeeeseeeseeeseeeenseeeneees 624 Editing a FOr vcd cstntssenlad ciedatvccuseaauanimnedidce waaeebsaeuisasebdomencessdewntas 625 EN a FOr siensa 625 View Form Toolbar sssasssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nna 625 Creating Polls and Surveys cccssseceessesseeceesseeeseenneessoees 625 Introduction to eWebEditPro XM_L 633 Creating a Simple Web Page cccssssceseseeseeeeeee
6. Click OK The Picture Properties dialog box reappears Here you can change the picture s properties For more information see e Adjusting a Picture on page 686 e Setting a Border on page 687 e Aligning the Picture on page 688 e Adding Space around the Picture on page 690 e Editing the Picture s Title on page 691 9 Click OK to insert the picture into the editor Using the Second Media Selection Dialog Box When using the second Media Selection dialog box you can insert a picture from any folder available to your computer whether the folder is on your computer or a remote computer or from the Web server Your Webmaster determines which pictures are available on the Web server To insert a picture from e a folder available to your computer click Select New File navigate to the file of interest and click OK e the Web server click the Select Server File button You are prompted to enter a User Name and Password Your Webmaster assigns these codes to you which are needed to copy the file to the Web server Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 684 Inserting Images Next the Image Explorer dialog appears illustrated below Navigate through the folder structure until you find the image Then click OK to insert the image into eWebEditPro XML Image Explorer tolde Select folder3 indes simiie ipg See Also e The Picture Properties Dialog Box on page
7. Content Searchable Content Category i Desktop JS Name CS H My Computer W 20593ABD 8D1E 41B7 A24B FOEC 416 KB Sag My Network Places E 22111 Property searches not wor 3 KB i My Documents O 5410_user pdf 238 KB Ee Gai 6 1 online help C Wi 9216265555154180a80c536d633 111 KB absence reporting 0344668acb958d97a3 25 KB A CMS 400 doc 44 KB 4 y cms400 51 help stationery w The left frame shows folders in your computer The right frame shows files in the selected folder 6 Inthe left frame select the folder that contains files you want to upload 7 Inthe right frame check the box next to each file you want to upload To select all files in the folder check the box in the header circled below a Schedule Comment Templates FABD 801E 416 AZ4B FOEC 1 l 7111 Pmnertu eearches nnt wer aTe NOTE You can only import files from one folder at a time 8 If appropriate enter the files summary metadata schedule tasks comments or category Any information you enter is applied to all selected files 9 To check in the files click the Check In button Ei from the top left corner Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 237 Using the Document Management System To submit the files into the approval chain click the Submit IEE or Approve Ee button Adding Documents Using Drag and Drop When using drag and drop
8. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 660 The Context Sensitive Menu This section explains the functions available on the menu that appears when you right click the mouse within the eWebEditPro XML editor You can also access this menu by pressing the application key Eh Because this menu can change depending on what you are doing it is called a context sensitive menu Menus Cut Copy Paste Paste Text Select All Clean HTML Hyperlink Insert HTML iv View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Picture Insert Custom Tag NOTE A different context sensitive menu is available when your cursor is within a table That menu is described in The Table Context Sensitive Menu on page 735 The following table lists the menu options and where to get more information on each Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 661 The Context Sensitive Menu Menu Option Lets you For more information see Menus View all toolbar menus Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse on page 92 Cut Remove selected text and graphics Place that data into temporary memory If you later cut or copy more information into memory the information in memory is lost Copy Copy selected text and graphics into Copying from Other temporary memory Leave selected data Applications on page 665 where it is If you later cut or copy more information into memory the original information is lost Past
9. For example the title of a blog is John s Blog Page The tag line could be A place to learn about John s past present future and his current state of mind Posts Visible The number of posts visible on the blog page If the number of posts exceeds this number only this many of the most recent posts appear For example if this property is set to 10 and you add 11 posts only the ten most recent posts appear This number can be from 1 to 999 If you leave this field blank all posts made during the current day are visible Comments Choose how to handle comments by checking the appropriate boxes For more information see Controlling Blog Comments on page 357 Update Service Enter a service that notifies a blog search site when blog posts are added to your blog site These blog search sites allow Web users to search content contained in blogs around the world To use this feature check the Notify blog search engines of new posts box and enter a path to a search site An example path is http rpc technorati com rpc ping Style sheet If you want to provide a custom style sheet for the blog enter the path to it filename for relative to the site root For example WworkArea csslib this folder my_custom_blogs css Leave this field blank to inherit the default style sheet blogs css located in Workarea csslib You can customize the default style sheet but your modifications will get overwritten when you upgrad
10. NOTE This screen allows you to add up to eight replies If you have more than eight __ replies you can add them in the forms editor after clicking the Done button 10 Click the Next button 11 This screen indicates that you have entered the basic poll information and should click the Done button to further edit and view the form s fields 12 After clicking the Done button the form editor launches so you can edit existing fields and properties In addition you can set post back and schedule information add metadata and comments change the title and submit the poll for publication NoTE From this screen you can add more replies to your poll by right clicking on the choices field and clicking properties See Also Inserting a Choices Field on page 187 Replacing a Poll from the Web Site When logged into Ektron CMS400 NET you can right click on a poll and choose New Poll to replace the current one The title of the poll its ID and properties stay the same Only the questions and answers Change To replace a poll follow these steps 1 Log into Ektron CMS400 NET 2 Navigate to the Web page that hosts the poll Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 219 Working with HTML Forms 3 Right click the poll and choose New Poll I TAKE A SURVEY Where did you hear about Ektron Medical Conine E New Pall O Friend C edit coWorke TA view History Newsgrol Doleta Hother l Add
11. Approvals Report Approvals Requiring your approval Checked In Content Checked in CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Checked In Report Checked Out Content Checked out CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Checked Out Report New Content New that is created and saved CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt but never published Content Reports gt New Content Report Submitted Content Submitted for publication CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Submitted Report Pending Content Approved and pending a start date CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Content Pending Start Date Report Refresh Reminder Report End date has been reached CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Refresh Reminder Report Expired Content Expired date has been reached CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Expired Content Report Content to Expire Will expire within specified number CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt of days Content Reports gt Content to Expire Report Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 262 Working with XML Smart Forms Working with XML Smart Forms Creating XML As the world s leading browser based XML editor the Ektron Smart Form Editor is an easy to use browser based content edito
12. Blogging your health Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Add Post 1 2 3 5 6 Fi 8 9 10 New Test Post 43 12 44 iR 1A 17 3 The Subscribe Unsubscribe screen appears 4 Select a Notification Type 5 Check the Unsubscribe check box Ektron Medical Blog Blogging your health 6 Click Update Subscription A message states that you are now unsubscribed to the blog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 346 Blogs Subscribe to a Blog Post To subscribe to a blog post follow these steps 1 Navigate to the blog post on the site 2 Click the Subscribe icon i for the blog post 3 The Subscribe Unsubscribe screen appears Ektron Medical Blog Blogging your health Subscribe Unsubscribe Post Ektron Medical Blog World Population to reach 6 5 Billion Notification All Comments Type Add Subscription 4 Select the Notification Type 5 Click Add Subscription A message states that you are now subscribed to the blog post You are forwarded to the blog posts page Unsubscribe to a Blog Post To unsubscribe to a blog follow these steps 1 Navigate to the blog post on the site 2 Click the Subscribe icon for the blog World Population to reach 6 5 Billion General Information Edit Permanent link The world s population will exceed 6 5 billion shortly a Census Bureau estimates that each second approxima are born and almost two die The bureau operates a VW
13. Creating a Menu in Any Language To create a menu in any language follow these steps 1 Form the Workarea screen click Modules gt Menus 2 From the language drop down list select the new menu s language ID Description 3 Create the menu See Adding a Menu via the Menus Module on page 446 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 469 Ektron CMS400 NET System Management Ektron CMS400 NET System Management Updating Your User Profile When a new user is added to an Ektron CMS400 NET Web site the administrator sets up a personal profile for him It contains information such as password and email address You can update some personal profile information when needed This section explains how to modify your personal profile Viewing Your Profile Before changing your personal profile you must view it To do so follow these steps 1 Access your Workarea 2 From the lower left frame click Settings gt User Profile 3 Your user profile appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 470 Updating Your User Profile View User Information jedit Username Jedit First Name John Last Name Edit Display Name JE User Language App Default E Mail Address jedit example com Forum Editor eWebEditFro System Notifications Receiving of E Mail Enabled John Edit Technical Editor Ektron Inc Work Page Size Width 790p Height 580px Display button text in the t
14. If the word appears repeatedly in the content Ignore All also appears Use this to skip all occurrences of the word in this spell check session Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 500 Checking Spelling Option Use this option if you want to Change Manually Retype the highlighted word If the word appears repeatedly in the content the following message asks if you want to change all occurrences to the fixed version This word occurs more than once in the text Would you like to replace all instances Add to Dictionary Add the selected word to the dictionary Do this if it is correctly spelled and you expect to use the word in the future Once you add a word to the dictionary it will no longer be highlighted by the spell checker The word can also now appear on the correctly spelled words list Technical note Words added using this option are placed in a txt file located in the host server s site root Workarea Foundation RadControls Spell TpF folder The file s name begins with the selected language and ends with custom txt For example if the language is U S English the file is en US custom txt Using the Spell Checker e As soon as you select an option the spell checker moves to the next misspelled word and displays its options e If you finish spell checking all words you return to edit mode e Instead of stopping at every misspelled word you can place the cursor on any highlighted
15. Note that you can only copy content not background information that generates content So for example you can copy the values in a spreadsheet but not the formulas used to generate them Also copying dynamic fields from Microsoft Word retrieves the current value of the fields but not the variables that generate the values oR OD Its a good idea to experiment with copying from different sources to test the results Copying from Microsoft Word eWebEdit400 is very flexible in handling content pasted from Word The table below present your options and how your users can achieve them Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 493 Copying from Other Applications To preserve Apply this Application Setup screen setting MS Word styles class Check Preserve MS Word Styles attributes and all HTML tags Preserve MS Word Classes All HTML tags Uncheck Preserve MS Word Styles Preserve MS Word Classes HTML tags except lt span gt and Not applicable lt font gt tags Press this toolbar button Paste lis or lt Ctrl gt lt V gt Paste lis or lt Ctrl gt lt V gt Paste from Word lp Visual line breaks onl Not applicable j Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 494 Finding and Replacing Text To find and optionally replace text on your Web page click the Find and Replace button 44 When you do the Find and Replace dialog box appears Find amp Replace Find
16. Root an Li a Pinna PP ee Pam ee Tithe Sample Content Block English U S 3 Content Metadata Schedule Comment Web Alerts Templates BB G M83 oO Ye ARANA A HWA eel Chai kissed BE o o a a l a 4 Click the calendar button next to the Start Date field Start Date 5 Acalendar pops up 6 Select the date and time when this version of the content will become visible on the Web site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 69 Scheduling Content to Begin and End http localhost cms4oo fa Ef lt e Nov December 2005 Jan gt gt Fri Sat S n Mon Tue Wed Thu 11 2 fae Done Cancel 7 Click the Done button 8 The date and time appear in the Start Date field NOTE When you select a time for content to go live that time depends on the server s system clock If the clock is incorrect the content will not go live at the intended time What Happens After I Set a Start Date After you save the content it appears on the Content Pending Start Date report which helps you keep track of content with a future start date See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Content Pending Start Date Report After you set a go live date and the content completes the approval chain two scenarios may occur e The content is new e The content already exists and you are publishing a new version Ektro
17. The above section describes assigning tasks from the Tasks folder You can also assign task via the content folder as illustrated below View Content ASP NET Unleashed Dy Sa Aa amp amp a aa E viewsEnalish U8 Content Meta Data Comment Tasks Tithe 4 5P WET Unleashed Subject Computer Programming ISBN 067232542 Assigning a Task from the View Content Screen To assign a task from the View Content screen follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 306 2 Managing Tasks Access the View Content screen for the content to which you want to attach in a task as described in Viewing Content on page 40 Click the Add Task button A IMPORTANT The Add Task button only appears if your system administrator has granted you permission to add tasks For more information seethe Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Permissions 3 Viewing a Task Follow the directions in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 295 The only differences are the content s ID number and title appear on the screen the language of the content is the default language Once a task is added with the exception of Administrators and users given permission to create tasks only the user who assigned the task and those to whom the task was assigned can view it To view a task follow these steps Viewing a Task from the Con
18. View Tabs Published Staged Each area is explained below Toolbar The content comparison toolbar has five buttons explained below Print Sends content to local or network printer Note This option prints the currently displayed content whether it is the compared published or staged content m Save Saves a copy in HTML format on your local machine or network When saved as a physical file the HTML may be edited However the changes are not saved to the Web Server Note The save option saves the version of the content you are viewing Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 106 Comparing Versions of Content pe a Setup Opens setup dialog box to configure the settings Typically only an administrator would use this For more information see Setup on page 107 a p Displays additional information about the compare feature Exit Closes the window ERI Setup Click the Setup button Bh to open the setup dialog box Typically a system administrator would edit these settings w Ektron eWebDiff f Compare visual aspect f Compare source code Whitespace Other C ignore All f Smart Detect C Detect All Ignore Case lgnore format iv attributes Cancel You can change the setup options to better suit your needs The following table explains each option Description Compare Options Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 107 C
19. Working with HTML Forms View Form Toolbar Several toolbar buttons and tabs help you work with forms To learn about toolbar buttons available when creating or editing a form see Inserting Form Fields on page 171 Button or Description More Information Tab Edit Content Edit the form s content which Editing a Form s contains the form fields Content on page 213 View Staged Click View Staged button to view Published Content content that has not yet been published Click View Published button to view content that is live on the Web site View History View and possibly restore older Accessing Content versions of a content block History on page 111 View Difference Compare two versions of content Comparing Versions of Content on page 101 Edit Form Properties Edit Form properties not available Viewing and Editing a via the Edit Content button Form s Properties on page 207 Delete Form Delete a form Deleting a Form on page 214 Check Links Check for other content that contains a link to this form You would typically use this feature to remove the links before deleting content If you do not remove the links they are inoperative after the content is deleted Add Task Add a task Managing Tasks on page 361 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 215 Button or Tab ao D CE Export Raw Data View Reports e View Content or Form Properties Propertie
20. on page 145 The only difference is that you view a quicklink or form instead of a file The table below describes each field on the quicklinks display Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 155 Library Folder Field Description Title Title given to the hyperlink or form by the user who added it or last edited it URL Link URL link for the quicklink or form Library ID ID number assigned automatically by Ektron CMS400 NET when the quicklink or form was originally added Parent Folder Parent folder that the quicklink or form belongs to Users need permissions to this folder to be able to access the quicklink or form Last User to Edit Last user that made changes to the quicklink or form Last Edit Date The date the quicklink or form was last edited Date Created The date and time the quicklink or form was originally added to the Ektron CMS400 NET library To preview a quicklink or form click the link at the bottom of the page Updating Default Template for Multiple Quicklinks WARNING This procedure is only necessary if Link Management is set to false in your web config file If if Link Management is set to true Ektron CMS400 NET automatically updates the template within the quicklink when content is moved See your system administrator for help with the web config file NOTE This action can only be performed on quicklinks When content is moved in Ektron CMS400 NET its quicklink doe
21. on page 1771 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 648 Toolbar Buttons Table Elements Toolbar Toolbar button Description for more information see Insert table Introduction to Tables on page 726 Add row Inserts a new row below the last one Add column Inserts a new column to the right or the right column Insert row Inserts a new row above the current one Insert column Inserts a new column to the left of the current one Se Insert new cell Inserts a new cell to the left of the current one E epe e B e Deleting a Cell on page 755 meee Merging Two Cells on page 767 Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 737 Working with Table Cells on page 753 O Mp a p EH Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 649 Toolbar Buttons Miscellaneous Toolbar Button Equivalent Function Keystroke Internet Explorer only Ga Open File o o FA Display hide Display or suppress table and cell borders Borders Open local file and copy it into CMS content While you can open any file type Ektron CMS400 NET S editor only works with htm and xml files When you open a file into a content block the new file replaces any content currently in the block Save CMS content as file on your computer or network Since Ektron CMS400 NET s editor only works with htm and xml files you should save the file using one of those extensio
22. 3 The Subscribe Unsubscribe screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 347 Blogs Ektron Medical Blog ml Blogging your health Subscribe Unsubscribe Blog Ektron Medical Blog World Population to reach 6 5 Billion Notification All Comments Type Unsubscribe Select the Notification Type 4 5 Check the Unsubscribe check box 6 Click Update Subscription 7 A message states that you are unsubscribed to the blog post Blog Posts For a definition of blog posts see Blogs on page 319 From your Web site only published blog posts are visible But from the Workarea you can see all blog posts regardless of status Using the Workarea you can also create edit delete and archive blog posts the same way you work with content This section contains the following subtopics e Blog Posts on the Site on page 349 e Blog Posts in the Workarea on page 351 e Adding a Blog Post on page 353 e Editing a Blog Post on page 355 e Deleting a Blog Post on page 356 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 348 Blogs Blog Posts on the Site You can view published blog posts on the Web site The following is an example of one A blog post has a Title Content Comments Link Post Time Date and Editor Information Below is a breakdown of a blog post ona site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 349 Blogs
23. 4 lf desired use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 774 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 5 You can enter text to appear in a small window when someone hovers his cursor over this link For example SCIEIMLle WE dif de LO PIOVIUeE SOIULOT make a difference in people s lives Go to Ektron We do thy HoH yA a aaa Ir pharma a nology to patients th the latest technol able to provide solutions that make a To add such text use the Tooltip field 6 The style of this hyperlink is normally determined by the style sheet assigned to the content s page template However if you want to apply a special style sheet class to this link select it from the CSS Class dropdown 7 Click OK Testing a Hyperlink To test a hyperlink save the content Then under the View screen s Content tab click the link to verify that it opens the correct Web page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 526 Using Hyperlinks View Content Home LY th bo la Dea a Ge e Properties Content Summary Meta At ektron Medical we focus on assisting some of the most complex conditions Som hemophilia cancer immune disorders and We do this by applying our expertise in me pharmaceuticals and biotechnology to mak difference in patients Ives Wi
24. By default the search ignores the case upper or lower of a search term In other words if you enter Bob in the Find What field the search finds bob Bob BOB etc lf you want the search to be case sensitive use the Match case check box on the Find window If you enter Bob in the Find What field and place a check in the Match case box the search only Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 668 Finding and Replacing Text stops at Bob not bob or BOB Find And Replace Find What iit Find Next Replace With P Match whole word only Replace Al Direction Up Down Cancel Replace PEER Whole Word Match By default the search finds any occurrence of the text that you type into the Find what field For example if you enter the the search finds the word the as well as those letters embedded in other words such as others and theater lf you want the search to find only whole word occurrences of the text you type into the Find what field click the Match whole words only box in the Find dialog box Find And Replace ww Eo ooo Replace With F Match whole word only Pere _ Match case Replace All Direction C Up Down Cancel Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 669 Checking Spelling The eWebEditPro XML editor can check your spelling as you type or whenever you want to check it The rest of this section explains e Disabling Script Blocking on
25. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 583 Working with HTML Forms 5 Choose the form that you want to begin with You can click the preview icon next to any sample form to see it before choosing it Select a sample that most closely matches the form you want to create After you create it you can add fields remove fields modify possible responses etc 6 Click Next 7 Enter or edit the form s Title and Description e Title used to reference the form within the Workarea required e Description an extended description of the form 8 The next screen lets you assign a task to a user or user group If you do a task will be created every time a site visitor submits this form See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 621 9 Anew screen lets you determine what happens after the site visitor completes the form The choices are e Display a message See Composing the Postback Message on page 585 IMPORTANT If your form survey poll uses either Redirect option your Web developer must use a FormBlock server control to display this form on a Web page He cannot use a Poll Server Control when redirecting to an action page e Redirect to a file or page Identify a file or a page on your Web site that is launched when the visitor completes the form An example of a file is a white paper a common file format is PDF that a visitor requested An example of a page is one that prom
26. Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Ctrl C Copy j l V E Paste Text Copy selected text and graphics into Copying from Other temporary memory Leave selected data Applications on where it is page 665 If you later cut or copy more information into memory the original information is lost Insert the most recently cut or copied text and graphics at the current cursor location Paste the contents of the clipboard as plain text That is all HTML tags including images are not pasted This button is helpful when you want to eliminate the HTML formatting of the text being copied Launches the Search and Replace dialog Finding and box The dialog searches for and lets Replacing Text on you optionally replace text that you page 666 specify Find next occurrence of the string Finding and Replace ay Find Next a entered into the Find What field of the Replacing Text on Search and Replace dialog box page 666 E und Ctrl Z Reverse the most recent action as if it nag never occurred You can undo as many actions as you wish Ctrl Y Reverse the undo action l Seanas Begin spell checker Checking Spelling Upon Demand on page 671 Ba Spell Check manual Turn on or off spell check as you type Checking Spelling feature as You Type on page 670 Spell Check automatic Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 642 Toolbar Buttons
27. Horizontal fo fo Vertical You can also access this dialog box to modify a picture after you insert it To do this follow these steps 1 Click the picture 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Picture from the menu If you see the first dialog box proceed to Using the First Picture Properties Dialog Box on page 680 If you see the second dialog box proceed to Using the Second Media Selection Dialog Box on page 684 Using the First Picture Properties Dialog Box When the first Picture Properties dialog box appears click the Select New File button When you do the Insert Media Item dialog box appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 680 Inserting Images This box and lets you insert a picture from your computer and any network folder available to your computer or from the Web server to which your computer is connected Both choices are described below Insert Media Item Microsoft Internet Explorer To Select an Existing File File Information Mot Available Delete Preview To Select a Local File Browse Enter a description for the file OK Cancel Inserting a Picture from the Server The top left corner of the dialog box Illustrated below lists the pictures on the Web server Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 681 Inserting Images E Insert Media Item Microsoft To Select an Existing File Delete
28. Search Content Folder RSH Published OT Search Content Forms Assets Include Archived All the words Any of the words Exact Phrase Content ID Title Comments Additional Search Criteria The next section of the Advanced Search Tab lets you choose one or more customized search criteria Note that if you enter more than one criterion only content satisfying all criteria appears on the search results screen Fields that Apply to Content Forms and Assets Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 128 Searching the Workarea Search criterion Description Title The title of the content You can enter a partial word For example entering Part yields the following results e Multi Hospital Nurse Executive Participation e Ektron Partners and Customers You can enter more than one word or phrase as long as they are in the correct sequence The content s comments which can be inserted via the Comment tab Date Created The file s creation date You can enter a single date or a range of dates The search returns all content with that creation date that satisfy the other criteria Date Modified The last date when the file was modified You can enter a single date or a range of dates The search returns all items with that edit date that satisfy the other criteria Last Editor s Last Name The last name surname of the user who most recently changed the content This is
29. The submitted form data can be viewed in any of these formats Table with Totals on page 200 e Bar Chart on page 167 e Summary of Selected Choices on page 201 e Table of Values on page 202 e List of Submitted Values on page 203 e Submitted Data as XML on page 204 Table with Totals Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 200 Working with HTML Forms The table of values shows the following information for each completed form e a checkbox that lets you delete the response e an internal identification number of the response e the name of the user who submitted the form if he signed in to Ektron CMS400 NET beforehand If the user did not sign in anonymous appears e date response was submitted e The name of each field on the survey under each field name is the submitted response for the each user e the bottom line sums the numerical and percentage totals for each response Sample of Table with Totals Format General Demographic Survey Gender Age range Ed Delete ID Submitted Date F By Submitted H Male Female 22 25 26 30 31 40 Schoi F 22 Member 12 6 2005 John 4 18 50 od PI F 23 anonymous 12 6 2005 42250 We A Fi a 24 Edit John 12 6 2005 4 25 40 nf nf Pp Total 2 4 1 i i Average 3 rows 66 67 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 66 Summary of Selected Choices Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 201 Working with HTML Forms Thi
30. Within the Table Wizard dialog hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while clicking all cells in the row In the following illustration the second row from the top is selected dark gray AOB w oP Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 553 Working with Tables Table Wizard E Table Design eee el Cell Properties 6 Click the Background dropdown list circled above Table Wizard i Table Design Fi Sd Table Pre Dimensions wate om Hat OOO w Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 554 Working with Tables 7 A selection of colors appears Click a color for the table s 8 background Click OK Specifying a Table s Background Image You can specify a background image for your table Here is an example Note that when you apply a background image to a table if the table is larger than the image the image repeats until it fills the table if the image is larger than the table the top left corner of the image aligns with the top left corner of the table The rest of the image fills as much of the table as possible you can also apply an image to individual cells see Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 759 make sure the image does not obscure the table s legibility See Steps for Inserting a Table s Background Image To insert a table background image follow these steps a ee es ie Place the cursor within the table Right cli
31. Working with Collections Reordering Collections List After a collection is created and more than one content item is assigned to it you can reorder the collections list To do so follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 418 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 421 Click the Reorder button The Reorder Collection screen appears Reorder Collection Support Packages First oternal Support Policies RAC International Support Support Request Form 4 gt 5 Click the content whose order you want to change Click the up or down arrow to move the content in either direction 7 Repeat steps five and six until you set the desired order 8 Click the Update button Editing Collection Information To edit information about a collection follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 418 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 421 3 Click the collection whose information you want to change Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 432 Working with Collections
32. next to any sample form to preview it before choosing it Click the Next button 7 Enter or edit the form s Title and Description Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 222 Working with HTML Forms e Title used to reference the survey within the Workarea required e Description an extended description of the survey 8 Click the Next button 9 This screen lets you determine what happens after the site visitor completes the survey The choices are e Display a message See Composing the Postback Message on page 163 e Redirect to a file or page Identify a file or a page on your Web site that is launched when the visitor completes the form An example of a file is a white paper a common file format is PDF that the visitor requested An example of a page is one that lets the visitor download your product e Redirect to an action page and forward form data See Redirect to an Action Page and Forwarding Form Data on page 164 e Report on the form See Making Form Results Available to Site Users on page 165 10 Click the Next button 11 A screen indicates that you have entered basic information about the survey and should click the Done button to enter the survey s content This procedure is described in Creating a Form s Content on page 168 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 223 Using the Document Management System The Document Manageme
33. on page 524 e Testing a Hyperlink on page 526 e Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page on page 527 e Editing a Hyperlink on page 528 e Removing a Hyperlink on page 528 e Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink on page 529 Creating a Hyperlink When creating a hyperlink you must specify a e source the text the user clicks to move to the destination e destination the Web page that appears when someone clicks the source Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 524 Using Hyperlinks To continue with the above example Ektron Web Site is the source and www ektron com IS the destination Entering a Hyperlink To create a hyperlink follow these steps 1 Select the source text NOTE Alternatively you can select an image and apply a hyperlink to it 2 Click the Hyperlink Manager button The Hyperlink dialog appears Hyperlink Manager Hyperlink U eee URL ad Existing Anchor None Type Target Tooltip pd CSS Class 3 Click in the URL field after nttp 7 Then enter the address of the destination Web page For example www ektron com If your version of Ektron CMS400 NET has URLs that have been entered into the library as hyperlinks click the ellipsis button E to browse the library and insert a hyperlink See Also Hyperlinks on page 153 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 525 Using Hyperlinks
34. on page 760 Basic colors EEEN Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel Specifying a Cell s Background Color Specifying a Table s Background Color on page 746 explains how to apply a background color to a table You can also apply a background color to a cell To apply a background color to a cell follow these steps 1 Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 757 Working with Table Cells Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu Click the Background Color field on the Cell Properties dialog box Custom Background Background Color M Unassigned 5 When you click that field a Windows Color selection box appears See Also Using the Color Box on page 760 Color Basic colors EE EHEN Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel 6 Click a color to apply to the background of the cell Deleting a Cell s Background Color To delete a cell s background color click the Unassigned box in the Custom Background area of the Cell Properties dialog box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 758 Working with Table Cells Custom Background Background Color M Unassigned specifying a Background Image for a Cell Specifying a Background Image for a Table on page 748 explains how to apply a background image to a table You can also apply
35. 3 na P a Aa okey ca Neca From Subject Date ommunity Groups JE Content Project 10 10 2007 9 21 53 AM Favorites a g enn ibe Colleagues In the Workarea Messages links are located in two places The first a link in the left side panel of the Smart Desktop The second a link under the My Workspace folder button Messages are stored in two areas the Inbox and Sent Messages Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 384 My Workspace space 4 Documents 5 Communi He Favorites ae Colleaques ao Messaging Inbox ia ll RM EEIEIE EE See Also e Messaging Inbox on page 385 e Messaging Sent Messages Box on page 386 Messaging Inbox In the Inbox you see a list of messages that have been sent to you You can see who the message is from the subject and the date the message was sent Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 385 My Workspace Subject Date Content Project 10 10 2007 9 21 53 AM From the Inbox you can e view a message s details See Viewing a Message on page 386 e compose a new message See Compose a New Message in the Workarea on page 387 e delete a message See Delete a Message on page 389 Messaging Sent Messages Box Sent Messages provides a list messages you ve sent You can see to whom the message was sent the subject and date it was sent From the Sent Messages list you
36. Adding a Library File to Content on page 150 The only difference is that you add an image instead of a file The image is placed into the picture properties dialog box where you can change it before inserting it For information about the picture properties dialog box see Using the First Picture Properties Dialog Box on page 680 Quicklinks and Forms For a definition of the terms quicklinks and forms see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 134 Adding a Quicklink or Form to Content Users can insert a quicklink to it within any content To do so follow the procedure described in Adding a Library File to Content on page 150 The only difference is that you add a quicklink or form instead of a file You can apply a quicklink to text or an image within the content If you do and a site visitor moves the cursor over the text or image the cursor indicates that a hyperlink is available If he clicks the link he jumps to the source content or image If you do not select text or an image before inserting a quicklink place the cursor where you want it to appear The title of the jumped to content appears in the content To test a quicklink or form select hyperlinked text or image and double click it When the page is published a reader can click the link to jump to the quicklink or form page Viewing Quicklinks or Forms To view a quicklink or form follow the procedure described in Viewing Files
37. After you create or update content it is typically published Programs that search the Web look at a page s title and keywords to determine if they should return your Web page To improve search results Ektron CMS400 NET provides two fields within Metadata by default NOTE Your system administrator may enable or disable these fields for each folder e Title appears on the search results screen to further define your Web page 4 Adding Metadata to a New Content Block ficrosoft Internet Explorer right 2002 Ektron Inc CMS sample site formation in the sample site is fictional appear on the Aa esa Metadata to a New Sb dis uae R TAR tel bes Copyright 2002 Ektron duni e s Seer pe e Keywords are searched by leading search programs along with the page s title After content is published you can view the page source to see its metadata Below is an example Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 88 Adding or Editing Metadata E www ektron 1 txt Notepad File Edit Format View Help HTTP EQUIV Content Type gt CONTENT text html charset 1s0 8859 L gt kmeta name robots content index follow kmeta name rewisit after content 15 days gt EMETA JHTTP EQUIV Imagetoolbar CONTENT no gt ETitlegektron Inc web Content Management and Document Management with Tlexitble and affordable authoring solutions lt T1t le gt Emeta Mahek Keywords conte
38. Delete column Delete current cell Deleting a Cell on Delete cell page 565 Merge current cell with cell to its right Merging Two Cells cs Merge cells on page 572 horizontally Merge current cell with cell below it Merging Two Cells 3 Merge cells on page 572 vertically Original cell Adjust a table s properties Modifying Table Properties on page 539 E Table properties Adjust properties of current cell Working with Table Cell properties Cells on page 562 Display suppress internal table border Setting Table Borders on page 557 gi Show hide border E split cell Divide a cell into two After you split each Splitting a Cell on purge cell occupies one half the size of the page 571 Form Elements Toolbar These toolbar options appear when you are working with an HTML form poll or survey M l i oF 4 y See The Form Toolbar Options on page 593 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 492 Copying from Other Applications You can copy information from most other Windows applications into eWebEdit400 and retain most or all of the Original application s formatting In general copying from another application involves these steps Sign on to the application that contains the information Select the text to be copied Press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt Go to eWebEdit400 Press lt Cirl gt lt V gt to paste the selected information
39. Ektron to Demons Healthcare Healthcare Conte Framework whick hospitals medical health insurers to Indexed content w W id 4 To turn preview mode off click the preview button on the login screen Logging Out of the Sample Site To log out of Ektron CMS400 NET follow these steps 1 Click the Logout button in the content s floating toolbar or click the Logout button 3 logout J on the Web page 2 The Logout confirmation box appears T Ektron CMS Logout Microsa Select Logout to logout of the system LOGOUT 3 Click the Logout button You return to the Web page from which you logged out However it is in standard view not Ektron CMS400 NET view Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 15 The Workarea and Smart Desktop The Workarea and Smart Desktop The Workarea is a central screen from which you perform all Ektron CMS400 NET activities From it you can e access the Smart Desktop e view the system s top level folders e navigate through the folder structure e perform actions on content This chapter describes using the Workarea and Smart Desktop through the following subtopics e Accessing the Workarea on page 16 e Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 17 e Navigating Within the Smart Desktop on page 20 e Sending Instant Email on page 25 Accessing the Workarea To access your Workarea follow these steps 1 Click t
40. Example of an Approval Chain on page 94 Checked In Content lf content has a green border it could mean that the content is checked in A checked in content item is one to which changes were made after which it was checked in instead of being submitted or published When content is checked in it is accessible to all users who have permissions to edit it They can check it out and change it Keep in mind that the content seen on the template is not the same as the content in the editor view ktre C ontent Title Abouk Us Checked In by Application Administrator Ektron is a recognized international leader in Web content authoring and publishing Ektron s easy to use affordable a full featured content management systems address the c organizational need of simplifying dynamic Web content mananement With Ereteon s fheoweer hased snliitinns hiiciness See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 94 Each option you may perform on checked in content is described below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 ili Appendix A Content Statuses Name Description For more information see Check out and Check content out and save on Checking Out Saving and Save as your computer Replacing an Office Document on page 250 Save copy of file to your Saving an Office Document on computer page 251 cy Edit or Edit in Office Check out the content to Editing HTML Content on Editing
41. If you want to use the Document Management s drag and drop feature with the Firefox browser you need to install software to enable it You only need to do this the first time on a computer Afterwards the features are available to you with no additional effort Follow these steps to install the Firefox plug in software 1 Launch the FireFox browser 2 In the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea open a content folder 3 Click the Add Assets button circled below 5 Click the word here 6 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 227 Using the Document Management System Opening ekdragdrop xpt You have chosen to open scape Theme or Extension Package from http icestorm What should Firefox do with this file Open with 7 Click the down arrow next to Netscape default and select Other 8 Browse to C gt Program Files gt Mozilla Firefox gt Firefox exe 9 Click Open 10 Firefox exe appears next to the Open with field 11 Press OK 12 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 228 Using the Document Management System Software Installation You have asked to install the following item ekdragdrop xpi Unsigned from file C DOCUME 1 bbolt LOCALS 1 Te Malidous softwar
42. NOTE Folder information appears at the bottom of the screen only if the folder has subfolders or content under it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 280 Working with Calendars Add Calendar Event Event Title Event Location One Time Recurring Date Wednesday April 06 2005 Start 12 00 AM Q End 12 00 AM Q9 a W Display the times for the event Hyperlink Launch link in a new browser Event Type Ovallable Selected Company Holiday gt No Event Types Trade Show Company Event a 5 Respond to the fields using the following table as a reference Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 281 Working with Calendars Field Description Event Title Enter a title for the event Note If you enter a Quicklink in the Hyperlink field the Quicklink s content title replaces this title You can then edit the new title if desired If desired enter a location for the event for example Conference Room 1 or Cafeteria Event Location One Time Recurring If you want to enter a one time only event continue reading If you want to add a recurring event see Adding a Recurring Event on page 284 Date Click the calendar icon to display a calendar From it select a start date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windo
43. O Business Practices ektron Medical s commitment to operating with integrity requires more than just adequate financial management workplace relations and public service It requires a framework for leaders to guide their organization in an ethical way Learn about how ektron Medical integrates integrity into its culture C Ektron Offers a Visual Development Environment for Rapid CMS Integration and Deployment Ektron leverages strong capabilities of Visual Studio NET to give developers a truly visual environment for integrating CMS components into Web templates O Ektron Supports Rapid and Efficient Globalization Strategies on the Web Powerful new tools in Ektrons CMS300 and CMS400 NET enable content managers to better handle end to end site translation and localization processes 5 To indicate that a wiki to new content has been applied the text color changes to blue and bold and small dots appear under the wiki text t Summary Metadata Schedule Comment web Alerts Templates Category tS BRA Soo aD ACOHTORS FR BIUAA x s wo eme GRC Hole jlobal leader ektron Medical strives to improve lives in its local and ularly with regard to increasing access to high quality healthcare for tre ations Itis a commitment to the long term sustainable well being of the E In employees live and work ikeLink Normal We yi uFi yi I I i Il Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 R
44. This is typically used with polls and surveys to limit one user s influence over the results Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 206 Working with HTML Forms Assign Task to Users and groups to whom a task will be automatically assigned whenever a site visitor completes the form See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 197 Content Properties Displays the properties of the form s content Title of content associated with form Content Title Note The content name is the same as the Form name Content ID Content ID number assigned to content Status The status of the content Last Editor Last user to edit the content Start Date Date and time when content will go live on Web site if set for future date End Date Date and time when content will be removed from Web site if set for future date Date Created Date and time when content was created The View Form screen also contains several buttons to perform actions To learn about the buttons see View Form Toolbar on page 215 Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties To see and update additional form information that does not appear on the View Form screen view its properties To do so follow these steps 1 Navigate to the form s View Form screen as described in Viewing a Form s Information on page 206 Click the Form Properties button aj 4 rF 3 i The Form Properties screen displays a s
45. To create the menu in this language proceed to the next step To change the language of the new menu click View gt Language and select the new language 3 Click New gt Menu The Add Menu screen appears Add Menu Title English U 5 3 Advance Settings 5 At minimum a menu requires a title If you want to add more information click Advance Settings When you do the lower section of the screen appears as shown below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 441 Working with Menus Title English U 5 Advance Settings These fields are not required Image Link fCMS400Example ti CS OW FG l Use image instead of a title URL Link CMS400Example E Hyperlink this menu item to this link Template Link ICMS400Example ti CS CO Override tems with quicklinks at this menu level with this template Description 6 Using the following table complete the fields on the Add Menu screen Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen e ses The name given to the menu by the creator It appears on the Web page to indicate the kind of information on the menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 442 Working with Menus Plt Powerpton Image Link You can have an image appear next to or instead of the menu title For example Document Management Solution Web Authoring Tools Web Image Editor Store 4 Download Center To do this
46. URL Decimal number Floating point number 6 Click the down arrow to the right of the Examples field to see sample logic Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 608 Working with HTML Forms Custom Validation Data Type Condition Number between two values X lt and lt CY Must equal another number X Must not equal another number X7 Maximum text length string length lt x 7 Click Maximum text length This option lets you specify the length of the user s response 8 string length lt x appears in the Condition field 9 Since you want the user s input to equal 10 remove the less than sign lt from the calculation Now it looks like this string length X 10 Replace the x with 10 Now it looks like this string length 10 11 Move the cursor up to the Message field and compose a relevant error message For example must be 10 digits 12 Your screen should look like this Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 609 Working with HTML Forms Text Field General Validation Data Style Validation Custom w Message Custom Validation Data Type Whole number F Condition Examples Maximum text length string length lt X7 hd 13 Press OK Fields on the Text Field Dialog Data Style Tab Click the Data Style tab to apply formatting to a field that accepts user input When you do the f
47. Working with Menus e Menu Feature gt Permission to Use the Menus Feature e Menu Feature gt Implementation of the Menus Feature The Structure of Menus and Menu Items Menus have the following structure e menu top level structure that is a placeholder for menu items and submenus It is assigned to a content folder A menu identifies a page template used to display menu options that are content e menu item the individual options on a menu can be any of the following content of any type library asset external hyperlink link to a page outside your Web site submenu a link to another menu In the illustration below the menu on the right is a submenu It appears when the user hovers the cursor over Company Profile The right arrow indicates a submenu is available Access to the Menus Feature There are three ways to access the Menus feature e the Workarea by choosing the associated content folder then clicking View gt Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 439 Working with Menus e the Workarea by choosing Modules gt Menus e the Edit Menu option on the sample menu displayed above If you choose the first or second option you select a specific menu Then it appears on the View Menu screen For the third option the selected menu appears on the View Menu screen From the View Menu screen you can perform the following actions on a menu e Create anew menu e Edi
48. You do not need to know HTML to use eWebEdit400 However if you Know HTML you can view insert or edit your Web page s HTML code Viewing and Editing HTML To view your page s HTML follow these steps 1 Scroll to the bottom of the screen 2 Click the HTML button circled below lt gt Words 297 Charact 3 The HTML code appears as shown below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 532 Working with HTML http localhost id 3 3 amp type updatettangType 1033 CMS400 Edit Content Microsoft lt p gt lt img width 149 height 135 title Welcome Doctors alt Welcome Dc sre http localhost CHS400Developer uploadedimages CM5400Demo p1 jpq border 0 gt At lt strong gt lt em gt lt a href http localhost CH5400Developer We content id amp Lang lype 1l0ss amp id s3 amp type update amp enableFrmbar htcreatetask bookmark gt ektron Medical lt a gt lt emo lt strong gt we focus on of the most complex conditions Some examples are hemophilia cancer in disease We do this By applying our expertise in medical devices pharm biotechnology to make a meaningful difference in patients lives With t medical science we are able to provide solutions that make a difference lives lt p gt lt p gt a style BACKGROUND IMAGE url CH5400Developer workarea csslib ContentDesigner selectedfield gitf BZ href mailto webmaster ektron com subject Medical Technology gt Contact Us thaic
49. amp Workarea Logout 3 Make changes to the poll using the Forms editor 4 Submit the poll to the Approval Process Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 221 Working with HTML Forms Creating a Survey To create a new survey follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a survey in another language by copying an existing form and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 927 NoTE For the steps to create a new poll see Working With Polls on page 217 For the steps to create a new form see Creating a New Form on page 161 Choose a content folder 2 Fromthe View menu click Language and select the language in which to create the form 3 Click the New gt HTML Form Survey 4 The New Form screen appears New Form St C paaa na eat eae aa A eat LU Sr Net EER aa T be Select a form from below or rae with a blank form Next t you ll b be able to customize all aspects of the form so that it collects exactly the information you re looking for Blank Form Design a new form Blank Survey Leh Design a new survey Standard Poll Design a new poll Compose Email ch NOTE When you choose Standard Poll or Blank Survey the number of steps in the Forms Wizard changes from five steps to four steps This happens because the Assign Tasks step is removed 5 Choose Blank Survey You can click the preview icon amp
50. ccccsesseeeseenseeeeennees 77 Creating a Summary for Existing Content ccceeseees 78 Editing a Summary s saasssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nenne 79 Adding or Editing Metadata ccssecsseceneeeeseeneenes 80 Entering Custom Metadata ccccccseesesseesseseeseenseseeneeseenees 81 Entering Title and KeywordS cccccesseeeseseesesseeenseeseessenseaees 88 Approving Declining Content cccssesssseeseseeeeseseees 90 Approve Decline One Content It M cccccseseseeeeeeneeeeeeeneeees 92 Approve Decline Several Content ItemS secesseeeeees 93 Example of an Approval Chain sccccssssessesseeseeseesensensenees 94 Comparing Versions of Content cccceeseeeeseeeeeees 101 The View Content Difference Screen 0 ccccseeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 101 The View Content Difference Feature ccscccsssseesseensees 103 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 ii Viewing and Restoring Previous Content 00 111 Accessing Content HiStory cccccsessseeesssseeseeeneeeseeeeeees 111 The Content History WinNdOW cccsssseeesseseeeseesseeeseeeneees 112 Restoring a Previous VErsiON cc cccceesesseseeseseeeeneeeseeeeseeenees 114 Comparing Historical Versions cccsssssessssseeeseesseeseeees 115 Removing Applied XSLT ccccccssseesssseeesensse
51. content lt P gt After lt P gt This is initial content lt P gt Style Display a list of styles Users can select from the list to apply a style to selected Apply Style Apply Style ie Note that the list can change depending on the formatting of the selected line Your Webmasier determines which styles are available Change the heading size Your Webmaster determines which heading sizes are available Heading Size Mormal Change the font style Your Webmaster determines which fonts are available Times New Roman B Font Style Note If more than one font appears in a selection the browser on the reader s PC tries to display text using the first font If the browser cannot find that font it tries to use the second etc Change the font size Your Webmaster determines which font sizes are 3 Te pu ba Font Sjz available A Font Color Change the font color Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 645 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only h h k d color of the text ABackground Color Change the background color of the tex Note To remove background color from selected text click the Normal button A I B Make th Id T Ctrl l Make the text italic Italic Apply strikethrough to selected text For example Here s semetexdt Remove all formatting from selected text ae Make selected text appear smaller
52. content block setting 69 setting results 70 start time event calendar 282 286 Strikethrough toolbar and menu option 646 style class assigning to text 645 submenus adding as menu item 452 adding items 453 definition 439 deleting 465 submit toolbar button 67 submitted content definition vi Subscript tooloar and menu option 646 summary adding 76 content creating for existing content block 78 creating for new content block 77 editing 79 Superscript toolbar and menu option 646 surveys creating 216 222 625 630 T table insert toolbar button 649 table properties toolbar button 649 tables alignment 744 background color applying 746 deleting 747 background image deleting 749 inserting 748 border color 749 invisible 750 size 751 columns adding 738 deleting 738 spanning 761 specifying 737 creating 727 deleting 728 inserting within a table 729 locking in position 647 rows adding 738 deleting 738 spanning 761 specifying 737 section 508 794 width setting by percentage 740 setting by pixels 742 tasks add button 64 assign button floating toolbar 5 assigning to content block 296 to HTML form 197 621 to user 296 comments adding 313 updating 315 creating via content block 306 via task folder 295 definition 293 deleting 316 due date 298 editing 312 priority assigning 296 redirecting to another user 296 relationship to content blocks 293 start date 298 state assigning 297 toolbar butto
53. e Adding validation criteria to form fields e Automatically assigning tasks for follow up activities to form submissions e Reporting on form information e Exporting results to Microsoft Excel A sample form appears below Toolbar buttons for working with forms are circled Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 580 Working with HTML Forms Bf U x Request for White Paper Please fill out the form below If you have any questions please e mail white paper example com required fields This chapter explains how to perform all form actions through the following topics Overview of Form Processing on page 582 The Structure of Form Data on page 582 Creating a New Form on page 582 Creating a Form s Content on page 591 Form Validation on page 596 Form Fields on page 596 Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 621 Assigning a Task to a Form on page 621 Viewing Form Reports on page 624 Viewing Form Information on page 624 Editing a Form on page 625 Deleting a Form on page 625 View Form Toolbar on page 625 Creating Polls and Surveys on page 625 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 581 Working with HTML Forms Overview of Form Processing Step For more information see 1 Create a form Creating a New Form on page 582 2 Assign it to a Web page Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 621 3
54. e hyperlinks e quicklinks e form links Result Display Options At the top of the library search screen a pull down list lets you choose the how to display the results Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 141 Library Folder Search Library Folder Mixed Text F Ceaarch Mntinone View Description option If the item is an image display the Title image in the left column It nol BON DEMAND AIIM on Demand Conference and Exhibr display its title NETE ere alee zi Ektron CMS400 Net logo large size display the item s eins 400 net 4 g Description Teaser Note Mixed search results require the Internet Explorer browser version 6 or greater Display item s title in the left column Title Type Folder Name jee SIM Images CMS400Example uploadediImages type and folder CMS400 Logo Images CMS400Example uploadediImages name Codes Images CMS400Example uploadediImages CRSM Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Gilbane Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Market Cycle Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Panorama Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Files This section explains how to work with library files through the following subtopics Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 142 Library Folder e Copying Files to the Library on page 143 e Viewing Files on page 145 e Editing a File on page 147 e Overwriti
55. eS Se J a 3 S k t Search Published Advanced Search Basic Search cancer Search Site Results 1 10 of 12 for cancer 0 23 seconds Avoid Cancer 3 9 2006 11 23 52 AM In general our responses to cancer are converging but very slowly Presently all cancer authorities are agreed on only one thing cancer cannot take hold in a healthy immune system Avoid Cancer Don t Get Cancer by Simon Mitchell One antidote to cancer is information In general our responses t ID 119 Size 17 KB Last Author Application Administrator The Diet Cancer Link 6 30 2006 7 20 34 AM The Diet Cancer Link By Simon Mitchell Attitudes to the link between diet and cancer are changing fast The World Cancer Research Fund was founded specifically to fund and sponsor education and research into the diet cancer link There is mounting evidence that the high fat intake in a typical WCancer ID 89 Size 16 KB Last Author Application Administrator As you can see content on the search results screen begins with the title and last edited date time Following them is either an abstract or the summary of the content This is determined by your web developer in the Web Search server control Following the abstract is additional information such as content ID number size last author etc Search Result Ranking Each content item found by a catalog search is given a numerical rank between 0 and 1000 Search results can be s
56. follow these steps Note Before beginning these steps the image must reside in the library if it does not add it before proceeding For more information see Copying Files to the Library on page 143 1 2 3 4 Click the image icon amp The library window opens Navigate to the folder that contains the image you want to use Click the Insert button to insert it Using Image to Replace Title Text Alternatively you can have the image replace the menu text so that only the image appears to indicate the kind of information on the menu To do this check the Use image instead of a title checkbox INESE TOES are not required CMS400Example Image Link l Use image instead of a title Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 443 Working with Menus Pitt Powerpton URL Link After you create a menu your developer links it to text or an image on a Web page by modifying a page template When a site visitor reading that Web page moves the cursor over the text or image the menu appears In the illustration below the menu appears when the site visitor moves the cursor over Products Product Support Hews Careers You can also assign a URL link to a menu using this field If you do and the user clicks the link text or image he jumps to the specified page For example in this field you assign the product landing page siteroot products aspx In the i
57. gt Description content Ektron s web Content Management and C Management software products manage web content and documents with w sI XHTML HTML editors offering easy to use browser based web authoring anc Pemdiiraoinnms For wah santant maoanaoaamant and doaciimeant mansnomont For more information see Entering Title and Keywords on page 88 e Metadata that identifies related Ektron CMS400 NET information for example another content item a collection or a ListSummary Then your Web site can display the related content whenever the source content item appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 80 Adding or Editing Metadata For example your Web site sells motorcycle helmets On a page that shows a particular helmet the left column lists a collection of motorcycle drivers who use that helmet e Image data this standard metadata field is available to every content item It identifies an image that can be retrieved by Ektron Markup Language s EKML s1mage and ImageThumbnail Variables EKML is described in the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer s Guide An example of using Image data is a list summary that includes a photo of every item on the list For example your site promotes a soccer team The list summary shows every player on the team To the left of each player s name is a thumbnail of his image e Content tags keywords that can be assigned to content and library items For
58. instead of the item you want to work with 5 To learn about the fields on the screen see Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 442 Editing a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page To edit a menu via navigation link on a Web page follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 459 Working with Menus 1 Access the template where you inserted the link to display the menu Click the Menu Navigation link title on the Web page 3 A menu is displayed along with all menu items on the menu Click Edit Menu The View Menu screen appears 6 Move the cursor over the item you want to edit and click Edit from the popup menu 7 To learn about the fields on the screen see Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 442 Viewing a Menu Just like editing a menu you can view a menu via e its content folder e menus module e navigation link on a Web page When viewing a menu via the content or menu folder you get an internal view of information entered by menu creator When viewing via a navigation link on a Web page you get an external view of the menu as seen by anyone navigating Web site View a Menu via its Content Folder To access a menu via its content folder follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea and navigate to the content folder that contains the menu 2 Click View gt Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 460 Working with
59. ma a and Time l i aa TS z 0 M Mi ENT j i LIK l Titre a The headline of the post Usually what a site visitor scans through to find a post to read Permanent Link If you click this link a new screen appears The new screen indicates the permanent link to this blog post As long as the blog post is active within Ektron CMS400 NET you can access it via the URL in the browser s address bar Most blog pages show only recent posts After a post is moved off the blog s front page it is still accessible via this link Comments Information The comments link shows the number in parentheses of comments for a post When this link is clicked a new page of comments for the post appears Also on the page is a form to add comments about the post The comments only appear if a site visitor has logged in or authentication is not required for blog comments Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 350 Blogs So Editor Information The person who created or last edited the blog post Post Time and Date The date and time a blog post was created or last edited Blog Posts in the Workarea Viewing a blog post in the Workarea is similar to viewing content in the Workarea Navigate to the folder that contains the blog Next in the View Posts in Blog screen click the title of the blog post Below is an example of a viewing a blog post in the Workarea view Posts in Blog Blog 2 Hew V
60. on page 778 e Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page on page 7 78 e Editing a Hyperlink on page 779 e Removing a Hyperlink on page 780 e Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink on page 780 Creating a Hyperlink When creating a hyperlink you must specify a e source the text or image the user clicks to move to the destination e destination the Web page the browser displays when the person viewing the page clicks the source Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 775 Using Hyperlinks To continue with the above example Ektron Web Site is the source and the Web page available at www extron com IS the destination To create a hyperlink click the Hyperlink button When you do the Hyperlink dialog box appears From there you can select from a list of Web pages also known as Quicklinks Or if the page you are jumping to is not on the list enter the URL address of the destination Web page Each choice is described below Using a Quicklink Your Web master can add to the Hyperlink dialog box any number of Quicklinks that is Web addresses that you can link to simply by selecting an item from a drop down menu Quick Link select link Ektron Home Fage Ektron Technical Support Quicklinks are quick because you do not need to enter or know the URL of the destination Web page your Web master has already stored that information for you To apply a Quicklink foll
61. ro The Edit Summary window opens Click the Edit button The summary opens within the editor Make the necessary changes When done click the appropriate button Op pi oe p The View Content page reappears NOTE When you edit an existing content summary it goes into a checked out state After creating the summary check the content back in From that point you must submit it or publish it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 79 Adding or Editing Metadata Adding or Editing Metadata You can add several kinds of metadata to Ektron CMS400 NET content e Metadata that can be found by your Web site search It helps site visitors find content on your Web site This kind of metadata can also be found using the Workarea s Search screen For more information see Entering Custom Metadata on page 81 e Metadata that resides in the source code of a Web page Examples include the title and meta tags This data makes it easier for search engines to find your Web page illustrated below HTTP EQUIV Content Type CONTENT text html charset 1s0 8859 L name robots content index follows name rewisit after content 15 days gt HTTP EQUIV Imagetoolbar CONTENT no ET1itlegektron Inc web Content Management and Document Management wi Tlextble and affordable authoring solutions lt T1t le gt Keywords content document management web content manageme Management cms
62. series j Rows lt Columns If you know how many rows and columns the table will be enter those numbers If you don t know the number of rows and columns you need when you create the table estimate how many you need You can add or remove rows and columns later Placement of Inserted Row or Column If you add a row it appears above the row in which the cursor was resting when you pressed Insert Row If you add a column it appears on the left side of the table Adding or Removing Rows and Columns To add or remove rows and columns after you create the table follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell from which you want to add or delete Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 738 Manipulating Your Table s Format 2 Right click the mouse A menu appears ort Eopy Paste Select All Insert Ao Insert Column Delete Rows Delete Columns Table Properties Cell Properties Hyperlink Picture Clean HTML Code Insert HTML View as HTML 3 Click the appropriate action from the menu For example to add a row click Insert Row NOTE If you are working with nested tables and you add or remove a column then undo that action and redo it you must press the redo button once for each cell in the row or column specifying Table Width When you create a table you can set its width by specifying one of the following e percentage of the window the tab
63. text click Replace find the next occurrence of the find text and optionally replace it with the replace text click Find Next change the highlighted term using the editor exit the Find and Replace dialog move to the term and edit as needed To restart the search press the Find button 6 Continue to find and optionally replace or edit until you reach the end of the text Additional Options on the Dialog Box The dialog box also lets you do the following e Specifying a Search Direction on page 497 e Considering the Case of a Search Term on page 498 e Whole Word Match on page 498 e Searching Selected Text on page 497 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 496 Finding and Replacing Text Searching Selected Text You can search and replace text in a selected portion of content To do so follow these steps 1 Select text that you want to search and replace by dragging the cursor over it Click the Find and Replace button In the Find amp Replace dialog enter the search string If desired click the Replace tab and enter a replacement string 5 Under Search click Selection only Find A Find Search Directio Up Dow 6 Click Find Next 7 The search runs but is limited to text you selected in Step 1 Specifying a Search Direction The search begins where the cursor is when you click Find Next To make sure you find every occu
64. two images have the same file extension and size or make the adjustments at each occurrence of the image Before You Overwrite a File Remember all links that point to the overwritten file now point to the new file Overwriting Library Assets To overwrite a library file follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View File screen for the file you want to overwrite as described in Viewing Files on page 145 2 Click the Overwrite button 3 The Overwrite File screen appears Overwrite Library Item in Folder Root images I d ie E Title Filename Ektron CMS400 NET Logo Reflection CMS400Developer uploadedImages ektronlogo gir aan ie eI Please select a replacement file Browse Current library ttem CM MSGR A et Description one eb Normal BI A OY tee 2 A TH II Wty mil uFi iiil i I Mi sae Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 148 Library Folder Click the Browse button A window lets you navigate to the new file Click the file then click the Open button You return to the Overwrite File screen with the path to the new file in the Filename field oO ol e Filename CMS400Sample uploadedFiles Punctuation Introducing Lis C Tech Fubs deptConventions Terminoloc Browse Please select a replacement file 8 If desired enter a Description for the new file 9 To overwrite the current version of the file with this version clic
65. you might use Photoshop to create a jpg file Next save it to Ektron Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 255 Using the Document Management System CMS400 NET using any method explained in Importing Office Documents on page 232 While importing add supporting information such as summary metadata taxonomy category and schedule Use standard toolbar buttons to perform actions like view history submit for publishing and delete If you want to edit a managed file use the Check out and Save As menu option to place a copy of it on your computer Then edit it using the host application When done drag and drop the changed file to Ektron CMS400 NET This section explains how to work with managed files through the following subtopics e Managed File Menu Options on page 256 e Creating a New Managed File on page 257 e Importing Managed Files on page 258 e Editing a Managed File on page 258 e Deleting a Managed File on page 259 Managed File Menu Options Depending on a managed file s status your role and position in the document s approval chain any of the following options may be available when you display the dropdown menu for a managed file See Also Workarea Content Menu on page 35 Menu Description For more information see option Note These sections describe working with Office documents Everything works the same with managed files View and edit managed file
66. you can show ongoing results to site visitors after they submit their answers The following sections provide information about creating a poll or survey beyond the normal form information e Working With Polls on page 217 e Creating a Survey on page 222 e Making Form Results Available to Site Users on page 165 e Viewing a Form s Information on page 206 e Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 207 For information on how to display a poll or survey on a Web site see the Developer Reference Manual section Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Server Controls gt Poll Server Control Working With Polls Below is an example of a poll Note that when a site visitor hovers over the poll the question also appears as ToolTip text I TAKE A SURVEY Where did you hear about Ektron Medical Online b Friend Where did you hear about Ektron Medical Coworllptions are required Newsgroup Other Submit Form This subsection contains the following e Creating a New Poll in the Workarea on page 218 e Replacing a Poll from the Web Site on page 219 e Editing a Poll from the Web Site on page 221 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 217 Working with HTML Forms Creating a New Poll in the Workarea To create a new poll follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a poll in another language by copying an existing poll and
67. 12 Close the document and exit from Office Saving Office Document as html from Your Computer Open the Office Document Click File gt Save as htm html 3 Click My Network Places and navigate to exdavroot folder on the server that hosts Ektron CMS400 NET 4 Ektron CMS400 NET s folders appear The folder that contains the Word document is the default folder Select that or any other Ektron CMS400 NET folder 5 In the Save as Type field select Web page htm html or Web Page filtered htm html See Also Saving an Office Document as a Web Page on page 253 6 Click the Save button 7 You may be warned about formatting features not supported in HTML Press Continue 8 Adialog prompts you to enter your Ektron CMS400 NET user name and password 9 The Office document is saved as an html file into Ektron CMS400 NET 10 Close the document and exit from Office The status of the document depends on the approval chain and the user who signed in when the mapped network folder was created e lf you are the last approver or if there is no approval chain its status is Approved e lf there is an approval chain and you are not the last approver its status is Checked In I Working with Managed Files Ektron CMS400 NET can also track and manage any non Office type of file that runs on your computer for example PDF gif and ZIP You use a host application to create the file For example
68. 3 Click the Edit Properties button L 4 Click the Blog Roll tab 5 Find the Blog Roll Link for which the information needs to be edited 6 Edit the information 7 Click Save M NOTE As with adding a blog roll link you can edit multiple blog roll links before clicking Save Removing a Blog Roll Link There are two ways to remove blog roll links e Remove the last link that was added e Remove any link in the list individually The steps to perform each task are documented below Removing the Last Blog Roll Link Using this method to remove the last blog link on the page 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site access the blog s menu from the site click Properties NOTE To remove a blog roll link from the Web site you must be logged in 2 Click View gt Folder Properties 3 Click the Edit Properties button L 4 Click the Blog Roll tab Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 338 Blogs 5 Click Remove Last Roll Link Edit Properties for the folder GBNB a Pare 1 aoe IF b an Torie aeni essa ine etare era eira ere eta s r fa sin s rarei ars sare n sigra a wera ta eet fe sra e aon g esii P rm rae i i ci sie a oe PEL Fa ese Pa asta f sat fa PET e APEEP EEEIEE EEA EIA E AEA I E EEA E EEA EA tle EA ELERTE Sia See Se ee ae wee hh seas oe ene tye s ob Ves se si Se slut so Soy 9 weet os L oe ee ee SRE Save E P
69. 449 Any library assets images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Item Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu on page 451 External hyperlinks Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 451 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 452 Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page 1 Log in 2 Access the Web page that contains the link to display the menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 448 Working with Menus 3 Place the cursor on the hyperlink that causes the menu to appear 4 The menu appears Click Add The Add Menu screen displays a list of items you can add to the menu 7 Use the table below to select the type of menu item and follow the steps to add that menu item Assign this type of content to For details see the menu Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 449 Any library assets images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu Item on page 451 External hyperlinks Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 451 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 452 Adding Content as a Menu Item To add content as a menu item follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 449 Working with Menus 1 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 446 Addin
70. 500 e Working with Images on page 503 e Using Bookmarks on page 520 e Using Hyperlinks on page 524 e Inserting email Links on page 530 e Working with HTML on page 532 e Working with Tables on page 535 e Working with HTML Forms on page 580 NOTE You cannot use eWebEdit400 to create or edit Smart Form configurations If you try to Ektron CMS400 NET begins to install eWebEditPro XML If you complete the installation you will use eWebEditPro XML to create and edit Smart Form configurations but use eWebEdit400 to perform other editing Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 485 Toolbar Buttons This section explains how to use the buttons and drop down lists on the toolbar The toolbar is the row of buttons across the top of the editor window illustrated below m Il a Apply CSS Cl Paragraph Sit B Z7 U e x MX i E 7 35 2 fa ee zx Gol e 2 Gad Fal cw The buttons let you perform functions such as cutting and pasting text inserting images and creating tables All buttons may not appear Your Webmaster determines which buttons appear on your toolbar TECHNICAL NOTE The following Ektron Knowledge Base article explains how a Webmaster adds a custom toolbar button to eWebEdit400 http dev ektron com kb_article aspx id 16550 See Also e Selecting Text on page 639 e Applying Formatting Attributes to Text on page 640 Table of Toolbar Buttons o
71. 66 WeblmageFX command 718 save as WeblmageFX command 719 scanning an image 723 scheduling content 68 search 666 considering case of search term 668 content folder 117 direction 667 library 138 toolbar button 67 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 vi whole word match 669 search screen noise files 126 specifying kind of content to search 125 match criteria 126 word or phrase 125 searchable properties creating 82 editing 82 section 508 compliance 791 tables 794 select all menu option 662 toolbar button 651 select none toolbar button 651 select WeblmageFX command 720 selecting text 639 server moving picture to 692 sharpen WeblmageFX command 720 shortcuts keyboard 640 show calendar toolbar button 67 Smart Desktop definition 17 hiding left panel 23 modifying folder display 21 navigating 20 set as start location for user 476 Smart Detect field eWebDiff 108 space character inserting 644 spacing cell 769 spanning table columns 761 table rows 761 special characters inserting 645 spell check automatic tooloar and menu option 642 manual toolbar and menu option 642 spelling check a single word 672 check as you type 670 check on demand 671 check selected text 672 checking file addresses 673 checking Internet addresses 673 checking uppercase words 673 checking words with numbers 673 fix errors 671 split cell toolbar button 649 splitting a cell 766 staged content block viewing 67 start date
72. 685 e Adjusting a Picture on page 686 e Pixels on page 687 e Setting a Border on page 687 e Aligning the Picture on page 688 e Resetting Width Height Border Thickness and Alignment on page 690 e Adding Space around the Picture on page 690 e Editing the Picture s Title on page 691 e The Options Button on page 691 The Picture Properties Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 685 Inserting Images You can also use the Picture Properties dialog box to adjust the picture s width height border thickness and alignment reset the image s properties width height border thickness and alignment to their original specifications set spacing between the picture and surrounding information on the page enter or edit the picture s title view technical information about your connection Adjusting a Picture The layout area of the Picture Properties dialog box lets you adjust a picture s width height border thickness and alignment Layout width fi 6 Height fi b fo Border Thickness Alignment Mot set bi Reset You can use the following fields to adjust the picture before inserting it into the editor To make this change Use this field The width of the picture in pixels Width Add a border around the picture Border Thickness For more information see Setting a Border on page 687 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Versio
73. 694 Specifying Color Depth siivosescesieitetarcmonnsernsvasrsvnsssiavesneseaveviateerat 725 Introduction to Tables cccceeesecseseseeseeeeeneeeeseeenseeseaeenees 726 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus ccssccesseeeeeseeeeneeeeeees 730 Manipulating Your Table s Forimat ccccssseceeseeeeeseeeeneees 737 Choosing the Number of Rows and Column 737 Specifying Table VIG sie stccdesinnaiicdereenrsicemcenivinwiienacecinncieneins 739 Specifying Horizontal Alignment s cccsssseeesseeseeseeeees 744 Table Background Saes 745 Setting Table Borders cccssssececssseeseesseescesseeesseeneeseeeneees 749 Working with Table Cells ccccsssecsssseeseeneeseeseeseeseenes 753 Specifying the Width of a Cell cssseeecessseeeeeeeeeeseeneees 753 ucts lg tare a Celicne 754 Bieri dae a ease essen nn ee me nae ee aa 755 Setting a Cell s Border Color cscccssssseecsssseeeeesseeseeees 756 Specifying a Cell s Background Color cccssssseeseeseeseeeees 757 Specifying a Background Image for a Cell ccssseeeeeees 759 Spanning Rows or Columns ccccscseeesseeseeeeeesseeseeseeeseeees 761 Aligning Text Within a Cell cccccesssssseesceenseesesseeeseeeneees 763 SPURTO a eE Ronemcennemeny ater sence a srt one clans ieee cass soe en op annnnrs 766 Merging Two Cells asec ipaenetsrereeernany 767 E i a 768 Setting
74. 7 6 Revision 5 180 Working with HTML Forms NOTE Your Web developer can customize validation options For details see the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer s Guide section Customizing Validation Option Characteristics of Valid Response No validation Response is not checked Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked Non negative whole number or A positive whole number or no response blank Non negative whole number A positive whole number required Decimal number or blank A decimal number for example 12 345 or 12 or blank A leading minus sign is allowed The decimal point must be a period even in locales that normally use a comma Decimal numbers include whole numbers because the decimal point is implied That is 12 is 12 0000 Decimal number required A decimal number it cannot be blank of none one or two decimal places A leading minus sign is allowed The decimal point must be period even in locales that normally use a comma Decimal numbers include whole numbers because the decimal point is is implied That is 12 is 12 0000 That is 12 is 12 0000 Percent 0 100 required A whole number from 0 to 100 a a a where a is one or more characters email address list Several email addresses Each address s format is a a a where a is one or more characters The user must separate each address with a semicolon Zip code US 5
75. 71 Scheduling Content to Begin and End 6 Click the Done button 7 The date and time appear in the End Date field NOTE When you select a time for content to go live that time depends on the server s system clock If the clock is incorrect the content will not be removed at the intended time What Happens After I Set an End Date You have three choices for what to do with content when it reaches its end date These are explained in Setting Archive Options on page 72 If your choice means the content will not appear on the Web site Ektron recommends having another content item ready to replace it If not and a site visitor visits the page containing the content he sees the template without the content Appearance on Content Reports After content reaches its end date it appears on the Expired Content report which helps you track expired content See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Expired Content Report The report lists all content whose end date will occur within a number of days that you specify setting Archive Options Use content s archive options to determine what happens upon reaching its end date time To be eligible for any option the content must reach its end date time progress through its approval chain and be published Until those events occur the content remains visible both within its content folder and on the site The archive options illust
76. A Checkbox field is only one character wide and accepts one of two possible values checked or unchecked For example Check if you are over 65 D To insert a checkbox field follow these steps 1 Place a checkbox type field a onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 170 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 175 Working with HTML Forms Checkbox Field Descriptive Name Field 1 Field Name Field_1 Tool Tip Test Field 1 Default value C True checked f False unchecked men Fields on the Checkbox Dialog De Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 199 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 176 Working with HTML Forms a E Default If you want this field to be checked when the screen first value appears click True Otherwise click False Regardless of the default value t
77. Adding HTML Content NOTE This section only explains how to create HTML content The procedure for creating uploading other types content are listed in the table below To add HTML content follow these steps 1 Browse to the folder where you want to create the new content 2 Click View gt Language and select a language from the list View Contents of Folder Root anounc 4 Ektron Sample HTML FormSurvey 3 DMS Document English U S Deutsch German Espa ol Spanish rangele ench talano Italian Nederlands Dutch 3 Click New gt HTML Content View Contents of Folder CMS ce New l view Delete w Discussion Board Tu Community Folder E HTML Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 49 Adding HTML Content 4 The Edit Content window opens 5 Create content in the editor using the following table To learn about the content editor which you use to create or update content see Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Editors on page 481 Responding to the Fields on the Add Content Screen i Uh Title Enter a title for the content Content Searchable Note This checkbox only appears if you are a member of the Administrators User Group Check this box if the content should be found when someone searches your Web site However even if content is not searchdisplay e the Workarea Advanced search still finds
78. Administrator Manual section Web Site Navigation Aids gt Collections gt Setting up Approval for Collections 6 Click the Save button 5 You can now assign content to the collection See Assigning Content to the Collection on page 427 Default Template vs Quicklinks You can specify a template that determines the screen display for a collection when it is published on a Web page See your system administrator for information about Ektron CMS400 NET templates Or you can disable the template and instead use Quicklinks to determine the page template See Also Quicklinks and Forms on page 155 If you specify a template all content in the collection uses the same screen elements other than the specific content For example the page header footer and information in the right frame of the screen are all the same On the other hand if you use Quicklinks every page in the collection uses its original template As a result the surrounding information may change for every content item in the collection Here is an example of links using Quicklinks Notice that content uses several templates As a result when a user clicks content in Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 425 Working with Collections the collection the screen information around the content changes according to its template Title F Home Page Content CMS4000emo index asp id 1 Support Page CMS4
79. Also you might have sample users that appear in your users lists This depends on which version of the software you have installed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 ii Securing Ektron CMS400 NET CMS400 NET Users Membership Users C jedit C jmember C tbrown C member example com C jsmith north a vs C supermember See Also Managing Users amp User C west Groups on page 762 See Also Membership Users and Groups on page 777 Removing CMS400 NET Users To remove CMS400 NET users in the Workarea follow these steps 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to Settings gt Users 2 Click the check box next each user you want to remove 3 Click the Delete button 7 4 Click OK in the dialog box that appears The page refreshes and the users are removed Removing Membership Users To remove Membership users in the Workarea follow these steps 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to Modules gt Community Management gt Memberships gt Users 2 Click the check box next each user you want to remove 3 Click the Delete button 7 4 Click OK in the dialog box that appears The page refreshes and the membership users are removed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 ili Securing Ektron CMS400 NET Do Not Allow the Use of Group User Accounts L Do Not Allow the Use of Group User Accounts A group account is an account that multiple people use to log in to CMS400 NET using the same use
80. Cell Padding and Spacingd ccsessseesseeseeeseeenees 769 Using BOOKMAFKS sect cess srccteecerentec aE 771 Using HyperlinkS sssnnsnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 775 WOKO WN Pacesetter dawarcussdevcendiewenavnwdenrenieawcscssaantns 781 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 viii Using Ektron CMS400 NET s Wiki Feature 785 NF Ve asir 785 Section 508 Compliance cccsssccsnssecensecessecenseeenees 791 Moving the Cursor into eWebEditPro XM L 0008 791 Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse 00000 792 Secon 508 TaDleS ainrsiccic ciate Ses ccpancc a 794 Inserting Comments within Content csseesseeeeeees 801 Appendix A Content StatusSes ccscssseeseees I Approved Content siciieseciietdsiettndescsaiateavatiawaiesvaientieriseisateiaurnesnds ii Checked In COnte nt 2 cccceceececeeceeceeceeeeceececeeeeecuseeeesenseeeeeeeseuens jii Checked Out Content asasnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn n V Submitted CONteCNt cccceccecceceececeeceececeeeeeceeceseeceseuseueaseueeeeneaas vi Marked for Deletion COntent cccccceccecceceeceeceeeecesceceeeeeeaeees vii Pending Start Date Content cccssseeessesseeeeeesseeeeeneeeeseees viii aged CONTENE scissa ix What s New in the 7 6 Release ccccscsssecscneseeseneseeeenenes Ektron CMS
81. Chain If the author edited content then submitted it for approval the updated content remains in the file If you do not want it to remain choose the Edit option You may be asked to decline both a content change and a request to delete content Deletes selected item See Also Deleting Content on page 60 D Delete Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 65 Workarea Toolbar Buttons a Delete Content Deletes multiple content items at once See Also Deleting Content on page 60 Delete Folder Deletes current content folder Do Not Apply XSLT Removes XSLT applied to XML content viewed in the content history area See Also Removing Applied XSLT on page 115 Edit Edits content or specific criteria in the Workarea Insert Library Item Inserts selected library item into content See Also Library Folder on page 134 Link Check Identifies content with a hyperlink to the current content You would typically use this feature to remove the links before deleting content If you do not remove the links they are inoperative after the content is deleted Overwrite Replaces an image or file with a newer version See Also Overwriting Images on page 154 Previews item that was or will be added Publish Save and publish the content Removes items from folders and lists in the Workarea Reorder Changes the sequence of links in a collection See Also Working with Coll
82. Custom Color If a color has already been assigned it appears next to this field label To change it click down arrow next to the color to display the color palette Image Alt Text The image s title is used as the default alt text Change if desired The alt text appears in place of the image on the Web page if the image does not display Examples of when an image does not display include a speech browser for example a visually impaired person a text only browser for example browsing from a mobile phone a graphical browser with images turned off Image Alignment The alignment of the image relative to adjacent text and images If you choose left or right alignment the text wraps around the image For more information see Aligning the Picture on page 511 Image Src The path to the image If you want to change the image click the ellipsis button to open the library From there select a replacement image Horizontal Spacing The amount of horizontal and vertical space around the picture See Vertical Spacing Also Adding Space around the Picture on page 512 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 508 Working with Images SS The width of the picture in pixels See Also Pixels on page 509 Note The Width and Height settings determine the area on a Web page in which the image is displayed To display an image correctly its height and width settings should match its actu
83. DMS document Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 41 Viewing Content To change the type of content being displayed click View then select a type View Contents of Folder Root E All Types 1 HTML Content Cnllerctinn 3 If your system supports more than one language you can view only content in any language via the View gt Language menu option illustrated below view Contents of Folder Root 2 aie a Fig if Bas er elet eer i Fi a a H a Tei ey wm Li G es tn Pht oe oe Wi taf RER a ee Lii bami n Pa ii rn Pee Pr 5 Al Eee i Title 3i All Il Types H anounc d s HTML Content H Ektron Ekron F Sample ple 3 HTML Form Survey 5 DMS Document Language English U S Deutsch German Espa ol Spanish Frangais French E italiano Italian a Nederlands Dutch Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 42 Viewing Content 4 Hover the cursor over the content click the triangle and select View from the dropdown menu i Delete Alternatively click the contents title 5 The View Content screen appears View Content Privacy J 7 i Properties Content Alias Comment Tasks Ektron Medical Privacy Policy At Ektron Inc we respect your right to privacy We will never sell or rent your name e mail address physical address and any othe
84. Description e Group Tags tags are keywords that are associated with a user or community group in CMS400 See Also The Developer Manual section gt Community Management gt Tags To use the basic search enter a name email group name or tag into the text box Then click the Search button Any matches appear in the results See Also Using Community Search Results on page 401 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 398 My Workspace You can also perform wildcard searches but the wildcard must appear after the first letter in the search For example you can search for J but not J J returns all users and community groups that start with the letter J or have a word that starts with the letter J in their email tags or description Advanced User Searching The Advanced tab lets you filter search results for users and community groups based on selected criteria The filters to select from are the same criteria as a basic search But with advanced searching you select which filters you apply to the search results For example you can select the Tag filter and the Display Name filter and you will only see results that have Tag and Display Name information that match the given criteria See Also Performing a Basic User Search on page 398 Basic Search Advanced Search Add Filter Groups oa ee aL ooo Add Filter If you apply several filters they work in an and fashion wh
85. Editing Metadata on page 80 If the Category tab appears apply at least one taxonomy category to this asset See A so Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 240 Using the Document Management System section Taxonomy The status of a dragged and dropped document depends on the approval chain e lf you are the last approver or if there is no approval chain its status is Approved e lf there is an approval chain and you are not the last approver its status is Checked In I Adding Documents to a Mapped Network Folder You can set up a mapped network folder then drag and drop folders or assets into it The advantage of this method is that you can upload documents without installing or learning how to use Ektron CMS400 NET When using drag and drop you can choose individual assets or a folder If you choose a folder Ektron CMS400 NET recreates that folder structure even if it is several levels deep After the assets are uploaded they are set to Checked In status You can also delete and move assets using the mapped network folder This section explains these procedures e Language Restrictions on Content in a Mapped Network Drive on page 241 e Setting up a Mapped Network Drive on page 242 e Dragging and Dropping Assets into a Mapped Network Drive on page 244 e Viewing Managed Files in a Mapped Network Drive on page 245 e Removing Mapped
86. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 541 Working with Tables NOTE HTML does not let you use tabs or spaces to align text in columns You must use a table to align columns You can remove the table s border so that no lines appear between the columns and rows To insert a table within a table follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell into which you want to insert a table 2 Click the Insert Table button 9 3 Drag the cursor over rows and column to indicate the size of the table 4 Click the mouse Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns Use the Table Design tab of the Table Properties box to change the number of rows or columns in a table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 542 Working with Tables Table Wizard X HA Table Design E Table Properties Y go Cell Properties kd Accessibility Columns Column Span Cancel Sso0mson 4ll 1 eo0m Alternatively place the cursor within the table then add or remove columns relative to that cell See Adding or Removing Rows and Columns on page 543 Adding or Removing Rows and Columns To add or remove table rows and columns follow these steps NOTE You can also adjust the number of rows and columns using the Table Wizard See Also Creating a Table Using the Table Wizard on page 537 1 Place the cursor in the cell from which you want to add or delete rows or columns 2 Right
87. For more information see Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only we Edit Hyperlink Eha Remove Hyperlink iy Library ey Upload Files a Translate lt Add Comment Picture a Image Editor Table Edit in Microsoft Word Change information about a hyperlink Remove a hyperlink Insert a library file Upload any external files such as images to the server Translate content into another language Insert a comment into the content Insert a picture Edit an image Insert or edit a table Edit content in Microsoft Word Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 Using Hyperlinks on page 775 Removing a Hyperlink on page 780 Adding a Library File to Content on page 150 Moving an Image to the Server on page 692 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Multi Language Support gt Working with Multi Language Content gt Translating Content gt Using Machine Translation Adding Comments to Content on page 802 Inserting Images on page 678 Editing Images on page 694 Introduction to Tables on page 726 Editing in Microsoft Word on page 675 643 Toolbar Buttons For more information see Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Switches to Data Design Mode Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Using the Data Designe
88. Horizontal Flip on to right page 710 tz vertical flip Flips an image vertically top to Vertical Flip on bottom page 724 c5 rotate Turns an image a specified number Rotate on page 718 of degrees Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 699 Editing Images Annotation Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button information see pointer selection Click an annotation to select it Pointer Selection on page 714 choose color Sets the color for an annotation Choose Color on before you insert it page 702 choose font Sets the color of text before you Choose Font on insert it page 703 ae freehand Draws a line in any shape that you Freehand on want page 09 Draws a straight line Line on page 711 polygon Draws a polygon a closed figure Polygon on page 715 surrounded by straight lines rectangle Draws a rectangle Rectangle on page 16 Blur Standard Toolbar Button amp Description Blurs or softens an image You can select a level of blur from O through 4 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 700 Editing Images If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area Dialog Box men Brightness Standard Toolbar Button We Cj C a Description Increases or decreases an image s brightness You can select a brightness level from 32 brightest through 32
89. Menus 3 The View All Menus screen displays all menus in the folder View All Menus Root View In English U 5 Title ID Lang ID Date Modified Shout Ls 11 1033 6 9 2006 4 34 10 PM Conditions 7 1033 Sf 2 2006 10 13 37 AM contact Ta T a 6 1033 of19 2006 4 54 17 PM Inside Ektron pE Medical 36 1033 3 24 2006 3 54 08 PM Products 1 1033 3 6 2006 9 36 42 AM 4 Click the menu you want to view 5 The menu s options appear E Why Choose Ektron E Business Practices D Company Profile L News L staff List Careers L Ektron Medical Blog D Forum L Site Search L Using the Ektron Explorer Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module To access the menu via the Modules folder follow these steps 1 From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 461 Working with Menus 2 The Menus Report screen displays all menus Menus Report Title ID Language Description About Us 17 1033 Conditions 7 1033 Contact Information 6 1033 Home 36 1033 3 Click the menu you want to view 4 The menu s options appear re L Why Choose Ektron L Business Practices D Company Profile D News L Staff List 9 Careers E Ektron Medical Blog E Forum L site Search L Using the Ektron Explorer View Menus via Navigation Link on a Web Page To access the menu via a navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Access the Web page on w
90. Network Drives on page 245 Language Restrictions on Content in a Mapped Network Drive You cannot choose a language for assets in a mapped network folder they are automatically assigned the Ektron CMS400 NET default language set in the siteroot web config file at the ek _DefaultContent Language element Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 241 Using the Document Management System And you cannot work with assets of a language other than your computer s default language For example if your computer s default language is English and your version of Ektron CMS400 NET has Spanish content you cannot edit that content ina mapped network folder Setting up a Mapped Network Drive Prerequisites e The path to your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site It is something like thiS nttp server23 cms4oo If you do not know the path ask your system administrator e an Ektron CMS400 NET user name and password 1 Right click the Windows Start button Open Add to VLC media player s Playlist Browse with Paint Shop Pro Studio Browse with Paint Shop Pro X Play with VLC media player Search Propertes Open All Users cas Explore All Users Poy 2 Choose Explore Windows Explorer opens 3 Click Tools gt Map Network Drive Start Menu File Edit View Favorites Help Map Network Drive Address Disconnect Network Drive Folders Synchronize dell 5 E Documents a
91. PM ime 19 Bal 5 weekly meeting Location Hew York Room Start 12 00 End 1 00 PM button 4 The View Events screen appears listing all calendar events for that date If an event is part of a series of recurring events the following icon appears next to it 3 From this screen you can perform the following functions Add anew event See Also Adding a Calendar Event on page 280 View edit and delete an existing event Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 288 Working with Calendars Editing Calendar Events The section explains how to edit a single event or a recurring series of events NOTE You can only edit a calendar event if you have edit permission for the folder to which the calendar is assigned See Also Adding a Calendar Event on page 280 Editing a Single Event After a calendar event is added to a calendar you may edit it to change the title location times etc To edit a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for the date that contains the event you want to edit as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 280 Click the event you want to edit The Edit Calendar Event screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 289 Working with Calendars Edit Calendar Event E i LU 4 AN a d i Pe a E rna A Ai aa Event Title company meeting Event f montreal roo
92. Pictures that you previously inserted appear on this list as do pictures inserted by other users connected to that server To insert a picture from the server follow these steps 1 Click the picture from the To Select an Existing File field that you want to insert 2 Information about the picture s file size width and height appears in the upper right corner of the dialog box 3 If you want to view a picture before inserting it click Preview on the right side of the dialog box Click OK 5 The Picture Properties dialog box reappears Here you can change the properties of the picture For more information see e Adjusting a Picture on page 686 e Setting a Border on page 687 e Aligning the Picture on page 688 e Adding Space around the Picture on page 690 6 Click OK to insert the picture into the editor Deleting a Picture from the Server To delete a picture from the server select the picture and click the Delete button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 682 Inserting Images Inserting a Picture from Your Computer Use the lower left corner of the dialog box to insert pictures from your computer and any network folder available to your computer into the editor To Select a Local File Browse Enter a description tor the file NOTE You can only select files in the To Select a Local File field if your computer has permission to uplo
93. Site visitor goes to your Web site and completes form Form is mailed to an email address saved toa database or both 4 View submitted form data and Viewing Form Reports on page 624 download it to a spreadsheet The Structure of Form Data A form has the following components e Form title ID number whether the form data is sent as email and or saved to a database etc e Content information title start and or end date status postback message etc e Form fields text field password field text area hidden text choices checkbox select list calendar submit button etc Creating a New Form The screen you use to create a form follows five simple steps After completing the steps you have a new form that s ready to collect the information you need To make the task easier Ektron CMS400 NET provides sample forms that you can start with then customize As explained in Mailto or Database Form on page 214 form data can be emailed and or saved to a database Forms created using the procedure described below are saved to a database by default but not emailed To change either setting use the Edit Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 582 Working with HTML Forms screen See Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 207 To create a new form follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a form in another language by copying an existing
94. Source and do a quick acquire from that source using Twain Acquire Limitations e You can only acquire one page at a time e Few digital cameras support twain Usually digital cameras resemble a hard drive or use proprietary software to extract images Ektron does not support an interface to proprietary software e Not all scanners support the twain standard Twain Source Standard Toolbar Button aie Description Lest you select a source for acquiring an image such as a scanner or digital camera See Also Twain Acquire on page 723 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 723 Editing Images Undo Standard Toolbar Button Description Reverses the most recent commands within the current editing session You can undo several commands at once by pressing the undo command repeatedly The first time you press the command the most recently completed command is undone The next time the second most recently completed command is undone etc See Also Redo on page 717 Vertical Flip Standard Toolbar Button tw Description Flips an image vertically top to bottom Click this command again to reverse the image vertically bottom to top A Image before vertical flip Image after vertical flip Zoom In Standard Toolbar Button E Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 724 Editing Images Description Increases an image s magnification You can
95. Supported Types of Assets on page 225 e Security on page 226 e Software Requirements on page 226 e Working with Microsoft Office Documents on page 229 e Working with Managed Files on page 255 e Asset Workflow on page 260 e Adding Assets to Collections and Menus on page 261 e Asset Reports on page 261 Supported Types of Assets Ektron CMS400 NET can support all file types By default only the following types are supported However your administrator can add or remove any file type via the Asset Server Setup screen EXCEPTION Ektron CMS400 NET does not support double extensions such as filename aspx vb e Microsoft Office 2000 or later documents Word Excel Powerpoint Project Publisher Visio etc e Managed files zip files PDFs txt files graphic files such as gif and jpeg Open Office documents such as odf odt e Multimedia files such as swf mps wav avi NOTE The file types that can be uploaded are determined by your administrator If you try to upload the wrong type of file the following error message appears File Type Not Supported File type not supported X Only file types supported are doc xs ppt pdf gif jpg jpeg tet log vsd dot zip cwf wma wav avi mp3 rm wmv ra mov odt odf odp odg ods Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 225 Using the Document Management Syst
96. Table dialog box appears Insert T able Size Rows E 4 Poe ib an x Cancel Columns Layout Borders M Use Default Color C Not Specified f Percent C Pixels Border Color Border Size Cell Padding Horizontal Alignment Cell Spacing Custom Background Background Color M Unassigned Background Image From File You can also access this dialog box after you insert it You would do this if you wanted to edit any of the information entered in the dialog To access this dialog after insertion follow these steps 1 Click the table 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table Properties from the menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 727 Introduction to Tables When creating a table you can specify the e number of rows and columns e width e horizontal alignment on the page e background color or background picture e border size and color For more information about managing tables see Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 737 For more information about managing individual cells within a table see Working with Table Cells on page 753 Deleting a Table To delete a table follow these steps 1 Move the cursor over the table until the cursor becomes a four headed arrow 4 2 Click the mouse button The table becomes selected small Squares appear around it Gi Co 3 Press lt Delete gt Ektron CMS400 NE
97. Task Submit For Properties amp Workarea 4 The Workarea opens indicating you are at step three of the Poll Wizard Continue to define the Poll Enter a question and all possible responses Leave unused responses blank Question er Choices 5 Add anew question to the Question text box 6 Add possible responses to the Choices text boxes 7 Click Next 8 Click Done 9 The form editor launches allowing you to edit the fields and properties In addition you can set post back and schedule information add metadata and comments change the title and submit the poll for publication Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 220 Working with HTML Forms 10 Once published the updated poll appears on the site I TAKE A SURVEY How often do you visit the Ektron Medical site Daily Weekly Monthly Semi Annually Yearly Vote Editing a Poll from the Web Site To edit an poll on a Web site follow these steps WARNING Ifyou are logged into the site and create a new poll by right clicking on a poll selecting New the existing poll is replaced by the new one 1 Log on to the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site 2 Right click the poll you want to change and click Edit I TAKE A SURVEY Where did you hear about Ektron Medical New Poll re Friend i UP view History 0 Delete Add Task CoWorker Newsgroup Other Properti Submit Form een oe
98. The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Content to Expire Report Forum Post A list of Forum Posts that are awaiting approval Posts need approval when Forums are using the Moderate Comments feature See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Discussion Boards gt Implementing Discussion Boards gt Working with Posts gt Approving a Post Content Review A list of Content Reviews awaiting approval Content Reviews need approval when the ContentReview server control s Moderate property is set to True See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing HTML Content gt Content Rating gt Viewing the Content Rating Report gt Moderating Reviews gt Moderating Reviews From the Smart Desktop Content Flags Content flagged by a site visitor for review See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Community Management gt Flagging eCommerce recent orders and orders on hold This only appears if your license key supports eCommerce and you are a member of the Administrators Group or are assigned to the eCommerce Admin role NOTE The number to the right of each category lists the quantity of content items in that category for you When you click an item up to five content items in a category appear To perform tasks on that content and to view additional content in that category cli
99. Visio IFilter in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual e PDF file e txtfile Images added as gif jpeg etc assets or through the library Multi Media Flash mps etc Forums Forum posts and topics NOTE The search cannot find calendar events Searching for Metadata e Searchable type metadata values are returned like regular content See Also Types of Metadata on page 116 e lItcan take up to 30 minutes for newly added metadata to be available to the search e Searchable metadata field names must not include a space If they do the search cannot find the metadata e To find content with searchable metadata whose style is yes or no enter true OF false Display of Published Search Results Below is an example of the Search Published results screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 120 Searching the Workarea Search Content Folder a Mea A eke Be ev Doh Roe a Deen Deen Se Boa ate a a ean oo em ee a A a a a e Lade inde Linde Laide bade badende badekar krade kade kbd endeka kn a et roid l r Beta hata b i sass hena beraidh t bearnan Deg Poy piane pitas fessa ned hanen da steep tar p aama ka a I ias ledan Wa lysis Deasa d gg Det od ag AE ae Bead oe Be Road ae Ded a ed ae Bead aia Be Ded ag Be Rad a BLE neta aa aA aa EA tad ae Bed oa BEd aia Bead a BLE ary a a eee ae i inini Sad g r ahi cs p anatata al dipsa oiak A TT i a al al fale yal fete Saal Boa ba sal iniia al al fail Be 4 Nae
100. Web site 349 made from the Workarea 351 overview 348 properties 325 roll 334 assigning link 334 editing 337 link removing 338 searching 344 setting style sheet 328 smart forms used with 333 tagline 328 update service 328 visibility setting 324 workflow 322 blur WeblmageFX command 700 bold toolbar option 646 bookmarks 771 border image color 688 thickness 687 border color cell 756 content block meaning table 749 border size cell 753 table 751 brightness WeblmageFX command 701 broken links finding 63 browser requirements document management feature 226 bullet toolbar option 646 buttons adding to menu 654 rearranging on menu 657 removing from menu 654 text displaying in title bar 476 C calendars add event button 64 authorization for creating 270 button to display in Workarea 67 definition 268 event types 284 events adding 280 assigning event types 284 button for viewing 67 deleting 291 display times 283 286 editing 289 end time 282 286 insert hyperlink 283 location 282 recurring adding 284 start date 282 285 start time 282 286 viewing 287 screen information on 272 viewing 276 cell properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 toolbar button 649 cells background color 757 background image deleting 760 inserting 759 border color 756 invisible 756 deleting 755 inserting 754 merging 767 padding 769 spacing 769 splitting 766 text alignment 763 width 753 check in
101. a Form on page 212 Deleting a Form See Deleting a Form on page 214 View Form Toolbar See View Form Toolbar on page 215 Creating Polls and Surveys Polls and surveys are a type of form All of the same functionality is available and applies WARNING For complete understanding of forms polls and surveys you should read the entire chapter Working with HTML Forms on page 580 e A pollis generally one question and appears on a site for a very short time an hour or a day e A survey is usually multiple questions and appears on your site for a longer time than a poll NOTE For information on scheduling when your polls and surveys appear on the site see Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 68 With polls and surveys you can show ongoing results to site visitors after they submit their answers The following sections provide information about creating a poll or survey beyond the normal form information e Working With Polls on page 626 e Creating a Survey on page 630 e Making Form Results Available to Site Users on page 588 e Viewing Form Information on page 624 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 625 Working with HTML Forms For information on how to display a poll or survey on a Web site see the Developer Reference Manual section Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Server Controls gt Poll Server Control Working With Polls Below is an e
102. a Managed File on page 258 Editing an Office Docu ment on page 246 Edit Properties Edit content s summary metadata schedule comment etc View View in View all information about Viewing Content from the Office or View content Workarea on page 41 Properties Delete Submit a request to delete the Deleting Content on page 60 content If you are the last or only approver the content is immediately deleted See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 94 LY U a By Submit Publish Submit content into approval Asset Workflow on page 260 chain If you are last approver in the approval chain the publish button option appears If you click it the content is immediately posted to Web site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 iV Appendix A Content Statuses Checked Out Content If content has a red border it was checked out by a user other than you If you checked it out the border is green While in this status other users are prevented from editing It Ektron encourages you to contact us with y feedback about Ektron s Web content auth solutions The content remains checked out until it is checked in by the user who checked it out or a system administrator Only the user who checked out the content can edit it Each option you may perform on checked out content is described below Button Name Description For more information see is Check In Che
103. a Web Page NOTE You can only use this feature after your Web developer has modified a page template to display the menu This procedure is described in the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer Manual section Custom ASP Functions gt Menus To add new content to a menu via a navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Access the Web page that contains the link to display the menu 2 Place the mouse on the hyperlink that causes the menu to appear 3 The menu appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 454 Working with Menus Click C Add The Add Menu screen opens displaying items you can add 6 Refer to the table below for selecting a menu item and follow the steps to add it Assign this type of content to For details see the menu Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 449 Any library asset images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu Item on page 451 External hyperlink Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 451 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 452 Editing a Menu You can edit a menu via e its content folder e menus module e navigation link on a Web page This section describes each option Editing a Menu via its Content Folder To edit a menu from a content folder follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea and navigate to the content folder that c
104. across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 3 Aconfirmation message is displayed 4 Click OK to delete the menu NOTE Deleting a menu automatically deletes all menu items associated with it Do not confuse the menu link with the item itself For example deleting a menu deletes its links to content but has no effect on the content Deleting a Menu via Menus Module To delete a menu via its menus module follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 461 2 Move the cursor over the menu and click Delete NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 3 Aconfirmation message is displayed 4 Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 464 Working with Menus NOTE Deleting a menu automatically deletes all menu items associated with it Do not confuse the menu link with the item itself For example deleting a menu deletes its links to content but has no effect on the content Deleting a Submenu 1 Access the View Menu page as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 461 Select the submenu Move the cursor over the menu and click Delete Deleting a Menu It
105. an 3 31 2005 Friday April 01 2005 As f l 00 AM 0 00 AM 2 00 PM birthday party 00 PM 00 PM e From the daily view you can see all events and the hours they span proceed to the previous or next day click a date in the upper left or right corner return to the month view by clicking on today s date view detail about an event by clicking on it e From the event view illustrated below you can view the event s location and start and end times Click the date to return to the daily view Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 279 Working with Calendars birthday party Friday April 01 2005 Location my house Start 12 00 PM End 1 00 PM Adding a Calendar Event Nore You can only add a calendar event if you have add or edit permission for the calendar s folder To add a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the calendar to which you want to add an event as described in Viewing a Calendar on page 276 NOTE You can also add a calendar event after viewing the View Events screen See Also Viewing a Calendar Event on page 287 2 Navigate to the month and day for which you want to add a calendar event Your calendar display is determined by your system administrator June 20 Tuesday Wednesd Fal FA RC International Hosts RC Conference E 3 Click the Add Event EA button 4 The Add Calendar Event screen appears Sunday
106. and you are an alias administrator an Alias tab appears To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section URL Aliasing gt Manual Aliasing e assign or change available templates To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing HTML Content gt Creating Updating Templates e assign taxonomy categories To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Taxonomy e save changes e check in content e submit content for approval e publish content to the Web site e access the library 5 Edit the content See Also Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists on page 640 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 57 Editing HTML Content Or you can choose a toolbar option or tab from the top of the Edit Content window These options are described in Buttons on the Add Content Screen on page 50 and Tabs on the Edit Content Screen on page 51 Editing Content from the Workarea To access the Edit Content screen from the Workarea follow these steps 1 Access the View Content screen for the folder that contains the content you want to edit as described in Viewing Content on page 40 2 Select View gt Language then the language whose content you want to view Hover the cursor over the triangle 4 and click Select Edit from the menu 4 Delete i 5 The editor opens with the
107. blog folder can approve comments To learn about the approval process for pending comments see Moderate Comments on page 358 To approve a comment follow these steps From the Content area navigate to the blog 2 Click the Comments icon to the left of the post whose comment you want to approve Unapproved comments are indicated by a red flag 3 Click approve 4 The comment s status changes to approved Adding or Editing Blog posts with Windows Live Writer Ektron CMS400 NET authors and membership users can use Windows Live Writer to add and edit blog posts to your site If users have the proper permissions they upload images and attach files from their system See Also Permissions and Approvals on page 341 For additional Windows Live Writer help from Microsoft click here Follow these steps to set up Windows Live Writer to work with your Ektron CMS400 NET Blog If you have previously set up Windows Live Writer click Weblog gt Edit Weblog Settings Then skip to step four Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 365 Step Download and Start Windows Live Writer When the Welcome window appears click the Next button Do not create a Windows Live Spaces account In the Choose Blog Type window select the Another weblog service radio button Click Next Blogs Windows Live Writer Setup Screen Y Welcome to Windows Live Writer Beta K s Welcome We
108. browser Firefox does not let you edit Office documents within Ektron CMS400 NET as you can with Internet Explorer To work around this limitation check out the Office document save it to your computer and edit it When all edits have been entered drag and drop the document back to Ektron CMS400 NET Follow these steps to copy an Office document to your computer edit it then replace the version in Ektron CMS400 NET IMPORTANT There are several ways to import a document into Ektron CMS400 NET Some methods retain the original file name while others let the user assign a name When you check out and save a document to your computer it is saved under the original file name which may be different from its Ektron CMS400 NET name The original file name is on the screen that appears after you select Check out and Save as circled below Opening Ecommerce_Project_Capabilities doc You have chosen to open from http icestorm What should Firefox do with this file Save to Disk Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 250 Using the Document Management System Make note of the original file name because you use it to identify the file after it is saved to your computer 1 In Ektron CMS400 NET open the folder that contains the Office document 2 Hover the cursor over the triangle on the right end of the document and select Check out and Save As 3 You are prompted to open or save the do
109. can e view a message s details See Viewing a Message on page 386 e delete a sent message See Delete a Message on page 389 Viewing a Message To view a message s details click the message s subject link The details of a message include who the message is from to whom it was sent the subject date sent and body of the message Actions you can take from the message details screen include e compose a new message See Compose a New Message in the Workarea on page 387 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 386 My Workspace reply to a message See Reply to a Message on page 387 forward a message See Forward a Message on page 388 Moving to the Next or Previous message See Moving to the Next or Previous Message on page 388 print a message See Print a Message in the Workarea on page 389 delete the message See Delete a Message on page 389 Compose a New Message in the Workarea Clicking the Compose a Message launches the Send a Message screen To compose a message follow these steps 1 ot 2 oO eS SS 9 In the Workarea click My Workspace or expand the Messaging folder on the Smart Desktop Select either Inbox or Sent Items Click the Compose a Message button The Send a Message screen appears Click the Browse Users link Select the people to which you want to send the message Add a subject to the Subject field Add text to the body of the
110. characters a a where a is one or more characters A response is required Several email addresses Each address s format is a a where ais one or more characters The user must separate each address with a semicolon Several email addresses Each address s format is a a where a is one or more characters The user must separate each address with a semicolon A response is required 5 nnnnn or 9 digits If 9 a dash appears after the fifth NNNNN nnnn 5 nnnnn or 9 digits If 9 a dash appears after the fifth nnnnn nnnn A response is required Q Social Security US Social Security US required Postal Code Canada Postal Code Canada required Social Insurance Number Canada Social Insurance Number Canada Required Telephone number US and Canada Telephone number US and Canada required Working with HTML Forms Used with calendar Used with text field Characteristics of Valid Response Nine digits in this pattern nnn nn nnnn Nine digits in this pattern nnn nn nnnn A response is required ana nan where ais an alphabetic character and n is numeric ana nan where a is an alphabetic character and n is numeric A response is required A nine digit number in the format nnnnnnnnn A nine digit number in the format nnnnnnnnn A response is required A seven or 10 digit number in the format nnnnnnn or nnnnnnnnnn The site visitor can insert
111. click the mouse A menu appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 543 NOTE Working with Tables Menu options relating to adding removing rows or columns are highlighted below Insert Row Below Delete Row Insert Column to the Left 2 Merge Cells Horizontally Merge Cells Vertically Split Cell x Delete Cell al Set Cell Properties Fa Set Table Properties vi Show Hide Border 3 Click the appropriate menu option For example to add a row above the current cursor location click Insert Row Above These options are also available on the toolbar Filesi warde 201 Charartere 20 Specifying Table Width After you create a table you can set its width by specifying one of the following e percentage of the window the table s width varies as a user adjusts the browser size e fixed number of pixels the table s width stays the same as a user adjusts the browser size You can also not set a width but instead let information you enter into the table s cells determine its width Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 544 Working with Tables NOTE To set the width of a column adjust the width of one of the cells within the column as described in Specifying the Height and Width of a Cell on page 564 Usually this change affects the other cells in the column Specifying Table Width by Percentage Specify table width and height by percentage if you want the
112. color background image height and width ID css class abbreviation categories Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 Working with Tables For more information see Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns on page 542 Spanning Rows or Columns on page 568 Specifying Table Width on page 544 Table Backgrounds on page 550 Specifying Horizontal Alignment on page 548 Setting Cell Padding and Spacing on page 574 Setting Table Borders on page 557 Aligning Text Within a Cell on page 5 0 Specifying a Cell s Background Color on page 566 Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 567 Specifying a Cell s Background Color on page 566 Spanning More than One Row or Column on page 569 540 Working with Tables Description For more information see Accessibility Lets you assign accessibility information Section 508 Tables on for the table page 5 6 heading rows caption heading columns caption caption alignment caption summary Deleting a Table To delete a table follow these steps 1 Move the cursor over the table until the cursor becomes a four headed arrow 2 Click the mouse button The table becomes selected small Squares appear around it 3 Press lt Delete gt Inserting a Table within a Table You can insert a table within a table You might want to do this to arrange text in columns
113. configuration setup file When done click the appropriate button Creating a Summary for Existing Content 1 2 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 Navigate to the folder that contains the content Hover the cursor over the content click the triangle 4 and select Edit or Edit Properties from the dropdown menu The View Content screen appears Click the Summary tab to enter or edit summary information for the content The summary can include images files and hyperlinks Its length can be restricted by your system administrator in the configuration setup screen When done click the appropriate button The View Content page reappears 78 Adding a Content Summary NOTE When you enter or edit existing content s summary its status changes to checked out After you create the summary click the Check In button to check the content in From that point you need to submit or publish it Editing a Summary NOTE You can only edit the summary of content that is published checked in or checked out by you To edit a content s summary follow these steps 1 Access the View Content page for the content whose summary you want to edit as described in Viewing Content on page 40 2 Click the Summary tab Edit Content in Folder About Us Title About Us English U S Content Summary Comment Templates Cat BB 2B M48 Sooo Fw T ELT EE Bi Apel Style Normal A E Z UAA
114. content block active definition ii adding 48 adding as menu option 449 adding to collection 427 approval process 94 archived toolbar button 65 archiving see archiving area expanding 47 awaiting approval 18 border hiding and showing 6 checked in definition iii checked out definition v collaboration 801 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 comparing see comparing con tent creating 48 currently checked out 18 declining 93 declining see declining content deleting 60 difference view button floating toolbar 6 viewing 101 103 editing 52 editing toolbar button 66 end date setting 71 folders see folders history accessing from Web page 56 112 accessing via Workarea 58 112 marked for deletion definition vii metadata see searchable proper ties pending start date viii previous version viewing 111 properties 45 publish see publish restoring previous version 111 scheduling 68 start date setting 69 statuses i approved i submitted definition vi summary see summary translating 59 types 8 viewing 40 Workarea search 117 workflow reports see reports content block see also content add button 64 definition 1 deleting several at once 66 editing overview 10 finding 10 lifecycle 11 contrast WeblmageFX command 705 copy information from other applications 665 toolbar and menu option 642 WebImageFX command 706 copyright character inserting 644 create new WebIlmageFX command 706 creating il
115. cursor within the table Right click the mouse Select Set Table Properties Click the Table Properties tab Use the icons within the Border area to indicate which border lines should appear Each icon has tooltip text that explains its function aee Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 560 Working with Tables NOTE In order to view the selected borders on the dialog a border color must be assigned See Assigning Table Border Color on page 558 Note that if a table already has border lines but you want to start fresh it is a good idea to remove all borders using the icons indicated below Then you can begin adding new ones Fad Table Properties 1 Cell Properties Border px Yo px Yo Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 561 Working with Table Cells Working with Table Cells NOTE Along with functions for managing tables described in Introduction to Tables on page 726 and Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 737 eWebEdit400 also lets you perform actions on individual cells within a table You can perform the following actions on individual table cells e Specifying the Height and Width of a Cell on page 564 e Deleting a Cell on page 565 e Specifying a Cell s Background Color on page 566 e Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 567 e Spanning Rows or Columns on page 568 e Aligning Text Within a C
116. digit calculated according to a modulo 11 algorithm on the basis of the 7 preceding digits this eighth control character may be an X if the result of the computing is equal to 10 in order to avoid ambiguity Above copied from www issn org Custom Validation The Text and Calendar field dialog s Validation tab features a validation area illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 605 Working with HTML Forms Calendar Field General Validation Data Style Validation Custom I Message Custom Validation Data Type Condition The validation feature can ensure the following aspects user input e The data type the default types are text URL whole number decimal number floating point number Floating point includes scientific notation so is appropriate for scientific numbers Decimals usually suffice for business numbers date calendars only e The field value has one of the following relationships with another field a number or an expression The default expressions are between two values either another field or a number that you specify less than equal to not equal to Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 606 Working with HTML Forms maximum length usually for text responses NOTE Your Web developer can customize validation options For details see the Ektron CMS400 NET D
117. do not agree with the changes you can decline the request In this case the user who made the edits is informed that the change is not approved The following graphic illustrates the content approval cycle Create or edt content Publish to Web site To help track content s position in this workflow Ektron CMS400 NET assigns a status to each content item The status determines what you can do with it and indicates what must occur in order for it to get published to the Web site For more information see Appendix A Content Statuses on page i Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 17 Logging In and Out Logging In and Out This section explains how to log in and out of Ektron CMS400 NET and to use the site preview feature through the following subtopics e Prerequisites on page 12 e Logging into the Sample Web Site on page 12 e Site Preview on page 14 e Logging Out of the Sample Site on page 15 Prerequisites Once your Webmaster or administrator installs Ektron CMS400 NET you need the following items before you can use tt e URL Web address of Ektron CMS400 NET Web site e Username and password Once you acquire both you can log into Ektron CMS400 NET and begin managing Web site content Logging into the Sample Web Site To access the Ektron CMS400 NET sample site follow these steps 1 In your Web browser navigate to the URL of your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Your
118. editable if the list type is Custom The Context Sensitive Menu Buttons to the left of each item circled below display a menu The menu lets you remove items rearrange them and insert additional items anywhere on the list d Item List Selected J Sr Insert Below Duplicate y Move Down Remove The Selected Box Place a check in the box of any item to be checked by default on the data entry screen If you do the user can accept the default or uncheck the item by clicking in the checkbox Note that if Only One is selected under Allow selection above only one item can be selected If the Appearance is set to Drop Down list this value is ignored Display Text Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen Value Enter the value that is collected when the site visitor selects this item For example if Interests appears in the Name field and you want music to be collected when the data entry user selects this item and saves the page enter music here The Disabled Checkbox Check the box next to any selection that you want to disable If you do the option appears on the form but the user cannot select it Option Click this button to add a row to the bottom of the list Inserting a Calendar Field To insert a field that lets a site visitor select a date use a Calendar Field To do that follow these steps 1 Enter a field label For example Expiration Date Ektron CMS400 NET U
119. exceed 1000 characters Only available if text field is set to Allow Multiple lines Site visitor s entry must be at least 8 characters and include one digit Only available if text field is set to Password field A positive whole number or no response A positive whole number must be entered Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 602 Decimal number or blank Decimal number required Percent 0 100 required email address email address required email address list email address list required Zip code US Zip code US required Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 60 Working with HTML Forms Used with calendar Used with text field Characteristics of Valid Response A decimal number for example 12 345 or 12 or blank A leading minus sign is allowed The decimal point must be a period even in locales that normally use a comma Note Decimal numbers include whole numbers because the decimal point is implied That is 12 is 12 0000 A decimal number it cannot be blank of none one or two decimal places te 93 A leading minus sign is allowed The decimal point must be period even in locales that normally use a comma Note Decimal numbers include whole numbers because the decimal point is implied That is 12 is 12 0000 A whole number from 0 to 100 A response is required a a where a is one or more
120. field onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 170 2 The following dialog appears Textarea Descriptive Hame Field Hame Tool Tip Text Default value Validation Validation No validation Error Message Fields on the Textarea Dialog ete Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 199 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 185 Working with HTML Forms SS Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Default If you want to set a default value for this field enter it here For example if this value field collects a city and most users enter New York enter New York as the value Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field The choices are No validation response is not checked Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked Allow m
121. following information for each version e version number See Also The Content Version Number on page 113 e agreen circle indicates a version that was published Versions without a green circle indicate content that was checked in but not published e date and time when a version was checked in or published e title of content e last user who edited content e comments entered by user to describe nature of changes made To view any version click its title When you do the Content History window appears for that content The Content Version Number Ektron CMS400 NET assigns a unique number to each saved version of a content block The number is increased by one tenth if the content is checked in but not published If the content is published the next whole number is assigned For example if the current version is 1 0 and you check in that content the new version is 1 1 If the next editor publishes it the new version is 2 0 If the content is purged the numbering scheme restarts with the remaining content The Detail History Window After viewing the View Content History window you can click any version to see the detail for it The detailed History window has two sides e The left side redisplays the information in the content history window See Also The Content History Window on page 112 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 113 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content e The right s
122. for any reason The Options Button When you click the Options button on the File Properties dialog box the options dialog box appears The box displays information about your connection to the Web server Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 691 Inserting Images Cancel For information about these settings see Uploading Images in the eWebEditPro XML Developer s Reference Guide Moving an Image to the Server If you insert an image from your computer into eWebEditPro XML content that image must be moved to the server when you save the content The image can only appear on Web pages that display it after you move it to the server When you save content that includes an image you inserted the following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 692 Inserting Images Files Waiting for Upload l Hone wynet 13 KB Estimated Upload Time 00 00 05 Files for Upload Upload Now Upload Later Bance Preview All inserted files appear in the dialog which also estimates how long it will take to move the files to your server If you do not want to wait that long to upload the files click Upload Later If you do this the images will not appear on the published Web content until you move them to the server You can also enter a Title for the image near the bottom of the screen If you do this text appears when the user reading the W
123. form and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 927 NoTE For the steps to create a new poll see Working With Polls on page 626 For the steps to create a new Survey see Creating a Survey on page 630 1 Consult with your Ektron CMS400 NET administrator about the folders in which you should create forms See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing HTML Forms gt Forms Must Use Template with FormBlock Server Control 2 Fromthe View menu click Language and select the language in which to create the form 3 Click the New menu gt HTML Form Survey The New Form screen appears New Form Be Baa a oh ae i m r La Aone hee Se ee Sahn sate Rent eae A s Ps Sheer er ae Das apna nasa nnn i z a C Seta Cenaa A LEP J AL ee Fee Ce Select a form from below or begin with a blank form Next you ll be able to customize all aspects of the form so that it collects exactly the information you re looking for Blank Form Design a new form Blank Survey Leh Design a new survey Standard Poll Design a new poll Compose Email A LALA sare rl ae a ull eS SS Ss eS NOTE When you choose Standard Poll or Blank Survey the number of steps in the Forms Wizard changes from five to four This happens because the Assign Tasks step is removed See Also Working With Polls on page 626 and Creating a Survey on page 630
124. function when performed function when performed from from Web Site Workarea View Published posts are viewable by Blog properties standard permission any site visitor View Only Add Not available Blog properties standard permission Add Edit Not available Blog properties standard permission Edit Delete Not available Blog properties standard permission Delete Approve Not available User must be member of blog s approval chain Add Three blog folder properties Blog properties standard permission control how comments can be Add submitted from Web site See Controlling Blog Comments on page 357 Edit Not available Blog properties standard permission Read Only Delete Not available Blog properties standard permission Read Only Not available Blog properties standard permission Edit Membership User Blog Permission Table Membership users can be given permission to edit and add blog posts in the blog Depending on the level of permissions they can perform any of these functions Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 342 Blogs Permission Lets membership user Read Only Read blog posts This box must be checked before you can add Edit and Add permissions Purge History Purge History works the same way for blogs as it does for the rest of the Ektron CMS400 NET See Also the Administrator Manual section Managing Content gt Managing Content Folders gt Purge History Language Su
125. g t 1 ka mr F Optior make a meaningful E SS With the latest tech GH To webmaster ektron com science we are able j make a difference in Contact Us today Subj Medical Technology We do this by apply iE gi ee EEEREN pharmaceuticals and patients lives With The address and subject are retrieved from the mail link and inserted into the user s email screen as shown above To insert an email link follow these steps 1 Within eWebEdit400 content insert text that a site visitor will click to open the email link For example Contact us today If the text does not exist yet insert it 2 Select the text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 530 Inserting email Links 3 Click the Hyperlink Manager button The Hyperlink dialog appears 4 Click the E mail tab Hyperlink Manager Hyperlink Anchor E mail i C55 Class Note that the selected text appears in the Link Text field In the Address field enter the email address to which the message will be sent 7 Inthe Subject field enter default text for the email s Subject line if desired The user sending the mail can edit this text if desired 8 Press OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 531 Working with HTML eWebEdit400 creates pages for display on the internet or an intranet These pages use HTML hypertext markup language to format text and images for display in a browser
126. information via the Workarea Membership Users Ektron CMS400 NET users and administrators can access their profile pages via the Web site My Workspace is a component of the Community Platform This area allows you to manage your community information from the Workarea Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 370 My Workspace Berg UU Dy canes hai a aan a a AU EEan iMy Workspace Ee Documents 6 Community Groups ae Favorites H Colleagues Pending Groups ae Journal SD Favorites Colleagues Pending Colleagues bam cent Colleaque SS i Requests _ Journal Message Board _ Inbox Sent Messages Photos The following features are included in My Workspace e Documents see Documents on page 372 e Community Groups see Community Groups on page 405 e Favorites see Favorites on page 408 e Colleagues see Colleagues on page 393 e Journal a Journal is a personal blog for a user See Blogs on page 319 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 371 Documents My Workspace Message Board see Message Board on page 390 Messaging see Messaging on page 383 Photos see Photos on page 410 The Documents area of My Workspace allows you to add assets and HTML content to Ektron CMS400 NET and associate it with your profile You can create subfolders to separate content by category Folders and files in the Documents area are sepa
127. interest in your products and services Register people for events Form capabilities include e Creating a form and its postback message e Creating polls and surveys for a Web site e Adding validation criteria to form fields e Automatically assigning tasks for follow up activities to form submissions e Reporting on form information e Exporting results to Microsoft Excel A sample form appears below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 158 Working with HTML Forms ARBRE AA Oo Ye Beam Le E of Ems e i Normal 2000 A BAA y E fab fab e e EE Te Select Button III Wt gi NI gi iil lil Request for White Paper Please fill out the form below If you have any questions please e mail white paperd required fields IMPORTANT to avoid delays please provide accurate informatio EE Company Persanal Website Eee cil LR ii We A H This chapter explains how to perform all form actions through the following topics e Overview of Form Processing on page 160 e The Structure of Form Data on page 160 e Creating a New Form on page 161 e Creating a Form s Content on page 168 e Form Validation on page 174 e Form Fields on page 175 e Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 196 e Assigning a Task to a Form on page 197 e Viewing Form Reports on page 199 e Exporting a Form s Raw Data on page 205 Ektron CMS400 NET Us
128. it See Also The Advanced Search Tab on page 122 it can appear among Suggested Results See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Searching Your Web Site gt Suggested Results After you respond to the above fields the following buttons are available Buttons on the Add Content Screen ro rome e A Submit Submit the content into the approval chain This action also returns the new or updated content to the database and exits the editor See Also Approving Declining Content on page 90 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 50 Adding HTML Content Ec Ds ca Publish Publish the content to the Web site aI Note Only the last approver in the approval chain sees this button If no approval chain is assigned to the content s folder every authorized user sees this button See Also Approving Declining Content on page 90 This action updates the content in the database and exits the editor Check In Save and check in the document This action updates the content in the database and exits the editor It does not submit the content into the approval chain Rather it allows you and other users to continue changing it Save Save the content without leaving the editor It is a good idea to save your work frequently Close the editor without saving changes Tabs on the Edit Content Screen Jis Description Tab Content Insert content For more informat
129. lines with bullets or numbers e adjust indentation e right center or left justify text and images e adda bookmark hyperlink image or table e view your text as WYSIWYG or HTML code e insert or clean HTML source code You gain access to these functions either from the toolbar at the top of the editor window or from a menu that appears when you right click the mouse inside the editor Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 633 Introduction to eWebEditPro XML Using eWebEditPro XML eWebEditPro XML is like many other word processing applications You type text and then use toolbar buttons illustrated below and menu options to change the text s appearance or perform functions on it such as spell checking BE 32 B 80 AM SB eave Aaa Bi Apply Style Normal BFiuU A 3 Liki an lI Ww WL yI iij il il bpt M Ej H gt e To learn more about using eWebEditPro XML see these topics Creating a Simple Web Page on page 635 e Toolbar Buttons on page 639 e Customizing Your Toolbar on page 652 e The Context Sensitive Menu on page 661 Using eWebEditPro XML s Advanced Features on page 664 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 634 Creating a Simple Web Page This section walks you through the process of creating a simple Web page using only a few of the many features available Later sections explain all of the features and how to use them Your Fini
130. ls kikib ee ee be Task Title Make sure to review your approval list Assigned To f admin Assigned By jedit Priority High Status Not Started Due Date 11 Jun 2004 Start Date 10 Jun 2004 Description Remember to view your approval list every day and approve any content blacks on the list Comments Date Timel4added By Comments 10 Jun O04 10 47 Sh l Be sure to check this list every day for John Edit content blocks needing approval 3 The Comments window opens with the comment displayed 4 Update the comment 5 Click the button Deleting a Task You can easily delete a task that is no longer needed For example the user who assigned a task would typically delete it when it is completed To delete a task follow these steps 1 Access the View Task screen for the task as described in Viewing a Task on page 307 2 Click the Delete button i Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 316 IMPORTANT Managing Tasks The Delete button only appears if your system administrator has granted you permission to delete tasks For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Permissions 3 A confirmation message appears 4 Click OK Viewing a Task s History view Task Histo Ektron CMS400 NET maintains a history of all events in the life of a task as well as any comments entered As examples
131. message in the editor Click the Send button Reply to a Message When replying to a message you reply only to the person who sent you the original message A reply contains the details of the original message The details of the original message can be edited or removed from the new message To reply to a message follow these steps l In the Workarea click My Workspace gt Messaging or expand the Messaging folder on the Smart Desktop Select either Inbox or Sent Items Find the message to which you want to reply and click the subject Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 387 My Workspace Click the Reply button a 5 The message editor screen appears with the original message s details in the body of the message 6 Add your reply 7 Click the Send button 2 8 The message is sent Forward a Message When forwarding a message you can select to whom the message is sent A forwarded message contains the details of the original message The details of the original message can be edited or removed from the new message To forward a message follow these steps 1 In the Workarea click My Workspace or expand the Messaging folder on the Smart Desktop Select either Inbox or Sent Items 3 Find the message you want to forward and click the subject Click the Forward button w 5 The message editor screen appears with the original message s details in the body of the mess
132. module 465 editing via content folder 458 via menus module 459 via navigation link 459 rearranging 463 moving from toolbar 659 multi language issues 466 rearranging on toolbar 657 removing from toolbar 653 structure 439 submenu definition 439 template link field 445 translating 466 URL link field 444 viewing via content folder 460 via menus module 461 via navigation link 462 merge cell toolbar button 649 merging cells 767 metadata definition 80 Microsoft Office documents importing 232 Microsoft Office document checking out saving and replacing 250 deleting 248 saving 251 saving in html format 252 Microsoft Office Documents adding via drag and drop 238 adding via mapped network folder 241 adding via Multiple DMS Docu ments option 236 Microsoft Office documents adding via DMS Document Option 235 edit in mapped network folder 247 editing in Office 246 imported how named 234 Microsoft Word editing in 675 editing XML documents 676 inserting content from 784 uploading image from 676 multi language menus 466 Multiple DMS Documents option 236 N network folder mapped adding Office documents 241 number toolbar option 646 numbers in words spell checking 673 O objects absolute positioning 647 Office 2000 inserting content from 784 open file toolbar button 650 open WeblmageFX command 712 oval WeblmageFX command 713 overwrite button 66 P padding cell 769 password changing 473 paste toolbar and m
133. nnnnn or 9 digits separated by a dash after the fifth nnnnn nnnn Zip code US required 5 nnnnn or 9 digits separated by a dash after the fifth nnNNNN nnnn A response Is required Social Security US required Nine digits in this pattern nnn nn nnnn A response is required Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 181 Working with HTML Forms Option Characteristics of Valid Response Postal Code Canada ana nan where a is an alphabetic character and n is numeric Postal Code Canada ana nan where a is an alphabetic character and n is numeric A required response is required Social Insurance Number A nine digit number in the format nnnnnnnnn Canada Social Insurance Number A nine digit number in the format nnnnnnnnn A response is Canada Required required Telephone number US and A seven or 10 digit number in the format nnnnnnn or nnnnnnnnnn Canada The site visitor can insert separator characters such as dashes between numbers Telephone number US and A seven or 10 digit number in the format nnnnnnn or nnnnnnnnnn Canada required The site visitor can insert separator characters such as dashes between numbers A response is required Inserting a Password Field Use a password field when you want the user to enter a password A password is like a text field but the user s entry appears as dots instead of characters This prevents an onlooker from seeing the pass
134. on page 174 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 169 Working with HTML Forms The Form Toolbar Options Creating form content is similar to creating a standard content item See Adding HTML Content on page 75 The big difference is a special toolbar illustrated below to make it easier to insert form elements a fab fab e e EE TS Select Button All tooloar options except the Select button pull down also appear on a vertical toolbar to the left of the editor You can use whichever toolbar you prefer all options are the same Form Post back message Metadata Schedule Comment LRAMAl Oo Ss FEE Normal 2010 pt A WI BJAA m fab fab e e EE Te Select Button Place form elements here Adding a Field to the Screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 170 Working with HTML Forms The major difference between the toolbars is how you add a field to the screen If you are using the horizontal toolbar place the cursor where you want field and click the toolbar button When using the vertical toolbar drag a button to the desired screen location Note that a context sensitive menu available by right clicking the mouse is also available to perform these actions You can right click the mouse then select Insert Field to display a context sensitive menu of all commands Form Post back message Metadata Schedule Comment Notificatio R
135. on screen User checks any number of appropriate boxes Same as Choices except options appear in a drop down box and site visitor can only select one choice Lets user insert a date by clicking a calendar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 For more information see Inserting a Checkbox Field on page 1 5 Inserting a Hidden Text Field on page 177 Inserting a Text Field on page 178 Inserting a Password Field on page 182 Inserting a Text Area Field on page 184 Inserting a Choices Field on page 18 7 Inserting a Select List Field on page 191 Inserting a Calendar Field on page 194 172 Working with HTML Forms After you complete the form you have the following options Postback Message See Composing the Postback Message on page 163 Metadata Edit the metadata for the content See Also Adding or Editing Metadata on page 80 Assign start or end dates or both for when content is published to Web site See Also Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 68 Enter history comment to indicate changes made to content Web Alerts Assign or update Web Alert information for the form See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Web Alert Feature Web Alert Feature on page 1063 Submit content into approval process 5 Submit By Publish content to Web site Publish ee EES Note If the content has any active tasks a co
136. page 670 e Checking Spelling as You Type on page 670 e Checking Spelling Upon Demand on page 671 e Spell Checking Selected Text on page 672 e Setting Spell Check Options on page 673 Disabling Script Blocking If Norton Antivirus 2001 is installed on your computer you need to disable script blocking in order to use the spell checker If you do not disable script blocking an error message will appear whenever you check spelling To do this follow these steps 1 Launch Norton Antivirus 2001 2 From the first window click Options 3 On the next window click Script Blocking 4 On the script blocking window uncheck Enable Script Blocking 5 Press OK Checking Spelling as You Type You can have the editor check spelling as you type To turn on the spell check as you type feature click the automatic spell check button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 670 Checking Spelling When you click the button the spell checker reviews every word in the file A wavy red line appears under any word whose spelling is not found in the system s dictionary The spell checker continues to review each word as you type it marking any words not in the dictionary NOTE Depending on the speed of your computer there may be a short delay between the time you type an incorrect word and when the wavy red line appears Also the spell check does not check a word until you enter a space char
137. px Height Oo px Layout 7 Click Update Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 575 Working with Table Cells Section 508 Tables You can apply the following information to any table to make it 508 compliant Narrative software uses the information from the Accessibility table fields heading rows columns caption alignment and summary to produce a Tooltip message for each table cell Users with impaired vision can see those Tooltips as they hover over the cells Heading Rows Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 577 Heading Columns Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog page 577 Summary Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog page 5 Caption Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog page 577 Horizontal Caption Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog Alignment page 5 Vertical Caption Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on Alignment page 5 Abbreviation Cell properties dialog Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog on page 579 Categories Cell properties dialog Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog on page 579 To create a 508 compliant table follow these steps 1 Create a new table or edit an existing one as explained in Creating a Table on page 535 2 Place the cursor inside the table 3 Right click the mouse Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 576 Working with Ta
138. screen From here you can perform additional content activities such as move copy delete and view its history Adding a Subfolder Since the procedure for adding new folders is usually only granted to administrators it is documented in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Managing Content Folders gt Adding Subfolders Deleting a Folder Since the procedure for adding new folders is usually only granted to administrators it is documented in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Managing Content Folders gt Deleting Subfolders Viewing Content You can view all content in your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Viewing content allows you to see the content metadata summaries and other information Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 40 Viewing Content Viewing Content from a Web Page To view content from a Web page follow these steps Sign in Browse to the content you want to view Right click the mouse Pwo hp gt Click Properties Edit View History Delete Workarea 5 Continue reading from The View Content screen appears on page 43 Viewing Content from the Workarea 1 Navigate to the folder that contains the content as explained in Viewing a Folder on page 30 2 The icon to the left of View indicates the type of content being displayed Icons are described below All types C B HTML form or survey
139. selected language Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Does Not Exist Navigate to the folder in which you will create the collection 2 Click View gt Collections The View Collections screen is displayed 3 Click the Add button ca and enter basic information about the collection This screen is described in Creating a Collection on page 423 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 434 Working with Collections 4 The View Collections in Folder screen appears Click the collection you just created 5 From the Add drop down list select the language of the new collection 6 Using the Add button ca select the content to add to the collection Navigate through the folders to the content you want to add You can only add content in the selected language Comparison of Collections Menus Taxonomy and the List Summary Features A menu a collection a taxonomy and the ListsSummary function are similar in that they let you add a list of links to a Web page The following table compares these features to help you understand which one is best suited to your needs NOTE To implement these features the assistance of a developer is required Collection List Taxonomy Summary Display all content in a folder X X X As folder s content changes folder items display changes appear ona menu Can display all content in a folder s subfolders Display external hyperlinks a
140. separator characters such as dashes between numbers A seven or 10 digit number in the format nnnnnnn or nnannnnnnnn The site visitor can insert separator characters such as dashes between numbers A response is required A web site address Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 604 Working with HTML Forms Characteristics of Valid Response Used with Used with text field calendar field The International Standard Book Number ISBN is a 10 digit number that uniquely identifies books and book like products published internationally Every ISBN consists of ten digits When printed the ISBN number is preceded by the letters ISBN The ten digit number is divided into four parts of variable length each part separated by a hyphen The four parts of an ISBN are e Group or country identifier identifies a national or geographic grouping of publishers Publisher identifier identifies a particular publisher within a group Title identifier identifies a particular title or edition of a title Check digit the single digit at the end of the ISBN which validates it Above copied from www isbn org The ISSN International Standard Serial Number is an eight digit number which identifies periodical publications as such including electronic serials The ISSN takes the form of the acronym ISSN followed by two groups of four digits separated by a hyphen The eighth character is a control
141. several factors such as e your folder permissions e your position in the approval chain if any e the content s status e whether the item is a Microsoft Office document To see the dropdown menu options for any content item follow these steps 1 After signing in navigate to a Web page or the folder that contains the content 2 Hover the cursor over the content item It is surrounded by a blue rectangle and a triangle appears to the right of the title View Contents of Folder Root 2 Title Langu abstract q A accessibilit T active_directory 4 LS 3 Hover the cursor over the triangle 4 and click Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 36 Viewing a Folder 4 Amenu of options available for that content item appears For example if you have permission to edit it Edit appears on the dropdown menu Dropdown Menu Options Option Allows you to For more information see Approve Approve content that has been submitted for Approving Declining Content publishing on page 90 Check in Change status of selected content to checked in Checked In Content on Might use if you checked out and saved a page iii document then it became lost or corrupted This option changes original document s status to checked in However it does not replace the version of the file in Ektron CMS400 NET To replace content that was checked out and edited drag and drop it into E
142. share a folder follow these steps 1 In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Documents 2 Click the Manage Folder button qj 3 The Add Folder box appears 4 Click the Share Folder button qj 5 The Share Workspace box appears Public Colleagues Selected Colleagues Private Documents O O Requirements O O Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 382 My Workspace 6 Select with whom to share your folders The table below describes each option Viewer Type Description Public All people viewing your profile page can view your documents Colleagues Only people who are your colleagues can view your documents See Also Colleagues on page 393 Selected Colleagues Only colleagues who are marked as selected colleagues can view your documents Private You are the only one who can view your documents 7 Click the Share button Share 8 Documents in the folder are now available for viewing by the selected viewer type Messaging The messaging system allows you to send messages to other CMS400 and membership users Messages are similar to email The difference is messages are sent and received within CMS400 Web site or the Workarea When sending a message users can send it to multiple recipients The recipients can then read reply or forward the message Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 383 My Workspace ene q x Inbox a
143. six rows by six columns or less use the Table Builder See Also Creating a Table Using the Table Builder on page 536 If it will exceed 6 x 6 use the Table Wizard See Also Creating a Table Using the Table Wizard on page 537 Either way once the table is created you use the features described in Modifying Table Properties on page 539 to add borders background color set width and height etc Creating a Table Using the Table Builder To create a table follow these steps 1 Click the table button 1 2 Drag the cursor over rows and column to indicate the size of the table The following example shows a table that is 4 rows by 5 columns Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 536 Working with Tables 4x5 Table Table Wizard 3 Click the mouse At this point the table looks like this De H jiy G WM ee i il gt r a a D E S i oh hi S I r I E l l I I E l l I Lest ciate ela lar del I l l I I I I l E E lL 4 Begin entering text and images into the table cells To further modify the table see Modifying Table Properties on page 539 You can also select the table and drag its right border to the right and or down to enlarge it for ease of use Creating a Table Using the Table Wizard 1 Click the table button 9 2 Click Table Wizard circled below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 537 Working with Tables 3 The Table W
144. step Click the Add Content button The Add Content screen appears If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support the content s language appears next to the title The language is derived from the collection s language and cannot be changed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 429 Working with Collections ctron rh etna r G a 4 pi Z e Betta A EEA EET Een ens ELELEE al ADANE j aeien etn BA AIL Ee ST sor bet FAR p R ve ERA k E a Taaa pe Oe Aa ar F i FE ur TEAT a a rii i e ia a eet ee ey AA Poke Ob hey pee AE ke A AN A Oks T AAE W g B oe AN An We a i i w Vi PA eS PS AR TPT A ENP OT PARR NN OP PLT TP AT A S RC Edit Content in Folder Root Mo oe i ve eh Lo elon LI Title E English U 5 Add to Quicklinks table Content Searchable Content Catec BB 45286868484 o gt PERET E Appl Style Normal BIUsxA E a sees e TH i BPR oem Ao e HEC A 9 Create the content NOTE Refer to Adding HTML Content on page 48 for additional information about creating new content 10 Click a workflow option in the Add Content screen 11 The Add Content screen closes and the new content link appears in the list of links available to the collection 12 Check off the content yo
145. structure CMS400 NET cre ates it in Workarea Using the Document Management System Disadvantages Document title taken from Windows file name Content is in checked in status submitting it for pub lishing is a separate For more information see Adding Documents to a Mapped Network Folder on page 241 step Cannot assign lan guage to content or work with content in a language other than your com puter s default lan guage How Imported Documents are Named When you use the New gt DMS Document file import option you enter an Ektron CMS400 NET title for the file When you import an Office document or managed file into Ektron CMS400 NET using any other method its name is the file name without the extension So a file named mypicture jpg becomes mypicture In Ektron CMS400 NET While it may appear that the file extension was removed it is retained and reappears for assets when you use the Edit option on the View Contents of Folder screen circled below Edit Content in Folder Root Title Al ign Center Content Summary Metadata Com Currently uploaded file Align Cente Please select a file to upload eo Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 234 Using the Document Management System The original file extension also appears when you check out File Download Do you want to open or save this file N Name help syster Type Paint Shop Pro X Im
146. system administrator provides this 2 Click the Login button on the screen Login Click here to log in Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 12 Logging In and Out 3 The Login dialog box appears Ektron CMS Login Mi Enter your username and password User 4 Enter your username and password If you are using one of Ektron s sample sites you can use any of three standard users that demonstrate Ektron s flexible user permissions model The table below lists the username and password needed to log in as each user type as well as the permissions assigned to each user Standard user jedit jedit Basic for example add edit content manage library files etc Membership user jimember jmember Read only permission to private content 5 Click the Login button 6 The Web page appears You can navigate around your Web site as you could before signing in But now the content is surrounded by a colored box when you move the cursor over it illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 13 Logging In and Out Home gt News iat Our Company Vision Deliver world class quality products and services Customer experience that exceeds expectations and differentiates ot marketplace To be the preferred global standard for Web Content Management Site Preview While logged into Ektron CMS400 NET you can preview the Web site as it would
147. the Caption Alignment field Summary If desired enter the table summary Non visual browsers use the summary to explain the table s contents From http www ws org TR WCAG10 HTML TECHS data tables A summary of the relationships among cells is especially important for tables with nested headings cells that soan multiple columns or rows or other relationships that may not be obvious from analyzing the structure of the table but that may be apparent in a visual rendering of the table A summary may also describe how the table fits into the context of the current document If no caption is provided it is even more critical to provide a summary Associate Check this box if you want to associate the table s data cells with the Cells with appropriate headers See Also htip www w3 org TR WCAG20 Headers TECHS H43 html After you complete the Table Properties dialog click OK to make the table Section 508 compliant Setting Abbreviation and Category Attributes You can modify abbreviation ABBR and category AXIS attributes within a table To do so follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 578 Working with Table Cells Select one or more cells Right click the mouse Select Set Cell Properties aN The Cell Properties dialog appears It includes the Abbreviation and Categories fields see illustration below Cell Properties H Cell Properties Content Alignment Back
148. the Title of the blog post The comment page contains the original post any comments that have been added and a form to post new comments Depending on how the page is designed the calendar and blog roll can also appear Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 359 Blogs The Story of My Life This is the story of my life And I write it everyday I know it isn t black and white And it s anything but gray T know that no Tm not alright But Til be OK cause Anything can everything can happen That s the sat a my life Can t wait to read it Posted by John Smith email visit on 02 14 2006 01 55 PM Scott s Blog Toby Tyler s Blog oie a COMM Music Artist of the Week John Smith Name required Best Week Fver F mail required http URL Your Comrnent N_Post Comment _ Comment The Comment Form NOTE See Controlling Blog Comments on page 357 to learn about how an administrator determines if and by whom comments can be submitted Site visitors regular users and Membership users can add comments by filling out the form on the comments page The form has five fields Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 360 Blogs Se The person submitting the comment This information is required Note This text box ap
149. the View Menus option Click More Info Click the menu item you want to change ve a a At the Link field change the value from Menu Template to Quicklink Link GuickLink Menu Template Important If you created menus prior to upgrading to this version of Ektron CMS400 NET those menu items are assigned as Quicklinks You cannot change them to template links simply by entering a template link here Instead you must go to each menu item and change the Link field value from QuickLink to Menu Template as illustrated above Add a more detailed description for the menu Folder Seethe Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Menu Feature gt Associations Implementation of the Menus Feature gt Effect of Assigning a Folder to a Menu Template Seethe Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Menu Feature gt Associations Implementation of the Menus Feature gt Effect of Assigning a Template to a Menu 6 Click the Save button H With the menu added you may assign menu items to it See Adding a Menu Item on page 446 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 445 Working with Menus Adding a Menu via the Menus Module 1 From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus 2 Click the Add Menu button qq 3 The Add Menu screen appears Add Menu Title English U 5 3 Advance Settings 4 To complete the fields on the Add M
150. the cursor over the triangle on the right end of the file and click 5 Click Check out and Save As from the dropdown menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 258 Using the Document Management System 4 View Properties Save As Edit in Microsoft Office A Edit Properties Select a folder on your computer in which to save the file Open the host application Edit and save the file Return to Ektron CMS400 NET and open the file s folder 0 Click the Add Assets button circled below S28 SN o View Contents of Folder CMS400Demo 4 E amp E 372 4 1098 4 E 3 11 Drag the changed file to the Assets area in the middle of the screen Deleting a Managed File NOTES You must have delete permissions for the folder that contains the document Permissions are explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual It is good practice to check for broken quicklinks before deleting documents See Checking for Broken Quicklinks on page 63 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the managed file s folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 259 Using the Document Management System 3 Find the managed file you want to delete 4 Hover the cursor over the triangle 4 on the right end of the file and click 5 Click Delete from the dropdown menu ee ee A T a l 2 TCPIP props f a a View Save As Replace Check Out
151. the deleted cells shift left to occupy the vacant space In this example the cursor was in cell b when the user clicked on Delete Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 755 Working with Table Cells Before setting a Cell s Border Color NOTE A cell border is the line that separates it from other cells By default the color of a cell s border matches the color of the table border However you can change the color of any cell border individually When viewed in Netscape Navigator cell borders are gray regardless of any change you make on the Cell Properties dialog box This example illustrates the effect of different cell border colors within a table T Sets the color of the table be Sets the thickness of the tab oath tha ceacines cared thes lf you want a cell s border to disappear set it to the same color as the table s background color To change the color of a cell s border follow these steps 1 Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse 2 Click Table from the menu 3 Click Cell Properties from the menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 756 Working with Table Cells 4 Click the Border Color field on the Cell Properties dialog box Border Color EPE 5 When you click that field a Windows Color selection box appears Click the color that you want to apply to the cell border See Also Using the Color Box
152. the following tags Music Guitars Rock amp Roll When a person visits a blog search site and searches for Rock amp Roll music your blog post appears Some blog search sites have a page specifically for searching blog tags Editing a Blog Post NoTE Tobe able to edit a blog post you must have Edit permission onthe blogs Standard Permissions screen Follow these steps to edit a blog post IMPORTANT If another editor changes a blog post the posting information reflects the new editor the date and the time the information was changed This is important to remember if you want the original person who posted the blog to get credit for the post 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder Or From the Web site open menu for the blog then choose Properties Next choose the post NOTE To add a blog post from the Web site you must be logged in 2 Click the blog post title you want to edit Click the Edit button L 3 4 Change the blog post 5 When the blog is published the changes appear in the blog post on the Web site Approving a Blog Post If someone who is not a member of the blog s approval chain creates or edits a blog post its status is set to Submitted It will only appear on the Web site after a member of the chain approves it While its status is Submitted it has yellow border on the View Posts in blog screen To approve a blog post see Approving Declining Content on page 90 Ekt
153. the left column of the View Tasks screen Assigned To Your user name appears e f you do not have Redirect permissions you cannot assign tasks to other users If you have Redirect permissions your user name appears followed by Select User or Group To assign the task to yourself proceed to the next field To assign the task to someone else click Select User or Group and choose a user or group The user to whom the task is being assigned must have permission to edit the con tent When you complete the screen an email is sent to the selected user or user group informing him of the assigned task Note email is only sent if email notification is enabled for Ektron CMS400 NET Select the language of the user who will perform the task Content If this task involves a piece of content select it When you click Select a new window appears From this window you can navigate through folders to find the content You can only select a piece of content whose language matches the user language selected above See Also Selecting Content for the Task on page 299 Priority Select the priority of the task Your choices are High Normal and Low The priority appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by priority Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 296 Managing Tasks SS Task Category Select a category for the task When a Task Category is chosen the Task Type drop down b
154. the message you want to delete and fill in the check box Click the Delete button j The message is deleted and you are returned to the Inbox or Sent Messages Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 389 My Workspace Message Board The Message Board allows site visitors to leave a short message or comment on the site Message Board in My Workspace The Message Board located in My Workspace allows a user to manage the comments on their board From this area a user can e view comments see Viewing Your Message Board Comments on page 391 See Viewing Your Message Board Comments on page 391 e add comments see Add a Comment to Your Message Board in the Workarea on page 392 See Add a Comment to Your Message Board in the Workarea on page 392 e delete comments see Delete Comments on Your Message Board in the Workarea on page 392 Delete Comments on Your Message Board in the Workarea on page 392 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 390 My Workspace 1 x Message Board aN il y Works J ace seis eer J 2 Pocuments AA Here is the first message for 10 10 2007 5 Community Groups my Message Board Delete 10 48 10 AM H Favorites 5 Colleagues Add Comment 5 Journal eT 0 Messaging 44 Photos IPHI character imit Page l of 1 Viewing Your Message Board Comments To view comments for a Message Board in the Workarea click the
155. the title of the selected content replaces any text in the Event Title field You can edit the new title if desired Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 286 Working with Calendars Check this box if you want the Web page or Quicklink specified in the Hyperlink field to appear in a new browser window when someone clicks it Launch Link in New Browser If you do not check this box the new Web page replaces the current one when the link is clicked or more event types for this event See Also Understanding Event Types on page 284 To apply an event type to this event click an Event Type from the right column Then click the Right Arrow gt to move the event type to the Selected column Repeat for each event type you want to assign to the event 5 Click the Save button Hl Viewing a Calendar Event Once events are added to a calendar you can easily view them To view a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the Show Calendar screen for the calendar that contains the event you want to view as described in Viewing a Calendar on page 276 2 Place the cursor on the event you want to view Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 287 Working with Calendars April May 2004 Thursday 4 Ea 6 weekly meeting Location Hew York Room Start 12 00 AM End 1 00 PM EE JAA weekly meeting Location Mew York Room Star 12 00 AM End 1 00
156. them into Web content through the following topics Terms Used in this Chapter on page 134 Accessing The Library on page 135 Library Folder Properties on page 137 Searching the Library on page 138 Files on page 142 Hyperlinks on page 153 Images on page 153 Quicklinks and Forms on page 155 Terms Used in this Chapter An image is any graphic file which can include illustrations and photos Common image file extensions are gif jpg tiff etc A file is type of computer file that can be launched from a browser such as Internet Explorer Examples include a Microsoft Word document and a PDF file A hyperlink is a commonly used or hard to remember Web address also known as a URL After you add hyperlinks to the library users can easily apply them to editor content So for example if the editor content is Contact Ektron the user can select the text click the library button select hyperlinks to find the Ektron hyperlink and apply that hyperlink to the text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 134 Library Folder Library Folder Content hyperlinks m La e hyperlinks Title ei D Date modified Ektron Ine 25 3 a u20 2 Chapada e Once the page is published a person reading it can click the text to jump to the Web address www ektron com e A quicklink is a special kind of hyperlink that jumps to another content item on your W
157. this list every day for John Edit content blocks needing approval Several comments can be added to a task to record its progress from assignment to completion To add a comment to a task follow these steps NOTE When an approver approves declines content from the Content Awaiting Approval screen if the content has an active task the Add Comments to Task screen appears The screen lets the approver insert comments about the task associated with the content 1 Access the View Task screen for the task as described in Viewing a Task on page 307 2 Click the Add Comment button 4 3 The Comments window appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 314 Managing Tasks Comments an2p gt ASR BIUA Times New Roman B Bom sA Insert Close 4 Enter your comment in the editor Note that you can format and spell check the text using the toolbar buttons 5 Click the button 6 The View Task screen reappears with the comment at the bottom of the page Updating Comments To update a comment follow these steps 1 Access the View Task screen that contains the comment you want to update as described in Viewing a Task on page 307 2 Click the comment s Date Time link illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 315 Managing Tasks View Task Y 0 mh e Mls le Ms le es ae le es le le ll se le le ls le ls le les Ms ss Be es le le le ls Ml
158. to Viewing a Collection on page 421 Finding a Collection Using the Collections Folder To view all collections in all content folders follow these steps 1 From the Workarea click Modules gt Collections 2 The Collections Report screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 419 Working with Collections Collections Report Title ID Description Path Homepage Ads 4 1 Homepage News 6 1 About Us a 1 Contacts 10 List of contacts at Ektron Medical CMS400Demo About Us Statt NOTE The ek_PageSize setting in the web config file determines the maximum number of collections that appear on a page before it breaks When a page breaks additional collections appear on another screen and the following appears at the bottom of the list Page 1 of 2 First Page Previous Page Next Page Last Page NOTE If you have a large number of collections use the Search box to help find one 3 The screen has four columns described below Title given to collection by user who created or last edited it ID number assigned by Ektron CMS400 NET Developers use this number to reference the collection in ecmCollection custom function Description given to collection by user who created or last edited it Folder location of the collection You can click any collection to view information about it and perform tasks on it See Viewing a Collection on page 421 You can also add a
159. use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 774 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 5 Click OK Testing a Hyperlink Within the eWebEditPro XML editor you can test a hyperlink To do this select the hyperlink then double click it That action launches the Web page assigned to the hyperlink Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page Sometimes the destination Web page contains bookmarks and you want to jump from your page to a bookmark on another page Bookmarks are described in Using Bookmarks on page 771 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 778 Using Hyperlinks To create a hyperlink that jumps to another page s bookmark follow these steps Go to the destination Web page 2 Click the bookmark that you want to jump to For example on the illustration below the text Benefits to Partners jumps to a bookmark further down on the page PARTNER PROGRAM OVERYIEW Welcome Executive Summary Ektron Partner Programs Ektron Technology Partners Benefits to Partners Ektron Products Partners in Learning Program 3 When you click the bookmark its full address appears in your browser s address bar This bookmark s address looks like this http www example com single cfm doc_id 35 Benefits2 4 Click the address ba
160. visible if site visitor enters exact path such as http localhost CMS400Developer dynamic aspx id 1014 amp _ taxo nomyid 14 Can users view and edit content within Ektron CMS400 NET upon expiration Yes within its folder by clicking the View gt Archive Content option Also can be found via Basic Search and Advanced search if the Archived check box is checked Yes in the active area of its folder and on the Refresh Report See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Content Reports gt Refresh Reminder Report Restoring Content from Archived to Active State Navigate to its folder Options on page 72 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 To restore content from archived state to active follow these steps 2 Click View gt Archived Content See Setting Archive 74 Scheduling Content to Begin and End 3 Hover the cursor over the content click the triangle 4l and select Edit from the dropdown menu The Edit Content in Folder screen appears Click the Schedule tab Remove the End Date or change it to a future date eo 2 ol gt Submit the content for publishing When the content is published it will no longer be archived Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 75 Adding a Content Summary Adding a Content Summary A summary provides a short description of content to supplement the title when a list of content items
161. visitor to enter information Then add a button that enables the user to submit data If you chose a sample form at the beginning of the Forms Wizard the form includes fields If you did not the screen has only a Submit bution Tip In addition to inserting fields you can add explanatory text lines images etc to the form To lay out fields in columns insert a table and place the fields within table cells The table below explains each field type you can enter Inserts this Description For more information see kind of field Checkbox User s response is either checked or Inserting a Checkbox Field on unchecked page 597 Free text field user cannot format Inserting a Text Field on page 598 text Choices Several choices appear on screen Inserting a Choices Field on User checks any number of page 611 appropriate responses Calendar Lets user insert a date by clicking a Inserting a Calendar Field on calendar page 615 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 593 Working with HTML Forms Inserts this Description For more information see kind of field Insert Button Button with no text You can easily Inserting or Editing Buttons on the add text to it Form on page 619 When a site visitor completing the form presses this button the data on the screen is submitted to your Web server Insert Reset Button with Reset as its text When a Inserting or Editing Buttons on the site visit
162. visitor to select several choices if you use a choices field To insert a Select List field follow these steps 1 Place a Select List field s onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 170 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 191 Working with HTML Forms Select List Field Descriptive Mame Field 1 Field Name Field Tool Tip Text Field 1 List Custom ltem List ltem Value fi Text Value 1 Add Change Check tem to be selected by default Move Up Move Down Remove T First item is not a valid selection For example Select i Fields on the Select List Field Dialog Fie a Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 199 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 192 Working with HTML Forms SS Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 List Custom You create your own set of choices Use the Item and Item List fiel
163. web config file s ek_EditControlwin key See Also Seiting the Editor for Ektron CMS400 NET Users on page 482 Your choices are eWebEditPro and eWebEdit400 See Also Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Editors on page 481 Avatar An image or icon to represent you on the Web site Type in a web path to image For example http www example com smileyface gif TE JE Posted Tuesday 0 oined 3 7 20 This is a test repl John Edit Technical Editor Ektron Inc Address The address used to find your location when a user is performing a search based on location Latitude The latitude used to find your location when a user is performing a search based on location Google maps provides a service that takes the address of user and returns its latitude and longitude Note You don t need to use Google s automatic retrieval of latitude and longitude Instead you can enter the values manually Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 474 Updating Your User Profile Fed Powerit Longitude The longitude used to find your location when a user is performing a search based on location Google maps provides a service that takes the address of content and returns its latitude and longitude Note You don t need to use Google s automatic retrieval of latitude and longitude Instead you can enter the values manually Forum Signature Adds a signature to your posts in the forum You do not see the signatu
164. you split a cell each cell occupies one half the size of the original cell Row before split a E Row after split Ca To split a table cell into two cells follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell that you want to split Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 766 Working with Table Cells 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table 4 Click Split Cell from the menu Insert Table Add Row Add Column Insert Row Insert Column Insert Cell Delete Rows Delete Columns Delete Cells Split Cell Tahle Pranertie 5 Two cells now appear where only one appeared before Merging Two Cells You can merge two cells into one If you merge two cells the new cell contains all of the information from both The new cell s width equals the sum of the two cells that were merged Cells Before Merge Cs Cell After Merge an To merge two or more cells follow these steps 1 Select the cells that you want to merge Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 767 Working with Table Cells 2 Click the Insert Table button E 3 Click Merge Cells from the menu Word Wrap Word Wrap is a text formatting feature of tables It causes text to move down to the next line when the width of the characters on a line equals the column width For example if you set column width to 50 with word wrap turned on a table looks like this If you turn Word Wrap off for the same table
165. you view as HTML The settings are ignored when you view the page in WYSIWYG mode and when the user views the page 3 To return to normal view click the View as WYSIWYG button E or right click the mouse and click View WYSIWYG Editing a Section of a Page If you want to edit only a section of the HTML on your Web page follow these steps Select the portion of your Web page that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Edit Source from the menu The HTML code appears Edit the HTML code as desired Click OK Ce Se YS Inserting Source If you want to insert HTML source code into your Web page follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 782 Working with HTML 1 Place the cursor at the spot on the page where you want to insert the HTML Right click the mouse 3 Click Insert Source from the menu The Insert Source dialog box appears Paste or type your HTML code 5 Click OK Cleaning Source Code eWebEditPro XML lets you clean the HTML source code for your Web page You would typically use this feature after entering HTML text or pasting HTML code into eWebEditPro XML from another application The Clean Source option removes unnecessary HTML tags ensures that all tags begin and end properly and maximizes the page for efficiency As a result the page should be error free and load more quickly in a browser Also the appearance of clean HTML is more consistent wh
166. you want to edit Click Edit in Context from the menu e O N gt The content opens within the page as shown below At ektron Medical we focus on assisting o people with some of the most complex ci i y bat i conditions Some examples are hemophilia a CE cancer immune disorders and kidney disease p gt f We do this by applying our expertise m medical devices pharmaceuticals and biotechnology to make a meaningful difference in patients lives With the latest technologies in medical ie science we are able to provide solutions that make a difference in people s lives Our projects have been very successful with Ektron s new project management starter application 5 Use the following table to help you edit and save the content Toolbar Description For more information see button menu option Save changes and submit content to the approval Approving Declining Content on chain page 90 Note Unlike other edit options the check in button is not available Undo checkout discard your edits and close the editor Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 5S Editing HTML Content Toolbar Description For more information see button menu option Spell check Checking Spelling on page 500 Add remove a hypertext link Using Hyperlinks on page 524 m if Insert library item Adding a Library File to Content on page 150 J Cut selected text Cut on page 48
167. 00 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 569 Working with Table Cells Effect of Spanning a Cell When you set a cell to span rows or columns eWebEdit400 does not remove the cells that are in the way Instead it moves those cells across or down to the next available position For example the following table has two rows and two columns If you set cell A to span two rows note that cell C moves across to make room for cell A This action pushes cell D to the next column Aligning Text Within a Cell Within a cell you can specify how your text aligns horizontally and vertically You have nine choices for specifying the horizontal and vertical alignment of a cell illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 570 Working with Table Cells To set cell alignment follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Set Cell Properties The Cell Properties dialog appears oe a hy Ss Click the down arrow to the right of Content Alignment j H Cell Properties Content Alignment Bi Dimensions 6 Click your alignment choice 7 Click Update Splitting a Cell You can divide a cell into two If you split a cell each cell occupies one half the size of the original cell Row before split Cs Row after split Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 571 Working with Table Cells Ca To split a t
168. 00 NET folder then select Edit Properties from the dropdown menu When you begin to edit the document its status changes to Checked Out 0 When you make your changes and save it is Approved See Also e Adding a Content Summary on page 76 e Adding or Editing Metadata on page 80 e Managing Tasks on page 293 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 68 eEktron CMS400 NET Administrator manual chapter Web Alert Feature Web Alert Feature on page 1063 Edit Using a Mapped Network Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 247 Using the Document Management System You can edit an Office document directly from a mapped network folder To do that follow these steps 1 Set up a mapped network folder as described in Setting up a Mapped Network Drive on page 242 2 Use Windows Explorer to open the folder NOTE If any Windows folder has more than 1500 files Windows Explorer may time out while trying to open it To remedy this problem divide your files in that folder into several child folders 3 Open a document using Office make changes and save it You can also delete and move documents using the mapped network folder The document is now in checked into Ektron CMS400 NET and can appear on your Web site when approved Also a history of every saved version is retained so you can restore previous ones if necessary You cannot enter or change Ektron CMS400 NE
169. 000emo index asp id 8 Plastic Molder 123 CMS4000Demo hr asp id 13 RC Cheetah l CMS4000Demo products asp id 5 RC Redstar CMS400Demo products asp id 7 New Content Block CMS4000Demo index asp id 17 Contact Ektron CMS4000Demo index asp id 15 Here is an example of links when using a template named index asp In this case all pages have the same information Surrounding the content Title ID URL Link Home Page Content 1 CMS4000Demo index asp id Support Page 3 CMS400Demo index asp 7id Plastic Molder 123 13 CMS400Demo index asp id RC Cheetah 5 CMS4000Demo index asp id RC Redstar Fi CMS4000Demo index asp id New Content Block 17 fCMS400Demo index asp id 1 Contact Ektron 15 CMS400Demo index asp id 15 NOTE lf a collection item is a form ekfrm is used instead of id to denote form block To toggle between a default template and Quicklinks follow these steps 1 Access the Edit Collection screen for the collection you want to edit 2 Modify the Template field 3 Click the Save J button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 426 Working with Collections Assigning Content to the Collection After a collection is created your next step is to assign content to it To do so follow these steps NOTE When viewing a Collection on the Web site the last published version of content appears If the content has never been published nothing appears 1 Access the collections screen for t
170. 10 digits It would appear if the user entered for example S061882 By default the error message matches the selected validation criterion Use this field to customize the text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 601 Working with HTML Forms G Custom See Custom Validation on page 605 Validation Validation Options No validation Cannot be blank Allow Maximum of 1000 characters Minimum of 8 characters with at least one digit Non negative whole number or blank Non negative whole number required NOTE Your Web developer can customize validation options For details see the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer s Guide section Customizing Validation However the file that maintains custom validation is different for HTML forms it is siteroot workarea ContentDesigner ValidateSpace xml NOTE If you want to change the visual indicator that a field s response is invalid see the following Ektron CMS400 NET KB article http dev ektron com kb_article aspx id 7070 Characteristics of Valid Response Used with Used with text field calendar Response is not checked Response is required The format of the response is not checked Response cannot
171. 12 pz Engine Run Time 15 min full tank Pofill Tirnea 17 core Without XSLT Content RC Redstar The RC Redstar is a radio controlled gas powered low wing aircraft This nev beginners intermediates that are looking for a easy plane to learn with or to Redstar is easy to fly and easy to maintain Low Wing 57 in lin 7 8 lbs 60 70 cc 1 15 min full t Standard White highly refined gasoline Standard Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 116 Searching the Workarea Searching the Workarea You can search any folder to quickly locate content within Ektron CMS400 NET The following sections explains how to use the content search through the following subtopics e Accessing the Search Content Folder Screen on page 117 e The Search Published Tab on page 118 e The Advanced Search Tab on page 122 e Result Display Options on page 130 e Information on the Advanced Search Results Screen on page 131 Accessing the Search Content Folder Screen To access the Search Content Folder screen follow these steps 1 Navigate to the folder from which you want to begin the search NOTE To search your entire site start with the top level Root folder If you want to limit the search to a folder and its subfolders select it then choose search criteria 2 Click Action gt Search 3 The Search Content Folder screen appears Search Content Folder Search Published Advanced Search Basic Searc
172. 17 Adding a Collection To add a new collection follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content folder in which you want to create the collection 2 If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support features select the language See Also Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 433 3 Click New gt Collection NOTE If you access the collection via the Collections folder you cannot choose the collection s folder It is automatically placed in the root folder 4 The Add Collection screen appears Add Collection Titles O Template cm5400Demo S Leave the above template empty if you wish to use the Quicklinks Include Subfolders CL Approval is required Quickdeploy This Collection 5 Complete the screen using the following table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 424 Working with Collections Field Description Assign a unique title to the collection Template Enter the default template for the collection This template is used to display the content of the links generated if no template is assigned in the custom function If left blank the links use their respective Quicklinks See Also Default Template vs Quicklinks on page 425 Add a more detailed description for the collection Include Subfolders Check if you want to add to the collection content in subfolders of the content folder Approval is Required See the Ektron CMS400 NET
173. 1_1004849152_1033_ 1_onicestorm If you find that exdavroot folders clutter up your My Network Places folder you can delete them Deleting exdaavroot folders has no impact on your ability to use Ektron CMS400 NET Editing an Office Document There are two ways to edit an Office document if you are using the Internet Explorer browser and Office is installed on your computer e Edit in Microsoft Office on page 246 e Edit Using a Mapped Network Folder on page 247 NOTE Firefox users should download the Office document to their computer edit it using Office then drag and drop the asset back into CMS400 NET Edit in Microsoft Office Prerequisites e Your computer has MS Office e The Internet Explorer browser You cannot use Firefox Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 246 Using the Document Management System To use this option click the document from the Ektron CMS400 NET folder and select Edit in Microsoft Office from the dropdown menu rat BPG CMS Personnel Y 4 view in Microsoft Office Hi gh View Properties Save As Edit Properties z3 Check Out and Save As 4 Delete The document opens within Office Make your changes and save it When you do the revised version is saved to Ektron CMS400 NET NOTE If you want to edit the document s Summary Metadata Schedule Comment Task or Taxonomy category information click the asset from the Ektron CMS4
174. 4 Change any of the field values For documentation of the fields see Complete the screen using the following table on page 424 Deleting a Collection When you no longer want a collection you can delete it To delete a collection follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 418 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 421 Click the Delete button 7 A confirmation message appears 5 Click OK to proceed Working with Collections in a Multi Language system NOTE In a multi language Ektron CMS400 NET system you can create a language specific edition of each collection For example prior to the 4 7 Release the RC International sample site s products page had a collection in the default application language English unless you change it From 4 7 on you can create an edition of a collection in every enabled language When a visitor to your site selects a language then navigates to a page with a collection Ektron CMS400 NET displays the collection in the selected language if available If not Ektron CMS400 NET displays nothing Note the contrast between the collections and content if a collection is not available in the selected language nothing appears But if content is not available in the selected lan
175. 400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 ix Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Using Ektron CMS400 NET to manage Web content is easy once you know the basics of setting up and maintaining your site This documentation explains how to maintain an Ektron CMS400 NET site from a user s point of view By reading this documentation you will gain an understanding of how Ektron CMS400 NET works This section introduces basic concepts that you should understand when beginning to work with Ektron CMS400 NET through the following subtopics e What is a Content Block on page 1 e Control Menu Options on page 4 e Types of Content on page 8 e Workflow in Ektron CMS400 NET on page 9 e Editing Content on page 10 e The Lifecycle of Content on page 11 What is a Content Block A Web site consists of several pages Each page is made up of one or more blocks of content For example the home page from one of Ektron CMS400 NET s sample sites is below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 1 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Home gt News Deliver world class quality products and services Customer experience that exceeds expectations and differentiates our company in the marketplace To be the preferred global standard for Web Content Management gt Company Directory of Services You can wo
176. 489 paste from Word toolbar button 487 paste plain text toolbar button 487 paste toolbar button 487 print toolbar button 488 redo toolbar button 488 remove hyperlink toolbar button 488 replace toolbar button 488 replacing text 495 search 495 considering case of search term 498 direction 497 whole word match 498 select all toolbar button 487 spell check toolbar button 488 spelling 500 strikethrough toolbar button 489 style class toolbar button 489 subscript toolbar button 489 superscript toolbar button 489 table add row above toolbar button 491 add row below toolbar button 491 iil adding columns 543 adding rows 543 alignment 548 background color 550 553 background color deleting 552 background image 555 background image deleting 556 border color 558 border size 559 cell properties toolbar button 492 columns specifying 542 creating 535 delete cell toolbar button 492 delete column toolbar button 492 delete row toolbar button 491 deleting 541 543 insert column left toolbar button 491 insert column right toolbar button 491 insert toolbar button 491 inserting within a table 541 merge cell horizontally toolbar button 492 merge cell vertically toolbar button 492 properties toolbar button 492 rows specifying 542 section 508 576 abbreviation 579 categories 579 table caption 578 table summary 578 show hide border toolbar button 492 span rows and columns 568 split cell tooloar button 492 width setting by percentag
177. 54 quicklinks adding to content 155 viewing 155 search results include images 130 142 text only 131 142 searching 138 license keys viewing 647 650 lifecycle content block 11 line WebImageFX command 711 link check button 66 link search button 63 links broken finding 63 ListSummary compared with collection and menu 435 lock table or image in position 647 log in 12 log out 14 button floating toolbar 5 managed files 255 creating 257 editing 258 importing one 258 manuals online accessing 478 mapped network folder adding Office documents 241 drag and drop assets 244 editing Office document 247 language restrictions 241 removing 245 setting up 242 viewing files 245 marked for deletion content vii menus accessing 439 add new content block via naviga tion link 454 adding new via content folder 441 via Menus module 446 adding to toolbar 653 appearance to content contributor 437 to site visitor 437 changing orientation 660 compared with collection and List Summary 435 creating 657 in any language 469 definition 437 deleting 464 editing 455 via content folder 455 via menus module 456 via navigation link 456 items adding content block as 449 external hyperlink as 451 library asset as 451 submenu 452 to submenu 453 via content folder 446 via modules folder 447 via navigation link on Web page 448 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 definition 439 deleting via content folder 465 via menus
178. 598 e Inserting a Choices Field on page 611 e Inserting a Calendar Field on page 615 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 596 Working with HTML Forms See Also Inserting or Editing Buttons on the Form on page 619 Inserting a Checkbox Field A Checkbox field is one character wide and accepts one of two possible values checked or unchecked For example Check if you are over 65 D To insert a checkbox field follow these steps 1 Place the cursor where you want the check box field to appear 2 Click the Checkbox field button F5 3 The following dialog appears Checkbox Field Descriptive Name Field Name Field1 Tool Tip Text Default value True checked False unchecked caption tr Fields on the Checkbox Dialog D a Descriptive Enter a descriptive name for this checkbox Name Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 597 Working with HTML Forms ES Field Name Enter a name for this checkbox This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Default If you want this field to be checked when the screen
179. 650 view published toolbar button 67 view staged toolbar button 67 ViewAllMenus 437 viewing HTML 781 W WeblmageFX assigning new name to image 696 choosing image 694 commands blur 700 brightness 701 choose color 702 choose font 703 contrast 705 copy 706 create new 06 crop 706 delete 707 dimensions 707 exit 708 exit without save 709 freehand 709 horizontal flip 710 image info 710 line 711 open 712 oval 713 paste as new image 714 pointer selection 714 polygon 715 rectangle 716 redo 717 rotate 718 save 18 save as 19 select 720 sharpen 720 text 721 twain acquire 723 twain source 723 undo 724 vertical flip 724 zoom in 724 zoom out 725 introduction 694 menu commands 696 saving image 696 specifying color depth 725 toolbar buttons 696 whole word match 669 width table setting by percentage 740 setting by pixels 742 width work page Customizing for user 475 wiki creating 785 overview 785 word wrap 768 work page size customizing for user 475 workarea accessing 16 button floating toolbar 6 definition 16 hiding left panel 23 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 toolbar buttons 64 add 64 add calendar event 64 add content block 64 add content folder 64 add library items 64 add task 64 approvals 64 approve 65 approve all 65 archived content 65 calendar 65 check in 65 collections 65 delete 65 delete content 66 delete folder 66 do not apply XSLT 66 edit 66 insert library item 66 li
180. 7 Copy selected text Copy on page 487 Paste text Paste on page 487 Eo Paste text from Word Paste from Word Cleaning Fonts amp Styles on page 487 Fa Paste plain text Paste Plain Text on page 487 Set Image Properties appears when you select Editing an Image s Properties on an image page 506 TECHNICAL NOTES System administrators can remove toolbar buttons by editing the c Program Files Ektron CMS400v7x workarea ContentDesigner configurations Inte rfaceEditInContext aspx file The content block server controls Suppresswrappertags property must be set tO false Edit Option The Web Site Edit option offers content authors full access to all editing functions Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 56 Editing HTML Content To access the Edit Content screen from a Web page follow these steps Sign in to the Web site Browse to the content you want to edit Click Edit from the menu The Edit Content in Folder screen appears One of two editors may appear See Also Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Editors on page 481 2 YS From here you can e edit content e create or edit a summary e specify metadata for the content e enter or update a comment e enter or update start and end dates e review and update Web Alert information To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual chapter Web Alert Feature e if manual aliasing is enabled
181. 93 My Workspace id Oe Sa A eh Ti Lal i k e OUN meee T ELETI Rosey gae st 1 ig rs 5 ar pt Maes Aa el m g f a eee of eT a a or ee ei at i z er Ti i fi ana H priri ls i falar WOT SE GEU Weanesday October 10 UU T A x My Friends iMy Workspace m I AIEEE PENER EAEAN ia ee S d Selected Avatar 1 Display piy First Name Last Name 5 Favorites il E 2 JE John Edit gt Colleagues Colleagues ie Pending Colleagues x ae Journal Si Message Board ae Messaging 2 Photos Managing Existing Colleagues To manage existing colleagues in the Workarea click My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Colleagues From the Colleagues link users can e view alist of colleagues see Viewing the Existing Colleagues List on page 395 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 394 My Workspace e invite non site user to join to the site and become a colleague see Inviting Non Site Users to Become Colleagues and Join the Site on page 395 e search for users see Searching for Ektron CMS400 NET Users and Members on page 396 e send a colleague request see Send a Colleague Request on page 401 e remove colleagues see Removing Colleagues on page 402 e choose whether a colleague is a Selected Colleague see Selected Colleagues on page 403 Viewing the Existing Colleagues List The Colleagues list provides a quick and easy way to view your colleague
182. CE AINE Sen Meen Title ID content Lanquar GO _RotatingIma About Us login asps7id 35 56 1033 About Us About Us Index flogin aspy 7id 276 296 1033 Blogs Home login aspsx7id 33 54 1033 Conditions Privacy login as wid 268 208 1033 3 Contact Infor Products products aspx id 76 g7 1033 a ektron Medice Products 4 Mm CQ Services Therapies 5 Developer a aii Ea Discussion Boarc Title ak C HTML multimedia test G Openoffice i POF Use this screen to identify the related content To do this Select a folder from the left frame Double click the related content item from the top right frame The item appears in the lower right frame When all items are in the lower right frame click the Save button lal directly below Select Metadata e fdefault metadata is defined for a specific data type you can click the Default button at the bottom of each field to restore it e Below each field is a Characters Left field which counts the number of metadata characters You cannot exceed the maximum 500 characters 5 Click the Save button 1 6 The View Content screen reappears The content is now in a checked out state to you For the changes to take effect on the Web site check in the content and submit it to the approval chain Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 87 Adding or Editing Metadata See Also Approving Declining Content on page 90 Entering Tithe and Keywords
183. Cell on page 755 e Setting a Cell s Border Color on page 756 e Specifying a Cell s Background Color on page 757 e Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 759 e Spanning Rows or Columns on page 761 e Aligning Text Within a Cell on page 763 e Splitting a Cell on page 766 e Merging Two Cells on page 767 e Word Wrap on page 768 e Setting Cell Padding and Spacing on page 769 HTML does not allow you to adjust the width of a cell s border You can also select several cells or a row of cells and change them as described above However you cannot select and change a column of cells Specifying the Width of a Cell As described in Specifying Table Width on page 739 there are several ways to set the width of a table Within a table you can also specify the width of an individual cell Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 753 Working with Table Cells When you set a cell width there is no guarantee that the cell will occupy that width when displayed in a browser This is because the cell is part of a column and changes to other cells in the column can affect the cell whose width you set Setting cell width only guarantees that the cell will not be ess than the width you specify lf you want to ensure that a cell s size does not change set all cells in a column to that width To specify a cell s width follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell whose width
184. Click the icon to pop up a library dialog and select an image See Also Copying Files to the Library on page 143 Free text field provides more than one line for entering text Unlike the single line text field you can use all editor toolbar buttons to modify text add images hyperlinks etc You can also right click the mouse to edit the field s source code Group box field icons A Group Box field lets the form designer group related fields together The following icons let you work with content in these fields When clicked displays a menu of options you can perform on the current group box mja Insert Above Sr Insert Below Du plicate howe U p owe E gt Petiove Expand or collapse the display of fields within a group box For example a screen has two groups of fields one about hardcover books and another about paperback books Since you are adding information about a hardcover book you collapse the paperback questions Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 266 Working with XML Smart Forms Add a row of the same group of fields For example you are entering information about a book s two authors After completing the first author s field you click the Add button FJ to insert a second row of fields Here you can enter the second author s information Note This button performs the same function as the Insert Below option on the menu shown above
185. Comments oa A subject can only be assigned to the blog in which it is created it cannot be used with other blogs With each new blog you need to create new subjects This gives you the flexibility to tailor unique subjects to each blog Adding Blog Subjects To add a blog subject follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 329 Blogs NOTE To add a blog subject from the Web site you must be logged in 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site open the menu for the blog click Properties 2 Click View gt Folder Properties 3 Click the Edit Properties button L 4 Click the Subjects tab then Add New Subject Add a Blog to folder Blog 5 A text box appears 6 Enter the subject NOTE Add as many subjects as you need by clicking Add New Subjects 7 Click Save 4 Editing Blog Subjects To edit a blog subject follow these steps NOTE To edit a blog subject from the Web site you must be logged in 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site open the menu for the blog click Properties 2 Click View gt Folder Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 330 6 Blogs Click the Edit Properties button L Click the Subjects tab Change the information in the text box for the subject you want to edit Click Save i NOTE You can edit several s
186. E Approvals View approval chain for folder or content See Also Approving Declining Content on page 90 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 64 Add Library Item In the library folder allows you to upload an image or file or add Workarea Toolbar Buttons Approve content that awaits your approval Approve Approve All In the approvals folder approves all content awaiting your approval with one click Archived Content If current content is being displayed switch to display archived content If archived content is being displayed switch to display current content See Also Setting Archive Options on page 72 Back Return to previous screen Calendar Lets you choose when content will go live See Also Working with Calendars on page 268 Cancel Cancels action you are performing without saving the information Check in Saves and checks in content you are working on See Also Approved Content on page ii Collection Accesses the collection area for content lets you create edit and delete collections See Also Working with Collections on page 417 Decline Declines an approval request submitted to you Clicking this button rejects changes and keeps the current version of content live on Web site You are prompted to enter a reason for the decline After you decline e The author who made the change is notified by email e The content is removed from the Approval
187. EGES Find O Search Entire text O selection Match whole words only 0K area You can use this dialog to simply find text or to find text then replace it with other text Each option is explained below Tip You can also use this dialog to delete text that appears repeatedly To do so follow the directions in Finding and Replacing Text on page 496 and enter nothing in the Replace With field See Also e Finding Text on page 496 e Finding and Replacing Text on page 496 e Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 496 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 495 Finding and Replacing Text Finding Text In the Find field type the text you want to find 2 Set dialog box options see Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 496 3 Click Find Next to find the next occurrence of the find text Finding and Replacing Text In the Find field type the text you want to find Click the Replace tab In the Replace With field type the text to replace the find text oN Fs 4 Set dialog box options see Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 496 9 If you want to replace all occurrences of the find text with the replace text click Replace All NOTE You can undo replacements one at a time using the Undo button replace only the highlighted term with the replace
188. ET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 786 Using Ektron CMS400 NET s Wiki Feature lt lt _ lt http 192 168 0 219 editorName J B Add Edit Wiki Link a EE New Content Related Content Folder 198 Wiki_Example Title Target Frame Parent Window _parent e Use the New Content tab to create a new content item into which you will add information later The new content item will appear when a site visitor clicks the link text If you want to place the new content item in the folder that contains the text you are editing do nothing To place new content in a different folder click Change and navigate to that folder NOTE Membership users do not have an option to assign a folder The new content is saved to the folder that contains the content to which the wiki is assigned You can also edit the Title and the Target Frame To learn about target frames see Changing the Destination Window on page 774 e Use the Related Content tab to link to an existing content item If you click this tab Ektron CMS400 NET uses the selected text to search the Web site All content with that text then appears on the screen Each content item s title appears followed by its summary Click the radio button next to the content you want to link to Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 787 Using Ektron CMS400 NET s Wiki Feature Add Edit Wiki Link Total 69 Fage 1 of 8
189. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 267 Working with Calendars Working with Calendars Calendars in Ektron CMS400 NET perform the same function as a paper calendar they keep one or more users informed about upcoming events They can be displayed to all visitors to your Web site and any authorized user can add events to a calendar Typical calendar events could include e company meeting e reserving a conference room for an interview e company holidays e deadlines These are only a few uses of calendar events Calendars are versatile and can easily meet all of your needs A sample calendar appears below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 268 Working with Calendars Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Ta E 4 al e 5 Edel 6 EJA 7 al 9 ALM Trade SIM Trade ALM Trade show irn show Ir show in Miami Mami Miami Ta 6 11 Ed Sl 12 Ga E 13 fal S 14 Ed Sl Company meeting Bal E is Ed Sl 19 Ed S 20 Gal S 21 Ed E The Calendar Feature is explained through the following topics e Understanding Calendars on page 270 e Accessing the View Calendar Screen on page 271 e Viewing a Calendar on page 276 e Tips on Viewing a Calendar on page 278 e Adding a Calendar Event on page 280 e Understanding Event Types on page 284 e Viewing a Calendar Event on page 287 e Editing Calendar Events on page 289 e Deleting Calendar Events on page 291 E
190. Farr arr tri mer FS ovra rt co oan mews asn Odes i ese Tih o rmo samt anl o sane F lt UI 4 You can edit the HTML using functions like Cut Copy Paste and Delete To access these functions right click the mouse 5 To return to normal view click the Design button circled below Adding Custom Tags to the Content s Source You can insert custom tags into your content The tags can be used to provide all kinds of functionality such as video object tag support JavaScript and css file support To insert custom tags edit the source of your content as explained in Viewing and Editing HTML on page 532 Then enter the custom tags Here is an example Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 533 Working with HTML Content Summary Comment Templates lt p gt cstrong gt Ektron CMS5400 NET Server Controls lt strong gt lt p gt lt p gt Developer productivity is a critical issue among Web teams Faced w budgets smaller teams and compressed schedules to roll out new Inter applications developers need every advantage tilted in their favor te strategies succeed lt p gt lt p gt EkEtron CHS400 NET delivers that advantage It now offers elght visu development components that enable developers to assemble Web sites ur in J2EE lt p gt kembed Pluginspage http www macromedia com go getflashplayer type Aallowscriptaccess always align middle name tangle height 18 w wmode t
191. ID Submitted Date Gender Age Education Annual Household E Y Submitted range Leve Income Income E 22 Member 12 6 2005 Male 22 25 High 40 000 60 000 L John 4 18 50 School GED 49 999 69 999 5 PM F 23 anonymous 12 6 2005 Female 31 40 Master s 70 000 100 000 4 22 58 Degree 79 999 149 000 PM a 24 Edit John 12 6 2005 Male 26 30 High 30 000 30 000 5 4 23 40 School GED 39 999 39 999 PM List of Submitted Values The List of Submitted Values format provides the same information as the Table of Values but is formatted vertically rather than horizontally See Also Table of Values on page 202 Sample List of Submitted Values Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 203 Working with HTML Forms General Demographic Survey Delete ID Submitted By Date Submitted Field d F 22 Member John 12 6 2005 4 18 50 PM Gender Age range Education Level Annual Income Household Income Marital Status Religious Other Religious Affiliation Race Mothers Education Level Fathers Education Level a 23 anonymous 12 6 2005 4 22 58 PM Gender Age range Education Level Annual Income Household Income Marital Status RPelininis Submitted Data as XML Yalue Male eee High School GE 40 000 49 9 60 000 69 9 Legally Separat Evangelical Chr African America High School GE Some College Female 31 40 Masters Degre 70 000 79 9 100 000 14 Mar
192. K Effect of Spanning a Cell When you set a cell to span rows or columns the editor does not remove the cells that are in the way Instead it moves those cells across or down to the next available position For example the following table has two rows and two columns If you set cell A to span two rows note that cell C moves across to make room for cell A This action pushes cell D to the next column Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 762 Working with Table Cells Aligning Text Within a Cell Within a cell you can specify how your text aligns horizontally and vertically Setting Horizontal Alignment In the Cell Properties dialog box you can specify the horizontal alignment of a cell You have set the alignment to left center or right or e left e center e right e justify the text is justified down both left and right edges Many books use this alignment style This alignment is not supported by all browsers This example illustrates these choices text right justified center justified ext left justified This text i both justify left and right justified To set horizontal justification of a table cell follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 763 a a YS 6 Working with Table Cells Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu Th
193. Language ID URL Link hore Into 10 Add items to the menu See Adding a Menu Item on page 446 If adding content you can only insert an item in the selected language 11 Later you can add more menu items edit them delete them view them etc Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 467 Working with Menus These capabilities are described in this chapter By Accessing the Menus Report Screen From the Workarea screen click Modules gt Menus Click the menu you want to translate The View Menu screen appears for the selected menu A Shy Z From the Add drop down list select the language into which you want to translate the menu Add select language PRIR BPR Ek be PE gpp select language Danish German standard 5 The Add Menu screen appears Complete the screen for the menu in the selected language See Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 442 Click the Save button 4 The View Menu screen reappears Now the View In drop down list displays the menu s new language Yie Menu Italian menu In talan standard Title Language ID URL Link hore Into 8 Add items to the menu See Adding a Menu Item on page 446 If adding content you can only insert an item in the selected language Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 468 Working with Menus Later you can add more menu items edit them delete them view them etc
194. MS Developer A Native WET Cont Last edited by Appli 12 2 2005 12 56 PR Hias 40C Net Sample Microsoft Word document CMS400 Replication 4 doc Last edited by Application Adr on 12 2 2005 12 36 PM Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 130 Searching the Workarea View Description option Text Display item s title in the left To the right display th COI i t a ie Search found 5 result s that matched your keyworag last edit date time i fi re ie P N LE E SEN TEN ESA ee E ee A EAE eae Nr eed real Sci Opermame Search Published Advanced Search size assets only Title Last Edi DMS rank assets only Avoid Cancer 3 9 200 ianeuaae Build Health Want To Prevent Or Cure Cancer 3 10 20 How to Spot A Bad Mole 1 5 200 statis The Met Cancer ink B an en Information on the Advanced Search Results Screen The following column headers describe the information displayed for all content items that satisfy the search criteria Column Description Header Content Title The title of the content item Last Edit Date The most recent date on which content was edited If it was never edited its creation date The folder that contains the content The size of the content item in kilobytes DMS Rank An indication of how well a content item page matches the search criteria using a range of 0 to 1000 The higher the rank the more relevant content is to the search criteria Ektro
195. MS400 Library For admin Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Ektron Inc gt Library 4 Books Calendar 9 CenturyMedi Contacts G Dynamic Con FAQ a G Form_Examp 9 IntranetBasi G Press_Relea 9 Purchase Or 8 Click the insert button 1 Making Form Results Available to Site Users When you create polls and surveys you can choose to display the results after a site visitors completes the form The results can display in the same window or a new window In addition you can choose how to chart the data For a description of chart types see Chart Types on page 590 To show site visitors poll survey results follow these steps 1 Go to the page on which you determine the form s response If this is a new form it is page 4 of the Forms Wizard To modify an existing form select the form s folder then the form Next select Edit and click the Post Back Message tab 2 Select Report on the form Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 588 Working with HTML Forms Edit Content in Folder Content English U 5 Display a message Redirect to a file or page Redirect form data to an action page ae e ame Window 3 Choose whether you want the results to appear in the Same Window or a New Window 4 Choose the style of the report Edit Content in Folder Content English l Display a message Re
196. My Workspace folder button Then click the Message Board link A list of comments and a dialog that allows you to add a comment appear Each comment contains the following information e Comment Text the message text that s been posted to the Message Board e Delete Link click this link to delete the comment from the Message Board Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 391 My Workspace Avatar an image representing the user who made the comment Display Name the display name of the user who made the comment Date Time The post date and time of the comment Add a Comment to Your Message Board in the Workarea To add a comment to your Message Board in the Workarea follow these steps a 4 Add Comment O l In the Workarea click My Workspace gt Message Board In the text box enter a comment Click the Add Comment button The comment appears in the list of comments Delete Comments on Your Message Board in the Workarea To delete a comment on your Message Board in the Workarea follow these steps 1 2 Click My Workspace gt Message Board Click the Delete link next to comment you want to remove Message Board zi Here is the first messagefor 10 10 2007 my Message Board Delete 10 48 10 AM Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 392 My Workspace 3 A dialog box asks if you are sure you want to delete the comment Click OK 5 The com
197. NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 292 Managing Tasks Managing Tasks A task is a request from one user to another to perform an action within Ektron CMS400 NET Examples of a tasks include e updating content e publishing content e updating an image e reordering a collection The Tasks folder displays all tasks that are either assigned to you or that you assigned to another user or user group You can also assign tasks to yourself A task may or may not be related to a specific piece of content If it is you Can access content then attach a task to it This kind of task is managed just like the other tasks but you can also view and update it via the attached content For more information see Viewing a Task on page 307 This chapter explains how to work with tasks through the following topics e Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 294 e Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 301 e Creating a Task from the Web Site on page 306 e Creating a Task via the Content Folder on page 306 NOTE Tasks can also be created automatically when forms are submitted See Also __ Assigning a Task to a Form on page 197 e Viewing a Task on page 307 e Editing a Task on page 312 e Adding Comments to Tasks on page 313 e Deleting a Task on page 316 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 293 Managing Tasks Viewing a Task s History on page 317 T
198. NING This content contains tags that Microsoft Word may not recognize Microgoth Word may corupt the content introduce invalid tags or may not display it at all Do you want to continue You can proceed and edit using Word or decide not to edit using Word Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 677 Inserting Images To insert a picture into the editor place the cursor where you want the image to appear and click the Insert Picture button l When you click the button one of the two Picture Properties dialog boxes illustrated below appears depending on how your Webmaster has set up your system The dialog boxes are very similar with the only difference being that the Select Server File button only appears on the second dialog box The Select Server File button appears if your upload mechanism is set to FTP It does not appear if the mechanism is HTTP For more information see the eWebEditPro XML Administrator Manual section Managing Image Selection gt Examples of Implementing Image Selection gt Selecting Files from the Server Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 678 Inserting Images Media File Selection Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 679 Inserting Images Media File Selection To Cancel File Selection Picture width Height Border Thickness fo Alignment Reset W Maintain 4epect Ratio Spacing
199. Pending Community Groups on page 407 e view and accept invitations for any groups you have been invited to join see Working with Community Group Invites on page 407 Viewing Your Community Groups You can see a list of community groups you belong to by navigating to My Workspace gt Community Groups gt My Groups in the Workarea From this area you can remove yourself from a community group Remove Yourself from a Community Group To remove yourself from a community group in the Workarea follow these steps 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Community Groups gt My Groups 2 Place a check in the box next to the group from which you want to be removed To remove yourself from all groups place a check in the Select All box IMPORTANT If you are the leader of a community group a check box does not appear next the title of the group You cannot remove yourself from community groups which you lead You must either select a new leader for the community group and then remove yourself or remove the community group from the system For the steps to select a new leader see the Administrator Manual section Community Groups gt Community Groups in the Workarea gt Managing Community Groups gt Edit a Community Group s Information 3 Click the Leave Group button U The screen refreshes and the group is removed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 406 My Wor
200. RMA CO Ye BOM AVA Fe Norrnal x 2 10 pt A B ZAAl g alli W fab fab e e EE Ta Select Button Place form elements here Checkbox Field Plain Text Field Hidden Field Password Textarea El E mi M i eS A Choices Field Select List Field 2 Done loading Calendar Field H Inserting Form Fields The final screen of the Forms setup lets you arrange the screen so that it collects exactly the information you want To create the screen you insert fields that prompt a site visitor to enter Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 171 HE Working with HIML Forms information Then add buttons that let the user submit the data on the screen If you chose a sample form at the beginning the screen includes fields If you did not the screen has only a Submit button NOTE In addition to inserting fields you can add explanatory text lines images etc onto the form screen If you want to place fields in columns insert a table and place the fields within table cells The table below explains each field type you can enter Inserts this kind of field Checkbox Hidden Text Field Text Field Description User s response is either checked or unchecked Information a site visitor doesn t need to know about Free text field user cannot format text A password field Same as Text Field except field scrolls vertically to accept more text Several choices appear
201. Remove Last Subject Sports Remove Music Remove Remove Education Remove 6 A confirmation box appears 7 Click OK if you want to remove the subject NOTE You can continue to remove subjects from the list by clicking the Remove link next to each subject 8 Click Save M Web Alerts Web Alerts notify users when a blog post is published This feature is explained in the Administrator Manual Section Web Alert Feature gt Assigning Web Alert Information to Folders and Content Smart Forms Use a Smart Form when you want to create structured blogging Structured blogging provides a form for the blogger to fill out instead of free form writing For example you create a blog for book reviews You want to make sure that when someone submits a review he provides the following information e Book title e Author e Date of review Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 333 Blogs e Review text For information on working with Smart Forms see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing Content Folders gt Smart Forms Unlike the Smart Forms you can assign to regular folders you cannot require the NOTE user to select a Smart Form when creating a new post It is only an option The Blog Roll The blog roll lets you add a list of Web site links to your blog page Think of this as a roll call of blog pages a list of blogs related to you or that you wan
202. S400 NET Editors Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Editors Ektron CMS400 NET has two choices for a main content editor depending on your computer s operating system Operating Possible editors System Windows e eWebEditPro XML e eWebEdit400 eWebEdit400 TECHNICAL NOTES eWebEdit400 does not require installation of an ActiveX control to each client computer But even if you choose eWebEdit400 if a user begins to create or edit an XML Smart Form configuration the client computer installs eWebEditPro XML Ektron CMS400 NET requires that editor to create XML Smart Forms Each editor s toolbar is illustrated below eWebEdit400 Toolbar Mi IN Apply CSS Cl Paragraph sit B J U 4 x X a Z E Mi Es a FE a ai a Y fx Sl de FO a fe ew Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 481 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Editors eWebEditPro XML Toolbar Templates BB A48 G oo Pee Aaaale E E Apply Style Normal BIU A rh T z o m PBR famele ible I HH III Wt gi u gi Iil ii ll NOTE Your choice of editors only affects the main HTML content editor It does not affect other screens which use eWebEdit400 such as the Task Description Setting the Editor for Ektron CMS400 NET Users Each Web server that hosts Ektron CMS400 NET has two editor options one for clients that run Windows and another for clients using Macintosh Your system administrator determines t
203. T document information Summary Metadata etc in the mapped network folder someone must use Ektron CMS400 NET to do that Status of Document Saved to Mapped Network Folder The status of a document saved to a mapped network folder depends on the approval chain and the user who signed in when the mapped network folder was created e lf you are the last approver or if there is no approval chain its status is Approved e lf there is an approval chain and you are not the last approver its status is Checked In Also if the contents folder requires metadata or a taxonomy category which has not been entered its status is Checked In I Deleting an Office Document NOTES You must have delete permissions for the folder that contains the document Permissions are explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual It is good practice to check for broken quicklinks before deleting documents See Checking for Broken Quicklinks on page 63 To delete an Office document follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 248 Using the Document Management System Navigate to the Workarea s Content folder Open the folder that contains the document Place the cursor over the document a TS a Hover the cursor over the triangle 4 on the right end of the document and click A dropdown menu appears 5 Click Delete 7 View Properties Save As z Edit in Microsoft Office a E
204. T User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 728 Introduction to Tables Inserting a Table within a Table You can insert a table within a table You might want to do this to arrange text in columns NOTE HTML does not let you use tabs or spaces to align text in columns You must use a table to align columns You can remove the table s border so that no lines appear between the columns and rows To insert a table within a table follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell into which you want to insert a table 2 Click the Insert Table button E3 3 Click Insert Table from the menu Insert Table Inzert Aor Insert Column Insert Cell Delete Rows Delete Columns Delete Cells Menge ells Split Cell Table Properties Cell Properties 4 The Insert Table dialog box appears 5 Edit the fields in the dialog box as needed Then click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 729 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus This section explains the menu options and dialog boxes you use to manipulate tables and cells In most cases you are referred to another section that describes the feature in more detail This section explains e The Insert Table Menu on page 730 e The Table Properties Dialog Box on page 732 e The Cell Properties Dialog Box on page 734 e The Table Context Sensitive Menu on page 735 The Insert Table Menu You access the Insert Table menu by
205. TE If you do not see Delete either you lack permission to delete the content or its status makes it ineligible for deleting 4 The following message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer o x This content will be deleted once the entire list of approvers has approved this request 2 re vou sure vou wish bo submit this content block to the approvers For deletion This action will also delete any library quicklinks associated with the content block Continue Cancel 5 Click OK to delete the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 62 Deleting Content Deleting Several Content Items in a Folder On the View Contents of Folder screen you can delete several Approved content items at once To do so follow these steps NOTE If you are working with an eCommerce catalog entry you can only delete it if it is not on an order nor checked out 1 Navigate to the folder that contains the Approved content you want to delete 2 Hover the cursor over the Delete menu f Delete 3 Select Content from the dropdown menu TH ahstract 1 4 Check boxes next to Approved content items you want to delete NOTE Check the box in the header cell to select all or deselect all 5 Click the Delete Content button Ly 6 A confirmation message appears 7 Click OK to continue Checking for Broken Quicklinks The Link Search button locates all content that includes a Quicklink to t
206. Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists The toolbar buttons and drop down lists on the default toolbar are explained below Five optional toolbars are also available To display one place the cursor on the standard toolbar right click the mouse and select it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 640 Toolbar Buttons Content Summary Metadata La RRMA Oa ys CEM AYA Ei Appl Style Normal Verdana 2 10 pt Eciit View 45 Ta al Special Characters Format nl A Native NET Content Manage Pras rh foma Improve Table ektron O O with dra Position Objects gt N for temp Text Direction C MS a nN ef e enn Miscellaneous denloym Form Elements Ektran CMSA MET ic a nanwerfiil SMI conmtant mz The optional toolbars are explained in these sections e Form Elements Toolbar on page 648 e Table Elements Toolbar on page 649 e Position Objects Options on page 647 e Text Direction Options on page 648 e Miscellaneous Toolbar on page 650 Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Remove selected text and graphics Place that data into temporary memory also known as the clipboard If you later cut or copy more information onto the clipboard the new information overwrites the original information Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 641 Toolbar Buttons For more information see
207. To change an image s size click the Resize button E When you do the following dialog appears Edit Image Resize Image Current File Size 35kK Width 295 Height 283 Keep Ratio CMS400 nel Change the image to the desired size then click Done Keeping the Aspect Ratio Aspect ratio is the relationship between an image s width and height For example if a graphic has an aspect ratio of 2 1 its width is twice as large as its height If you check the Keep Ratio box just specify a new width or height the other dimension is calculated for you Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 515 Working with Images Effect of Changing Image Size on the Image Properties Dialog The Width and Height settings on the Image Properties dialog shown below determine the area on a Web page in which the image Is displayed Image Properties Image Properties To display an image correctly its height and width on this dialog should match its actual size that you set using the Resize button Adjusting Brightness oie To adjust the image s brightness click the brightness button e When you do a brightness control appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 516 Working with Images Fdit Image Adjust Brightness 4 4 4 4 CMS400 net The red dot indicates the current brightness level e To brighten the image place your cursor to the left of the red dot an
208. Types of Assets on page 225 Viewing Managed Files in a Mapped Network Drive If you want to view individual managed files within a mapped network drive folder follow this procedure 1 Open the site root web config file 2 Goto this line lt remove verb GET HEAD POST path gt 3 Remove the comment characters in red above 4 Inthe following lines insert beginning and ending comment characters as shown in red below lt l add verb GET POST path doc type Ektron ASM EkHttpDavHandler EkDavHttpHandlerFactory gt lt add verb GET POST path docx type Ektron ASM EkHttpDavHandler EkDavHttpHandlerFactory gt lt add verb GET POST path xls type Ektron ASM EkHttpDavHandler EkDavHttpHandlerFactory gt lt add verb GET POST path xlsx type Ektron ASM EkHttpDavHandler EkDavHttpHandlerFactory gt lt add verb GET POST path ppt type Ektron ASM EkHttpDavHandler EkDavHttpHandlerFactory gt lt add verb GET POST path pptx type Ektron ASM EkHttpDavHandler EkDavHttpHandlerFactory gt lt add verb GET POST path vsd type Ektron ASM EkHttpDavHandler EkDavHttpHandlerFactory gt lt add verb GET POST path vsdx type Ektron ASM EkHttpDavHandler EkDavHttpHandlerFactory gt lt Enable the line below and remove all office specific mappings above for Server 2003 with private assets and enable remove verb command gt 5 Go to this line lt ad
209. User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 488 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Insert symbols and special characters Insert Symbol Check content for adherence to XTMHL Ektron CMS400 Net and accessibility standards Administrator Manual gt Validating with eWebEdit400 Validate r Apply CSS Class Display a list of style sheet classes pone zz Users can select from the list to apply a Apply C55 Cl class to selected text The list can change depending on the selected text Your Webmasier determines which styles are available Display a list of paragraph styles Users can select from the list to apply a style to selected text The list can change depending on the selected text Paragraph Style Normal Your Webmaster determines which styles are available B Bold Ctrl B Make selected text bold i Ctrl I Make selected text italic Italic U Ctrl U Make selected text underlined Underscore Apply strikethrough to selected text For Strikethrough example Here s semetexdt Make selected text appear smaller and above text line X Superscript below text line Change the relative font size Your Webmaster determines which relative font sizes are available Relative Font Size 2 7 X3 Subscript oo Make selected text appear smaller and Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 489 Toolbar Buttons Equi
210. Versions of Content There are two versions of this procedure You may need to consult your system administrator to determine the correct procedure for you If the Ektron And your CMS400 NET client is server is 32 bit 32 bit The View Content Difference Screen on page 101 64 bit 32 bit The View Content Difference Feature on page 103 Note This procedure was the only one prior to 7 5 2 It downloads an ActiveX control to your computer 64 bit 64 bit The View Content Difference feature is not available The View Content Difference Screen NOTE Use this procedure if both your computer and the Ektron CMS400 NET server are 32 bit The View Content Difference screen highlights changes to selected content Below is an example of the View Content Difference screen showing the default tab Difference Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 101 Comparing Versions of Content Difference ERP RCE At ektron Medical _ we focus on assisting iconic a OED _ immune disorders and kidney disease We do this by applying ou EORR ETEN harmaceuticals and biotechnology to make a in patients Ives latest technologies in medical solution a Difference Both versions content that only appears in the version on the This Content tab is high lighted in yellow content that only appears in the currently published version is red unchanged content is black Last Currently publi
211. Vertical to add space around the picture You enter a number of pixels to determine spacing value Mave DIU Pup Vertical Spacing Til aA lon Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 512 Working with Images The following graphic illustrates the effect of adding spacing to a picture This image has no vertical or horizontal space BS Ba This image has 20 pzels of vertical space no horizontal space This image has 20 prels of horizontal space no vertical space BS aS This image has 20 pzels of vertical space and 20 preels of horizontal space Editing an Image You can perform the following tasks on any image inserted into eWebEdit400 content e crop e resize e rotate e adjust brightness To access the image editing tool edit a piece of eWebEdit400 content right click an image then click Image Modification Tool Developer produ Ektron ae NET eke that ee When you do the following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 513 Working with Images Edit I x mage E 4 F J i i 1 rr sy ee PEE PENT mE P e cor rea i amp Ms400 net TECHNICAL NOTE When you save edits to an image a version is placed inthe site root uploaded images CMS folder folder The version is named filename nextnumber file extension For example if a library image is named ektronlogo png and someone inserts it into content and saves it a new versi
212. Windows folder title for each docu structure ment You can check in or submit document for approval Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 232 New gt Multiple DMS Documents from View Contents of Folders screen Drag and drop into CMS400 NET from View Contents of Folders screen Advantages Can upload several files at once so it s faster than New DMS Document option More efficient when same summary metadata sched ule etc apply to many documents You can check in or submit document for approval Can upload several files at once so it s faster than New DMS Document option Can drag drop folder structure CMS400 NET rec reates it in Workarea More efficient when same summary metadata sched ule etc apply to many documents Using the Document Management System Disadvantages Document title taken from Windows file name Requires Internet Explorer and MS Office Content is in checked in status submitting it for pub lishing is a separate step Document title taken from Windows file name Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 For more information see Adding Documents Using the Multiple DMS Documents Option on page 236 Adding Documents Using Drag and Drop on page 238 233 Drag and drop into a mapped network folder Advantages User doesn t need to install or learn CMS software Can drag drop folder
213. a background image to a cell Your Webmaster determines which images are available To insert an image into a cell follow these steps Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu a i Move the cursor to the Background Image field of the Cell Properties dialog box Custom Background Background Color if Unassigned Background Image Select Image E 5 Click the down arrow to the right of Select Image A list of background images appears 6 Click the image of your choice 7 Click OK Note that when you apply a background image to a cell e Ifthe cell is larger than the image the image repeats until it fills the cell Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 759 Working with Table Cells e lf the cell is smaller than the image the top left corner of the image appears in the top left corner of the cell The rest of the image fills as much of the cell as possible e Make sure the image does not obscure a user s ability to read the cell text if any exists Deleting a Background Image Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu 2 NY amp Select the value in the Background Image field and press lt Backspace gt Using the Color Box Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the question mark in the top rig
214. a start date for the task The start date appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by start date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user Due Date Using the calendar button choose the date by which the task needs to be completed The due date appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by due date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 298 Managing Tasks SS Description Add additional information to describe the task The description appears on the View Task screen circled below View Task OOS Task Title testing self assignment Assigned To jedit Assigned By jedit Priority High Status Completed Due Date 23 Jun 2004 Start Date 11 Jun 2004 Description testing self assignment Comments Date Time Added By Comments 4 Click the Save button E If email notification
215. able s Format Basic colors EE EHHH Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Assigning Border Size You can also adjust the size of a table border Size is measured in pixels one pixel 15 pixel table border table border To assign a border size to your table enter a number of pixels into the Border Size field on the Insert Table dialog box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 751 Manipulating Your Table s Format Border Size If you set a table s border size to zero 0 but wish to view the table s boundary lines while you are editing it select the table and click the border button H Boundary lines will appear while you are editing but disappear when a user views the page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 752 Working with Table Cells NOTE Along with functions for managing tables described in Introduction to Tables on page 726 and Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 737 eWebEditPro XML also lets you perform actions on individual cells within a table You can perform the following actions on individual table cells e Specifying the Width of a Cell on page 753 e Inserting a Cell on page 754 e Deleting a
216. able cell into two cells follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell that you want to split 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Split Cell from the menu a5 Insert Row Above a Insert Row Below Delete Row ta Insert Column to the Left i Insert Column to the Right TP Delete Column T Merge Cells Horizontally Merge Cells Vertically Fl Neletes Call 4 Two cells now appear where only one appeared before Merging Two Cells You can merge two cells into one If you merge two cells the new cell contains all of the information from both The new cell s width or height equals the sum of the two cells that were merged Cells Before Merge Cs Cell After Merge Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 572 Working with Table Cells The above example shows a horizontal merge You can also merge cells vertically To merge two or more cells follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the left or upper cell 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Merge Cells Horizontally or Merge Cells Vertically Word Wrap Word Wrap is a text formatting feature of cells It causes text to move down to the next line when the width of the characters on a line equals the column width For example if you set column width to 50 with word wrap turned on a table looks like this If you turn Word Wrap off for the same table you get this result If Word Wrap is turned off text stays on one line until
217. ace Edit Content in Folder Workspace Title em English U S Add to Quicklinks table Content Searchable Content ae Sea Se TARSAR Be Apply Style Nena BZ UAA A L FR EFS R eller eens marnm 5 Add a title and content See Adding HTML Content on page 48 for an explanation of the buttons and tabs in this window Click the Publish button E to publish the content The page refreshes and the HTML content appears in the file list Documents Eei Be lee aLa a a a a a aa a e Lee Laa Workspace Documents 3 No subcategory exists J My Test Content Here is another example of test content sample d this is a sample content block under the documents folde Wh Server Control Review d Below is a list of server controls waiting for review Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 379 My Workspace Moving and Copying Content in My Workspace gt gt Documents You can change the folder where assets and HI ML content are stored in My Workspace gt gt Documents by moving the content from one folder to another In addition to moving files you can copy files to another folder To accomplish either of these actions follow these steps 1 In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Documents 2 Select the folder from which to move or copy the content 3 Click the triangle to the right of the content title circled
218. ach is explained below Editing Content from a Web Page There are two options for editing content from a Web page illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 53 Editing HTML Content Feit In Context E E al CLA Edit m z de y UB view History ig le TT Delete e hj e h e Add Task eG zlu IF rar Dranartiac This table compares the editing options a Edit in Context Option Edit Option How editor is displayed Within the page you are viewing What you can update Content only Content plus all editor tabs Summary Metadata etc Types of content available HTML only e HTML e HTML forms e XML Smart Forms What you can do after Submit Publish only Check in or Submit Publish editing Available from Web Site Content Menu Web Site Content Menu and Web Site Server Control Menu See Also Working with Content from your Web Site on page 2 Edit in Context on page 54 Edit Option on page 56 Edit in Context The Web Site Edit in Context option offers content authors quick access and editing within a page But it has a limited set of editing Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 54 Editing HTML Content functions listed below See Also Editing Content from a Web Page on page 53 To Edit in Context from a Web page follow these steps Prerequisite You must have permission to edit the content Sign in to a Web site Browse to the content
219. acter after the word Fixing Spelling Errors There are two ways to fix a spelling error indicated by a wavy red line e Click the misspelled word and then right click A menu displays words that are similar to the misspelled word Click the correct word e If you know the correct spelling type the correction Checking Spelling Upon Demand If you do not want to use the spell check as you type feature you can begin spell checking whenever you wish To do this click the spell check button 2 When you do the system checks each word in the file If the spell check finds a word in none of the dictionaries it displays the Spelling dialog box Spelling x Mot in Dichornary O leal O leal E All Suggestions Change Change all Change all Cancel e Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 671 Checking Spelling The Spelling Dialog Box The Spelling dialog box displays e the word not in the dictionary in the Not in Dictionary field e suggested spellings for the word in the Suggestions field The most likely replacement is selected at the top of the list e buttons that let you ignore the word change the word or exit If you want to Do this Replace the word with one of the suggestions and continue Click the suggested word spell checking the page _ Click Change Replace every occurrence of the word with one of the Click the suggested word Suggestions and continue spell checking t
220. ad files to the server To insert a picture from your computer follow these steps Click the Browse button 2 Navigate to the file that you want to insert and press Open to insert it Your Webmaster can set a maximum size in kilobytes for images If you select an image that exceeds the maximum an error message appears and you cannot insert it Your Webmaster can also restrict the type of image file you can insert For example if your Webmaster does not authorize you to insert bitmap bmp files and you try to do so an error message lists valid file extensions and you cannot insert the image Microsoft Internet Explorer AN You have not selected a file with one of the valid extensions gif iog prng ped it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 683 Inserting Images 3 Click in the Enter a description for the file field Enter a title to describe the file 4 After you insert the picture the title appears in the dialog box s top left corner to identify the picture to you and all users connected to the same Web server NOTE The title is also the ait text for the image The alt text appears in place of the image on the Web page if the image itself cannot display for any reason 5 Information about the picture s file size width and height appears in the upper right corner of the dialog box 6 If you want to view a picture before inserting it click Preview on the right side of the dialog box
221. ag Can be used to render non visual media such as speech or Braille For more information see http msdn microsoft com library default asp url workshop author dhtml reference properties abbr asp Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 799 Section 508 Compliance SS Categories Sets or retrieves a comma delimited list of conceptual categories associated with that tag Can be used to render non visual media such as speech or Braille For more information see hittp msdn microsoft com workshop author dhtml reference properties axis asp Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 800 Inserting Comments within Content While editing Ektron CMS400 NET content you can insert comments to the content Comments might be an author s note to himself or other authors about the content For example you could insert a comment explaining why you are using a certain style class Comments are only visible during editing they do not appear when the content is published on your Web site 2 Headquarters 5 Northern Blyd Bldg 6 Amherst WH 03031 USA Tel 1 603 594 0249 Fax 1 603 594 0258 Sari onte S Ektron CMS Comments Microsoft Internet Explorer Uuropear Comments Times Hew Roman 3 12 pt bi A Ja H Ji BEng A Wedia Co Torn Please review the text to verify accuracy Gl Bill Partners wl E j Done loading B pz pz E Internet f Ektron CMS400 NET Us
222. age Redirect to a file or page Redirect form data to an action page Report on the form HEr Ga i a a E E E A fia Apply CSS Cl Paragrapt Fad gt 5 5 to a Y Ex a aaga HA I n AE Place post back message here When you click that button a dialog like the one below appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 585 Working with HTML Forms Merge Field x General Select a field to insert iy b survey_id gt on Age range Age range ol Education_Level Education Level Annual_Income Annual Income oR Household Income Household Income Le Marital Status Marital Status i ee All form fields appear on the list In addition the list includes the following fields which can retrieve form information into the postback message e Form title e Form description e Date submitted Redirect to an Action Page and Forwarding Form Data The following section of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual explains how your administrator sets up the action page Working with HTML Forms gt Redirecting Submitted Form Data After your administrator follows that procedure he identifies a folder and hyperlink that you use to select an action page WARNING You must have the folder and hyperlink name from your administrator to complete this procedure To redirect submitted form data to an action page follow these steps 1 G
223. age 6 Add any additional information to the message 7 Click the Send button _ 8 The message is sent Moving to the Next or Previous Message Users in the Workarea can navigate through their messages by clicking the Next or Previous button i ah located in the header of a message Clicking the Next button a opens the next i i Pm newest message in the list Clicking the Previous link Be opens the next oldest message in the list Once you have reached the end of the list that option s link is unavailable For example when Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 388 My Workspace a user reaches the newest message in the list the Next link is greyed out 4 4 and cannot be clicked Print a Message in the Workarea To print a message follow these steps 1 oo ao ol SS Delete a Message In the Workarea click My Workspace or expand the Messaging folder on the Smart Desktop Select either Inbox or Sent Items Find the message you want to print and click the subject Click the Print button C The Print dialog box appears Select a printer Click the Print button Deleting a message permanently deletes it from Ektron CMS400 NET To delete a message follow these steps 1 In the Workarea click My Workspace or expand the Messaging folder on the Smart Desktop Select either Inbox or Sent Items Find the message you want to delete and click the subject or Find
224. age From icestorm Save If you import a file of the same name but a different extension into the folder the new file s name has the next available number appended to it For example mypicture 2 Adding Documents Using the DMS Document Option To add a new Office document to Ektron CMS400 NET via the New gt DMS Document menu option follow these steps From the Workarea select the Content tab 2 Select the folder in which you want to place the document See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 28 3 The default language icon appears next to the screen title To create a document for a different language click View gt Language and select the language Click New gt DMS Document 5 The following screen appears Root Tile nals 0 5 9 Add to Quicklinks table Content Searchable Content Templates Please select a file to upload fs Browse Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 235 Using the Document Management System 6 Click the Browse button and browse to the file you want to import Click OK 7 Enter a Title NOTE If you want to retain the original document name insert the full filename into the Title field For example you could enter mydocument doc 8 Use the Content Searchable checkbox to determine if the content should be searchable See Also Content Searchable on page 46 9 If desired add a summary metadata a schedule and comments Se
225. al Version 7 6 Revision 5 312 Managing Tasks e Task Type e Status State e Due Date e Start Date e Description To edit a task perform the following steps 1 Access the View Task page for the task as described in Viewing a Task from the Tasks Folder on page 307 NOTE You cannot edit a task after viewing it from the Content folder 2 Click the Edit button LY 3 The Edit Task screen appears 4 Edit the task 5 Click the Update button E to save the changes Adding Comments to Tasks You can add comments to an assigned task if you want to provide additional information about its status For example if you update a task s status from n progress to Waiting on Someone Else you can use a comment to describe the status change such as left voice mail with John with questions about his changes to the home page Comments appear at the bottom of the View Tasks screen illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 313 Managing Tasks Phi bbe IERIE kL RII de REI ER ee Re Re Re RR RR Re RR Re Task Title Make sure to review your approval list Assigned To a admin Assigned By jedit Priority High Status Not Started Due Date 11 Jun 2004 Start Date 10 Jun 2004 Description Remember to view your approval list every day and approve any content blocks on the list Comments Date Time 4dded By 10 Jun OO4 10 47 Sh Be sure to check
226. al chain Invokes the editor From here the approver can change the content Edit CF For demonstration purposes we ll choose Approve Second Approver After the content is approved the next approver in the approval chain receives an email saying that the content is ready for approval Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 97 Approving Declining Content Request for content approval File Edt View Tools Message Help Oa Reply Reply Al Forward Pri Delete Previous Next Addresses From Webmaster your company com Date Friday May 03 2002 4 19 PM To EditorInChiehi your domain com Subject Request for content aporoval The content Red Sox Win World Series has been submitted tor your approval by Sports Writer To locate the content the folder path in your workarea 1s Sports The following lnk will take you to the submutted content block on the Web site htte 192 168 0 156 CMS200Samplelindex asp 7id 17 Please Note You must logn and select the preview icon to wiew the changes The content was submitted for approval on 03 May 2002 4 16 19 PM Approvals SportsEditor EditorInChief Comment f EditorInChief logs in to Ektron CMS400 NET and accesses his Workarea The Workarea has an Approval folder with the content awaiting his approval EditorInChief navigates through the Approval folder until he finds the content Red Sox win World Series From th
227. al chain this is replaced by a SUBMIT button If you click Publish but the content item has an incomplete task assigned to another user the content cannot be published Instead the following error message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer E This content has been submitted Buk waiting For completion of associated tasks The publishing process will not proceed until the task has been completed The user to whom the task is assigned must complete it before you can publish the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 92 Approving Declining Content Decline Reject changes and keep current version of content live on Web site You are prompted to enter a comment that provides a reason for the decline The author who made the change is notified by email of the decline The content inserted by the last editor remains in the file If you do not want it to remain choose the Edit option Check out content and change it if desired Toggle between published and submitted versions of content This can Published help you compare versions See Also Staged Content on page ix Staged View Diff View differences between the version awaiting approval and the published content See Also Comparing Versions of Content on page 101 Return to previous screen Approve Decline Several Content Items To approve several submitted content items without reviewing them follow these steps 1 Select the submitte
228. al size set using the resize button See Also Resizing the Image on page 515 Height The height of the picture in pixels See Also Pixels on page 509 Constrain The constrain feature lets you determine if an image s height and width can be adjusted independently Typically you want Constrain on as shown below In this state if one dimension is adjusted the other is automatically adjusted in proportion to it For example if you change the height from 100 to 200 the width is also doubled To turn Constrain off click it When you do it looks like this When Constrain is off the adjusted picture can be disproportionate as shown below AKON MIN WARNING If you substantially adjust the picture s height and or width the picture may be distorted when users view your Web page Pixels A pixel is a single point in a graphic image Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 509 Working with Images Computer monitors display pictures by dividing the screen into thousands of pixels arranged in rows and columns The pixels are so close together that they appear connected Below is an image shown at regular size and then enlarged so you can see the pixels that make up the picture regular size enlarged to show pixels Setting a Border To add a border around a picture enter the border s thickness in pixels in the Border Width field on the Image Properties dialog See Also P
229. alendar screen may contain the following toolbar buttons that let you perform other tasks View Show calendar in the Workarea Viewing a Calendar on Ea Calendar page 276 Back Return to previous screen Viewing a Calendar NOTE This section explains how to view a calendar and enter calendar events from the Workarea Once a calendar is available on your Web site you can also perform these actions by logging in and navigating to the calendar on your site To view a calendar follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar screen for the calendar you want to see as described in Accessing the View Calendar Screen on page 271 2 Click the View Calendar 31 button 3 The calendar appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 276 Working with Calendars Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Bal S 4 Bal E 5 EJA 6 Ed E 7 ALM Trade ALIM Trade SIT Trade show in show in show in Miani Paro Miani yl E 11 Ed E 12 E E 13 Fal S 14 Ed El J Company meeting al E 18 E E 19 Fa S 20 Ed S 21 E E lk 1 See Also Tips on Viewing a Calendar on page 278 4 lf you want to view events of a certain type only click the Select Event Type to View drop down list illustrated below Then choose an event type See Also Undersianding Event Types on page 284 Show All Company Holiday Trade Show Company Event The page is refreshed and the calendar displays events of t
230. also want to decentralize the update process so that non technical users from any department can make changes Further organizations want oversight over those changes to ensure the accuracy of the information that the content adheres to corporate guidelines etc Ektron CMS400 NET manages the lifecycle of content from creation through approval and publication It helps your organization set up a process for overseeing changes to a Web site indicate contents status within that lifecycle and inform the next approver that it is their turn to review the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 9 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Editing Content Finding Content Much of your work involves editing existing content or creating new content Ektron CMS400 NET provides three methods for finding content to be updated You can use whichever method is easiest e Navigate through your Web site to the content you want to edit e Find the content through the Workarea which resembles Windows Explorer and helps you find content by navigating through a folder tree See A so gt The Workarea and Smart Desktop on page 16 e Use the Search button 4 which appears on many screens When clicked a screen prompts you to enter keywords and then finds content containing the keywords The Editing Process After you find content click the Edit button 4 or menu option to open it in an editor Below is an example of con
231. among the choices Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 285 Working with Calendars 4 Finish your edits For documentation of See Start Time Click the clock icon 9 to display a clock From it select a start time End Time Click the clock icon E to display a clock From it select an ending time for the event Display the times for the event Check this box if you want the calendar to display the event s start and end times illustrated below Ooa E company meeting Location montreal room Start 1 00 PM jEnd 2 00 PM T The time also appears on the event detail if this box is checked Company meeting Friday April 01 2005 Location Montreal Room Start 1 00 PM End 2 00 PM l Hyperlink You can link a Web page to this calendar event The Web page could contain more information about the event directions to it etc If you insert a hyperlink when this event appears on the calendar the reader can click the event to jump to that page To enter any page on the internet enter its Web address For example www example com To link to content on your Web site click the library button K This type of link is known as a Quicklink The Quicklinks dialog appears and you can navigate to the content The last published version of linked content appears If content has never been published nothing appears If you select a hyperlink
232. an Item to a Submenu From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus Select the menu 3 Find the submenu to which you want to add items Submenus have a folder icon amp next to them English US ViA SO MIEWW IPI Therapies L AntiBody Therapy E Hemophilia Therapy 9 Renal Therapies 4 Move the cursor over the submenu and click Add from the popup menu View Menu Therapie D AntiBody Therapy L Hemophilia Therapy B ili 9 Renal Therapies Reorder L Edit English U S ad i Delete NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 5 The Add New ltem screen opens displaying items you can add 6 Refer to the table below for selecting a menu item and follow the steps to add it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 453 Working with Menus Assign this type of content to For details see the menu Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 449 Any library asset images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu Item on page 451 External hyperlink Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 451 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 452 Adding New Content to a Menu via Navigation Link on
233. an a 33 Delete M nu ccccccececeecececeeeeeececeeeeeecusesaeeeeususeueeeususaueeeeeusaseesens 34 NU Bt EG aise esters cade scence otesecuantecaasaecunaoneiweas 35 Workarea Content M nu 2 csccsceeceececeeceeceececeeceececeeeaseeseeeeees 35 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 i Adding a Subfoldefr seeneacecaceanscrivcneecnsnsnseanrcenseuiquineneesounesean 40 Deleting a Folder nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn e 40 Viewing Content See ener re eee eee ne nee eee eae eee 40 Viewing Content from a Web Page cssssssesssesseeseeeseeeees 41 Expanding the Content Area cccsssseesssesseesesssseeseenseeseoees 47 Adding HTML Content siiscccsassanseaccsiscnniacasenienaeensnincsinuveanss 48 Editing HTML Content sssssnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 52 Deleting Content ccccesecceseeeseeeeseeensesenseecnsesensesenseees 60 Workarea Toolbar Buttons ssceeseeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeees 64 Scheduling Content to Begin and End seeee 68 Seiling a Stari DY ee 69 Setting an End Date on Content cccccseeeseeeeeeeseeseeeneeeeeeenees 71 Setting Archive Options cccccsssseeeceesseeeseesseeseenseeseeeseeeses 72 Adding a Content Summary ccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeees 76 Automatic Creation Of a Summary cccsesseeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeees 77 Creating a Summary for New Content
234. anaging Tasks ic Displays these tasks Active All whose state is Active Awaiting Data All whose state is Awaiting Data On Hold All whose state is On Hold All whose state is Pending All whose state is Reopened Completed All whose state is Completed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 Action you can perform from view screen Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Change to the following state Archive Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column 310 Managing Tasks Sorting Tasks By Task Type On every View Task page you can sort tasks by the Task Type assigned to the task You sort by Task Type using the Show Task Type drop down box It is located in the upper right corner of the Workarea Note Task Types only appear in the Show Task Type dropdown box when they have _ been added to a task Senn Sm Not Specified Not Specified am
235. and above text line Strikethrough x Superscript Subscript Make selected text appear smaller and below text line Begin the line on which the cursor rests or all selected lines with a bullet Bullet Increase or decrease the current line s distance from the left margin al Begin the line on which the cursor rests Number with a number If the line above this line is not numbered assign this line 1 numbered assign a number one more than the line above Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 646 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Align paragraph so that it is arranged e evenly on the left side uneven on Left Center and Right the right Justify in the center of each line e evenly on the right side uneven on the left evenly on right and left side Display a dialog box that shows your version of eWebEditPro XML and your license keys About eWebEditPro XML Position Objects Options These buttons let you absolutely position elements pictures tables etc anywhere on a page WARNING Some older browsers for example Netscape 4 do not display absolutely positioned elements Absolute position uses the style attribute If you use this feature the content is not compatible with all browsers T Position Lets you move selected table or image anywhere on the screen Locks selecte
236. and columns in the table Table width The table s alignment across the Web page The background color of the table A background image for the table Whether or not to use the default color gray for table borders If you do not use the default the color of the table border The size of the table border The space in pixels between the cell text and a cell s border The space in pixels between a cell and surrounding cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus For more information see Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns on page 737 Specifying Table Width on page 739 Setting Horizontal Alignment on page 763 Specifying a Table s Background Color on page 746 Specifying a Background Image for a Table on page 48 Assigning Border Color on page 749 Assigning Border Size on page 751 Assigning Cell Padding on page 769 Assigning Cell Spacing on page 770 733 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus The Cell Properties Dialog Box The Cell Properties dialog box lets you manipulate most elements of a cell s appearance Cell Properties Span Rows Spanned Columns Spanned Cancel Borders M Use Default Color f Not Specified Border Color C Percent i Word Wrap C Pixels Horizontal Alignment Vertical Alignment Custom Backgrou
237. and CMS100 Your system administrator can add custom search fields that only appear if a user is logged in For more information seethe Metadata section of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 124 Searching the Workarea Specifying the Kind of Content to Search Near the top of the screen check boxes let you determine the kinds of content to search M Content MW Forms M Assets M Include Archived NOTE Assets only appears if your organization has implemented Ektron s Document Management feature Content HTML content blogs entries and XML Smart Form field values Assets Content that is neither HTML nor XML such as Office documents and managed files See Also Using the Document Management System on page 224 Include Archived Content forms and assets that have been archived See Also Setting Archive Options on page 72 Specifying a Search Word or Phrase In the Search Text field enter one or more words that you want to find within content forms and assets The search returns content that includes these words Entering text here is optional That is you can use fields on the lower portion of the screen to find content without entering words contained in the content For example you can find every piece of HTML content that was modified by a certain user within the last 30 days If you check off HTML and Form content you can enter
238. and Save As Submit 6 You are asked to confirm the deletion Press OK 7 The asset enters its approval chain Like publishing deleted content must go through the approval chain before it is removed If you are the last approver in the approval chain the content is deleted immediately See Also Approving Declining Content on page 90 Asset Workflow An asset proceeds through the same workflow as any other type of content A diagram is below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 260 Using the Document Management System Check in Edit Approval Chain Publish to Web site See Also IHH e Approving Assets on page 261 e Adding Assets to Collections and Menus on page 261 Approving Assets Assets are placed into the approval chain like other types of content For more information see Approving Declining Content on page 90 Adding Assets to Collections and Menus You can add an asset to a collection or menu as you would any other type of content For more information see Working with Collections on page 417 and Working with Menus on page 437 Asset Reports Ektron CMS400 NET provides several reports that track assets by status Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 261 Using the Document Management System Report Displays assets in this status For more information see CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt
239. and its CMS400 NET information Summary Metadata History etc Can also be used to replace file Save copy of managed file to your computer Saving an Office Document on page 251 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 256 Using the Document Management System Description For more information see Note These sections describe working with Office documents Everything works the same with managed files Check Out Change a managed file s status to checked out Checking Out Saving and Replacing an Office Document on page 250 Edit Overwrite a managed file in CMS400 NET witha Checking Out Saving and version on your computer Replacing an Office Document on The file name can be different but its tyoe must page 250 match the file being edited A file s type appears after you click Edit on the Edit Content in Folder screen circled below Edit Content in Folder Root Title Al ign Center Content Sched Currently uploaded file Align Centef gif Please select a file to upload and Save As and save a copy to your computer Check In Change a checked out managed file s status to checked in Useful if you checked out and saved a managed file then it became lost or corrupted This option lets you change its status back to checked in Submit Submit managed file into approval chain Asset Workflow on page 260 Publish Delete Delete managed file deleted file cannot be Delet
240. and that occurred before you pressed Undo select Selects an area of an image You can then perform actions on the area such as blur and delete t crop Removes everything outside of selected area of an image Redo on page 717 Select on page 720 Crop on page 706 Deletes selected area of an image Delete on page 707 View Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description Button reset zoom ratio Displays image at full size For more information see Reset Zoom Ratio on page 717 Ca zoom in Increases an image s magnification Zoom In on page 724 a zoom out Decreases an image s magnification Zoom Out on page 25 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 698 Editing Images Image Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button information see image info Displays information about an image dimensions Modifies an image s width and height color depth Changes the number of colors available to an image e eee Sharpens edges within an image Sharpen on page 720 brightness Changes an image s brightness Brightness on page 01 Image Info on page 10 Dimensions on page 707 Color Depth on page 04 Blur on page 700 contrast Changes the difference between Contrast on page 705 light and dark areas of an image dh horizontal flip Reverses an image horizontally left
241. and the currently published Content on page 101 version of content ite View History Open View History screen where you Viewing and Restoring can view previous versions of content Previous Content on page 111 Workarea Open Workarea From here you can The Workarea and Smart perform all Ektron CMS400 NET Desktop on page 16 tasks Hiding and Showing the Content Border IMPORTANT TECHNICAL NOTE When changing the border to hidden the Add and Edit buttons for menus are also hidden This displays the page as it appears when you are not logged in For information on menus see Working with Menus on page 437 You can hide the border that may surround content when you are logged into Ektron CMS400 NET This lets you view the page as it appears when not logged in When the border is hidden and you hover over a content area there is no indication that it is CMS400 content However you can still right click to access the menu Information about whether a border is hidden is stored in a cookie on a user s system This preserves the information between sessions Hiding the Border Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 To hide the content border right click a content block while logged in Next select Hide Borders The page refreshes and no border appears This image shows the content with a border and menu Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Our Company Vision Deliver world c
242. and types without leaving the Add Task screen Administrators can also add and edit Task Categories and Task Types from the Workarea by clicking Settings gt Configurations gt Task Types See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Adding a Task Category and Task Type To add a Task Category and a Task Type follow these steps 1 Goto the Add Task screen as described in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 295 2 Click the Add link next to the Task Type dropdown box E jedit Select User or Group English U S v Select Normal Not Speched Task Type NotSpeciied Edit l l 3 The Add Task Type screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 301 Managing Tasks Add Task Type Task Type Task Type Description Add Task Type to New Task Category C Not Available From this screen you can perform the following e Add a task type to an existing task category e Create a new task category e Add anew task type e Add a task type description e Define task type availability NOTE As auser if you set the Task type to Not Available you cannot edit the Task Type after that To make the Task Type available see your administrator Task Type availability is explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Categories and Types gt View Categorization Sc
243. appear on a Web page You create a Summary when creating or editing content Then your Web site developer can create Web pages that display just the title and summary to attract readers to the full story A good example is a news Web site which lists titles and summaries of top stories illustrated below TOP STORIES Ektron Named a Rising Star 08 15 2003 August 15 2003 Amherst New Hampshire USA iccieom Ine id SididOweneoie sia elo Come Sie management and authoring has been named a Rising Star as part of the prestigious New England Technology Fast 50 Program Ektron Launches International Distribution Program 08 08 2003 August 8 2003 Amherst New Hampshire USA Ektron Ine y an INAO Cor shel yoan Web content authoring and management with over 350 000 users today announced the Toun h or ses aioe Gucioveye kOe Ik Celigse cll cea Program Like content summaries can include images as well as different font styles and sizes This chapter explains how to create summaries and how they can help navigation on your site Your system administrator determines how and where to display summaries on your site See Also Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 76 Adding a Content Summary e Automatic Creation of a Summary on page 77 e Creating a Summary for New Content on page 77 e Creating a Summary for Existing Content on page 78 e Editing a Summary on page 79 Automat
244. appear to visitors or view it in regular view Button Description Appearance j lewd Preview Content appears as last edited The advantage of this mode is SS Mode that you can see a Web page as it will appear when published to your site Continue editing until you are satisfied with its appearance In Preview mode click the Preview button to switch to regular mode Regular View The most recently published version of content appears preview In this mode colored borders surround content when you move the cursor over it In regular view click the Preview button to switch to preview mode Toggling Site Preview To toggle site preview on and off follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 14 Logging In and Out 1 Navigate to a page that includes the login logout button 2 Click the Preview button preview 3 The Web site is now in preview mode I LATEST NEWS preview help A E SOME WORDS ABOUT US Fo heli y 4s a global leader ektron Site Language 9 logout S workarea fedicafl strives to improve lives in its local and global communities particularly with regard to increasing access to high quality healthcare for underserved populations It ts a commitment to the lang term sustainable well being of the communities in which employees live and work Ektron Rated Posi Ektron Inc an int Web content man software today a
245. arayetaniesne ne a oa HHI el offic Lions File Edit View Favorites Tool Address C Documents and Setting Folders Name Nee R Desk amp 2 Thumbs db Drag and drop documents below pen Pi lion2 jpg a Wn ion jpg Jntain lion jpg I mountain_lions_sc62 jp http icestorm CMS5400Developer jf Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 239 Using the Document Management System If any asset being uploaded is not supported an error message appears An error occurred copying some or all of the selected files However all supported files are uploaded See Also Supported Types of Assets on page 225 TECHNICAL NOTE If your Web site uses an https secure site setting you may see errors after dragging an dropping assets If this occurs open your site s web config file and change the value of the add key ek_UseSSL setting to true 11 If Ektron CMS400 NET requires you to apply metadata or a taxonomy category to the content the following screen appears NOTE Your system administrator creates the metadata screen The image below is only an example of what it might look like Metadata category title Default current character count 0 2000 max description Default current character count 0 2000 max 12 Required metadata field labels are red and have an asterisk as title does above Complete all required metadata See Also Adding or
246. ask Module Toolbar on page 318 Creating a Task via the Task Folder This topic consists of the following subtopics Accessing the Tasks Folder on page 294 Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 295 Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 301 Accessing the Tasks Folder To access the Tasks folder follow these steps 1 Access your Smart Desktop as explained in Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 17 The Smart Desktop folders appear in the top left frame D Smart Desktop BE Tasks 4 Reports Click the Tasks folder The following subfolders appear Assigned To Me tasks assigned to you Assigned By Me tasks you assigned to someone else Created By Me tasks you created Assigned To User search for tasks assigned to a user Not Started tasks whose state is set to not started Active tasks whose state is set to Active Awaiting Data tasks whose state is set to Awaiting Data On Hold tasks whose state is set to On Hold Pending tasks whose state is set to Pending Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 294 Managing Tasks e Reopened tasks whose state is set to Reopened e Complete tasks whose state is set to Complete You can click any folder to view only tasks in that category Also the View Tasks screen appears in the right frame listing all tasks assigned to you or assigned by you 1 x View Tasks Assigned By and To John Edit rot oO F
247. ation Label Label for the calendar s location information This label appears on the calendar when a location is assigned to a calendar event Pu Su YYTE LI Ta El 1 E E Company meeting Location New York conf room Start 12 00 PM End 1 00 PM Start Time Label Label for the calendar s start time This appears on the calendar when a start time is assigned to a calendar event End Time Label Label for the calendar s end time data This appears on the calendar when an end time is assigned to a calendar event Table Properties Display Weekends A green check means the calendar displays every day of the week A red X means the calendar displays weekdays only Forward Only If a green check appears next to Show only events that fall after the viewing day and the user viewing the calendar is not logged in the calendar only displays events from the viewing date forward No past events appear A logged in user can view past calendar events Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 274 Working with Calendars SS Event Type Label Indicates if event types are assigned to this calendar See Also Understanding Event Types on page 284 One section of the Add Calendar Events screen displays available event types and lets the user assign them to the event Event Type Available Selected Company Holiday gt Mo Event Types Trade Show Title Company Event By default thi
248. aximum of 1000 characters Site visitors entry cannot exceed 1000 characters If you assign to this field any value other than No validation the field is surrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Error Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s response to this field Message does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is Cannot be blank the error message could be Please enter a response By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 186 Working with HTML Forms Inserting a Choices Field Use a Choices field when you want the site visitor to select from a predetermined list of choices You can allow the site visitor to select only one or more than one choice You can also determine the list of choices and the appearance of the list To insert a choices field follow these steps 1 Place a choices field 2 onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 170 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 187 Choices Field Descrip
249. bar To move a menu to a different toolbar location follow these steps 1 Creating a New 1 Place the cursor on the double vertical bars that indicate the SE ME E amp beginning of the menu Click the mouse Hold down the mouse button and drag the menu to the new location You can move the menu anywhere else on the toolbar Note that your Webmaster can define a menu so that it cannot reside on the same row with another menu If you move such a menu it will not remain on a row with another menu Instead it will move down to the next row After you place the menu where you want it release the mouse button Menu Place the cursor on the toolbar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 657 Customizing Your Toolbar 2 Right click the mouse 3 A dropdown list appears Click Customize 4 The Toolbar Customization dialog box appears oolbar Customization Paragraph Format Format Special Characters Form Elements Table Position Objects C Text Direction 5 Click New Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 658 Customizing Your Toolbar 6 Anew menu appears on the left side of the window above the existing menus The default name of the new menu is Custom 0 Toolbars Comm Toolbars git 7 To rename the menu place the cursor in the field that displays the new menu and enter the new name NOTE If you click outside the toolbar name field
250. below Documents Workspace Documents 3 No subcategory exists My Test Content Here is another example of test content sample this is a sample content block under the documents WH Server Control Review Below is a list of server controls waiting for review 4 From the drop down list select Copy Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 380 My Workspace Documents Workspace Documents 1 No subcategory exists jsample EA this is a sample content block under Delete 5 Navigate to the my Workspace gt Documents folder into which you want to copy the content 6 Click the Manage link NOTE The Manage link only appears after you copy a document but have not pasted it Documents Documents 3 2 Requirements 1 ig Manage 7 Click the Move Items or Copy button ea Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 381 My Workspace 8 Adialog box appears asking you to confirm the move or copy action 9 Click OK 10 The page refreshes and the moved or copied content appears in the folder Sharing Content in My Workspace gt gt Documents The Documents area of My Workspace allows you to add and edit content you want share with your colleagues You can share content with the Public Colleagues Selected Colleagues or keep the content private You apply sharing options to folders not to individual content To
251. below If you want the destination page to appear Click this in the Target Frame field In a new browser window on top of the current browser Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 522 If you want the destination page to appear In the same position within the browser window The new window replaces the current one If your page contains frames in the frame that contains the frame with the hyperlink If your page contains frames in the full display area replacing the frames Using Bookmarks Click this in the Target Frame field Same Window Note this is the default Parent Window Browser Window Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 523 Using Hyperlinks Use hyperlinks to let a user jump from any word or phrase to another Web page The page can be within your network that is on an intranet or anywhere on the internet NOTE If you want to create jumps within a content block see Using Bookmarks on page 520 For example if your Web page should include a link to the Ektron Web site you would enter the text to indicate the jump for example Ektron Web Site then create a hyperlink to www ektron com When users see Ektron Web Site in a different color they can click the text to jump to the site Although most jumps go to the top of another Web page you can also jump to a bookmark within a Web page This section explains e Creating a Hyperlink
252. ble Cells 4 Click Set Table Properties 5 The Table Properties dialog appears 6 Click the Accessibility tab Table Wizard ee eee gt Accessibility F Table Design Heading rows Max 5 Heading columns Max 3 Caption alignment El Caption Summary Associate cells with headers e Accessibility Dialog on page 577 e Setting Abbreviation and Category Attributes on page 578 Accessibility Dialog The fields on the tab are described below e Heading If you want your table to have a horizontal header enter the number Rows of rows that it should occupy The number cannot exceed five Beginning with the top all cells in the specified number of rows are designated as table headers Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 577 Working with Table Cells ESS Heading If you want your table to have a header enter the number of columns Columns that it should occupy The number cannot exceed three Beginning with the left column all cells in the specified number of columns are designated as table headers Caption To choose the caption s alignment click the down arrow next to this Alignment field as shown below Heading rows lo Heading columns 0 OO O O aption alignment p Caption Click the box that represents the alignment style you want Caption If desired enter a table caption The caption appears above the table The caption s alignment is set in
253. ble click the word underlined Then click the underline button U to underline the word Create a Hyperlink e ww NN Type You can also easily add hyperlinks Double click the word hyperlinks so that it becomes selected Click the Hyperlink button i The hyperlink dialog box appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 636 Creating a Simple Web Page Hyperfink gt Hyperlink Information Type http Link http Bookmark Text content Target Frame 0 Cancel i Quick Link select link Mi 5 In the Link field after http enter www ektron com 6 Click OK Notice that the word hyperlink now appears in a different color When you save this Web page and a user views it if the user clicks hyperlink a new Web page will display Ektron s home page NOTE If your computer has an internet connection you can double click the hyperlink to test it Applying a Bullet to a Line of Text Press lt Enter gt to move the cursor down to the next line Type You can begin a line with bullets 2 3 Click the bullet button i 4 Notice that the line is indented and now begins with a bullet e You can begin a line with bullets Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 637 Creating a Simple Web Page Changing the Size of Text Press lt Enter gt to move the cursor down to the next line Type Finally you can change the font
254. box is not charted However the fact that a user chose Other is charted Creating a Form s Content Here is an example of form content that you can create Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 591 Working with HTML Forms Request for White Paper Please fill out the form below If you have any questions please e mail white paperdektron cam required fields First Name Po Website Email Phone State Province a t Country Comments 2 Request White Paper Note that some fields are required and some provide a dropdown list of choices You can learn how to create such a form by following the directions below The following topics explain how to create a form e The Form Toolbar Options on page 593 e Form Validation on page 596 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 592 Working with HTML Forms The Form Toolbar Options Creating form content is similar to creating standard content See Adding HTML Content on page 75 The big difference is a form toolbar illustrated below which lets you insert form elements MH abl c iy Ge ca When using the form toolbar place the cursor where you want field Then click the appropriate toolbar button Adding a Field to the Screen The final screen of the Forms setup lets you arrange a form that collects exactly the information you want To create the form insert fields that prompt a site
255. button B However some of eWebEditPro XML s features are more complex For example when creating a table you must make several decisions the number of rows and columns the size of the border the spacing between cells etc The following sections explain eWebEditPro XML s more advanced features Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 664 Copying from Other Applications You can copy information from most other Windows applications into eWebEditPro XML and retain the formatting from the original application In general copying from another application involves these steps Sign on to the application in which the information resides Select the information to be copied Press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt Go to eWebEditPro XML Press lt Cirl gt lt V gt to paste the selected information oR OD Note that you can only copy content not background information that generates content So for example you can copy the values in a spreadsheet but not the formulas used to generate those values Also copying dynamic fields from Microsoft WORD would retrieve the current value of the fields but not the variables that generate those values Its a good idea to experiment with copying from different sources to test the results Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 665 Finding and Replacing Text To find and optionally replace text on your Web page click the Replace button i amp When you do the Find and Re
256. can approve or decline all content submitted to you from the approval folder Edit Ektron CMS400 NET can automatically send email notification informing users that content workflow events have either taken place or are requested of them For example a content contributor receives an email that his content has been published to the Web site The list of automatic emails and directions for customizing their content are described in the Setup manual section Customizing Ektron CMS400 NET email The following topics guide you through the approval or decline of this content e Approve Decline One Content Item on page 92 e Approve Decline Several Content Items on page 93 e Example of an Approval Chain on page 94 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 91 Approving Declining Content Approve Decline One Content Item 1 Click the Smart Desktop button circled in red below len eet Menle Click Reports 3 Click Approvals Click the content you want to approve or decline To select all displayed content click Select All at the top of the screen All Clear All Title W Contact Ektron Wo Cumnart Pane 5 The content appears You can view the content summary metadata etc A toolbar at the top of the screen lists tasks you can perform on the content Bal Publish Accept changes to the content and publish it to the site Note If there is another approver in the content s approv
257. ce in which they appear initially e whether or not you are authorized to customize your toolbar If you are not authorized your edits are not saved when you leave the eWebEditPro XML screen lf you are authorized to customize your toolbar there are several ways to do so e Removing Or Adding Menus on page 653 e Removing or Adding Menu Items on page 654 e Restoring Toolbars on page 657 e Rearranging the Menus on a Toolbar on page 657 e Creating a New Menu on page 657 e Moving a Menu Off the Toolbar on page 659 e Changing the Menu s Orientation on page 660 Each procedure is explained below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 652 Customizing Your Toolbar Removing Or Adding Menus To remove or add a menu follow these steps Place the cursor on the toolbar Right click the mouse A dropdown list appears It displays all menus available to you and the Customize option iv Edit vv View As ve Paragraph Format eS Format ve Special Characters Form Elements Table Position Objects Text Direction Customize NOTE If Customize does not appear on the menu you are not authorized to customize the toolbar Menus that are checked appear on your toolbar In the above example the Special Characters View As Format and Paragraph Format menus appear The Table Position Objects and Text Directions menus which are not checked are available but do not currently appear on t
258. ck in content Only appears Ei to user who checked content out Force Check In Only appears if user is a member of the Administrator group and content is checked out Allows the admin to check in content even though he is not the one who checked it out Request Check In Allows any user to send an email to the user who checked out content The email asks the check out user to check in the content Save as Save copy of file to your Saving an Office Document on computer page 251 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 V Appendix A Content Statuses M Description For more information see Edit or Edit in Office Check out content to change it e Editing HTML Content on Only available to user who page 52 checked content out e Editing a Managed File on page 258 e Editing an Office Docu ment on page 246 Edit Properties Edit content s summary metadata schedule comment etc View View in View all information about Viewing Content from the Office or View content Workarea on page 41 Properties Submitted Content A yellow border shows that a user submitted the content into the approval chain The border remains yellow until the content is published or declined While the content is in the approval chain no user can check it out Products Support LY L lays Content management systems from Eki Ektron is a recognized international leader in Web con
259. ck the category lf you select a folder from the left frame the right frame displays content in that folder If you select content from the list information about it fills the right frame e The top left frame displays the folder tree for the Smart Desktop folder which has three subfolders Tasks See Managing Tasks on page 293 Content Reports see Content Reports in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Community Messaging see Messaging on page 383 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 19 The Workarea and Smart Desktop e The bottom left frame displays the top level folders in Ektron CMS400 NET Your display may be different depending on whether you are an administrator Content folder see Working with Folders and Content on page 28 My Workspace on page 370 Library Folder on page 134 Modules see Membership Users and Groups and Business Rules sections of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Settings folder which includes Updating Your User Profile on page 470 and Accessing Online Help on page 478 Navigating Within the Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET s top level folders appear in the lower left corner of the Smart Desktop Use them to access all other folders To open any top level folder click it When you do it appears in the frame above Typically you would a click top level folder to see its s
260. ck the mouse Select Set Table Properties Click the Table Properties tab In the Background Image field click the ellipsis button to open the Library From there select an image for the table s background See Also Library Folder on page 134 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 555 Working with Tables Table Wizard F Table Design E Table Properties Dimensions Width DX Height px o TT e O Background i E Alignment p ae Cell Spacing Cell Padding i Do iil O E O E Sackoground Image Tahle CSS 6 Click Update Deleting a Background Image Place the cursor within the table Right click the mouse Select Set Table Properties Click the Table Properties tab Select the value in the Background Image field Press lt Delete gt Click OK DOPL p e A YS Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 556 Working with Tables setting Table Borders A table border consists of the lines that separate a table s cells form each other and the table from the rest of your Web page There are two types of table borders Border Used by this type type of user internal content author TW LW Title Studio Weekend Gross 1 iN Jumper Fox 27 225 000 2 N Step Up 2 the Streets BV 19 666 000 external site visitor Title PER O tol N Jumper ____ Fox 27 225 000 2 N Step Up 2 the StreetsiBv 19 666 000 Assigning an In
261. cking feature your Webmaster makes this decision lf your installation uses Word Word s Spelling amp Grammar window available from the Tools gt Options menu has settings that affect the operation of the spell check Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 673 Checking Spelling Track Changes User Information Compatibility File Locations View General Edit Print Save Spelling amp Grammar Spelling I Hide spelling errors in this document M Always suggest corrections T Suggest From main dictionary only I Ignore words in UPPERCASE I Ignore words with numbers i Ignore Internet and file addresses Custom dictionary custom DIC T Dictionaries Grammar Check grammar as you type Writing style I Hide grammatical errors in this document Technical Check grammar with spelling R Show readability statistics SINS Recheck Document _Recheck Document Specifically you can set the spell check feature to check or ignore e words in UPPERCASE for example XYLOGIC e words with numbers for example mp3 e Internet and file addresses for example http www example com As an example if you check the box to the left of Ignore Words in UPPERCASE eWebEditPro XML s spell check does not consider words in all uppercase characters You also use the custom dictionary section of the screen to identify custom dictionaries for the spell check to reference T
262. clicking on the Insert Table button 1 while the cursor is inside a table NOTE Before you click the button make sure the table is not selected that is the table is not surrounded by small boxes When you do the following menu appears EJ Insert Table Tc Insert Aow Inert Column Insert Cell Delete Rows Delete Columns Delete Cells sa Menge ells Split Cell a Table Properties sta Cell Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 730 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus The following table lists the menu options and where to get more information on each Insert Table Inserts a new table where the Creating a Table on page 727 cursor is currently resting Insert Row Creates a new table row above the Adding or Removing Rows and row in which the cursor is currently Columns on page 738 resting Insert Column Creates a new table column next to Adding or Removing Rows and the column in which the cursor is Columns on page 738 currently resting Insert Cell Inserts a cell to the left of the cursor in a table Delete Rows Deletes table row in which the Adding or Removing Rows and cursor is currently resting Columns on page 738 Delete Column Deletes table column in which the Adding or Removing Rows and cursor is currently resting Columns on page 738 Delete Cells Deletes the selected cells a Merge Cells Combines the contents of two or Merging Two Cells on page 767 more selecte
263. command It re applies the changes from the command that occurred before you pressed Undo See Also Undo on page 724 Reset Zoom Ratio Standard Toolbar Button Description Displays image at full size See Also Zoom In on page 724 Zoom Out on page 725 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 717 Editing Images Rotate Standard Toolbar Button Co Description Turns an image a specified number of degrees Note that the dialog box lets you rotate the image e left or right e 90 180 or 270 degrees e any number of degrees between 1 and 359 Dialog Box w Rotate Off x f 180 C 270 jo 1 359 re Save Standard Toolbar Button Description Save changes to an image If required information is missing such as the image name you are prompted for this information Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 718 Editing Images Dialog Box Save Image As Save Ih ADOBEAPP image Gear Program Files BLE C Inetpub CI PSFONTS CFUSION Install LI System Volume Config Msi OnE dit_M anual Tech Pubs der Documents and Settings mspeclnt Temp EktronDey MSSOL Unzipped ewebeditpro My Music Wl file drop Norton Systemvworks2001 401 voroker framemaker test portutility YiewletBuilderz 1 My Compute l D ba l File name Untitled Vie ee Save as type GIF Files gif Cancel 2 My Network F NOTE The dialog box only appears the first ti
264. content s folder to email the user who checked out content The email asks the check out user to check it in Save Office document or asset to your computer Saving an Office Document on page 251 Submit Submit current version of content for publishing Asset Workflow on page 260 When you do this the next person in the Approval Chain is notified that your content is ready for review Synchronize content or folders between two eSync Feature on page 1 servers View View item s Ektron CMS400 NET information After you select the content such as Summary Metadata Schedule and you have the following options Taxonomy After viewing you can also edit that on page 43 information if you have permission Next you proceed to the View Content screen From here you can perform additional content activities such as move copy delete and view its history View in View Office document within Office application Microsoft Cannot change Office Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 39 Adding a Subfolder Option Allows you to For more information see View View Office document s Ektron CMS400 NET After you select the content Properties information such as Summary Metadata you have the following options Schedule and Taxonomy After viewing you can on page 43 also edit that information if you have permission After you complete the edit screen you proceed to the View Content
265. content such as Office documents and PDFs To add an asset to My Workspace gt gt Documents follow these steps In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Documents 2 Select a folder where the asset will be added If you want to create a new folder see Adding Folders to My Workspace gt gt Documents on page 373 3 Click the Add Asset button 4 The Add Asset box appears 5 Drag and drop an asset in the Add Asset box 6 A status box appears and shows the files being uploaded 7 Once the upload is complete the page refreshes and the asset appears in the file list Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 377 My Workspace Documents Workspace No subcategory exists sample this is a sample content block under the documents folder Wh Server Control Review Creating HTML Content in My Workspace gt gt Documents To create HTML content in My Workspace gt gt Documents follow these steps In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Documents 2 Select a folder where the content will be added If you want to create a new folder see Adding Folders to My Workspace gt gt Documents on page 373 3 Click the Add HTML Content button imp The Add HTML Content window appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 378 My Worksp
266. content block inserted One of two editors may appear See Also Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Editors on page 481 6 From the Edit Content window you can e edit content e create or edit a summary e specify metadata for the content e enter or update a comment e enter or update start and end dates e review and update Web Alert information To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual chapter Web Alert Feature e review and update templates To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing HTML Content gt Creating Updating Templates Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 58 Editing HTML Content e review and update categories To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual chapter Taxonomy e save changes e check in content e submit content for approval e publish content to the Web site e access the library 7 Make the necessary edits to the content Or you can choose a toolbar option or tab from the top of the Edit Content window These options are described in Buttons on the Add Content Screen on page 50 and Tabs on the Edit Content Screen on page 51 Translating Content to Another Language NOTE The following procedure only works with HTML or XML content You cannot translate other file types as described below Use this procedure when you want to initialize a new foreign language
267. content item with content from a source language This copying should facilitate the translation For example an editor is translating content from French to German The editor copies the French edition to new content whose language is German As the editor translates the French edition into German he deletes the French content Any images in the content would usually remain and all formatting tables bullets etc is retained NOTE Ektron CMS400 NET also has a Language Export feature copies content into XLIFF files for submission to a translation agency For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Multi Language Support gt Using the Language Export Feature To copy content into new content block of a different language follow these steps 1 Go to the View Content screen for the content you want to translate See Also Viewing Content on page 40 2 Use the Add dropdown list in the upper right corner to select the language into which you want to translate the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 59 Deleting Content 3 The Edit Content screen appears with original language content 4 Translate into the new language then delete the original content If desired you can click the Translate button ag If you do a new screen prompts you to identify the original language new language and a glossary Then the content is translated If you l
268. controls include setting permissions approvals and F adding editing publishing and deleting content Below is the content folder The following table describes the buttons available on every help screen Moves to prior topic in the help This refers to the topic sequence arranged by the help s author Moves to next topic in the help This refers to the topic sequence arranged by the help s author Divides the help into two panels e The left panel displays the table of contents It also provides buttons for accessing the index and full text search The right panel continues to display help topics Highlight the current help topic s location within the table of contents Prints current topic Accessing Online Manuals To access the help folder follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 479 Online Help 1 Access the Workarea 2 From the lower left frame click Settings 3 From the top left frame click Help nn x gt Settings 3 User Profile B4 Help 4 The help screen appears in the right frame Ektron CMS400 Help Visi We Page On irg Developer Manual Quick Start Manual Administrator Manual User Manual Setup Manual 5 Click any link to open the documentation or Web page NOTE Your computer requires an internet connection to access the help page on Ektron com Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 480 Introduction to Ektron CM
269. crosoft Word document 676 inserting picture from computer 683 media file selection 680 images adding space around 690 aligning 688 background cell inserting 759 table inserting 748 border color 688 thickness 687 deleting 693 deleting from server 682 editing 694 inserting 678 from server into editor 681 inserting from your computer 683 library adding to content 154 editing titles 154 overwriting 154 uploading 153 viewing 154 locking in position 647 moving to server 692 scanning 723 specifying color depth 725 indent toolbar option 646 insert column toolbar button 649 library item toolbar button 66 new cell toolbar button 649 row toolbar button 649 table toolbar button 730 inserting cells 754 HTML 782 instant email see email instant Internet addresses spell checking 673 italic toolbar option 646 J jumps see bookmarks and hyperlinks justify toolbar option 647 L landing page after login customizing for user 476 language user editing 473 library accessing 135 add items button 64 asset adding as menu item 451 copying files to 142 definition 134 file extensions 138 files deleting 150 editing 147 inserting into content 150 overwriting 147 viewing 145 folder properties 137 forms adding to content 155 viewing 155 hyperlinks adding 153 adding to content 153 editing 153 viewing 153 images adding to content 154 editing titles 154 extensions 138 overwriting 154 uploading 153 viewing 1
270. cument Click Save 4 Select a folder to which you want to save the document 5 The document s status changes to checked out O 6 Edit the document in Office Nore Ifyou change your mind and do not change the document but simply close a al remains Checked Out O Use the Check In menu option to 7 Drag and drop the edited document See Adding Documents Using Drag and Drop on page 238 8 You are asked to confirm the file replace Click Yes 9 The document is submitted for approval 10 The revised document is saved in Ektron CMS400 NET Saving an Office Document You would typically save an Office document to your computer in order to distribute it to others or if you want a personal copy You should not save a document to your computer if you plan to edit it then replace the version in Ektron CMS400 NET doing this may overwrite edits made by other users lf you want to edit a document use the Edit in MS Office or Check out and Save As menu option Both options set the content to checked out status which prevents non administrator users from editing it until you check it back in Follow these steps to save an Office document 1 In Ektron CMS400 NET open the folder that contains the Office document 2 Hover the cursor over the triangle on the right end of the document and click Save As Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 251 Using the Document Management System 3 You are ask
271. d Description for the folder in the provided text boxes 4 Click the Add link to add the folder The folder appears in the list of Favorites Remove Favorites To remove a favorite follow these steps In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Favorites 2 Place a check in the box next to the content you wish to remove 3 Click the Remove button i Moving Favorites to a Folder Moving favorite content to a folder allows you to group you favorites by a common theme For example you might group all content created by a certain author under a folder with that author s name To move a Favorite to a folder follow these steps In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Favorites Mark a favorite item s to be moved 1 2 3 Click the Move button lg 4 Select the folder where the content will be moved Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 409 My Workspace This folder contains my favorite content on Ektron s Server Controls Ektron Rated Positive Sample Content Block Oi 5 Click OK to move the favorites to the new folder 6 The page refreshes and the content can now be found in the Photos new folder The Photos area of My Workspace allows you to add images to CMS400 and associate them with your profile You can create subfolders to separate images by category Images in the Photos area are separate from the Content folder structure and its files Images in this li
272. d Ml Asset Management 11 oo HBlogging Tools 11 Poll and Survey 56 Multimedia 0 EiMembership 0 Msearch 0 Security 11 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 167 Working with HTML Forms Combined Combines the Data Table and the Bar Age range 4 responses Chart 13 21 50 M 22 25 25 B 26 30 o 31 or over 25 B IMPORTANT You cannot chart data that is entered into a text box For example if one of the choices in a poll is Other and the survey has a text box for site users to enter additional information the text in the box is not charted However the fact that the a user chose Other is charted Creating a Form s Content Here is an example of form content that you can create Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 168 Working with HTML Forms Request for White Paper Please fill out the form below If you have any questions please e mail white paperdektron cam required fields First Name Po Website Email Phone Era State Province Country Comments po Request White Paper Note that some fields are required and some provide a dropdown list of choices You can learn how to create such a screen by following the directions below The following topics explain how to create a form e The Form Toolbar Options on page 170 e Inserting Form Fields on page 171 e Form Validation
273. d T aec Check Spelling 4s You i We Deri Check bo Move Mawr E Selected Toolbar E dit Using the Customize Toolbar Dialog Box The left half of the Commands screen lists the buttons in the sequence in which they appear on the menu The right half of the screen lists available buttons that do not currently appear on the menu To add a button to the toolbar drag it from the right side of the screen to the location on the left side where you want it to appear You can also click a button then click lt Add This action places the button at the bottom of the list To remove a button from the toolbar drag it from the left side of the screen to the right You can also click a button then click Remove gt The Move Up and Move Down buttons let you to move any button up or down one slot within the list of buttons Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 656 Customizing Your Toolbar Rearranging the Items on a Menu ie 2 Click the button you want to move Click Move Up and Move Down to move the button up or down one slot for each click Restoring Toolbars If you remove all toolbars from your menu and then want to restore the menus but do not have the Customize menu option follow these steps gt w pP Place the cursor in the editor Right click the mouse A menu appears with a Redisplay toolbars option Click this option to restore all menus Rearranging the Menus on a Tool
274. d by site visitors meets your criteria For example a validation rule can specify that a site visitor s response to the Telephone field conforms to a standard format for example 7 or 10 digits If the response does not conform an error message informs the site visitor of the problem The input must conform before the form can be submitted For a list of validation rule types see Validation Options on page 180 When Validation Rules are Applied Validation rules are applied when a site visitor submits a form not as soon as the input is entered If invalid input is found the error message that you define appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 174 Working with HTML Forms NOTE If you want to change the visual indicator that a field s response is invalid see the following Ektron CMS400 NET KB article http dev ektron com kb_article aspx id 7070 The site visitor must change his response to conform to the validation rule When he does the next field is checked and if that is invalid its error message appears etc Tip If you apply validation rules to more than one field include the field name in the error message For example enter The name field only allows text This is good practice because error messages only appear after a form is submitted and if the message does not identify the field the user may not know which field needs correction Form Fields Inserting a Checkbox Field
275. d cells into one Split Cell Divides a cell into two Each cell Splitting a Cell on page 766 occupies one half the size of the Original cell Table Properties Displays and lets you edit table The Table Properties Dialog Box on properties such as the number of page 732 rows and columns cell padding and borders Cell Properties Displays and lets you edit cell The Cell Properties Dialog Box on properties such as width and page 734 alignment Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 731 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus The Table Properties Dialog Box The Insert Table dialog box lets you manipulate most elements of a table s appearance Insert T able Size Rows E 4 foe Cancel ib Fan x Columns Layout Borders Use Default Color C Not Specified f Percent Pixels Border Color Border Size Cell Padding Horizontal Alignment Cell Spacing Custom Background Background Color W Unassigned Background Image From File The following table lists the fields on this dialog box and refers you to the section that explains each field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 732 Field s Size Rows Columns Layout Width Layout Horizontal Alignment Background Color Background Image Borders Use Default Color Border Color Cell Padding Cell Spacing Lets you specify The number of rows
276. d click e To darken it move the cursor to the right of the red dot and click When you click the image redisplays using the new brightness level When you are satisfied click Done Rotating an Image To rotate an image click the Rotate Image button 1 When you do image rotation buttons appear Edit Image Rotate Image Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 517 Working with Images Use the buttons to rotate the image clockwise or counterclockwise in ninety degree increments When you are satisfied click Done Cropping an Image Cropping an image removes the portion of the image that is not within the cropping tool To crop an image click the Crop Image button E When you do the crop image box appears Edit Image Crop Image Drag the box handles to frame how the image will be cropped SMS4UQ net Drag the crop tool s handles to frame how the image is cropped When you are satisfied click Done Everything outside the crop box is removed Deleting an Image from Content If you want to delete a picture follow these steps 1 Move the cursor over the picture 2 Click the mouse to select the picture 3 Click the Cut button NOTE If you want to remove an image from content created from an XML Smart Form and eWebEdit400 is your editor click the image icon a open the Image Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 518 Working with Images Prope
277. d content you want to approve as described in Approve Decline One Content Item on page 92 Click the Approve All button IA The following message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer eS x E This action will approve all the selected content changes awaiting your approval wy This may cause some content blocks to become published or deleted Do you wish to continue Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 93 Approving Declining Content 4 To continue click OK 5 The approved content is either submitted to the next publisher published immediately to the Web site or deleted depending on the approval chain set for the content Example of an Approval Chain The approval chain begins when a content contributor submits a new or edited content If email is enabled an email is sent to the next approver in the approval chain The following example follows a typical content block from creation to publication Three users make up this approval chain e Sports Writer creates sports content e Sports Editor edits and publishes all sports articles e Editor In Chief edits and publishes all articles Each user has different permissions that correspond to their roles The example uses the following topics to explain a typical approval chain e Creating Content on page 94 e First Approver on page 96 e Second Approver on page 97 Creating Content The first step is to create conte
278. d in the folder that contains the source content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 789 Using Ektron CMS400 NET s Wiki Feature its name is typically the selected text However if the user used the wiki button he can modify the new content block s title on the Add Edit Wiki Link screen its initial text is New Content content for selected text Fill in the topic text as you or other collaborators have time gets the quicklink for the newly created content block 5 opens the original content and replaces the lt span gt tag with the quicklink to newly created content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 790 section 508 Compliance IMPORTANT This section explains how eWebEditPro XML complies with Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act To learn about how the alternative editor eWebEdit400 complies with Section 508 see Section 508 Tables on page 576 This section explains how eWebEditPro XML complies with Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act a law enacted by the United States government that requires Federal agencies to make their electronic and information technology accessible to people with disabilities Specifically this section explains the following topics e Moving the Cursor into eWebEditPro XML on page 791 e Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse on page 792 e Section 508 Tables on page 794 Moving the Cursor into eWebEditPro XML Using Inter
279. d table or image at its current screen position Nothing can move a locked object To move the object unlock it by clicking this button again i Lock Ty If two or more images overlay each other moves the selected image in front of Move to Front the others nee If two or more images overlay each other moves the selected image behind the Move to Back others If text overlays an image move the image in front of the text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 647 Toolbar Buttons If an image overlays text move the text in front of the image Text Direction Options The text direction menu options allow bi directional editing of text which is useful for Arabic Farsi and Hebrew The client computer must also support the language The text buttons determine the editing direction while the edit buttons determine the side of the editor that displays the scroll bar For right to left languages such as Arabic Farsi and Hebrew the text editing would be right to left and the scroll bar would be on the left side For western European languages the text editing would be left to right and the scroll bar would be on the right side T i i T alf a The vertical scroll bar appears on the alll Left Right Eoi right side of the window The vertical scroll bar appears on the left side of the window Right Left Edit Form Elements Toolbar See Inserting Form Fields
280. d verb GET HEAD POST path type Ektron ASM EkHttpDavHandler EkDavHttpHandlerFactory gt 6 Remove the comment characters in red above After you make this change you can click to view any image file in the ekdavroot folder Removing Mapped Network Drives Ektron CMS400 NET s DMS feature creates a mapped exdavroot network drive for many functions For example if you sign on to Ektron CMS400 NET and create a new folder a new mapped ekdavroot network drive is created Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 245 Using the Document Management System Address My Network Places T a Folders Name E Desktop o P S ekdavroot on icestorm E f My Documents E ES ekdavroot on icestorm 2 E F My Computer ekdavroot on W5 10080 S Local Disk C 4 DVD CD RW Dr Se CMS400Demo S Source on Amt Ss Cms400 on Ar S Documentation S Documentation g Control Panel a My Network Places K gj Recyde Bin fa ekdavroot_1_5497345_1033_ 1_on ws10080 fal ekdavroot_ 142369280 1033 _ 10n localhost E ekdavroot_1_226157056_1033_ 1_on icestorm ES ekdavroot_ 1 405496320 1053 1_ S ekdavroot_1_465072896_1033_ 1_onicestorm ekdavroot_1_623734912_1033_ 1_ on localhost ekdavroot_1_816112128 1033 _ 1_on localhost E ekdavroot_1_882467840_1033_ 1_ on ws10080 ekdavroot_1_921133568_ 1033 on icestorm ekdavroot_1_991972608_1033_ 1_onicestorm 2 ekdavroot_t
281. darkest If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area NOTE You cannot adjust brightness if the image s bit depth is 8 or fewer See Also Specifying Color Depth on page 725 Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 701 Editing Images w Brightness OF x Brightness Choose Color Standard Toolbar Button pes Description Lets you choose the color of an annotation before you insert it To change an annotation s color after inserting it place the cursor on the annotation and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 702 Choose Font Color El Ed Basic colors nl Gee nel See DE f imi i iff ff ioe ff Eee oT Custom colors iLL itp hn HEBER Define Custom Colors gt Cancel Standard Toolbar Button Description Dialog Box A e Editing Images Lets you choose the color of annotation text before you insert it To change an annotation s color after inserting it place the cursor on the annotation and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 703 Editing Images ae O Arial Black Bald O Arial Narrow F Arial Unicode MS F Batang O Berling Antiqua O Book Antiqua Color Depth Standard Toolbar Button amp Description Changes an image s color
282. dd content to the folder that contains the content being edited There are two ways to create a wiki link They are contrasted below Advantages For more information see Surround text with square Creating a Wiki Link brackets Using Square Brackets on page 89 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 785 Using Ektron CMS400 NET s Wiki Feature Advantages For more information see Use the wiki button a e Can link to existing content or create new Using the Wiki Button content on page 786 e Can choose new content s folder Note Membership users cannot choose a folder The new content is created in the same folder as the content being edited e Can change title of new content e Can select new window s target frame Using the Wiki Button To create a wiki link using the wiki button follow these steps 1 Begin editing a content item For CMS users this is explained in Editing HTML Content on page 52 For membership users this is explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Managing Content Folders gt Community Folders 2 Select the text to which you want to assign a wiki hyperlink It can be one or several words 3 Click the Wiki button z4 NOTE The Wiki button only appears if you have permission to add content to the folder that contains the current content 4 The Add Edit Wiki Link screen appears It has two tabs Ektron CMS400 N
283. depth See Also Specifying Color Depth on page 725 Dialog Box 704 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 Editing Images w Color Depth Contrast Standard Toolbar Button Description Increases or decreases an image s contrast that is the difference between light and dark areas of an image You can select a contrast level from 10 through 10 If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 705 Copy Editing Images Standard Toolbar Button Description Create New Copies a selected area of an image After you copy an image you can paste it using the paste command See Also Paste as New Image on page 714 To select an area of an image use the Select command See Also Select on page 720 If you do not select an area the entire image is copied Standard Toolbar Button Description Crop D Lets you create a new image If you are editing an image when you press this command you are asked if you want to save changes to it first By default a new image s bit depth is 24 but you can change it if desired using the color depth command See Also Color Depth on page 704 Standard Toolbar Button Description t Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 706 Editing Images Keeps selected area of an image removes everything outside that area T
284. direct to a file or page Redirect form data to an action page Report onthe form Same Window Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 589 Working with HTML Forms Chart Types The following table describes the types of charts available Data Table The poll or survey answers are displayed with the percentage of users 30 18 21 who responded to 29 22 25 each item 0 26 30 259 31 or over Age range 4 responses Bar Chart The poll or survey answers are Age range 4 responses displayed with a bar graph Use this chart type when you want a quick visual representation of the responses Pie Chart Displays a standard pie chart Poll or Poll My favorite feature survey answers are My favorite feature in Ektron CMS400 NET color coded and the ae percentage of p i B Approval Process 11 people who chose d Ml Asset Management 11 oo HBlogging Tools 11 Poll and Survey 56 Multimedia 0 EiMembership 0 Msearch 0 Security 11 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 590 Working with HTML Forms Combined Combines the Data Table and the Bar Age range 4 responses Chart 13 21 50 M 22 25 25 26 30 o 31 or over 25 Ei IMPORTANT You cannot chart data entered into a text box For example if one choice in a poll is Other and the survey has a text box for site users to enter additional information the text in the
285. dit Properties Check Out and Save As Submit NOTE If you do not see Delete either you lack permission to delete the content or its status makes it ineligible for deleting 6 The following message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer E x d Are you sure vou wish to submit this content block to the approvers For deletion This content will be deleted once the entire list of approvers has approved this request This action will also delete any library quicklinks associated with the content block Continue Cancel 7 Click OK to delete the document Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 249 Using the Document Management System Like publishing deleted content must go through the approval chain before it is removed If you are the last approver in the approval chain the content is deleted immediately See Also Approving Declining Content on page 90 Checking Out Saving and Replacing an Office Document lf you check out and save an Office document to your computer you would typically edit it using Office While it is checked out only you or a system administrator can check it back in Other users cannot edit it You may use this feature to work on the document on your computer copy it to another computer or even email it to someone who does not have access to Ektron CMS400 NET You can also use the Check Out and Save As option to edit an Office document if you use the Firefox
286. dit400 entries are listed under eWebEdit400 508 compliance 791 A about eWebEditPro box 647 650 absolute positioning of objects 647 add button calendar event 64 library items 64 task 64 workarea toolbar 64 column toolbar button 649 content 48 block button 64 folder button 64 row toolbar button 649 add content screen buttons 50 responding to fields 50 tabs 51 address email user editing 473 AddSubMenu 453 alignment cell 763 image 688 table 744 text 647 text remove toolbar button 650 approval chain example 94 approvals toolbar button 64 approve all toolbar button 65 button floating toolbar 5 workarea toolbar 65 content 90 one content item 92 several content blocks 93 approving file document management feature 261 archived content toolbar button 65 archiving definition 72 options 72 restoring archived content 74 assets supported types 225 assign task button floating toolbar 5 auto hide feature of Smart Desktop 24 avatar assigning 474 B background color applying to text 646 cell applying 757 deleting 758 removing from text 646 table applying 746 deleting 747 background image cell deleting 760 inserting 759 table deleting 749 inserting 748 bidirectional editing 648 blogs adding 323 categories 329 adding 329 editing 330 removing 331 comments in the Workarea 361 on the site 359 overview 357 deleting 343 overview 319 posts adding 353 deleting 356 editing 355 made from the
287. diting a File You can edit the title filename and description of any file that was copied to the library To do so follow these steps 1 Access the View File screen as described in Viewing Files on page 145 Click the Edit button L The Edit File screen appears Edit Library Item in Folder Contenti files Title ID Filename ktron Partners and Customers 41 CMS400ExalnplefuploadedFiles ektron_partners_custon Description y Bs A os 3012 pt A WI BZA Te aA Marketing description of Ektron s relationship with its partners 4 Change the title file name and or description of the file 5 Click the Update button i Overwriting Files If a library file becomes out of date or the wrong version was copied you may replace it with a new version Overwriting files lets you minimize disk space and the number of library files NOTE The ability to overwrite a library file is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see an Overwrite button E on the View Library Item in Folder screen you do not have permission to overwrite NOTE You can only overwrite images and files The new image or file must have the same file extension as the file being replaced Before You Overwrite an Image Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 Library Folder When overwriting an image the new image uses the same size dimensions and file extension as the older image Be sure that the
288. document document manage ment feature 257 crop WebIlmageFX command 706 custom validation data designer 605 customizing toolbar 652 cut toolbar and menu option 641 D data designer custom validation 605 decline content from publishing 93 one content item 92 several content blocks 93 delete button floating toolbar 5 content toolbar button 66 folder toolbar button 66 toolbar button 65 WeblmageFX command 707 delete cell toolbar button 649 delete column toolbar button 649 delete row toolbar button 649 deleting cell 755 content 60 folders 40 table 728 Detect All field eWebDiff 108 difference content view toolbar button 6 dimensions WebIlmageFX command 707 display borders toolbar button 650 DMS Document Option 235 Do not apply XSLT button 66 document creating document management feature 257 importing into DMS 232 document management feature adding documents to collections 261 adding documents to menus 261 approving file 261 browser requirements 226 creating managed file 257 document types 225 file types 225 importing document 232 introduction 224 managed files 255 Office document editing 246 overview 224 reports 261 reports of document by status 261 security 226 software requirements 226 workflow 260 Document Management System Firefox plugin 227 documentation online accessing 478 drag and drop DMS documents 238 E edit button floating toolbar 5 editing content block overview 10 conte
289. ds to do this See Also Customizing a Standard List on page 194 Languages list of languages supported by Windows Countries list of all countries in the world U S States and Territories list of all states and territories that make up the U S Canadian Provinces list of all Canadian provinces Age Ranges Use the predefined choices for age ranges You can see the ranges on the screen after you choose this option Numeric Ranges Use the predefined choices for numeric ranges You can see the ranges on the screen after you choose this option Years list of calendar years ranging from 2004 to 2014 ltem Enter the value that is collected when the data entry user selects this item Value For example if Interests appears in the Name field and you want music to be collected when the data entry user selects this item and saves the page enter music here Item Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen Text After you insert this field onto the screen you can use eWebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify its size font color and other attributes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 193 Working with HTML Forms SS Item List This section of the screen displays the items that you enter in the Value and Text fields Buttons near the bottom of the screen let you remove items from this list as well as rearrange them Move Up Move Down Remove Place a check in the box of any
290. e 0 Ektron CMS400 NET users and administrators can also view and update tasks assigned to them via the Task screens on the Smart Desktop See Viewing a Task on page 307 and Viewing a Task s History on page 317 Task Information The task created upon form submission has the following information Fed ve Title Form title as entered by the author Assigned to As set up by the user who created or edited the form Priority Normal Assigned by User who created or last edited form Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 623 Working with HTML Forms Value Form Submission Task Category Category Not specified Start date Not specified Description Data from form form name was received on date time form description Name of every field on the form value submitted by user into that field email Automatically Generated Upon Form Submission An email is automatically sent to every user named in Step 1 above who has a valid email address in the User Information Screen The email s subject line is the form name The body of the email contains the following information for each field on the form e name e value submitted by user Viewing Form Reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 199 Viewing Form Information See Viewing Form Information on page 206 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 624 Working with HTML Forms Editing a Form See Editing
291. e Fed Powerit User Properties See Custom User Properties in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 477 Online Help Online Help Online help provides access to important and useful information about using Ektron CMS400 NET Help is provided in two formats e online help accessible from most screens by clicking the help ore currently viewing Online help is in HTML format so it opens in the browser you use to surf the internet After viewing a help topic you can browse to related topics as well as access a table of contents index and search to expand your quest for information See Also Accessing Online Help on page 478 e online manuals can be viewed searched and printed like a paper manual Online manuals are in a PDF format which makes it easy to navigate online and print See Also Accessing Online Manuals on page 479 Both formats provide the same information Choose the format that best suits your needs Accessing Online Help To access online help for any screen click the help icon illustrated below View Contents of Folder Root When you do an online help screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 478 Online Help Ektron CMS400 MET Administrator Manual Managing Content Folders An administrator can control every aspect of the content and the folders that hold them The
292. e a site visitor can click it to see a full sized version of the image See an example of both below Syringe Pumps The InfusO R Pump ts a syringe infusion device that will a inesthetic Pharmaceuticals administration of many intravenous agents given during ar tegional Anesthesia procedures It provides for the convenient delivery of nar muscle relaxants and vasoactive drugs through the SMAF System To insert an image thumbnail follow the steps in Procedure for Inserting an Image on page 503 but when you get to Step 5 click the image s thumbnail button lah You can change the thumbnail image by right clicking it selecting Set Image Properties and editing the Image Src field If you do that however and someone clicks it the original full sized image appears If you want to change both the thumbnail and the full sized image delete it then enter a new thumbnail Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 505 Working with Images Editing an Image s Properties After an image in inserted you can adjust the following properties for it e border width e border color e alt text e description e alignment e the image itself e horizontal and vertical spacing e width and height Image Properties Image Properties Border Width To access the Image Properties dialog follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 506 Working with Images 1 Select
293. e 545 width setting by pixels 547 word wrap 573 text searching 495 text aligning in columns 542 toolbar buttons 486 translate toolbar button 488 underscore toolbar button 489 undo toolbar option 488 wiki toolbar button 488 exit without save WeblmageFX command 709 exit WeblmageFX command 708 extensions file allowed in library 138 image allowed in library 138 F file open toolbar button 650 save to local computer toolbar button 650 files copying to library 142 extensions library setting 138 library inserting into content 150 overwriting 147 viewing 145 library editing title 147 find next toolbar and menu option 642 finding content block 10 text 666 FireFox plugin for DMS installing 227 folders add button 64 button for deleting 66 deleting 40 information available when viewing 31 screen display 28 view history restore 114 viewing 30 fonts background color 646 color 645 heading size 645 size 645 style 645 form elements toolbar 648 forms adding to content 155 HTML assigning task 197 621 creating 161 582 creating content block 168 591 database 214 deleting 214 625 editing content block 213 introduction 212 625 summary 213 field validation options 180 602 implementing on Web page 196 621 inserting fields 171 calendar field 194 615 checkbox 175 597 choices 187 611 hidden text 177 password 182 select list 191 text 178 598 text area 184 introduction 158 580 mailto 214 processing ove
294. e Also e Adding a Content Summary on page 76 e Adding or Editing Metadata on page 80 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 68 10 Check in or submit the content for publishing as you would HTML content See Also Buttons on the Add Content Screen on page 50 Adding Documents Using the Multiple DMS Documents Option To add Office documents to Ektron CMS400 NET via the New gt Multiple DMS Documents menu option follow these steps NOTE This option is only available if you are using Internet Explorer and Office 2003 or higher is installed on your computer Tip If you will apply the same information Summary Metadata Categories etc to several files place those files in the same Windows folder before starting this procedure 1 From the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea select the Content tab 2 Select the Ektron CMS400 NET folder in which you want to place the documents See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 28 3 The default language appears next to the screen title To create a document for a different language click View gt Language and select the language 4 Click New gt Multiple DMS Documents Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 236 Using the Document Management System 5 The Edit Content in Folder screen appears The lower portion of the screen resembles Windows Explorer Edit Content in Folder Root EGE Ta ina EE 0S Add to Quicklinks table
295. e Cell Properties dialog box appears Click the down arrow to the right of the Horizontal Alignment field Cell Properties Spar Rows S panned Columns Spanned Layout width alls f Not Specified f Percent i Word Wrap i Pixels on Click your choice from the list and click OK Setting Vertical Alignment In the Cell Properties dialog box you can specify the vertical alignment of a cell You have four choices top middle bottom along the baseline of the first line of text the term baseline is defined in Aligning the Picture on page 688 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 764 Working with Table Cells This example illustrates the choices Top Bottom Baseline To set vertical justification for a table cell follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu g S ee a The Cell Properties dialog box appears Click the down arrow to the right of the Vertical Alignment field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 765 Working with Table Cells Cell Properties Spar Rows Spanned Columns S panned 50 Layout width C Not Specified f Percent I Word Wrap C Pixels Horizontal Alignment x Vertical Alignment ki 6 Click your choice from the list and click OK Splitting a Cell You can divide a cell into two If
296. e Description e Task Type Availability See Also Task Type Availability on page 303 NOTE As a user if you set the Task type to Not Available you cannot edit the Task Type after that To make the Task Type available see your administrator Task Type availability is explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Categories and Types gt View Categorization Screen gt Task Type Availability 5 Edit the information 6 Click Save lal 7 The Task Type information is changed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 305 Managing Tasks Creating a Task from the Web Site IMPORTANT To create a task from a Web page follow these steps 1 Browse to the content for which you want to assign a task 2 Right click the mouse to display a menu 3 Click the Add Task button L The Add Task button only appears if your system administrator has granted you permission to add tasks For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Permissions 4 The Add Task screen appears The content you were viewing is assigned to the task 5 Follow the directions in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 295 The only differences are e the content s ID number and title appear on the screen e the language of the content is the default language Creating a Task via the Content Folder
297. e Ektron CMS400 NET Page Lets you specify one or more templates for content in this folder For more Templates information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Managing HTML Content gt Creating Updating Templates Metadata There is no difference when working with Metadata for blogs or folders For more information see Adding or Editing Metadata on page 80 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 328 Blogs Blog Subjects Subjects make it easier for site visitors scanning a blog page find posts that interest them Here s how they work 1 The creator of a blog post assigns one or more subjects to it 2 When the post is published a list of subjects assigned to all posts appears in the right column 3 A site visitor clicks any subject and see all posts relating to it For example a blog s subjects are Music Sports and Art A user creates a new blog post about his favorite band Ektronica and assigns the music subject to the post When a site visitor views the blog page he looks under Subjects and clicks Music A list of music related posts appears including the post about Ektronica And I write it everyday T know it isn t black and white And it s anything but gray T know that no Tm not alright But Til be OK cause Anything can everything can happen That s the story of my life Posted by Application Administrator at 01 02 2006 01 PM
298. e Insert the most recently cut or copied text and graphics at the current cursor location Paste Text Paste the contents of the clipboard as plain text That is all HTML tags including images are not pasted This button is helpful when you want to eliminate the HTML formatting of the text being copied Select All Select all information on your page After you select it you can cut it copy it etc Clean Source Remove unnecessary HTML tags Cleaning Source Code on page 83 Hyperlink Create a link to another Web page ora Using Hyperlinks on spot within the current page page 775 Edit Source Edit your page s HTML source Editing a Section of a Page on page 782 Insert Source Insert HTML source onto the page at the Inserting Source on cursor location page 782 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 662 The Context Sensitive Menu Menu Option Lets you For more information see Check Spelling Compare words in the editor to Microsoft Checking Spelling on WORD spelling list page 670 View as WYSIWYG HTML View and edit your page s HTML Viewing and Editing HTML on page 781 Picture Insert a picture Inserting Images on page 678 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 663 Using eWebEditPro XML s Advanced Features Most of eWebEditPro XML s features are easy to learn For example to make your text bold you select the text and click the bold
299. e View Contents of Folder screen View Contents of Folder Root 2 NOTE Depending on your permissions you may not see all menu options e New Menu on page 32 e View Menu on page 33 e Delete Menu on page 34 e Action Menu on page 35 e Add Asset button EA See Adding Documents Using Drag and Drop on page 238 e Workarea Content Menu on page 35 New Menu Menu Option Lets you create or upload For more information see this new item into folder Discussion Board Discussion Board Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Section Discussion Boards Discussion Boards on page 467 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 32 Viewing a Folder Menu Option Lets you create or upload For more information see this new item into folder Community Folder Folder whose content can be Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator updated by membership as well Manual Section Managing Content as regular users Folders gt Community Folders HTML Content HTML content Adding HTML Content on page 48 HTML Form Survey HTML Form Poll or Survey Working with HTML Forms on page 158 Smart Form Smart Form Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Section Managing Content Folders gt Smart Forms enue e E Office Document e Working with Microsoft Office Docu i 22 Managed file any sup ments on page 229 ported type e Working with Managed Files on Multimedia file a
300. e Workspace box appears Public Colleagues Selected Colleagues Private testpics O O 6 Select with whom to share your folders The table below describes each option All people viewing your profile page can view your photos Colleagues Only people who are your colleagues can view your photos See Also Colleagues on page 393 Selected Colleagues Only colleagues who are marked as selected colleagues can view your photos Private You are the only one who can view your photos 7 Click the Share button Share Images in the folder are now available for viewing by the selected viewer type Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 416 Web Site Navigation Aids Web Site Navigation Aids Working with Collections A collection is a list of content links offered to the readers of a Web page The following illustration shows a collection on a Web page ae l cveack or Go Back Ektron Rated Positve Ektron Inc an innovator in Web content management software today announced Ektron to Demonstrate Healthcare Healthcare Content Indexing Framework which enables hospitals medical groups and health insurers to deliver indexed content via the Web You can also use a collection to display listings such as job postings press releases and knowledge base articles The following graphic illustrates a collection on the landing page of Ektron s Knowledge Base Highlighted Knowledge Base A
301. e can damage your computer or violate your privacy You rus t 13 Click Install Now 14 Close then reopen the Firefox browser 15 You can now drag and drop files into Ektron CMS400 NET Working with Microsoft Office Documents This section explains how to work with Microsoft Office documents through the following subtopics e MS Office Document Menu Options on page 230 e Notes on Working with Microsoft Office Documents on page 230 e Importing Office Documents on page 232 How Imported Documents are Named on page 234 Adding Documents Using the DMS Document Option on page 235 Adding Documents Using the Multiple DMS Documents Option on page 236 Adding Documents Using Drag and Drop on page 238 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 229 Using the Document Management System Adding Documents to a Mapped Network Folder on page 241 e Editing an Office Document on page 246 e Deleting an Office Document on page 248 e Checking Out Saving and Replacing an Office Document on page 250 e Saving an Office Document on page 251 e Saving an Office Document in html Format on page 252 MS Office Document Menu Options Depending on a document s status your role and position in the document s approval chain any of the following options may be available when you display the dropdown menu for an Office document j BPG CMS Pers
302. e kiro n What do you want your website to do Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 Ektron Inc 542 Amherst St Nashua NH 03063 Tel 1 603 594 0249 Fax 1 603 594 0258 Email sales ektron com http www ektron com To learn what s new in this release see http dev ektron com cms400releasenotes aspx Copyright May 2009 Ektron Inc All rights reserved EKTRON is a registered trademark of Ektron Inc Version 7 6 Revision 5 For updated versions of this manual please visit http www ektron com web content management solutions aspx id 4020 EKTRON INC SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT READ THIS BEFORE LOADING SOFTWARE YOUR RIGHT TO USE THE PRODUCT DELIVERED IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT USING THIS PRODUCT SIGNIFIES YOUR AGREEMENT TO THESE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT DO NOT DOWNLOAD CUSTOMER should carefully read the following terms and conditions before using the software program s contained herein the Software Downloading and or using the Software or copying the Software onto CUSTOMER S computer hard drive indicates CUSTOMER S acceptance of these terms and conditions If CUSTOMER does not agree with the terms of this agreement CUSTOMER should not download Ektron Inc Ektron grants and the CUSTOMER accepts a nontransferable and nonexclusive License to use the Software on the following
303. e the field s Default Value property Ca Descriptive Name Enter a description of the field This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 624 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters 8 lt gt H into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 599 Working with HTML Forms Pe Ec Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears if a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Default value If you want to set a default value for this field enter it here For example if this field collects a city and most users enter New York enter New York as the value A site visitor can change the default value while completing the screen Allow multiple lines Check this box if you want this field to scroll vertically to allow the person completing the form to enter as much text as needed Note This setting cannot be applied if this is a Password field Cannot be changed Check this box to prevent the person completing this field from changing its content For example you want to display a license agreement Below this field you might place a check box prompting the site visitor to check it to indicate he has read the ag
304. e to include with the invite in the Optional message box Click the Send Invitations button A confirmation appears stating that the invitation was sent The person is added to your Sent Colleagues Request See Also Viewing Sent Colleague Requests in the Workarea on page 404 Searching for Ektron CMS400 NET Users and Members Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 396 My Workspace This Search lets you find users or community groups registered on the Web site After seeing the search results you can add a colleague or join a community group When you hover over a user or community group name link profile information appears How much information appears depends on your status and the profile settings of the user or group returned in the results For an explanation of when additional information appears see the Developer Manual section gt Community Platform server controls gt CommunitySearch server control gt Using Community Search Results gt When is a User s Profile Accessible in Search Results The Community Search provides two types of searches e Directory filter users by a letter in the alphabet A user can select whether to sort by first or last name See e Basic Search Searches for users and groups on the site See Performing a Basic User Search on page 398 e Advanced Search Searches based on individual or multiple criteria such as Tags Display Name or Ema
305. ear keywords document management web content management Test Po content management F Search Data Part Number Then anyone visiting your Web site can find that document by its part number using your Web site s search screen NOTE When your system administrator sets up metadata he determines whether or not is it publicly viewable If it is the search field appears on the search screen that site visitors use along with the search screen in the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea If the data is not publicly viewable it only appears on the Workarea search screen Entering or Editing Metadata To enter or edit content s metadata follow these steps WARNING You may only edit metadata of content that is published checked in or checked out by you Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 82 Adding or Editing Metadata 1 Access the Edit Content screen for the content whose metadata you want to enter or edit as described in Editing HTML Content on page 52 2 Click the Metadata tab Edit Content in Folder Root Tithe Sample Content Block English U 5 9 Summary Metadata Schedule Web Alerts Templates title hae Content Block 3 The Edit Metadata screen opens with the current metadata displayed In order to add metadata to content an administrator must have created definitions for it in the language of the content NOTE Your system administrator determines the appea
306. eb pages moves the cursor over the image Deleting a Picture lf you want to delete a picture follow these steps 1 Move the cursor over the picture 2 Click the mouse to select the picture 3 Click the Cut button 4 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 693 Editing Images WebImageFX lets you select an image from the content edit that image and then insert the updated image into the content Editing consists of several functions available on the toolbar such as e brightening e rotating e changing the color depth e inserting text This section explains WebIlmageFX NOTE WeblImageFxX is an external add on product available from Ektron Using WeblmageFX Choosing the Image If you double click an image it appears within WeblmageFX You can also right click the mouse and choose Image Editor from the menu that appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 694 Editing Images Menus Cut Copy Paste Paste Text Select All Clean HTML Hyperlink Insert HTML ow View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Picture Image Editor Insert Custom Tag WeblmageFX looks similar to eWebEditPro XML but has different menu and toolbar buttons File Edit View Image Annotations ewal ayx olee Baal S Y OET If the Image Edit button A appears on your toolbar you can click it to open WebImageF x If no image is selected when you press the button or click the me
307. eb site A regular hyperlink jumps to a Web page on the internet e A formis a quicklink to HTML form content Whenever content is created a form link is automatically created for it Accessing The Library 1 Click the Workarea button Sworkarea or icon 2 Click the Library folder in the lower left corner of the Workarea 3 The Library folder appears Library Folder Content images Title ID Date Modified Filename ATM 624 4 14 2005 10 15 18 AM CMS400ExampleuploadediImages aim 2 git fr PM ON DEMAND cool lt ChS400 Logo 14 1 3 2005 3 56 19 PM CMS400Example fuploadediImages cms400 5 CMS400 net 4 The sub folders appear in the left frame Files in the root folder library appear in the right frame Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 135 Library Folder You can use the dropdown list circled above to change the type of library files that appear To work with any library file click it When you do the View Library screen appears providing additional information about the item From here you can e edit its title file name or description e overwrite it e find content linked to it e delete it For more information see Viewing Files on page 145 The following table explains the toolbar buttons on the library screen NOTE Your system administrator determines which library folders you can access and which functions you can perform on l
308. ections on page 417 Restore Restores previously published content See Also Viewing and Restoring Previous Content on page 111 Saves content that was modified Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 66 fe lf bl a bd el Workarea Toolbar Buttons Name Description Search Searches content and library folder screens See Also Searching the Library on page 138 Show Calendar Displays the calendar in the Workarea See Also Working with Calendars on page 268 Submit Saves and submits content to next approver in the approval chain Update Changes are saved and content is updated View all calendar events for a selected day View Difference Opens the View Content Difference feature See Also Comparing Versions of Content on page 101 View History View history of selected content See Also Viewing and Restoring Previous Content on page 111 View Published Displays currently published version of content View Staged Displays staged content See Also Staged Content on page ix Coe Selects the language of the content being displayed English US language Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 67 Scheduling Content to Begin and End scheduling Content to Begin and End scheduling lets you control when a version of content becomes visible on the Web site Similarly you can remove content on a predetermined date and time When used together a sta
309. ed content appears If content has never been published nothing appears If you select a hyperlink the title of the selected content replaces any text in the Event Title field You can edit the new title if desired Launch link in a Check this box if you want the Web page or Quicklink specified in the new browser Hyperlink field to appear in a new browser window when someone clicks it If you do not check this box the new Web page replaces the current one when the link is clicked Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 283 Working with Calendars i Note This field only appears if your system administrator set up one or more event types for this event See Also Understanding Event Types on page 284 To apply an event type to this event click an Event Type from the right column Then click the Right Arrow B to move the event type to the Selected column Repeat for each event type you want to assign to the event 6 Click Save Understanding Event Types Your system administrator can set up types of calendar events For a personal or workgroup calendar examples might be staff meetings employment interviews conference calls For an educational institution examples might be academic deadlines sporting events and tuition due dates If you assign a type to an event while creating it you can later display only events of that type This feature lets the viewer temporarily suppress unwant
310. ed events As a result the calendar display is cleaner because it only shows relevant information Adding a Recurring Event You can assign an event to occur multiple times on a calendar To do so follow these steps 1 Add a calendar event as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 280 2 Click the Recurring tab to assign the event for more than one day Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 284 Working with Calendars Location Start End Wednesday April 06 2005 ie ey Wednesday April 06 2005 E E Event Will Occur Event times Every Day o A ae Every selected weekday Start 12 00 AM Every selected date of ever z Month End 12 00 AM Every first selected weekday of every Month Yearly every selected date of 3 Refer to the table below to complete to the Recurring fields 1 Se Start Date Click the calendar icon 8 to display a calendar From it select a start date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user End Date Click the calendar icon to display a calendar From it select an end date for the series of recurring events Event will occur Select the frequency of the event from
311. ed if you want to open or save the document Choose Save 4 Select a folder to which you want to save the document Saving an Office Document in html Format This feature converts Office documents to HTML format which means they are formatted to display within a browser As a result anyone visiting your site can view the document whether or not Microsoft Office is installed on their computer WARNING Only Microsoft Word and Excel documents can be published as HTML Ektron CMS400 NET does not support saving Powerpoint or Visio documents as HTML There are two ways to save an Office document in html format Drag and drop Office document into You don t need to know the path Saving an Office CMS400 NET to your Web site s root folder Document as html from Use Edit in MS Office option to Ektron CMS400 NET on save it in html format page 254 Open an Office document on your You don t need to drag and drop Saving Office Document computer document to CMS400 NET as html from Your Computer on page 255 Save it in html format to the ekdavroot folder in your Web root Warnings About Saving in html Format Regardless of how you save Office documents as HTML be careful to set up procedures that prevent HTML content from being overwritten For example 1 You save a Word document as html 2 Someone edits the html version 3 You save the original Office Document as html again In this scenario the edits made i
312. ee content of a selected type in the folder See Also View Menu on page 33 4 To work with any folder or its content click the folder When you do its content appears in the right frame NOTE You can only view folders for which your system administrator has granted permission 5 If your system supports more than one language you can select content for a particular language or all languages using the View gt Language menu option illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 30 Viewing a Folder All Types 1 HTML Content HTML FormSurvey 4 DMS Document Language Menu Collection English U S Archived C Deutsch German i Folder Proj Espa ol Spanish Frangais French E italiano Italian Nederlands Dutch Each folder lists the following information about its content Field Description OO The name of the content The language of the content The number assigned to the content by Ektron CMS400 NET It is used to retrieve the content from a database Status The status of the content See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page Date The most recent date the content was added edited or Modified published Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 31 Viewing a Folder p as Last Editor The last user who accessed the content The following menus and button appear across the top of th
313. ee estima into this field 1 Administratoer Ektron com If you specify a group to receive the message as long as one group member has a valid email address all group members with valid addresses receive the email Subject If the email message is linked to content its title appears If the email message is linked to content a link to the message content appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 27 Working with Folders and Content Working with Folders and Content Every content item resides in the Content folder or one of its subfolders So to work with existing content or create a new content you must first navigate to its folder A typical content folder screen appears below It consists of three sections e The top left frame shows the folder structure You can click any folder to display its content in the right frame while its subfolders appear below it e The right frame shows content in the currently selected folder Above is a set of menus that let you perform tasks on the content e The lower left frame shows Ektron CMS400 NET s top level folders Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 28 Working with Folders and Content EE STUD EST TOT AEE ary ns l Ea 1IL 7 y L ol a E To tom A q a y a r ra p iea Date Modified 1 Folders gt New 9 CMS400Deme G _Rotatingl mages
314. eeees 263 Creating XML Smart FOrms ccccsceeeeceeseeeeeesseeeseenseeseeees 263 Completing a Smart Form s Fields ccccsssseeeseeseeeseeees 265 Working with Calendals ccsscsseseeess 208 Understanding Calendars cccccsssseesesesseeecesseenseeneeesees 270 Accessing the View Calendar SCreen cccssseesesseseeeeees 271 Viewing a Calendar sessesecsctesaccevehiatidetenrnseniuteeratanietaacacteveideudetes 276 Tips on Viewing a Calendar ccccsssseeeceeseeesceeeeeseeesnees 278 Adding a Calendar Event cccsssssececsssseeeeseeeseensseeseeeneees 280 Viewing a Calendar Event ccccsssscccsssseesceesseeseceseeeseeenees 287 Editing Calendar EVents cccsssseeccessseeecssseeesceensesseeeseesees 289 Deleting Calendar EVeNnts ssscccsssseesseeseeeseneseeesensneesees 291 Managing TasksS scccscsssssssssssssssessssseseseees LS Creating a Task via the Task Folder csssssseessesseeseeeees 294 Creating a Task from the Web Site cccsssesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 306 Creating a Task via the Content Folder ssscccsseseeeeeens 306 UN kU ti T E E 307 Editing a TaS Rossie ania 312 Adding Comments to TaskKS ccccsssseessesseesseenseesseneeenseeees 313 Deleng a TaS Kasini 316 Viewing a Task s History ccccsseeseeseeeeseeeeseeeaseeseseeeeneeeeaeens 317 Task Module Toolbar
315. eeeneenees 635 Creating a Sample Web Page scccsssseesssssseeseeeeeesseeees 636 Toolbar BS sonics esta dese eng etticteeernectenetinaiasnieeverneonen 639 Customizing Your Toolbar ccsssccssscsessccnssccnssecnseess 652 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 vii Removing Or Adding Menus cccccsssseeeeesseessenseeeeenneeeees 653 Removing or Adding Menu Items cccsesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesees 654 Restoring Toolbars nasi ivinstecincstcicvncenexceiscnvntantnosssanteesessesrpxiecesinies 657 Rearranging the Menus on a Toolbat cs sssecseeseeseeseeees 657 Creating a New Menu ccccsssscesssseeescesseeeeenseeeseenseesseeees 657 Moving a Menu Off the Toolbar cccccsssseesesssseeseeeeeeeees 659 Changing the Menu s Orientation cccssssscsssssseesseneeeeeeees 660 The Context Sensitive Menu ccscessseeeeeseeseeeens 661 Using eWebEditPro XML s Advanced Features 664 Copying from Other Applications cccsssecsseseeesenseeenees 665 Finding and Replacing Text cccsssccsesesesseeesseeseeeeeeeneens 666 Checking Spelling c cccccsssseccseseecenseecesseeeeneseesensesseees 670 Editing in MicroSoft Word c cccccssecsessecesseeeeseeeenseeeeseees 675 Inserting IMagesS annnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 678 Eiti a E o ete nnne set ote terete ter ese sre eae ae
316. eesseesenseseenseeses 115 Searching the Workarea ccssscsseseeeseseneesenseneneenes 117 Accessing the Search Content Folder Screen 05 117 The Search Published Tab cccccccssseeeeeesseeeseensesseeeseees 118 The Advanced Search Tab cccsseccssseeseeseesennseseenseneeneeees 122 Result Display Options ccccssseeecessseeeeeenseesceeneeseenseeesees 130 Information on the Advanced Search Results Screen 131 Content Workflow Report cc scccssseecesseseenseeeenens 133 Library Folder secessenscsencsesnasseneseenevaceusseaesteeyeccee 134 Terms Used in this Chapter c cccsssseeeessseeesesnseeseeeseees 134 Accessing The Library siniiccitnciccsicsciceccsesdencncnsemevesassensosarnstennness 135 Library Folder Properties cccccscsccsssseessssseeeenseeeeeseseenseeses 137 Searching the LiDrary ccccssssseeeeeseesseeeesseesseeeseneesseessenenees 138 FS A T E E span cous A E E PEE A A A A A 142 BN a E E A E pest A AE E 153 Ne a E E S 153 Quicklinks and FOrmS nnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenne nnmnnn 155 Working with HTML Form 00000 158 Overview Of Form Processing sssscccsssseeeesesseesenseesseeees 160 The Structure of Form Data sccccccsssseeeesseeeseeeseeeseeneees 160 Creating a New PON cctieviuieteniecesticsantevecnnseavevinneienieunniemnesarsawsiad 161 Creating a For
317. elected content Below is an example of the View Content Difference screen showing two versions of content The changes are indicated by e redlining deleted content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 103 Comparing Versions of Content e highlighting in yellow added content A CMS Compare Microsoft Internet Explorer Welcome to RC internNational EC ational is dedicated to the RO racing enthusiasts We eat work play and bve EC ra EC ational has become one of the leading manutactures of RO racing and fying vehucles sport and the enthusiasts who play it has endeared our products to the RO communty We wall improve our attordable products and hope you will become an RC international member Diff Published Staged Within the View Content Difference feature you can perform several tasks as well as view different versions of the content separately or compared The View Content Difference feature is explained through the following topics e When Can Compare Content on page 103 e The Compare Content Window on page 105 e First Use of the View Content Difference Feature on page 110 When Can I Compare Content The View Content Difference feature is only available when e you are viewing an historical version of content e a staged version of the content is available See Also Staged Content on page 691 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 104 Compar
318. ell on page 570 e Splitting a Cell on page 571 e Merging Two Cells on page 572 e Word Wrap on page 573 e Setting Cell Padding and Spacing on page 574 e Setting Abbreviation and Category Attributes on page 578 HTML does not allow you to adjust the width of a cell s border You can also select several cells or a row of cells and change them as described above However you cannot select and change a column of cells selecting Cells to Modify e Modifying a Single Cell on page 563 e Modifying Several Cells on page 563 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 562 Working with Table Cells Modifying a Single Cell If you want to make any of the modifications described in this section to a single cell follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in that cell 2 Right click the mouse 3 Select Set Cell Properties from the menu 4 Make the changes on the Cell Properties dialog 5 Click Update Modifying Several Cells If you want to make any of the modifications described in this section to several cells follow these steps NOTE Most procedures in this section tell you to select Cell Properties from the right click menu To perform an action on several cells select Set Table Properties from the right click menu then click the Cell Properties tab Place the cursor anywhere in the table Right click the mouse Select Set Table Properties from the menu Click the Cell Propertie
319. elp Ektron CMS400 NET users track content activities you can also assign a task to users or user groups whenever a form is submitted For example your Web site offers a free product demonstration to anyone who completes a form Whenever a site visitor submits the form a task is assigned to your sales department s administrative assistant He uses the information on the form to schedule a demonstration The sales manager can review the task history to audit sales leads and ensure demonstration requests are being handled in a timely manner To set up a task that it is assigned to users or groups whenever a site visitor completes the form follow these steps You should be familiar with tasks before beginning this procedure See Also Managing Tasks on page 293 O 1 If you are creating a new form assign the task at Step 3 of the Forms Wizard If you are editing a form assign the task on the form s Edit Properties screen In both cases you identify only users and groups to whom the task will be assigned whenever a site visitor completes the form Ektron CMS400 NET assigns the remaining task information You complete the form and make it available on your Web site A visitor to your site fills out and submits the form A task is created and assigned to users and groups you identified in Step 1 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 197 Working with HTML Forms 5 Any Ektron CMS400 NET user ca
320. em security For the purposes of security assets are treated like other content Your system administrator applies security to each folder determining which user groups can perform which tasks on the content in a folder For more information see the Setting Permissions chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual software Requirements Your production server must run Windows 2003 server or Windows 2000 See Also e Browser Requirements on page 226 e Installing FireFox Plug In on page 227 Browser Requirements Feature Browser Requirements For more information see Edit Microsoft Office Internet Explorer Option does not appear Editing an Office Document on documents within with Firefox page 246 CMS400 NET we Note Firefox users can check an Office document out to their computer edit it using Office then drag and drop the file back into CMS400 NET See Editing a Managed File on page 258 Note If your computer has Windows Vista you must turn off its User Account Control to use this feature For details see http www microsoft com technet technetmag issues 200 7 06 uac default aspx Multiple DMS Documents Internet Explorer Option does not appear Adding Documents Using the Option with other browsers Multiple DMS Documents Option on page 236 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 226 Using the Document Management System Installing FireFox Plug In
321. em Similar to editing and viewing a menu you can remove a menu item from a menu via e its content folder e its menu folder Removing a Menu Item via its Content Folder 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 460 2 Move the cursor over the item NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 3 Click Delete Removing a Menu Item via Menus Module 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 460 Move the cursor over the item Click Delete Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 465 Working with Menus NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with Working with Menus in a Multi Language System NOTE For background information about supporting multiple languages on your Web site see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Multi Language Support gt Additional Multi Language Topics gt Working with Menus in a Multi Language System You can create an edition of any menu in every supported language When a site visitor selects a language navigates to a page that has a
322. em List SelectedDisplay Text Value Disabled Pes see ee eee eee pee seees wees eee a a eee O Option Lok Cancel _ Fields on the Choices Dialog SS Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 624 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 612 Working with HTML Forms SS Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 List Custom You create your own set of choices Use the Item List area to do this See Also Item List on page 615 Languages A standard list of languages Countries A standard list of countries U S States and Territories A standard list of United States of America states and territories Canadian Provinces A standard list of Canadian provinces Age Ranges A standard list of age ranges Numeric Ranges A standard list of numeric ranges Years A standard list of years Gender Male or female Marital Status A standard list marital statuses Allow Click More than one to let a site visitor select more than one item
323. ement System Saving an Office Document as html from Ektron CMS400 NET This procedure assumes the Office document has been saved to Ektron CMS400 NET Procedures for doing this are explained in Importing Office Documents on page 232 See Also Warnings About Saving in html Format on page 252 1 Within the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea open the Content area 2 Open the folder that contains the Office document you want to save as html 3 Hover the cursor over the triangle on the right end of the document you want to save 4 Click Edit in Microsoft Office The document opens within Office From Office s File menu select Save as Web Page In the Save as Type field select Web page Filtered htm html See Also Saving an Office Document as a Web Page on page 253 Save as type XML Document te a Single F Fie Web rae 1 la mhtmi 7 Click he Se button 8 You may be warned about formatting features not supported in HTML Press Continue 9 A dialog prompts you to enter your Ektron CMS400 NET user name and password 10 Ektron CMS400 NET s folders appear in a Save as window The folder that contains the Word document is the default folder Select that or any other Ektron CMS400 NET folder and click Save 11 The Office document is saved as an html file into Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 254 Using the Document Management System
324. emplates to the content Administrator Manual section Managing HTML Content gt Creating Updating Templates Category tab Add edit Any taxonomy categories The Ektron CMS400 NET Taxonomy currently assigned to the Administrator Manual section Category content Taxonomy Edit Content Open content for editing Editing HTML Content on page 52 View History View older versions of content Viewing and Restoring restore older version Previous Content on page 111 View Staged Displays staged content Staged Content on page ix View Difference Compares current and earlier Comparing Versions of versions of content Content on page 101 Peep Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 44 Viewing Content Button or Description For more information see Tab io Delete content Deleting Content on page 60 a Check for Identify all content with Checking for Broken content linked to Quicklinks to this content Quicklinks on page 63 this content Add Task Attach a task to content Task Module Toolbar on vi page 318 View View If you can view content in more language than one language select a language from the drop down list Add Add Lets you copy current content Translating Content to Another select select into a new item and translate it Language on page 59 language language to selected language Properties The content properties screen contains informati
325. en viewed in different browsers To clean your HTML follow these steps 1 Right click the mouse 2 Click Clean Source from the menu 3 eWebEditPro XML cleans your Web page s HTML content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 783 Working with HTML Inserting Content from MS Office If you paste text into eWebEditPro XML from a Microsoft Office 2000 or higher application such as Microsoft Word the following window appears Clean HTML Code c HTML code generated by Office 2000 has been detected There iz excessive HTML code that may prevent you from changing test format You may clean the HTML code later by right clicking and selecting Clean HTML Code Do pou want to clean the HTML code now For best results click Yes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 784 Using Ektron CMS400 NET s Wiki Feature The Wiki feature lets registered site visitors that is membership users and CMS users insert hyperlinks to other content The hyperlinks can connect to existing content or to content that doesn t exist yet If the hyperlink s destination does not yet exist the wiki creates both the hyperlink and the new content item to which it jumps This collaborative authoring style is used in wiki sites such as Wikipedia nttp en wikipedia org where any author can contribute new content and articles Creating a Wiki To create a wiki hyperlink the user needs permission to a
326. ent on page 518 Inserting an Image Prerequisite Before you can insert an image into eWebEdit400 it must be either uploaded to the Library or imported as an asset e Copying Files to the Library on page 143 explains how to upload an image to the Library e Importing Managed Files on page 258 explains how to import an asset Procedure for Inserting an Image To insert an image into the editor follow these steps 1 Place the cursor where you want the image to appear 2 Click the library button Wi Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 503 Working with Images 3 Make sure Images is selected in the content type dropdown circled below Forms Hyperlinks Images Quicklinks 4 From the folder display in the left panel select the folder that contains the image you want to insert i Library CMS400Demo Developer B ImageGallery gt Wiki_Example CMS400 Library For admin If you don t know the image s folder use the search button Eh to find the image by title description or internal file name Select the image you want to insert Click the insert button The image is inserted into the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 504 Working with Images Inserting an Image Thumbnail NOTE As an alternative to inserting an image you can insert a thumbnail a miniature version of the image When the thumbnail appears on a Web pag
327. entify the folder when you want to drag and drop assets to it Click Next 10 The Finish screen appears Dragging and Dropping Assets into a Mapped Network Drive Use Windows Explorer to drag and drop folders or assets into the mapped network folder WARNING Ifa Windows folder has more than 1500 files Windows Explorer may time out while trying to open it To remedy this problem divide your files in that folder into several child folders 1 Open Windows Explorer Resize it so it occupies the left half of the screen 2 Open the folder that contains the folders or assets you want to upload to Ektron CMS400 NET 3 Open a second instance of Windows Explorer Resize it so it occupies the right half of the screen 4 In that window open My Network Places Under that find the mapped network folder you created in Seiting up a Mapped Network Drive on page 242 5 A login screen appears Enter your Ektron CMS400 NET username and password Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 244 Using the Document Management System 6 Open the Ektron CMS400 NET folder into which you want to upload assets or folders 7 From the left window drag and drop assets or folders into the mapped network folder If any of the assets being uploaded is not supported an error message appears An error occurred copying some or all of the selected files However all supported assets are uploaded See Also Supported
328. enu view in English U S CI About Us E Why Choose Ektron LI Business Practices Company Profile D News L Staff List Careers LI Ektron Medical Blog E Forum L site Search L Using the Ektron Explorer 5 Move the cursor over the item you want to edit 6 Click Edit from the popup menu NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 7 To learn about the fields on the screen see Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 442 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 458 Working with Menus Editing a Menu Item via Menus Module To edit a menu via the Menus module follow these steps 1 Access the Menu Report screen as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 461 Click the menu you want to edit The View Menu screen for that menu appears listing all items on the menu View Menu E Why Choose Ektron L Business Practices Company Profile L News L staff List Careers L Ektron Medical Blog D Forum L site Search L Using the Ektron Explorer 4 Move the cursor over the item you want to edit and click Edit from the popup menu NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected
329. enu option 642 paste as new image WeblmageFX command 714 paste text toolbar and menu option 642 pending start date content viii pictures inserting see image upload properties image upload 680 pixels 687 pointer selection WeblmageFX command 714 polls creating 216 625 creating in Workarea 218 626 editing from Web site 221 629 polygon WeblmageFX command 715 position objects menu 647 prerequisites 12 preview button 66 floating toolbar 5 feature 14 print editor content toolbar button 651 profile users updating 470 viewing 470 properties button floating toolbar 5 content 45 publish button 66 content to web site 92 published content block viewing 67 Q quicklinks 776 adding to content 155 broken finding 63 definition 135 using for a collection 425 viewing 155 R rectangle WeblmageFX command 716 red content border color meaning i redisplay toolbars 657 redo toolbar and menu option 642 WeblmageFX command 717 registered trademark character inserting 644 remove alignment toolbar button 650 remove button 66 remove XSLT from XML content block 114 reorder button 66 replace toolbar and menu option 642 replacing text 666 reports content workflow 133 restore toolbar button 66 restoring content 114 right to left editing 648 rotate WeblmageFX command 718 rows table adding 738 deleting 738 spanning 761 specifying 737 S save file to local computer toolbar button 650 to database toolbar button
330. enu screen see Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 442 With the menu added you may assign menu items to it See Adding a Menu Item on page 446 Adding a Menu Item Similar to being able to add edit view or delete a menu Ektron CMS400 NET also allows you to add edit view and delete a menu items See Also The Structure of Menus and Menu Items on page 439 Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder To add a menu item via a content folder follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content folder that contains the menu to which you want to add items Click View gt Menus 3 Click the menu that you want to add items to In the View Language dropdown list select the language of the menu See Also Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page 466 5 The View Menu screen opens displaying the items already on the menu Submenus look like a folder with a plus sign to the left amp 5 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 446 Working with Menus 6 To add anew item to the selected menu or any submenus on it move the cursor over the menu item and click Add from the popup menu View Menu A es i NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 7 The Add New Item screen appears Use the table below to select a type of me
331. er You do not need to know HTML to use eWebEditPro XML However if you Know HTML you can view insert or edit your Web page s HTML code This section explains e Viewing and Editing HTML on page 781 e Inserting Source on page 782 e Cleaning Source Code on page 783 e Inserting Content from MS Office on page 784 Viewing and Editing HTML When you choose to view your page as HTML the editor cleans the content using a method determined by your Webmaster For more information see Cleaning HTML in the eWebEditPro XML Developer s Reference Guide To view your page s HTML follow these steps 1 Click the View as HTML button e or right click the mouse and click View as HTML from the menu 2 EIEC ll Clean HTML Hyperlink Insert HTML ow View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Cheb ira Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 781 Working with HTML 2 The HTML code appears While viewing the code you can edit it using editor functions such as Cut Copy Paste and Replace To select all content press lt Ctrl gt lt A gt You can also set default values for the style size and color in which the HTML appears To do this right click the mouse and click Preferences When you do a dialog box appears in which you can enter formatting information about the HTML code View Preferences i oS Cancel Font Size Font Name Caune These settings will be used whenever
332. er Manual Version 7 6 801 Inserting Comments within Content Other users can add comments to your comments This feature is know as Content Collaboration Similar to other word processing programs comments can be added updated and tracked to audit changes being made This section explains the content collaboration feature WARNING Do not confuse these comments which are inserted within the content with history comments which are inserted outside the content and used to indicate what changed during an editing session Adding Comments to Content To add a comment to content follow these steps 1 Create new content or edit existing content See Also Adding HTML Content on page 48 2 Inthe editor place the cursor where you want to insert the comment On the editor toolbar click the Insert Comment button The Ektron CMS Comment window opens Insert a comment Use the toolbar to format the text if desired Click the Insert button The comment is saved Click the Close button The comment window closes and a comment icon is placed where the comment was added to the content oe ey a ae Oy e Be KZ H I O E E SS ec icome to RC internationi gt 2 AC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and live RC ra 135 became one of the leading manufactures of RC racing Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 802 Inserting Comments within Content Each comment appears in the
333. er Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 159 Working with HTML Forms e Viewing Form Information on page 206 e Editing a Form on page 212 e Mailto or Database Form on page 214 e Deleting a Form on page 214 e View Form Toolbar on page 215 e Creating Polls and Surveys on page 216 Overview of Form Processing Step For more information see 1 Create a form Creating a New Form on page 161 2 Assign it to a Web page Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 196 3 Site visitor goes to your Web site and completes form Form is mailed to an email address saved to a database or both 4 View submitted form data and Viewing Form Reports on page 199 download it to a spreadsheet The Structure of Form Data Forms reside within the root folder or one of its subfolders A form has the following components e Form title ID number whether the form data is sent as email and or saved to a database etc e Content information title start and or end date status postback message etc e Form fields plain text field password field text area hidden text choices checkbox select list calendar submit button etc Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 160 Working with HTML Forms Creating a New Form The screen you use to create a new form has five simple steps After you complete the steps you have a new form that s ready to collect the information you need T
334. ere results must match each filter For example if you select the Tags filter and the Display Name filter results must match the criteria in both to appear in the results box If a user or community group matches only one filter it does not appear in the results Here is a detailed example Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 399 My Workspace John is searching for another member named Jane who has tagged herself as a writer John decides to add Jane as colleague and searches for her by selecting the Tags filter and First Name filter In the tags filter John enters Writer In the First Name filter John enters Jane When the search is complete Jane appears in the search results If Jane did not match the criteria in both filters she would not show up in the search results In addition to the criteria listed in a Basic Search you can perform an advanced search based on a taxonomy category If you do not see the Category filter in the drop down list ask your administrator if your site has a taxonomy for its users To use categories to find a user select Category from the Users filter and place a check mark in the appropriate User Categories check boxes Next click the search button Any users assigned to the categories appear Directory Basic Search User Categories Ea Users Category Select 7 4 Occupation 3 Education Add Filter Groups Group Tags Add Filter search Nothing to
335. esce beet t i bj Properties Metadata Subjects Web Alerts Remove Roll Link Link Name URL http www testscottsblog com Short Description Test site for Scott s blog Relationship Edit Remove Roll Link Link Name Toby Tylers Blog URL http www _tttestsblog com Short Description Test site for Toby s blog Relationship frend colleague Add New Roll Link R 6 A dialog box appears Microsoft Internet Explorer 2 Are you sure you want to remove the last Roll Link 7 Click OK if you want to remove the last blog roll link You can continue to remove subjects at the end of the list by clicking the Remove Last Subject link 8 Click Save M Removing a Blog Roll Link Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 339 Blogs To remove any blog roll link on the list follow these steps 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site access the blog s menu from the site click Properties NOTE To remove a blog roll link from the Web site you must be logged in 2 Click View gt Folder Properties Click the Edit Properties button L Click the Blog Roll tab Find the blog roll link to be removed Click Remove Roll Link above the Link Name to be removed op Th wer Edit Properties for the folder GBNB l P Properties Metadata Subjects Web Alerts Remove Roll Link Link Name URL http www test
336. escription of each function Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 696 Editing Images File Menu Options Brief Description For more information see Toolbar Command Button Create New Creates a new image Create New on page 06 Open Selects an image to edit Open on page 712 Save Saves changes to an image Save on page 718 Saves the current image under a Save As on page 719 different name or format Save As Performs a single page scan Twain Acquire on Twain Acquire Before scanning you must select a page 723 source using the Twain Source command Allows the user to select a source for Twain Source on acquiring an image such as a page 723 scanner or digital camera Twain Source Exit Save changes and return to Exit on page 708 eWebEditPro XML Exit without save Ignore changes return to Exit without Save on eWebEditPro XML page 09 Edit Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button information see Copies a selected area of an image Copy on page 706 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 697 Toolbar Command Brief Description Button paste as new Inserts copied image or area into a image new file Editing Images For more information see Paste as New Image on page 14 Reverses the most recent action Undo on page 724 mu redo Reapplies the changes from the comm
337. ess 5 Submit B Publish content to Web site Publish ee E Note If the content has any active tasks a comments window pops up You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affects the task Note Only the last approver in the approval chain sees this button ps Save and check in content This button does not submit the Eil Check In content into the approval process but rather lets other users change it mi Save the content without submitting it into the approval process Save If a user clicks save and then closes the editor other users cannot edit the content This button appears if you are the next approver in the approval list Click it to decline the changes made to the content Note If content has any active tasks a comments window pops up You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affects the task Close the editor without saving changes Next click the Save and Submit or Publish button Eh The form only appears on your Web site after it is published After you complete and save the form it may need to go through the approval process When that is complete add it to the site by assigning it to a page template See Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 621 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 595 Working with HTML Forms Form Validation You can apply validation rules to text or calendar field types Valida
338. eted This status only remains until the start date is reached At that point the content is deleted Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 Appendix A Content Statuses Approved Content If content has a green border it is live on the Web site A CME200 i is ontrolled from this astra ete eV ee ceive lee civic e te aes ce ke red Seek Le When content is approved you can perform the following actions on it depending on your permissions Dropdown Description For more information see Menu Option Check out and Check content out and save on Checking Out Saving and your computer Replacing an Office Document on page 250 Save copy of file to your Saving an Office Document on computer page 251 Edit or Edit in Check out the content to Editing HTML Content on Editing a Managed File on page 258 Editing an Office Docu ment on page 246 Edit Properties Edit content s summary metadata schedule comment etc View View in View all information about Viewing Content from the Office or View content Workarea on page 41 Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 i Appendix A Content Statuses Dropdown Description For more information see Menu Option Delete Submit a request to delete the Deleting Content on page 60 content If you are the last or only approver the content is immediately deleted See Also
339. eveloper s Guide section Customizing Validation However the file that maintains custom validation is different for HTML forms it is siteroot workarea ContentDesigner ValidateSpace xml Your system administrator determines if a user can save the invalid data When the Custom Validation option is selected from the Validation field the Custom Validation screen area becomes active Custom Validation Data Type Condition Examples e The Data Type field is the value s basic type for example text number or URL e The Condition field displays the validation logic e The Examples drop down list shows validation expressions that you can apply to the field Example of Creating Custom Validation As an example of custom validation assume that a field collects telephone numbers and you want to make sure the user enters 10 digits To accomplish this follow these steps 1 Insert a Text Field 2 Complete the Text Field dialog s General tab 3 Click the Validation tab 4 In the Validation dropdown list select Custom Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 607 Working with HTML Forms Text Field General Validation Data Style 5 Inthe Data Type field select Whole Number from the drop down list This ensures that the user can only enter digits Text Field General Validation Data Style Custom ral Message Custom Validation Data Type Whole number Plain text
340. evision 5 546 Working with Tables Specifying Table Width or Height by Pixels Specify table width or height by pixels if you want the table size to remain the same when a user resizes the browser For example if you specify that a table is 610 pixels wide and the user s browser is set to low resolution 640 x 480 pixels the table occupies the full width of the browser when it is maximized lf the user resizes the browser so that it only occupies the left half of the screen only the left half of the table appears A scroll bar appears at the bottom of the browser The user must move the scroll bar to see the rest of the table FF Netscape File Edit View Go Communicator Help Back Reload Home Search Netscape Table Properties lz Setting Table Width by Pixels 47 Q Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 Working with Tables To specify table width or height by pixels follow these steps Place the cursor within the table Right click the mouse Select Set Table Properties Click the Table Properties tab In the Dimensions section of the Table Properties tab enter the number of pixels at the Width or Height field aoe oe Ne Table Wizard E Table Design Y Fa Table Properties Dimensions Width 610px px Height pe a Lavout Specifying Horizontal Alignment You can specify your table s horizontal alignment left right or center within the browser E
341. evision 5 708 Editing Images Exit without Save Standard Toolbar Button hle Description Ignore changes made to the image in WeblmageFX Return to eWebEditPro XML Freehand Standard Toolbar Button P Description Lets you draw a line in any shape that you want similar to using a pen on paper To use this command click the freehand command drag the line and release the mouse To change the line s size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 709 Editing Images Horizontal Flip Standard Toolbar Button Description Reverses an image horizontally left to right Click this command again to reverse the image horizontally right to left Image before horizontal flip Image after horizontal flip Image Info Standard Toolbar Button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 710 Editing Images i Description Displays information about an image e image name e height and width in pixels e bit depth See Also Specifying Color Depth on page 725 e file format Line Standard Toolbar Button ie Description Draw a Straight line To change a line s size or color right click it after drawing it To use this command click the line command drag the line and release the mouse To change the line s size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse b
342. evision 5 788 Using Ektron CMS400 NET s Wiki Feature lf you applied a link to related content a regular hyperlink appears Creating a Wiki Link Using Square Brackets To create a wiki link using square brackets follow these steps 1 Begin editing a content item For CMS users this is explained in Editing HTML Content on page 52 For membership users this is explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Managing Content Folders gt Community Folders 2 Move the cursor to the left of the text to which you want to assign a wiki hyperlink It can be one or several words 3 Insert two open square brackets Move the cursor to the end of the text to which you want to assign a wiki hyperlink Insert two close square brackets 6 Save the content Effect of Linking to Existing Content If you link to existing content the link is the same as quicklink See Using a Quicklink on page 776 Effect of Linking to New Content If you are creating new content Ektron CMS400 NET assigns a lt span gt tag to the selected text See example below lt Span class makelink gt selected text here lt span gt When the content is published Ektron CMS400 NET 1 detects the lt span class makelink gt tag 2 finds text surrounded by the lt span gt tag 3 creates a new content block in the selected folder NOTE Membership users cannot select a folder The new content is create
343. f the folder s title Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 374 My Workspace Documents Eiai Workspace 3 The Edit Folder box appears Name Documents 4 Change the name of the folder 5 Click the Save button Save When the page refreshes it opens to the folder with changed name Documents re es 2 en ee Workspace New Documents 1 No subcategory exists sample 4 this is a sample content block under the documents sR Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 375 My Workspace Deleting a Folder in My Workspace gt gt Documents You can delete obsolete folders from My Workspace gt gt Documents To delete a folder follow these steps NOTE You can not delete the top level folder Workspace CAUTION Deleting a folder permanently deletes all assets and HTML content as well as its subfolders 1 In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Documents 2 Click the folder s Edit button 421 This button is located to the left of the folder s title Documents 3 The Edit Folder box appears 4 Click the Delete button Delete 5 A dialog box appears asking you to confirm deleting the folder 6 Click OK 7 The page refreshes and the folder is removed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 376 My Workspace Adding Assets to My Workspace gt gt Documents Assets are files that are not HTML
344. first appears value click True Otherwise click False A site visitor can change the default value while completing the screen Caption Enter text to guide the user s response to this field The caption appears on the screen to the right of the checkbox To continue the above example the caption would be Check if you are over 65 Inserting a Text Field Use a text field when you want the user to enter a free text response or to display text on the screen There are many variations you can apply to such a field such as e a default value e text can be read only or hidden e the field can expand to accommodate user input e validation requiring user input to meet criteria such as a non negative whole number or a zip code To insert a text field follow these steps 1 Enter a field label For example Name 2 Place the cursor where you want the text field to appear Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 598 Working with HTML Forms 3 Click the Text field button abl 4 The following dialog appears Text Field General Validation Data Style Descriptive Name Field Name Field 1 Tool Tip Text Default value il Options d Cannot be changed L Invisible d Password field Fields on the Text Field Dialog General Tab NOTE If you are using FireFox you cannot enter text into a text field while creating or editing the form If you need to prefill a text field with text us
345. follow the procedure described in Viewing Files on page 145 The only difference is that you view a hyperlink instead of a file Editing Hyperlinks To edit a hyperlink follow the procedure described in Editing a File on page 147 The only difference is that you edit a hyperlink title instead of a file title You can also edit the URL Adding Hyperlinks to Your Content Once a hyperlink is added to the library users can add the hyperlink to their content To add a hyperlink to content follow the procedure described in Adding a Library File to Content on page 150 The only difference is that you add a hyperlink instead of a file Images For a definition of the term images see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 134 Uploading Images You must copy images to the library before content creators can insert them into content To copy an image to the library follow the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 153 Library Folder procedure described in Copying Files to the Library on page 143 The only difference is that you add an image instead of a file NOTE When an image is uploaded to the Media tab for a product in the eCommerce feature the original image and any thumbnails associated with it are added to the Library For example if you add an image named Testlmage actual file name case jpg with a 150px and 50px thumbnails you will see the following entries in your librar
346. follow these steps 1 Navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Sent Colleague Requests 2 Place a check mark in the checkbox next to each colleague whose request you want to cancel 3 Click the Cancel Colleague Requests button o 4 A dialog box appears asking you to confirm that you are canceling the colleague requests 5 Click OK Resending an Invitation To resend an invitation follow these steps 1 Navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Sent Colleague Requests lf necessary add a message to the Optional Message box 3 Place a check mark in the boxes next to the users that you want to re send an invitation 4 Click the Resend Invitation button The pages refreshes and returns to the My Sent Invites screen Community Groups Another aspect of a community site is the concept of Community Groups Being a part of a group allows you meet people with a similar interest for example car racing Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 405 My Workspace You can access your community group information in My Workspace gt Community Groups This area allows you to e view community groups to which you belong see Viewing Your Community Groups on page 406 e remove yourself from a community group see Remove Yourself from a Community Group on page 406 e view the different community groups to which you have asked to join but have yet to be accepted see Working with
347. for this Selection field Otherwise click Only one to limit the user to one choice A selection is required Check this box if the user must select at least one item First item is not a valid selection You can use the first list item to prompt the user to make a selection instead of being a valid response For example the first item may say Select from the list To do so check this box If you do the site visitor must choose any selection except the first item If he tries to file the screen without choosing a different item this error message appears First item is not a valid selection Note This option is only available if Appearance is set to Drop List Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 613 Working with HTML Forms SS Appearance Click Vertical List to arrange the choices vertically LOE O art emusic f sports Click Horizontal List to arrange the choices horizontally Ll e at music sports Click List Box to display all choices in a box If more than four choices are available the user scrolls to see additional options Select day s when you are available Tyesday Wednesday Click Drop List to display all choices in a dropdown list When the user clicks the down arrow all entries appear Interests Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 614 Working with HTML Forms SS Item List This section of the screen displays the list items It is only
348. g a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 447 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link ona Web Page on page 448 NOTE You can only add content that resides in the menu s content folder or its subfolders 2 Click the radio button next to Content Block 3 Click the Next button 4 The Add New item screen appears listing all content in the folder and its subfolders in which you created the menu 5 By default all content is available To limit your selection to a type of content for example Word documents click the content types dropdown and select a type Add New Item About All Types W T All Types HTML Content Office Documents Managed Files Mlultimedia Chen Office k F LU LI L 6 Content items in the selected folder appear below any subfolders You can click any subfolder to display its content 7 Check all content you want to add from any single screen to the menu WARNING If you check items on a screen then proceed to another screen before clicking the Add button the items on the first screen are not added to the menu 8 Click the Add button EH 9 The View Menu screen reappears showing the new content 10 To access the Edit Menu Item screen for the new content hover the cursor over the item then click Edit from the popup menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 450 Working with Menus NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across
349. g a Single Content Item on page 61 Like publishing deleted content must proceed through the approval chain before it is removed If you are the last approver in the approval chain the content is deleted immediately See Also Approving Declining Content on page 90 Deleting a Single Content Item To delete one content item follow these steps Deleting One Content Item from a Web Page To delete content from a Web page follow these steps Sign in Browse to the content you want to delete Click the Delete menu option oe Dp The View Content screen for the selected content appears See Viewing Content on page 40 5 Click the Delete button i Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 61 Deleting Content 6 The following message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer X This content will be deleted once the entire list of approvers has approved this request 2 Are vou sure vou wish bo submit this content block to the approvers For deletion a This action will also delete any library quicklinks associated with the content block Continue Cancel 7 Click OK to delete the content Deleting One Content Item from the Workarea 1 Access the View Contents of Folder screen for the content you want to delete as described in Viewing Content on page 40 Hover the cursor over the triangle 4l Select Delete from the dropdown menu Sample Content Block NO
350. g a Task on page 307 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 318 Blogs Blogs short for Web Logs are a form of online information sharing A blog is often set up so a group of people can share their thoughts on a subject One person creates the main post and other comment on post In addition blogs can be used to create an online diary of everyday life In the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea blogs and blog posts have a relationship similar to folders and content The blog is the equivalent of a folder and blog posts are the equivalent of content items While blogs and blog posts have a few unique properties they mostly work the same as folders and content On your Web site blogs are arranged so the latest post appears at the top This differs from paper diaries because you are reading the newest material first instead of the oldest Because blogs are laid out this way site visitors can quickly find the most recent entries Blogs are made up of multiple elements These elements allow site visitors to view or create a blog post add comments and see a roll call of associated blogs In addition if a blog calendar is present on the blog site visitors can see which days have blog posts Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 319 Blogs Jaa February 02 06 2006 E Writing a Masterpiece iniae Tm gonna write the melody That s gonna make history Yeah and when I paint my masterpiece I s
351. g and Restoring Previous Content Comparing Historical Versions After you select an historical version of content you can view the differences between it and the current version To compare an historical version follow these steps NOTE You can only View Differences if there are two or more published versions of the content Open the content folder that contains the content Click the content item 2 3 Click the History toolbar button Hi 4 Select an historical version of the content 5 Click the View Differences button EA The historical and the current versions are compared To learn more about the comparison see Comparing Versions of Content on page 101 Removing Applied XSLT You can only remove an applied XSLT when viewing historical versions of XML content If you remove the applied XSLT you can view the content without the irrelevant XML tags The following table compares the views Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 115 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content With XSLT Product Name RC Redstar Description The RE Redstar is a radio controlled gas powered low wing aircraft This new plane is for beginners intermediates that are looking for a easy plane to learn with or to have fun with The Redstar is easy to fly and easy to maintain Specifications Alrfoil Low Wing Overall Length 57 In Wingspan YLiIn Weight 7 8 lbs Engine Size 60 70 ce Fuel Tank Size
352. g oad Std Ceci od luc Sled eo Salata EE A E oe Sloe Seed SC E A E Guilt Ould A EE Ould E Ge Solute Ost AT E AA ch cals oe Show Tas Assigne Me litle CID State Priority Due Date As Prep to Move Downstairs Not Started Low 4Mar 2005 Edit Greeting Content Block 24 Not Started Normal 7 Mar 2005 Assigned To User Review Task section Not Started High 11 Mar 2005 Not Started Active Awaiting Data On Hold 7 4 D ig A aTi Me From this page you can view sort update or add tasks To learn more about the View Tasks screen see Viewing a Task on page 307 To learn about sorting by Task Type see Sorting Tasks By Task Type on page 311 Creating a Task via the Task Folder See Also Task Module Toolbar on page 318 To create a task follow these steps 1 Access your Tasks folder as described in Accessing the Tasks Folder on page 294 2 Click the Add button E5 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 295 Managing Tasks IMPORTANT The Add button only appears if your system administrator has granted you permission to add tasks For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Permissions 3 The Add Task screen appears Enter information for the task using the following table Field Description Task Title Enter a title for the task for example Update Content The title appears in
353. ge 640 e Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists on page 640 Selecting Text You select text before performing an action on it such as copying it e To select all information on a page press Ctrl A e To select a portion of the information on a page you have two choices Hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor across the data you want to select Hold down the Shift key and the right arrow key l until the desired data is selected Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 639 Toolbar Buttons e To select a single word place the cursor on the word and double click the mouse Selected text has different background and foreground colors as illustrated below Horizontal Sets the horizontal position of the entire Alignment able Border olor Sets the color of the table borders unless Pisce Afani Crataris checker Applying Formatting Attributes to Text Several buttons apply formatting attributes to text such as bold and italics There are two ways to apply these attributes e Enter the text Then select the text and press the toolbar button The button is now in a pressed in condition and the text has the formatting attribute e Press the toolbar button Then begin typing the text As you type the formatting is applied To stop applying the formatting press the button again This action changes the button to a pressed out condition and terminates the formatting
354. ght The Software including any images applets photographs animations video audio music and text incorporated into the Software as well as any accompanying written materials the Documentation is owned by Ektron or its suppliers is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaties and contains confidential information and trade secrets CUSTOMER agrees to protect the confidentiality of the Software and Documentation CUSTOMER agrees that it will not provide a copy of this Software or Documentation nor divulge any proprietary information of Ektron to any person other than its employees without the prior consent of Ektron CUSTOMER shall use its best efforts to see that any user of the Software licensed hereunder complies with this license 4 Limited Warranty Ektron warrants solely that the medium upon which the Software is delivered will be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal proper and intended usage for a period of three 3 months from the date of receipt Ektron does not warrant the use of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free nor that program errors will be corrected This limited warranty shall not apply to any error or failure resulting from i machine error ii Customer s failure to follow operating instructions iii negligence or accident or iv modifications to the Software by any person or entity other than Company In the event of a breach of warranty Customer
355. gn Cannot be blank the field is surrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Error Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s response to this field Message does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is Cannot be blank the error message could be Please enter a response By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Implementing a Form on a Web Page After you create the form you need to link it to another page on your Web site You would insert the link as you would any form link See Adding a Library File to Content on page 150 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 196 Working with HTML Forms Next open your Web Site navigate to the host page and click the hyperlink to access the form Now you can test the form and make Sure it works as you expected If needed you can return to edit mode change the form and test it again until you are happy with it For more information on this topic see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing HTML Forms Assigning a Task to a Form While tasks typically h
356. gn a new survey Standard Poll Design a new poll Compose Email ch bade rl mama rl om oll mae a NOTE When you choose Standard Poll or Blank Survey the number of steps in the Forms Wizard changes from five to four This happens because the Assign Tasks step is removed See Also Working With Polls on page 217 and Creating a Survey on page 222 5 Choose the form that you want to begin with You can click the preview icon next to any sample form to preview it before choosing it Select a sample that most closely matches the form you want to create After you create it you can add fields remove fields modify possible responses etc 6 Click Next 7 Enter or edit the form s Title and Description e Title used to reference the form within the Workarea required e Description an extended description of the form 8 The next screen lets you assign a task to a user or user group If you do a task will be created every time a site visitor submits this form See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 197 9 Anew screen lets you determine what happens after the site visitor completes the form The choices are Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 162 Working with HTML Forms e Display a message See Composing the Postback Message on page 163 IMPORTANT If your form survey poll uses either Redirect option your Web developer must use a FormBlock server control
357. ground Update Dimensions Additional width C No Wrapping Background Image Cell CS5 C55 Class The following explains how to respond to these fields Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog Lc Eins Abbreviation Sets or retrieves abbreviated text for the content in the tag Can be used to render non visual media such as speech or Braille For more information see http msdn2 microsoft com en us library ms533058 aspx Categories Sets or retrieves a comma delimited list of conceptual categories associated with that tag Can be used to render non visual media such as speech or Braille For more information see http msdn2 microsoft com en us library ms533489 aspx Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 579 Working with HTML Forms NoTE This section explains how to create edit HTML forms using eWebEdit400 If your editor is eWebEditPro XML see Working with HTML Forms on page 158 Ektron CMS400 NET provides powerful online form capabilities allowing you to create an online dialog with visitors Now anyone in your organization not just a developer or Webmaster can create and deploy Web forms to capture visitor information Support marketing strategies by getting feedback on their needs Follow up on their interest in your products and services Register people for events Form capabilities include e Creating a form and its postback message e Creating polls and surveys
358. guage content in the default language appears When creating a collection for a foreign language decide if you want to create Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 433 Working with Collections e a foreign edition of an existing collection or e anew collection in a foreign language For example if you want to provide several versions of a single page that change depending on the language selected by the user see Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Exists on page 434 On the other hand if you are creating a collection to appear only on a foreign language page and no other edition of the collection will appear on your site see Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Does Not Exist on page 434 You can only add content in the language of a collection So create the content first then create the collection that links to them Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Exists 1 Click the content folder in which your collection exists The folder s contents are displayed Click View gt Collection The View Collections screen is displayed Select the collection that you want to translate From the Add drop down list select the language of the new collection a amp N 6 Using the Add button ca select the content to add to the collection Navigate through the folders to the content you want to add You can only add content in the
359. h Search Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 117 Searching the Workarea The Workarea search has two tabs e the left tab Search Published is like the Site Search See The Search Published Tab on page 118 e the right tab Advanced Search lets you search by internal properties such as title status and comments See The Advanced Search Tab on page 122 The Search Published Tab The Search Published tab within the Workarea finds content that satisfies these criteria e status is published e active archived content is ignored however the Advanced Search finds archived content See The Advanced Search Tab on page 122 e you have read only or greater permission for the content s folder e content is public However private content is available to those with permission to view it such as membership users after logging in See Also Private Content amp Memberships section of the Managing Users amp User Groups chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual e matches selected language if site is multi lingual See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Working with Multi Language Content e the content s Content Searchable check box is checked e is nota non image file added to the library Images are searchable while other files added to the library are not So to make files searchable add them as assets not library files e conte
360. h http www microsoft com virtualearth product terms html If you have any questions would like to find out more about a MWS VE Agreement please contact maplic microsoft com for information Google Maps http code google com apis maps terms html 7 Miscellaneous This License Agreement the License granted hereunder and the Software may not be assigned or in any way transferred without the prior written consent of Ektron This Agreement and its performance and all claims arising from the relationship between the parties contemplated herein shall be governed by construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of New Hampshire without regard to conflict of laws principles thereof The parties agree that any action brought in connection with this Agreement shall be maintained only in a court of competent subject matter jurisdiction located in the State of New Hampshire or in any court to which appeal therefrom may be taken The parties hereby consent to the exclusive personal jurisdiction of such courts in the State of New Hampshire for all such purposes The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is specifically excluded from governing this License If any provision of this License is to be held unenforceable such holding will not affect the validity of the other provisions hereof Failure of a party to enforce any provision of this Agreement shall not constitute or be construed as a waiver of such p
361. hanges in the content s status Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 95 Approving Declining Content First Approver After Sports Writer submits the content the first user in the approval chain Sports Editor receives an email stating content needs his approval He can change and approve the content or decline it Sports Editor logs into Ektron CMS400 NET navigates to his desktop where he sees a link Content Awaiting Approval User iai x E a e a k Oo be T EER GECA O TALE O EEE E AOA e Ss 6 eee ee a a ee we a a a a a a a a a Smart Desktop for John Edit Content Awaiting Approval 2 5 L Content Currently Checked Out 2 Tasks 0 He clicks the link and sees all content awaiting his approval The approvals folder window displays information such as title who submitted it go live date etc The Sports editor clicks the submitted content View All Content Approval Content Meta Data A Native NET Costan Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 96 Approving Declining Content The View Content Awaiting Approvals window appears listing all information necessary to decide whether to approve or decline the content At the approval window the Sports Editor has these options Send content to next approver in chain Approve Ezy EB Send email to creator notifying him her that content was Decline Ey mole declined 2 Remove content from approv
362. hat type only Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 277 Working with Calendars From the View Calendar screen you can perform the following tasks Note that the Add and View buttons appear on each calendar day while the Return button is on the toolbar at the top of the screen Click on More Information Add Calendar Event Adding a Calendar Event on page 280 View Calendar Events Viewing a Calendar Event on page 287 Return to Previous Screen Return to previous screen Event title within calendar sample below f Eee Ed RC International Announces the RC Jump to calendar event s Web page if available See Also Working with Calendars on page 268 Tips on Viewing a Calendar e The monthly calendar displays the current month In the intranet sample today is highlighted in yellow illustrated below At the top of the calendar are the previous and next months Click them to view those months lt lt March April Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday AS al birthday party Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 278 Working with Calendars e Where an event appears move the cursor over it to see a popup box with the event name location and start and end times lf a Web page is linked to the event you can click the event name to jump to that page e Click the number that represents any day to view detail for that day illustrated below
363. he ranges on the screen after you choose this option Numeric Ranges Use the predefined choices for numeric ranges You can see the ranges on the screen after you choose this option Gender Use the predefined choices for gender You can see the values on the screen after you choose this option Marital Status Use the predefined choices for marital status You can see the values on the screen after you choose this option Allow Click More than one to allow the site visitor to select more than one item on Selection the data entry screen Otherwise click Only one For example if you click More than one and the choices are music art sports the user could select all three choices If you click Only one the user could only select one choice A selection is required Check this box if the user must select at least one item in the list Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 189 Working with HTML Forms SS Appearance Click Vertical List to arrange the choices vertically a art music f sports Click Horizontal List to arrange the choices horizontally Ll e at music sports Click List Box to display all choices in a box The box lengthens to display all entries Interests MUSIC sports Item Enter the value that is collected when the data entry user selects this item Value For example if Interests appears in the Name field and you want music to be collected when the data entry use
364. he toolbar 4 To adda menu to your toolbar that appears on the list but is not currently checked place the cursor on the menu name and click the mouse A check mark appears and the menu appears on the toolbar To remove a menu from your toolbar place the cursor on the menu name and click the mouse The check mark disappears and the menu no longer appears on the toolbar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 653 Customizing Your Toolbar Removing or Adding Menu Items 1 Place the cursor on the toolbar 2 Right click the mouse 3 A dropdown list appears Click Customize iv Edit e View As ve Paragraph Format eS Format ve Special Characters Form Elements Table Position Objects Test Direction Customize NOTE If Customize does not appear on the menu you are not authorized to customize the toolbar 4 The Toolbar Customization dialog box appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 654 Customizing Your Toolbar Toolbar Customization Special Characters Form Elements Table Position Objects C Text Direction EE 5 Click the menu that you want to edit 6 Click the Commands tab A new screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 655 Customizing Your Toolbar Toolbar Customization Bullets Bulleted List g Button s Ada gA Cell Properties m Bemave Center Align Center we Check Spelling t
365. he Match whole words only box Find EEE Find Find Next Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 499 Checking Spelling NOTE This section describes the spell check software installed with eWebEdit400 If you use the FireFox browser it has its own spell check software To eliminate confusion between eWebEdit400 s and Firefox s spell checker Ektron suggests disabling Firefox s This is set on Firefox s Tools gt Options dialog gt General Tab gt Check my spelling as I type check box To begin spell checking click the spell check button When you do eWebEdit400 underscores in red each word that s not in the dictionary Then it stops at the first misspelled word and displays your options for fixing the problem Spell checking mode Misspelled words are indicated with a red wave underscore ___ Finis At ektron Medical we focus on eelan peop e with some of the most complex 2 disorders and kidney e evices ceutical and biotechnology to ere a mea n E ants ives With the ide solutions that make a a in people s B Our successful with Ektron s new project management starter USE The Spelling Options Option Use this option if you want to One or more similar Replace highlighted word with one from the list To do this click the correctly spelled words correct word Ignore Ignore All Don t want to change the highlighted word nor do you want to add it to the dictionary
366. he Web page that contains the link to display the menu 2 Click the menu link Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 456 Working with Menus 3 The menu appears Click Edit Menu The View Menu screen for the menu appears Move the cursor over the menu that you want to edit ot oY or oS Click Edit from the popup menu NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 8 The Edit Menu screen is displayed 9 Update the fields by referencing Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 442 10 Click the Save button 4 Editing a Menu Item This section explains how to edit the following types of menu items e content on your Web site e library asset e link to an external Web site e submenu You can edit a menu item via e its content folder e menus module Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 457 Working with Menus e navigation link on a Web page See Also Working with Menus on page 437 Editing a Menu Item via its Content Folder To edit a menu item from its content folder follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea and navigate to the content folder that contains the menu Click View gt Menus Click the menu you want to edit 4 The View Menu screen for that menu appears listing all menu items View M
367. he Workarea button at the bottom of the screen lt workarea or the Workarea button in the content s floating toolbar The Workarea appears 3 The following illustrates one of several screens that may appear in the Workarea Your system administrator determines which screen appears for you Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 16 The Workarea and Smart Desktop 1 X Smart Desktop For admin 1Smart Desktop a Tasks pega elie He Reports 22 45 Messaging Content Community Content Awaiting A roval 0 a Forum Topics and Posts 0 L Content Currently Checked Out 7 Content Reviews 1 ES Content To Expire 0 Content Flags 0 eee al Tasks a Commerce e Recent Orders 0 Form Submission Tasks 1 A Orders On Hold 0 Closing the Workarea To close the Workarea click in the upper right corner of the window When you close the Workarea you return to the Ektron CMS400 NET view of your Web site You do not exit Ektron CMS400 NET Understanding the Smart Desktop The Smart Desktop is one of Ektron CMS400 NET s main screens To access it from wherever you are working in Ektron CMS400 NET click the button in the top left corner circled below i 927 768 G2 72 ChE a4 Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 17 The Workarea and Smart Desktop The Smart Desktop consists of three sections illustra
368. he content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 418 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 421 3 Click the collection to which you want to assign content Title ID Date Modified New Collection 21 8 17 2005 10 25 28 AM 4 The View Collection screen appears 5 Accept or change the language view Collection New Collection German standard French Standard 6 Click the Add button 7 7 The Add Items to Collection screen appears displaying e all subfolders within the selected folder Subfolders are available if the Include subfolders checkbox was checked for the collection Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 427 Working with Collections e content in the selected folder that is not part of the collection Note that the file types selection remembers your most recent choice and can filter which files appear You can change the selection if desired Add items to Collection New Collection All Types At E eae All Types gnt TML Content Office Documents Managed Files 5 Books io Calendar Language ic CeanturyMedicalServices contacts Dynamic Content In Content Fao O Form Example C IntranetBasic O press Releases m Purchase Orders CO B AddOnRegistrationProcess doc 381 1033 8 Check boxes ne
369. he displayed content This feature is useful before deleting content because it informs you of every content item that will include a dead link if you delete a content item You should then edit that content and remove or change the obsolete Quicklinks To use the link checker follow these steps 1 Access the View Content page for the content whose links you want to check as described in Viewing Content on page 40 2 Click the Link Search button a Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 63 Workarea Toolbar Buttons 3 A page lists each content item that links to the current content Click the title to access the View Content page for the selected content 5 Remove or change the Quicklink Workarea Toolbar Buttons Many Workarea screens feature a toolbar that contains buttons for performing actions This section explains the buttons functions a e e Add Calendar Event Accesses the add calendar event screen in the Workarea E Add Content In a content folder opens the editor and allows you to create Cl new content See Also Adding HTML Content on page 48 Add Content Folder In a content folder allows you to create a subfolder to further organize your content See Also Workarea Toolbar Buttons on page 64 ils a hyperlink or Quicklink to use in content See Also Library Folder on page 134 Add Task Assign task to a user See Also Managing Tasks on page 293
370. he editor options in the site s web config file using the following settings lt appSettings gt EditControlWin may be either ContentDesigner or eWebEditPro or UserPreferred gt lt add key ek_EditControlWin value UserPreferred gt lt EditControlMac Only ContentDesigner gt lt add key ek_EditControlMac value ContentDesigner gt lt appSettings gt The table below contains information about both editors Operating Web Config file key Possible editor key values System Windows ek EditControlWin Anam ips ContentDesigner use to load eWebEdit400 UserPreferred loads editor selected by user at Con tent and Forum Editor field in User Profile See Also Content and Forum Editor on page 474 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 482 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Editors Operating Web Config file key Possible editor key values System convent designes use to load eWebEdit400 The following sections explain how to use the eWebEditPro XML and eWebEdit400 editors Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 483 Introduction to eWebEdit400 eWebEdit400 is a browser based Web content editor designed for dynamic Web sites It lets you create and publish your own Web content in any language supported by the operating system and your Web site NOTE To learn how to enable eWebEdit400 for all clients that connect to your server see Setti
371. he page _ Click Change All Correct the spelling of the word by typing it and continue Click in the Not In Dictionary spell checking the page field Correct the spelling Click Change Leave the word as is continue spell checking the page Click Ignore You would normally do this if a word such as a company name is spelled correctly even though it is not in the dictionary Leave the word as is continue spell checking the page ignoring all other occurrences of the word Stop spell checking Click Cancel Click Ignore All Spell Checking Selected Text To check the spelling for a single word or a group of words follow these steps 1 Select the text that you want to spell check 2 Press the manual spell check button 7 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 672 Checking Spelling 3 The spell checker reviews the words in the selected text and stops at any word not in the dictionary For documentation of options when a misspelled word is found see The Spelling Dialog Box on page 672 4 When the spell checker finishes reviewing the words in the selected text it displays the following message Finished checking selection Do you want to check the rest of the document Click Yes to spell check the rest of the document including text above the selected text Click No to stop the spell checker Setting Spell Check Options eWebEditPro XML can use Microsoft Word s spell che
372. he site visitor can change it while completing the screen Inserting a Hidden Text Field When the form is submitted this field can pass information that the site visitor doesn t need to know about such as a tracking number This is typically data to be stored in the database and or emailed along with the rest of the data To insert a hidden text field follow these steps Place a hidden text field fab onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 170 The following dialog appears N Hidden text field Descriptive Name Field 1 Field Hame Field Tool Tip Text Field 1 Value coe Fields on the Hidden Text Field Dialog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 177 Working with HTML Forms Ci Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 199 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Value Enter the value that will be saved with this field when the form is submitted Inserting a Text F
373. he spell check feature does not use the other fields on this screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 674 Editing in Microsoft Word lf your computer has Microsoft Word 2000 or greater you can edit content within Word You may prefer to do this because of familiarity with Word s user interface and to use additional functionality available in Word See Also Working with Microsoft Office Documents on page 229 NOTE Some Word formatting may not be compatible with HTML and as a result not be transferred to eWebEditPro XML To edit with Word follow these steps 1 Open eWebEditPro XML Press the Word toolbar button ff The following dialog may appear warning you that some Word formatting may not be transferred back to eWebEditPro XML Press Yes if you still want to edit in Word Edit in ford You are about to edit pour document in MS Word Due to the limitations of HTML there may be a loss of formatting when returning the document to the editor Do you wish to proceed 4 Microsoft Word opens Any content that was in eWebEditPro XML when you pressed the Word button is copied to Word Edit content as desired Press File gt Close 7 Another warning like the one in Step 3 may appear Press Yes to copy the edited content back to eWebEditPro XML Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 675 Editing in Microsoft Word 8 When done return to eWebEditPro XML and press the Wo
374. hich your Web developer inserted the link to display the menu 2 Click the link that launches the menu on the Web page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 462 Working with Menus 3 A menu is displayed For information on how to display a menu on a Web page refer to the section on menus in the Developers and Administrator Manuals Reordering Menu Items To rearrange the items on a menu follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View Menu screen for the menu that you want to rearrange See Viewing a Menu on page 460 Move the cursor over the menu and click Reorder The Reorder Items screen appears Reorder tems Contact Information Contact Form Site Map Deweloper Click the item you want to move 5 Click the up arrow to move it up or the down arrow to move it down 6 When finished click Save E Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 463 Working with Menus Deleting a Menu Similar to editing and viewing a menu you can delete a menu via e its content folder e menus module You cannot delete a menu from the navigation link on a Web page Deleting a Menu via Content Folder To delete a menu via its content folder follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 460 2 Move the cursor over the menu and click Delete NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving
375. hoices are No validation response is not checked Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked Minimum of 8 characters with at least one digit Site visitor s entry must be at least 8 characters and include one digit If you assign to this field any value other than No validation the field is surrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Error Message Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s response to this field does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is Minimum of 8 characters with at least one digit the error message could be Please enter at 8 or more characters with at least one digit By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks 7 appear instead of the characters Inserting a Text Area Field Use a text area field when you want the site visitor to enter an unformatted free text response A text area field is similar to a Text Field except it scrolls vertically to accept more text To insert a text area field follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 184 Working with HTML Forms 1 Place a text area
376. ht corner Basic colors EE ERED Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 760 Working with Table Cells 3 Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Spanning Rows or Columns You can create a table cell that stretches across more than one row or column In the following table notice how the row that contains Sports Teams spans three columns Sports Teams Baseball Team Hockey Team White Sox Black Hawks You can also create a column that spans several rows as illustrated below Notice that Boston spans three rows Colleges oo mm Boston Boston College Northeastern University Boston University Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 761 Working with Table Cells Spanning More than One Row or Column To have a table cell soan more than one row or column follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell that will soan rows or columns 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table from the menu 4 Click Cell Properties from the menu 5 The Cell Properties dialog box appears In the Rows Spanned or Columns Spanned field enter the number of rows or columns that you want this cell to span BB Rowe Spanned Columns Spanned 6 Click O
377. ibing to a Blog Logged in Site users and Membership users can subscribe to a blog or a blog post By subscribing to a blog users receive notification when posts are added to the blog By subscribing to a blog post users are notified when comments are added to the post When you do not want to receive notices you can unsubscribe Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 344 Blogs The section contains the following topics e Subscribe to a Blog on page 345 e Unsubscribe to a Blog on page 346 e Subscribe to a Blog Post on page 347 e Unsubscribe to a Blog Post on page 347 Subscribe to a Blog To subscribe to a blog follow these steps 1 Navigate to the blog on the site 2 Click the Subscribe icon for the blog Ektron Medical Blog Blogging your health Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Add Post 1 2 3 5 6 Fi 8 9 10 New Test Post 1 42 WA 4G WA 17 3 The Subscribe Unsubscribe screen appears Ektron Medical Blog Blogging your health Blog Ektron Medical Blog STan Type 4 Select the Notification Type 5 Click Add Subscription Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 345 Blogs A message states that you are now subscribed to the blog You are forwarded to the blog page Unsubscribe to a Blog To unsubscribe to a blog follow these steps 1 Navigate to the blog on the site 2 Click the Subscribe icon for the blog Ektron Medical Blog J
378. ibrary Folder Add Library Item to Folder About Us images 5 mys mA mo ne EER ay bie nn Lau P Petes pot J For T Description i BS fg Normal BIA Ve ut oe 5 2 il tl il Hl Hl 5 Enter the necessary information according to the following table Description Enter a title for the file to be copied Filename Enter the path to the file to be copied You can use the Browse button to find it Description You can enter a full text description to help other users identify this file The Description appears on the View File screen It also accompanies the file on the Search Results screen if the user selects Mixed when viewing results See Also Displaying Search Results on page 141 After you enter the necessary information and click the Save button the file is copied Now users with permissions to the selected folder can insert the file into their content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 144 Library Folder Viewing Files Once a file is copied to the library you may preview it To preview a copied file follow these steps 1 Navigate to the library folder to which the file was copied 2 Click the file you want to preview 3 The View File screen appears View Library Item in Folder Contenti files Title Ektron Partners and Customers Filename CMS400Example uploadedFiles ektron_partners_customers ppt Library ID 41 Parent Folde
379. ibrary items within the folders Search library Searching the Library on page 138 View the library s properties Library Folder Properties on page 137 screen Add an image file quicklink or Copying Files to the Library on hyperlink to the library page 143 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 136 Library Folder Button Description For more information see ee a Select the type of Library file to A Images ME work with Library Folder Properties To view the library folder s properties follow these steps 1 Click the Properties button E 2 The Library Management screen appears Library Management b mil Image Extensions gif jpeg Jpg bmp png Image Upload Path This path ts relative to the site CMS400Demao uploadediImages Physical Path c inetpub wwwroot CMS400Demo uploadedimages Verified File Extensions ppt pdf xls doc File Upload Path This path ts relative to the site CMS400Dema uploadedFiles Physical Path c inetpub wwwroot CMs400Demo uploadedFiles Verified 3 The screen displays the following settings Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 137 Field Image Extensions Image Upload path Physical Path File Extensions Flle Upload path Physical Path Library Folder Description File extensions of images that can be copied to the library folder For example gif and jpg The folder to which
380. ic Creation of a Summary Ektron CMS400 NET automatically generates a summary for new content if none exists To do this it checks the summary when new content is published If the summary is blank Ektron CMS400 NET copies the first 40 words of the content to the summary After the content is published you can update or delete the summary If it is deleted the summary remains blank and is never again automatically generated for that content item Creating a Summary for New Content Navigate to the folder in which you want to create the content Click New then pick the content type from the dropdown menu The Add Content screen appears Insert a Title and content See Also Adding HTML Content on page 48 ae 5 Click the Summary tab Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 77 Adding a Content Summary Edit Content in Folder About Us Title English U S Content Summary Comment Templat BB REGAS oa eTA A A A ae Bi Apply Style Normal BZ UAA gzh FJ III Ta gi Ei i WW I nbp TM j i ed H As a global leader ektron Medical strives to improve lives in its local and glo communities particularly with regard to increasing access to high quality heal for underserved populations 6 T Enter summary information for the content The summary can include images files and hyperlinks Its length can be restricted by your system administrator in the
381. ices field and clicking properties See Also Inserting a Choices Field on page 611 Replacing a Poll from the Web Site When logged into Ektron CMS400 NET you can right click on a poll and choose New Poll to replace the current one The title of the poll its ID and properties stay the same Only the questions and answers change To replace a poll follow these steps 1 Log into Ektron CMS400 NET 2 Navigate to the Web page that hosts the poll 3 Right click the poll and choose New Poll I TAKE A SURVEY Where did you hear about Ektron Medical Oonine RT New pal O Friend CY Edit Coworke ih view History Newsgral Done Other Add Task submit For Properties Workarea Logout Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 628 Working with HTML Forms 4 The Workarea opens indicating you are at step three of the Poll Wizard Continue to define the Poll Enter a question and all possible responses Leave unused responses blank Question 5 Add anew question to the Question text box 6 Add possible responses to the Choices text boxes 7 Click Next 8 Click Done 9 The form editor launches allowing you to edit the fields and properties In addition you can set post back and schedule information add metadata and comments change the title and submit the poll for publication 10 Once published the updated poll appears on the site I TAKE A SURVEY How often d
382. ick View gt Folder Properties then the Edit Properties button L from the Web site log in navigate to the blog open the menu for the blog and select Properties When you are finished click Save fq To learn about the other tabs on the Properties screen see e Metadata on page 328 e Blog Subjects on page 329 e Web Alerts on page 333 e Smart Forms on page 333 e The Blog Roll on page 334 e Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Managing Content Folders gt Breadcrumbs Da Visibility Choose whether the site is a private blog or public Public Anyone who visits the site is able to view the blog Private A site visitor must log into the site to be able to view the blog This could include membership users CMS400 users or both Blog Name The name of your blog as it appears in the content folder tree Blog Title The title of your blog as it appears on the Web site blog It only appears if the ShowHeader blog server control property is set to true The ID number of the blog This number is assigned by Ektron CMS400 NET and cannot be changed Note ID only appears when viewing the Properties screen It does not appear while editing Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 327 Blogs Fea Poseren Tagline A line of additional information that describes the blog It appears below the title if the ShowHeader blog server control property is set to true
383. ick the Background dropdown list oe D N Table Wizard E Table Design A Fd Table Pre Dimensions width px Height E px 5 Layout Add Hex Color J 6 A selection of colors appears Click a color for the table s background From the dropdown you can add custom colors by selecting a color patch or entering a color s hex value Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 551 Working with Tables Basic colors EE EHHH Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Deleting a Table s Background Color To delete a table s background color click the Background dropdown list on the Table Properties tab of the Table Wizard Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 552 Working with Tables SASS TR E Tabl Dimensions Width p Height pP Layout Then click the top left choice circled above Specifying a Table Row s Background Color To assign a background color to a table row follow these steps Place the cursor within the table Right click the mouse Select Set Table Properties Click the Cell Properties tab
384. ide displays the selected version of the content After viewing a version of content you can perform these actions on tt Restore Restore historical version of Restoring a Previous content Version on page 114 View Difference Compare historical version to Comparing Historical current version Versions on page 115 View History View summary list of all versions The Content History Report a Window on page 112 Remove XSLT Remove XSLT applied to XML Removing Applied XSLT on XML Content Only content page 115 Actions are explained below Restoring a Previous Version NOTE The ability to restore content is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see a Restore button len on the View Content History screen you do not have permission to do so Open the content folder that contains the content Click the content item 2 3 Click the History toolbar button H 4 Select an historical version of the content that you want to restore oO Click the Restore button Ep The content history window closes and you return to the View Content page or the Web page with the content in a checked in status If desired check out the content to make additional changes Select the workflow to perform on the content 9 When the historical version is placed in the approval chain and approved it is published to the Web site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 114 Viewin
385. ield Use a plain text field when you want the user to enter an unformatted free text response To insert a plain text field follow these steps 1 Place a plain text field lab onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 170 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 178 Working with HTML Forms Plain Text Field Descriptive Hame Fid Field Name Fed Tool Tip Text Field 1 Default value Pe Validation Validation No validation Error Message Fields on the Plain Text Field Dialog SSS Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 199 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 179 Working with HTML Forms pe sss Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Default If you want to set a default value for this field enter it value here For example if this field collects a city and most users enter New York enter New York as
386. iew 20 Delete Action a E gt what is Guillain Barre Syndrome GES F Guillain Barre Ghee yan Bah ray Syndrome also called acute inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy and Landrys ascer paralysis is an inflammatory disorder of the peripheral nerves those outside the brain and spinal cord Itis characterized by comments 3 rapid onset of weakness and often paralysis of the legs arms breathing muscles and face GBS is the most common cause of rapidly acquired paralysis in the United States today affecting to two people in every 100 000 Last Edited by Generated User on 6 2 2006 2 13 51 PM Status A rI i i E world Population to reach 6 5 Bilion Last Edited by Application Administrator on 3 13 2006 5 09 46 Status 4 Mo comments ES Welcome to ektron Medical The View Posts in Blog screen shows the following information about each blog post Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 351 Blogs View Posts in Blog Life Story No Comments See Also Blog Posts on page 348 Blogs on page 319 SS eee The headline of the post Usually what a site visitor scans through to find a post to read Comments Information The comments link shows the number in parentheses of commenis for a post When this link is clicked the View Comments for Post screen appears If a red flag F appears next to the comments icon they are awaiting approval Editor Inf
387. ight fi b fo Border Thickness Alignment Y Reset When deciding how to align a picture you need to become familiar with these terms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 688 Inserting Images e baseline of text the imaginary line on which the text lies Some letters such as g p and y have descenders segments of letters that extend below the baseline e bottom of text the lowest section of a line to which a descender extends e top of text the highest spot of a line to which any segment of a letter extends e vertical center the midpoint between the top and bottom of the line top vertical ne OCCUPYING r bottom The following table lists your alignment choices To align Click this in the Alignment field The picture on the left margin allowing subsequent text to wrap around it The picture on the right margin allowing subsequent text to wrap around it The top of the picture with the top of the Text Top Top text The vertical center of the picture with the baseline of the text The vertical center of the picture with the AbsMiddle vertical center of the text absmiddle Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 689 Inserting Images To align Click this in the Alignment field The bottom of the picture with the Bottom Baseline baseline of the text This is the default alignment The bottom of the picture with the bottom AbsBottom of the text Resett
388. ike the translation click Paste Content and the translated content replaces the original Once the translated content is inserted into the editor you can edit it as needed 5 When you save the content it is saved as the edition of that content in the selected language It has the same content ID number as the original content but a different language identifier Deleting Content NOTE The ability to delete content is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see a Delete option on the View Contents of Folder screen you do not have permission to do so NOTE It is good practice to check for broken quicklinks before deleting content See Checking for Broken Quicklinks on page 63 The Delete command lets you permanently delete obsolete content from your Web site There are two ways to delete content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 60 Deleting Content eS Pee ted ETAT ee tee Dae ind el content items from the current folder This option only deletes Approved content For more information see Deleting Several Content Items in a Folder on page 63 e Depending on the content s status and your permissions you may be able to delete one item at a time The options for doing so are a Delete option when viewing content from a Web page a Delete menu option that appears after selecting content on the View Contents of Folder screen For more information see Deletin
389. il e See Advanced User Searching on page 399 Performing a Directory Search The Directory tab in a Community Search allows a user to filter the list of users based on the selection of a letter in the alphabet For example John wants to find all users whose first name begin with the letter S John navigates to the CommunitySearch control on his site clicks the Directory tab and selects First Name from the Sort By list Then he selects the letter S from list of letters Next the control displays a list of users who name begins with the letter S rectory Basic Search Advanced Search ick one of the options below to filter the User Director mano B Icblelr F Jea J K noc M orl X Y Z Sort by FirstName _ Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 397 My Workspace Performing a Basic User Search A Basic search is the easiest to perform and returns the widest array of results A Basic search is based on the following criteria e Email e Display Name e First Name e Last Name e Custom User Properties these properties define information about a user beyond the standard Ektron CMS400 NET user properties See Also The Administrator Manual section gt Custom User Properties e Personal Tags tags are keywords that are associated with a user or community group in CMS400 See Also The Administrator Manual section gt Community Management gt Tags e Group Name e Group
390. in Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 207 2 Click the Edit button E Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 212 4 5 Working with HIML Forms The Edit Form screen is displayed The screen is the same as the Add New Form screen For documentation of individual fields see Creating a New Form on page 161 Make the necessary changes to the form Click the Save button i See Also Working with HTML Forms on page 158 Editing a Form s Content You can edit the content associated with the form by a variety of methods including Accessing the content by the floating toolbar on the Web page Editing the content by the View Form screen Accessing the content by the View Form content properties screen This section explains how to edit a form s content from the View Form screen To edit a form s content follow these steps 1 a oe w N Access the View Form screen for the content as described in Viewing a Form s Information on page 206 Click the Edit Content button C The Edit Content screen appears Make the necessary changes to the form s content If you want to edit any field s properties place the cursor in the field right click the mouse and choose Field Properties If needed click the Postback Message Metadata Schedule Comment or Web Alerts tab to edit that information Click a workflow button Submit for Publication or Publish Edi
391. ince collections can be assigned to any content folder the Modules folder provides a central Collections folder which displays all collections regardless of their content folder For more information see Finding a Collection Using the Collections Folder on page 419 Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder To access collections for a content folder follow these steps 1 Click the content folder that contains the collection Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 418 Working with Collections 2 If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support features select the language by clicking View gt Language See Also Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 433 3 Click View gt Collection 4 The View Collections screen appears View Collections in Folder Root Title ID Date Modified URL Link About Us 8 3 21 2006 Homepage Ads 4 10 4 2007 Homepage News 6 3 21 2006 The screen displays each collection created for the folder The following table explains each column Column Description The title assigned to the collection by the creator The ID assigned to the collection by Ektron CMS400 NET This number is used to store and retrieve the data to from the database Date When the collection was last edited Modified The default template used to display the content To learn more about a collection and perform tasks on it proceed
392. ine the request it is removed from your Pending Colleagues list and the requester s Sent Colleagues Request list See Also View Pending Colleagues on page 403 and Viewing Sent Colleague Requests in the Workarea on page 404 To decline a colleague request follow these steps 1 Navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Pending Colleagues 2 Place a check mark in the check box next to each colleague whose request you want to decline 3 Click the Decline New Colleagues button U 4 Adialog box appears asking you to confirm that you are declining the colleague 5 Click OK The page refreshes and the users are removed from the Pending Colleagues list and requester s Sent Colleagues Request list Viewing Sent Colleague Requests in the Workarea The Sent Colleague Requests list allows you to view a list of users to whom you ve sent colleague requests From this screen you can also delete requests that have yet to be accepted See Also Canceling a Colleague Request on page 405 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 404 My Workspace lf a request goes stale and has not been acted upon the by the recipient you can resend the invite and add another optional message See Resending an Invitation on page 405 To view sent colleague requests navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Sent Colleague Requests Canceling a Colleague Request lf you want to cancel a colleague request
393. iness Phone Home Phone All form fields appear on the list In addition the following fields can be used to insert form information into the postback message although they re not completed by the person submitting the form e Form title e Form description e Date form was submitted by site visitor For example your postback message may be Thank you Full Name for completing the Form Title gt When the postback message appears it looks like this Thank you Jay Kohler for completing the breakroom survey Redirect to an Action Page and Forwarding Form Data IMPORTANT If your form survey poll uses this option your Web developer must use a FormBlock server control to display the form on a Web page He cannot use a Poll Server Control when redirecting to an action page The following section of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual explains how your administrator sets up the action page Working with HTML Forms gt Redirecting Submitted Form Data After your administrator follows that procedure he identifies a folder and hyperlink that you use to select an action page WARNING You must obtain from your administrator the name of the custom action page and its folder to complete this procedure To redirect submitted form data to an action page follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 164 Working with HTML Forms 1 Go to the page on which you determine the f
394. ing Versions of Content The following table explains when you can use the feature and which versions are compared Content Status Compares current published version with Published Historical version stored in the content history area Checked In Most recently checked in version Submitted Submitted version Pending Start Date Scheduled version pending start date Checked Out Not available lf content can be compared with another version the View Difference button A appears in the content history area or the Web page view The Compare Content Window NOTE The first time the View Content Difference feature is opened a simple installation program runs See Also First Use of the View Content Difference Feature on page 110 The Compare Content window consists of the following e Toolbar on page 106 e Content Area on page 109 e View Tabs on page 109 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 105 Comparing Versions of Content F CMS Compare Microsoft Internet Explorer auae Toolbar Welcome to RC internNational RC ational has become one of the leading manufactures of RO racing and thang vehicle sport and the enthusiasts who play it has endeared our products to the EC community We w improve our affordable products and hope you will become an EC international member EC is dedicated to the EC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and live RC Content Area
395. ing Width Height Border Thickness and Alignment If you adjust the picture s width height border thickness and or alignment and later want to restore all of those settings to their original values click the Reset button 20 Height 20 Border Thickness fo Alignment Mot set 7 eset Note that you cannot selectively restore some settings the Reset button automatically restores all of them Adding Space around the Picture On the Picture Properties dialog box you can use the Spacing fields Horizontal and Vertical to add space around the picture You enter a number of pixels to determine spacing value Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 690 Inserting Images Spacing Horizontal Vertical The following graphic illustrates the effect of adding spacing to a picture This image has no vertical or horizontal space BS Ba This mage has 20 prels of vertical space no horizontal space Ths image has 20 pels of horizontal space no vertical space BS aS This image has 20 pzels of vertical space and 20 prels of horizontal space Editing the Picture s Title The title that you entered in the Insert Media Item dialog box defaults into the Title field of the Media Selection dialog box You can edit the title in this field if desired NOTE The title is also the alt text for the image The alt text appears in place of the image on the Web page if the image itself cannot display
396. ing a Managed File on retrieved page 259 Creating a New Managed File You cannot create a managed file within Ektron CMS400 NET Instead create it on your computer using the host application then import it into DM Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 257 Using the Document Management System Importing Managed Files WARNING You cannot import files whose name includes a percentage sign or ampersand amp You import managed files into Ektron CMS400 NET using the same methods you use to import MS Office documents See Importing Office Documents on page 232 If you do not see a file you uploaded verify that the View Menu box is displaying the type of file you are looking for Files upload to the correct type regardless of what is selected when you drag and drop them Editing a Managed File You do not edit a managed file within Ektron CMS400 NET Instead you check it out save it on your computer edit it using the host application then check it back in to Ektron CMS400 NET While it is checked out only you or a system administrator can edit the managed file within Ektron CMS400 NET NOTE Alternatively you can edit within a mapped network folder See Edit Using a Mapped Network Folder on page 247 Follow these steps to edit a managed file 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the managed file s folder 3 Select the managed file you want to edit 4 Hover
397. ing with Collections e ID number e template e last user who edited it e last date when it was edited e date it was created e whether or not the content folder s subfolders can be included e for each content item in the collection a link to the content click this to view and edit the content ID number quicklink Collections Toolbar The following table describes the collection toolbar buttons Add Add new collection or add items to a Creating a Collection GE collection on page 423 Remove Remove items from a collection Removing Content from the Collection on page 431 f Reorder Reorder items in a collection Reordering Collections List on page 432 Edit Edit collection information Editing Collection Information on page 432 Delete Delete a collection Deleting a Collection on page 433 Return to previous screen Creating a Collection Creating a collection involves two steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 423 Working with Collections e Adding a Collection on page 424 e Assigning Content to the Collection on page 427 The following sections explain each step Note This section explains creating a collection in a site that does not support multiple languages If you want to create collections in several languages see Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 433 See Also Working with Collections on page 4
398. inistrator NEre s my comment AM Comments Times Hew Roman 3 12 pt sd A oa E 7 U TERLARI 3 The comment editor opens with the selected comment in it 4 Update the comment 5 Click the Update button to save the changes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 804 Appendix A Content Statuses Appendix A Content Statuses The table below describes all possible content statuses The rest of this appendix explains each status in more detail Border Color Letter green D Q green Submitted for Approval yellow yellow Marked for Deletion Pending Go Live Date grey Awaiting Completion of Associated Tasks Pending Deletion Approved Checked Out Checked In Content state More Information Through the workflow and published on the Web site Approved Content on page ii Checked Out Content on page v Currently being edited Has not been checked in Checked In Content on page iii Checked in for other users to edit Submitted Content on page vi Saved and submitted into the approval chain See Also Approving Declining Content on page 90 Marked for Deletion Content on page vii Requested for deletion Approved but the Go Live date hasn t occurred yet Pending Start Date Content on page viii Task s assigned to content are not complete Content was created with a future start date then checked in and del
399. inutes are the bookmark To create a bookmark follow these steps 1 Select the bookmark text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 520 Using Bookmarks 2 Click the Insert Anchor button t 3 The Hyperlink Manager dialog appears with the Anchor tab selected Hyperlink Manager Hyperlink E mail Enter a name for the bookmark Click OK The editor screen redisplays The bookmark does not appear on the page 7 Select the source text 8 Click the Hyperlink Manager button 9 The Hyperlink Manager dialog appears with the Hyperlink tab selected 10 Click the down arrow below the Existing Anchor field and click the bookmark you created in Step 4 Hyperlink Manager Hyperlink V E mail URL Target 11 If desired use the Target dropdown to change the destination text s window For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 522 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 521 Using Bookmarks If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 12 Click OK Changing the Destination Window Use the Target Frame field on the Hyperlink Manager dialog to change the window that displays the destination page http focalhost CM5400Developer WorkArea Existing Anchor Link Text ektron Medical CSS Class No Class The values you can enter into the Target Frame field are explained
400. ion 7 6 Revision 5 111 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content e A Web page Once you access the history the functionality is identical The following sections explains how to access the content history from both places Accessing the Content History from the Workarea To access the history from the Workarea follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View Content page for the content whose history you want to view 2 Click the item whose history you want to view 3 The View Content Screen appears 4 Click the View History button Tel Accessing the Content History from a Web Page To access the history for content from a Web page follow these steps Sign in 2 Browse to the content whose history you want to view Click the View History menu option Lit View History The Content History window opens The Content History Window View Content History Yersion Last Edit Date published date Content Title Last User To Edit 2 0 4 10 2007 Welcome to Deycenter Community Administrator Applic 1 1 410 200 Welcome to Devcenter Community Administrator Applic 1 0 3 22 2007 Welcome to Deycenter Community Administrator Applic 0 1 sfeef200 Welcome to Deycenter Community Administrator Applic Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 112 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content The View Content History window lists every version of the content available in Ektron CMS400 NET The window displays the
401. ion about using Ektron CMS400 NET S editors see Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Editors on page 481 Summary Enter or edit the content summary See Also Adding a Content Summary on page 76 Metadata Enter or edit the content metadata Note All required metadata must be added before content can be checked in or submitted into the approval chain See Also Adding or Editing Metadata on page 80 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 51 Editing HTML Content Comment Briefly describe the content or comment on changes made when editing content The history comment appears on the View Content and Content History screens Use this tab to set a future publication date time In order to be published this content must be approved and reach its publication date time See Also Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 68 If appropriate enter a date when the content will no longer be viewable on the Web site See Also Setting an End Date on Content on page 71 Web Alerts See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Web Alert Feature Templates This content s folder must have a default template It can also have additional templates assigned When content is created the default template is automatically assigned to it If you want to change the template assigned to this content click this tab and choose a template from the dropdown list See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Ad
402. ions are also hidden This allows you to view the page as it appears when you are not logged in See Also Hiding and Showing the Content Border on page 6 If the page is set to show borders and you still do not see the Add and Edit buttons the feature may be turned off Ask your Administrator or Web site Developer for additional information Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 437 Working with Menus NOTE For more information on adding content see Adding HTML Content on page 48 To learn more about Menu permissions see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Web Site Navigation Aids gt Menu Feature This chapter describes the following aspects of managing menus e what they are e how they can be used e how to the add edit view and delete them What s In This Chapter The following topics explain Menus e The Structure of Menus and Menu Items on page 439 e Access to the Menus Feature on page 439 e Adding a New Menu on page 441 e Adding a Menu Item on page 446 e Editing a Menu on page 455 e Editing a Menu Item on page 457 e Viewing a Menu on page 460 e Reordering Menu Items on page 463 e Deleting a Menu on page 464 e Deleting a Menu Item on page 465 e Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page 466 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual sections Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 438
403. iption Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 714 Editing Images Click an annotation to select it After you select an annotation you can perform functions on it such as delete it This command is a toggle which means the first time you click it it is on and the next time you click it it is off Polygon Standard Toolbar Button Description Draws a polygon that is a closed figure surrounded by straight lines To use this command follow these steps Click the polygon command Drag the line in one direction as far as you want Drag the line in the other directions to complete the polygon Double click the mouse to terminate the polygon oe ee To change the polygon s line size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 715 Editing Images Rectangle Standard Toolbar Button Description Draws a rectangle To use this command click the rectangle command drag a rectangle and release the mouse To change the rectangles line size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 716 Editing Images Attributes Redo Standard Toolbar Button Description If you use the Undo command and then decide that it was a mistake use this
404. is enabled an email is sent to the user user group to which the task was assigned Selecting Content for the Task When you click Select Content from the Add Task screen the Select Content screen appears It shows only content in the selected language Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 299 Managing Tasks Select Content Please select content by navigating the folders below Path 4 im Human Resources B Marketing io Products io Support 5 Syndication Contact Ektron C Greeting Home Page Content Introducing the RC Redstar C new content You should only select a content folder for which you have permissions To select a piece of content to assign to the task follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content Click any folder to open it 2 Click the circle to the left of the content LI Support i Syndication contact Ektron C Greeting 3 Press the Save button f Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 300 Managing Tasks Adding a Task Category and Task Type NOTE Add Task Task Title Assigned To Language Content Priority Task Category State Start Date Due Date Description Task Categories and Task Types let users and administrators sort task by user defined categories and types By clicking the Add link located next to the Task Type drop down box you can add Task Categories and Task Types This allows you to add categories
405. is window EditorInChief can view information about the content including title go live date user who created it etc He then clicks the content he wants to approve This window is similar to the previous approver s but includes a Publish button at the top of the screen The EditorlnChief has a Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 98 Approving Declining Content publish button instead of a submit button because he is the last approver in the approval chain When he approves the content it is published to the Web site Like the Sports editor the EditorInChief has the following options ee Publish the content Ey 1 Sends an email to the creator notifying him her that content was Decline declined 2 Removes content from the approval chain Invokes the editor The approver changes the content After reviewing the content the EditorInChief decides it is great and publishes it At this point the content becomes live on the Web site and the approval chain is complete The user who created the content receives an email notifying him that it was published Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 99 Approving Declining Content Content changes have been made The changes to the content Eed Sox Win World Series have been approved The content changes went hve immediately Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 100 Comparing Versions of Content Comparing
406. ision 5 110 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Past versions of published content are available unless your system administrator purged them Your ability to view a content item s history is determined by your user privileges After viewing a previous versions of content you can replace the current version with any previous version NOTE This section explains how to view and possibly restore older versions of content To see a change by change comparison of two content items use the View Content Difference feature explained in Comparing Versions of Content on page 101 NOTE The Purge History feature deletes historical versions of content according to user defined criteria Therefore some previous versions may be unavailable See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual gt Managing Content Folders gt Folder Properties gt Purge History The View and Restore features are explained through the following subtopics e Accessing Content History on page 111 e The Content History Window on page 112 e Restoring a Previous Version on page 114 e Comparing Historical Versions on page 115 e Removing Applied XSLT on page 115 Accessing Content History By default all users can view the history of Ektron CMS400 NET content You can access content history from two places e The Workarea s View Content page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Vers
407. item to be checked by default on the data entry screen If you do the user can accept the default or uncheck the item by clicking in the checkbox First item is Check here if the first item on the list is not a valid value but instead text that not a Valid prompts the user to respond to the field An example of such text for a list of Selection states would be Select a state If you check this box and the user selects the first value on the list most likely by default an error message appears when he tries to save the screen Customizing a Standard List You can customize any list of predefined choices For example you can change the calendar years so they begin in 1995 and run through 2020 To do this follow these steps Choose the standard list that you want to customize Change the value of the List field to Custom All of the predefined choices appear in the Item List box To e add new items use the Item Value and Text fields gt D N z e delete an existing list item select it and click Remove e rearrange the list use the Move Up and Move Down buttons e edit a list item select it and press the Change button Inserting a Calendar Field To insert a field that lets a site visitor select a date use a Calendar Field To do that follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 194 Working with HTML Forms 1 Place a Calendar field onto the screen See Also Adding a Fie
408. itle bar Landing Page after login Refresh the login page Set smart desktop as the start location im the workarea This User currently belongs to these User Groups e Everyone User Properties Wellness Articles Subscriptions i j Notification will send in user language Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 471 Updating Your User Profile 4 Click the Edit button in the top left corner Username jedit ID 14 First Name John Last Name Edit Display Name JE User Language App Default E Mail Address jedit example com Last Login Date 2 5 2009 Content and Forum Editor N System Notifications Receiving of E Mail Disabled Avatar Address 03060 Latitude 42 34584 Longitude 1 463283 Forum Signature Tags Work Page Size Width 900px Height 580px Display Button Text in the Title Bar Landing Page After Login Refresh the login page Set Smart Desktop As The Start Location In The Workarea This User currently belongs to these User Groups Everyone 5 The Edit User Information screen appears The following table explains fields you can edit Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 472 Updating Your User Profile Field Description Display Name The name that is used to identify you on the Web site This can be different from your Username which is the name you use to log into the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Important This name needs to be unique inside Ektro
409. itor set to low resolution 640 x 480 Setting Table Width by Pixels To specify table width by pixels choose Pixels in the layout section of the Insert Table dialog box Then specify the number of pixels at Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 743 Manipulating Your Table s Format the Width field Insert T able Size Rows 2 Colurnns 2 Layout 610 C Not Specified C Percent fe Pixels Specifying Horizontal Alignment You can specify your table s horizontal alignment left right or center within the browser Alignment Example EJ Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 744 Manipulating Your Table s Format If you specify right or left justify you can wrap text around the table To do this move the cursor to the right or left of the table and begin typing Table Properties In this example the table is left justified so this text appears to the right of the table Specify the table alignment at the Horizontal Alignment field on the Layout area of the Insert Table dialog box Layout width fi oos C Not Specified f Percent C Pizels Horizontal Alignment center Table Backgrounds You can specify a background color or image for your table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 745 Manipulating Your Table s Format Specifying a Table s Background Color You can assign a background color to a table to make i
410. ixels on page 509 Image Properties Image Properties Border Color Tenacds AL Tiavt Pr 1 oniran Here is a picture with a 1 pixel border A Here is the same picture with a 10 pixel sever al Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 510 Working with Images lf the picture is not a hyperlink its border is black If the picture is also a hyperlink the border is the same color as a hyperlink for example blue or purple if visited Aligning the Picture To align a picture use the Image Alignment field on the Image Properties dialog The following table lists your alignment choices To align Click this Alignment option The picture on the left margin allowing subsequent text to wrap around it The picture on the right margin allowing subsequent text to ted IT budgets smaller teams wrap around it out new Inteet and intranet Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 511 Working with Images To align Click this Alignment option The top of the picture with the first line of text The vertical center of the picture with the first line of text ae and compressed schedules to roll out new in The bottom of the picture with the first line of text Faced with the challenge of rech and compressed schedules to roll out new inte TET A Adding Space around the Picture On the Image Properties dialog box you can use the Spacing fields Horizontal and
411. izard dialog appears Table Wizard A HA Table Design i Table Properties kd Ko Cell Properties Y Accessibility Columns Column Span DopE SsuuMmsen 4 To change the number of columns or rows click the plus or minus signs next to Columns and Rows The image adjusts to show the number of rows and columns 6 Press OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 538 Working with Tables 7 Begin entering text and images into the table cells To further modify the table see Modifying Table Properties on page 539 Modifying Table Properties To modify a table s properties follow these steps 1 Click inside the table 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Set Table Properties 4 The Table Wizard dialog appears Table Wizard A DA Table Design E Table Properties Y g Cell Properties kd Accessibility Columns Column Span nie 3uo0Mson The dialog has four tabs described below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 539 Table Design Table Properties Cell Properties Lets you adjust the number or row and col umns span rows or columns that is two or more adjacent cells are merged Lets you set the table s width height background color background image alignment cell spacing and padding Id css Class border Lets you set the selected cells alignment background
412. izontal alignment Caption Alignment Gee e kjeft e right Vertical If desired enter the caption s vertical alignment Caption Alignment e bottom e top After you complete the Table Properties dialog click OK to make the table comply with Section 508 Setting Abbreviation and Category Attributes You can modify abbreviation ABBR and category AXIS attributes within a table To do so follow these steps Select one or more cells Right click the mouse On gt Select Table gt Cell Properties 4 Access the Cell Properties dialog The Cell Properties dialog includes fields that let you adjust the Abbreviation and Category Attribute field values see illustration below NOTE Your system administrator can add or remove the Accessibility fields from the Cell Properties dialog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 798 Section 508 Compliance Cell Properties E4 a e Se ae OF Bowe Spanned Cancel Columns Spanned Layout Borders M Use Default Color f Not Specified Border Color i Word Wrap Pixels Accessibility Horizontal Alignment Abbreviation Vertical Alignment Categories Custom Background Background Color Background Image From File The following explains how to respond to these fields Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog a e Abbreviation Sets or retrieves abbreviated text for the content in the t
413. jump from any word phrase or image to another place in the content On your Web page text appears in a different color to indicate that additional information is available at the bookmark s location For example if your Web page includes meeting minutes the top of the page could list the meeting dates You could then assign a hyperlink to each date and a bookmark to each set of minutes The user sees that a date is in a different color so clicks the date to jump to the bookmark that marks the location of the meeting minutes Creating a Bookmark on page 771 describes how to set up a hyperlink to a bookmark within a file You can also set up hyperlink to e another Web page This procedure is described in Using Hyperlinks on page 775 e a bookmark within another Web page This procedure is described in Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page on page 778 Creating a Bookmark When creating a bookmark you must specify a e source the text or image that the user clicks to move to the bookmark e bookmark the place to which the cursor jumps when the user clicks the source To continue with the above example a meeting date is the source and the meeting minutes are the bookmark To create a bookmark follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 771 Using Bookmarks 1 Select the bookmark text or image Click the Bookmark button Mig 3 The Bookmark dialog bo
414. k Set Cell Properties from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu n e w P The Cell Properties dialog appears Cell Properties H Cell Properties Content Alignment Background 4 Dimensions Additional C No Wrapping Background Image pO cell CS5 undefined CSS Class Clear Style 7 Abbreviation GOO Categories ee 6 Enter the cell width and height in the fields circled above You can enter the width in pixels or percentage These choices are explained in Specifying Table Width on page 544 7 Click Update Deleting a Cell To delete one or more cells follow these steps 1 Move the cursor to the cell you want to delete 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Delete Cell from the menu Cells to the right of the deleted cell shift left to occupy the vacant space In this example the cursor was in cell b when the user clicked on Delete Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 565 Working with Table Cells Before specifying a Cell s Background Color Specifying a Table s Background Color on page 746 explains how to apply a background color to a table You can also apply a background color to a cell To apply a background color to a cell follow these steps Move the cursor to the cell Right click the mouse Click Set Cell Properties Click the Background dropdown YS Cell Properties H Cell Properties C
415. k Survey A Design a new survey Standard Poll Design a new poll Compose Email ch NOTE If you choose Standard Poll or Blank Survey the number of steps in the Forms Wizard changes from five to four This happens because the Assign Tasks step is removed 4 Choose Standard Poll You can click the preview icon amp next to any sample form to preview it before choosing it 5 Click the Next button 6 Enter or edit the form s Title and Description e Title used to reference the poll within the Workarea required e Description an extended description of the poll Click the Next button This screen lets you add a poll question and possible replies NOTE This screen allows you to add up to eight replies If you have more than eight __ replies you can add them in the forms editor after clicking the Done button 9 Click the Next button 10 This screen indicates that you have entered the basic poll information and should click the Done button to further edit and view the form s fields Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 627 Working with HTML Forms 11 After clicking the Done button the form editor launches so you can edit existing fields and properties In addition you can set post back and schedule information add metadata and comments change the title and submit the poll for publication NoTE From this screen you can add more replies to your poll by right clicking on the _ cho
416. k the Update button i 10 The following message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer Be x E WARNING You are about to overwrite a library file Ws d The filename of the local file will be changed to match the existing filename This will ensure that web links to this library item do not break continue 11 To overwrite the file click OK Library Link Searching Link searching indicates all content that includes a library link It is useful when you want to delete a library item With the click of a button you see all content that you need to update to reflect the change you are making Performing a Library Item Link Search To perform a library item link search follow these steps 1 Access the View Library Item for any type of library item as described in Viewing Files on page 145 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 149 Library Folder 2 Click the Link Search button 3 A list of all content that references the library item is displayed You should edit that content before deleting the item Deleting Library Items You can delete obsolete items from the library By deleting an item you prevent users from adding it to their content A deleted hyperlink quicklink or form quicklink remains on your Web server so any existing links to them are not broken On the other hand if an item is a file or image the delete window displays an additional prompt Remove from the server
417. kspace 3 Click the Accept Community Group Invite button G3 4 A dialog box appears asking you to confirm that you are accepting the invitation 5 Click OK The page refreshes and community group is removed from the Group Invites page and now appears in My Groups See Also Viewing Your Community Groups on page 406 Declining a Community Group Invite To decline an invitation to a community group follow these steps 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Community Groups gt Group Invites 2 Place a check mark in the check box next to a community group 3 Click the Decline Invitation button Oo 4 A dialog box appears asking you to confirm that you are declining the invitation 5 Click OK The page refreshes and community group is removed from the Group Invites page Favorites The Favorites area in My Workspace allows you to manage content you have designated as your favorite content From this area you can e Adda Folder see Adding a Favorites Folder on page 409 e Remove Favorites see Remove Favorites on page 409 e Move a favorite from one folder to another see Moving Favorites to a Folder on page 409 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 408 My Workspace Adding a Favorites Folder To add a favorites folder follow these steps 1 In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Favorites 2 Click the Add Folder button amp 3 Enter a Name an
418. kspace Working with Pending Community Groups Pending Groups show a list of groups which you have asked to join but have yet to be accepted To view this list navigate to the Workarea gt My Workspace gt Community Groups gt Pending Groups Deleting a Pending Community Group lf a community group has not accepted your request to join you might want to delete the request Follow these steps to delete a pending community group request 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Community Groups gt Pending Groups 2 Place a check mark in the check box next to a community group 3 Click the Cancel Request button oO 4 Adialog box appears asking you to confirm the cancellation of the pending request 5 Click OK The page refreshes and the pending community group is removed from the list Working with Community Group Invites Members of a community group can invite people to join the group The Workarea allows you to view accept and decline pending group invites To view pending community group invites navigate to the Workarea gt My Workspace gt Community Groups gt Group Invites Accepting a Community Group Invite To accept an invitation to a community group follow these steps 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Community Groups gt Group Invites 2 Place a check mark in the check box next to a community group Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 407 My Wor
419. ktron CMS400 NET See Also Checking Out Saving and Replacing an Office Document on page 250 Note Previous Ektron CMS400 NET releases included a Work Offline option whose Check In function replaced the version of the file in Ektron CMS400 NET In contrast this release s Check In function only changes the content s status Check out Change acontent item s status to checked out and Checking Out Saving and and Save As save it to your local computer When you finish Replacing an Office Document editing the item drag and drop it into Ektron on page 250 CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 37 Viewing a Folder Option Allows you to For more information see Decline Edit in Microsoft Office Edit Properties Decline an approval request submitted to you This option reject the changes and keeps the current version live on Web site You are prompted to enter a reason for the decline After you decline e The author who made the change is notified by email The content is removed from the Approval Chain If the author updated content then submitted it for approval the updated content remains in the file If you do not want it to remain choose the Edit option You may be asked to decline both a content change and a request to delete content Submit content for deletion HTML HTML form or XML Smart Form con tent edit content within an Ektron CMS400 NET edi
420. ktron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 269 Working with Calendars Understanding Calendars Before working with calendars you should understand the following points Ektron CMS400 NET supports several calendars at one time There might be a site wide calendar and other calendars for special interests such as an athletic events calendar Each date can display several events Only system administrators can create a calendar Each calendar is assigned to a content folder See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 28 Your ability to view add edit and remove calendar events is determined by your permissions for that folder The following illustrates the workflow of calendar tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 270 Working with Calendars View all calendars View information for one calendar view calendar jump to Add event View events linked web E z page Edit event Apply Accessing the View Calendar Screen The View Calendar screen collects general information about a calendar and provides toolbar buttons that let you perform calendar related activities To access the View Calendar screen follow these steps 1 Access the Modules folder from the lower left corner of the Workarea Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 271 Working with Calendars 2 Click the Calendars folder m Modules a Collections HO Calendars 5 Me
421. ktron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 451 Working with Menus 1 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 446 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 447 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link ona Web Page on page 448 Click the circle next to External Hyperlink Click the Next button The Add New Item screen is displayed ae w hy Complete the fields as needed in Bc Title of the new external hyperlink menu item URL Link The URL of the external hyperlink For example www example com 6 Click the Save button H NOTE When adding an External Hyperlink menu item the URL does not get added to the library nor is an ID assigned to it So when you save the menu item it is not added to the CMS database nor can it be retrieved for future use Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item To add a submenu as a menu item via content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 446 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 447 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link ona Web Page on page 448 Click the radio button next to Submenu The Add Menu screen is displayed Complete the fields using Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 442 as a reference 5 Click the Save button H Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 452 Working with Menus Adding
422. ktron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 548 Working with Tables center If you specify right or left justify you can wrap text around the table To do this move the cursor to the right or left of the table and begin typing Table Properties In this example the table is left justified so this text appears to the right of the table To specify table alignment follow these steps Place the cursor within the table Right click the mouse Select Set Table Properties Click the Table Properties tab Specify table alignment at the Alignment field ae w Ye Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 549 Working with Tables Table Wizard EF Table Design Table Pre Dimensions Width px Table Backgrounds You can specify a background color or image for your table e Deleting a Table s Background Color on page 552 e Specifying a Table Row s Background Color on page 553 e Specifying a Table s Background Image on page 555 Specifying a Table s Background Color You can assign a background color to a table to give it more visual appeal Here is an example To assign a background color to your table follow these steps 1 Place the cursor within the table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 550 Working with Tables Right click the mouse Select Set Table Properties Click the Table Properties tab Cl
423. l being of mmunities in which employees live and work uti Thal WT Ilh ill Once the content area is expanded the top row of buttons and title are not visible Maem Bobe MRa i ve ah Ad rec a Wed nesday Dece mbe 27 20 4 Sse E E SEFA o EN ape VIET EA aly Style formal E 7 U 4A eX im Fe ESE Ea Bele Ron FO EASA PET EE been ones et yi LEET ESS T i E Z rbp ee m g amp i aAVH aE e lobal leader ektron Medical strives to improve lives in its local and global Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 47 Adding HTML Content Click the down arrow s to return the content area to normal size The top row of buttons and title return Adding HTML Content You can only add content to a folder if you have permission to do so The following flowchart illustrates a typical sequence of events when working with content Approval Chain Publish to Web site After you create content you or your system administrator typically make it available on the site For example you can add a hyperlink to it from another page or place it in a collection or menu Your administrator can add it to a list summary or content list Edit NOTE Only users with Add permission for a folder can add content to it See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Setting Permissions Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 48
424. lass quality products and services Customer experience that exceeds expectations and differentiates otl marketplace To be the preferred global star Cy Edit ent Management View History U Delete Company Directory of Services Ej Add Task Properties Workarea Logout Hide Borders This image shows the same content without the border Our Company Vision Deliver world class quality products and services Customer experience that evreeds eyvnertations and differen marketplace LY Edit To be the preferred gl View History 2b Content Manage Delete Add Task gt Company Directory of Ser Properties Worka fea SSEeeea Logout Show Borders Showing the Border To show the border right click a content block while logged into Ektron CMS400 NET Next select Show Borders The page refreshes and the border appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Types of Content Every piece of content in Ektron CMS400 NET is one of the following types The table below summarizes all types Type HTML content XML Smart Forms HTML form survey DMS Documents which consist of Office documents managed files and multimedia files Office documents Managed files Multimedia Content designed to be published on the World Wide Web Online forms polls or surveys designed to collect information from site visito
425. lcome to the world of blogging Windows Live Writer is a that makes blogging a breeze It works like a familiar desktop word processor making it easy to post text and other content on the web Whether you post regularly or are just getting started Writer is the tool for you If you do not already have a weblog you can create a Windows Live Spaces account now Click the link below to open the web page that will begin your ondine registration Configure Writer Windows Live Writer can create blog entries on your Windows Live Space or on another weblog service Please choose your blog service to continue Configure Windows Live Writer to publish to Another weblog service Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 366 Blogs Step Windows Live Writer Setup Screen In the Weblog Homepage and Welcome to Windows Live Writer Beta Login window enter m the following information Weblog Homep age URL this is the page that contains the blog For exam ple http lt your site gt CMS400Min blogs aspx Weblog Homepage URL View Weblog Username your PO username to log on to the Ektron Password your password to log on to the Ektron CMS400 NET site Edit Proxy Set tings edit the proxy settings as needed Configure Writer to work with your current blog service To use Windows Live Writer you must already have an account with a blog service like Windows Live Spaces If you do no
426. ld to the Screen on page 170 2 The following dialog appears Calendar Field Descriptive Hame Field 1 Field Hame Field Tool Tip Test Field 1 Default value oy Validation Validation No validation Error Message crcl Fields on the Calendar Field Dialog Se Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 199 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 195 Working with HTML Forms SS Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Default If you want to set a default value for this field enter it here For example if this value field collects a city and most users enter New York enter New York as the value Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field The choices are e No validation response is not checked e Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked If you assi
427. le s width varies as a user adjusts the browser size e fixed number of pixels the table s width stays the same as a user adjusts the browser size You can also not set a width but instead let information you enter into the table s cells determine its width Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 739 Manipulating Your Table s Format NOTE To set the width of a table column adjust the width of one of the cells within the column as described in Specifying the Width of a Cell on page 753 Usually this change affects all other cells in the column Specifying Table Width by Percentage Specify table width by percentage if you want the table to be resized as the user resizes the browser NOTE In order for the table to resize with the browser the Word Wrap attribute must be turned on in all of a table s cells For details see Word Wrap on page 768 For example if you specify that a table is 100 wide and your browser displays 14 inches across when it is maximized the table fills the screen except for the browser border Netscape File Edt YWiew Go Communicator Help 3 toa Reload Home Search Netscape Print Security Shop Stop If you resize the browser to half the screen the table will be about 7 wide You still see both columns but some of the data is moved down Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 740 Manipulating Your Table s Format Net
428. library images are moved when you insert them into Ektron CMS400 NET Extensions of files that can be copied to this library folder For example doc and pdf The folder to which library files are moved when you insert them into Ektron CMS400 NET Your system administrator controls these settings searching the Library You can search the library to find items when you only know some information about them For example you know that an image s name includes Ektron but don t know its filename or folder To search the library first select the folder in which you want to begin the search The search only considers files in that folder and its child folders To search the entire library begin by selecting the Library root folder Next click the Search button from the library toolbar When you do a search screen appears with two tabs shown below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 138 Library Folder Search Library Folder Search Published Advanced Search Basic Search Advanced Search Search The left tab Search Published works the same as the regular search tab of that name See The Search Published Tab on page 118 The right tab Advanced Search provides several fields that let you narrow your search Search Library Folder Results g Search Published Advanced Search Enter Keyword s Ooo a Search Options All types O Images only Q
429. llustration above if the user moves the cursor over Products the assigned menu appears However if the user clicks Products as indicated by the hand he jumps to siteroot products aspx Entering the Path to the Landing Page This path is relative to the site root For example siteroot jobs aspx This URL path can be a static template path like the one mentioned above or a dynamic path such as wellness aspx id 40 amp wellness Hemophilia Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 444 Working with Menus Pitt Deserta Template Link Note This field applies to content only It has no effect on other types of menu items such as images Also this field only affects content that dynamically references a content block such as cMS400Min therapies aspx id 84 If the menu option is a template that includes content for example cMS400Min news aspx the template you identify here is ignored If you want to apply a template to this menu enter the template here If you do all content on this menu uses this template when selected from the menu If you do not enter a template here content on this menu uses the template specified in its Quicklink Overriding the Template Link You can override the menu template for any content item on this menu and instead use the template specified in its Quicklink To do so follow these steps 1 Add all items to the menu See Adding a Menu Item on page 446 Go to
430. log on page 797 Horizontal Caption Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on Alignment page 797 Vertical Caption Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on Alignment page 797 Abbreviation Cell properties dialog Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog on page 799 Categories Cell properties dialog Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog on page 799 WARNING The Section 508 Table Properties dialog only works if Internet Explorer version 6 0 or higher is installed Once that is installed any browser can be used Netscape FireFox IE etc WARNING Even if you change no values on the screen you must open the Accessibility dialog whenever you modify a table for example add a new row The table s properties required for Section 508 are generated when you click OK to close the dialog box To create a 508 compliant table follow these steps 1 Create a new table or edit an existing one as explained in Introduction to Tables on page 726 2 Select the table by moving the cursor to a table border until you see a four headed arrow illustrated below When a table is selected small squares surround it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 795 Section 508 Compliance Ermpleyee Id Department 15468 1549 Human Resources 1550 Sales 1551 Admirstration Click the Tables button E3 Click Table Properties The Table Properties dialog a
431. log Configuration Complete name in the Weblog a Name field l Thank you for using Windows Live Writer Click Finish You have successfully configured writer to post blog entries Please confirm that vou would like to save these settinas Weblog Provider Custom Metaweblog APT Username Homepage Url Upload Settings admin Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 369 My Workspace My Workspace A community is a group of people who network with each other to share information ideas likes and dislikes Typically people or members in the community are connected to each other by a relationship For example they work for the same company went to the same school share the same values or have a friendship When a person initially visits a community site they can explore to see what type of information people and groups are on the site While the person can see some information on the site they often need to become a member of the site to see exclusive information When a person signs up to be member they define information about themselves This is known as their member profile As a Ektron CMS400 NET user you already have a member profile on the site The Community Platform in CMS400 is a set of features that allow users to network socially on the site Access to the community platform is available from both the Web site and the Workarea Only Ektron CMS400 NET users and administrators can access their
432. ls use the Background Image field of the Insert Table dialog box Custom Background Background Color M Unassigned Background Image Select Image Y Your Webmaster determines which images are available to you To insert a background image 1 2 3 Click the down arrow to the right of Select Image A list of background images appears Click the image of your choice Click OK Note that when you apply a background image to a table it applies to the entire table including the borders if the table is larger than the image the image repeats until it fills the table if the image is larger than the table the top left corner of the image aligns with the top left corner of the table The rest of the image fills as much of the table as possible you can also apply an image to individual cells see Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 759 make sure that the image does not obscure user s ability to read the table text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 748 Manipulating Your Table s Format Deleting a Background Image 1 Move the cursor to any cell on the table and right click the mouse 2 Click Table Properties from the menu ptt opy Paste Select All Insert Aor Insert Column Delete Rows Delete Columns Mee ells Split Cell T able Properties Cell Properties Hyperlink Picture Clean HTML Code Insert HT RAL Vie
433. m s Conte nt cccccessseecesenseeseessseeseenneeseoees 168 Form VY SUNG AION ccna 174 Formi Nace eerie ate E 175 Implementing a Form on a Web Page ccccessseeeeseeeenneeeees 196 Assigning a Task tO a Form 2 cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneees 197 Viewing Form Reports ccceeseceeseeeeseeeesseeeeseeeeneeseseeenneeeeneens 199 Viewing Form INfoOrmatiOn ccccccceesesseeeeseseeeeseeeseeeeseeeensens 206 Editing a FOF senaian riae 212 Deleting a FOM arc eenreecca sie tnia dnaiasanecatananetsiatidavaecam Geusaeeenss 214 View Form Toolbar ese sisnieidanainssissaruasidesnndensiiearideweaiessansaciisatabinned 215 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 ili Creating Polls and Surveys cccsssseeessesseeeeeeseeeseenseeseeees 216 Using the Document Management System 224 Supported Types Of ASSetS cccsssseecessseesceeseeeseeeneeseeennees 225 Se e U T n EE aden cere nate E S E T T O AE T E 226 Software Requirements ccsssececessseeceeesseseesnseesseeesesseenees 226 Working with Microsoft Office Documents 1000 229 Importing Office DOCUMENTS cccecseeeeeseeseneeseenseseeneeesees 232 Working with Managed Files ccsssecsssseeeeseeseenseneseeees 255 Py OG riasso 260 Asset Re as seiesat ccupetaveemesecbusenbansicanstaansannsnaciemseosianimeesiaen 261 Working with XML Smart Forms c sceeeeeeeee
434. m Location One Time Recurring Date 56 Apr 2006 pa Start 1 00 00 PM End 2 00 00 PM W Display the times for the event Hyperlink C Launch link in a new browser Event Type 4yvatlable Selected Company Holiday gt Company Event Trade Show El 4 Update the fields using the table described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 280 as a reference 5 Click the Save button Editing Recurring Events After a recurring series of events is added to a calendar you may edit it to change the title location hyperlink and event type Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 290 Working with Calendars NOTE You cannot edit event dates or times To change those delete and re enter the series of events To edit a recurring series of events follow the steps in Editing a Single Event on page 289 The only difference is the Update all recurring events associated with this event box To apply the edits to only the instance of the event that you selected uncheck the box To apply the changes to all instances check the box Deleting Calendar Events The section explains how to delete a single event or a recurring series of events NOTE You can only delete a calendar event if you have add edit or delete permission for the content folder to which the calendar is assigned Deleting a Single Occurrence Calendar Event You can easily delete calendar events that are no longe
435. mberShips 3 The Calendar Modules screen appears It lists all calendars in Ektron CMS400 NET Calendar modules Title ID Description Path Re International listing of events for RE International news y Calendar events NOTE Only system administrators can create a new calendar 4 Click a calendar 5 The View Calendar screen appears showing information about the calendar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 272 Working with Calendars View Calendar Intranet Company Calendar En EEA ie WPT English U S Y Add In select a Langt Title Intranet Company Calendar ID J Description Location Label Location Start Time Label Start End Time Label End Table Properties Display weekends Forward Only 5 Show only events that fall after the viewing day Event Types Event Type Label Bob s Event Type Event Types Available Event Types Required Instructions Ctrl Click to Show Event Type Show All Label Show All Long Description None Folder Name Content Folder Path Y The following table explains the fields on the View Calendar screen ed pe Title given to the calendar The title identifies the calendar within the Workarea Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 273 Working with Calendars SS ID number automatically assigned to calendar This is used to display the calendar on a Web page Description given to the calendar Loc
436. me you save the image If you later want to save it to a different folder or under a different name or file type use the Save As command Save As Standard Toolbar Button i Description Save the current image under a different name or format For example you might save mypicture gif as mypicture jpg Your system administrator determines which file formats are available Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 719 Editing Images Dialog Box See Save on page 718 Select Standard Toolbar Button Description Selects an area of an image You can then execute other commands on the selected area such as blur sharpen cut and delete NOTE Once you press the Select command it remains selected and continues to be active until you press it a second time Sharpen Standard Toolbar Button A Description Sharpens edges within an image You can select a level of sharpness from 1 through 5 Sharpening brings an image into better focus and increases the detail If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 720 Editing Images w Sharpen OFX men Text Standard Toolbar Button T Description Places text on an image You can also change the text s size font color and attributes bold italic etc To use the Text command follow these steps Click the Text button T Move the cursor to
437. med in Step 1 above who has a valid email address in the User Information Screen The email s subject line is the form name The body of the email contains the following information for each field on the form e name e value submitted by user Reports If a form is set to store data in the database you can run a report that displays the submitted data To view a form report follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 199 Working with HTML Forms 1 Navigate to the folder for which you want to view the report The View Contents of Folder screen appears 2 Click the form you want to view If you do not see your form in the folder make sure the Content Type drop down box Is set to All Types or Forms 3 Click the View Reports button il The View Forms Report screen appears 5 Enter report criteria using the following table as a reference e ee Start Date If desired specify a start date The report displays only forms that were submitted on or after the start date End Date If desired specify an end date The report displays only forms that were submitted on or before the end date Report Display Specify the format to display the report Select Legacy Specify the version of the form or poll for which to Report get a report Using this option allows you to see the results from previous polls and forms 6 Click the Get Result button to display the report Display Formats
438. ment is removed from the list Colleagues You can associate yourself with other people in the community by adding them as colleagues This allows you to create a network of colleagues and share information with them Once a colleague is added you can visit their profile page and see all their details including their colleagues You can then search through their colleagues list to find people you Know and add them to your own colleagues list Thus growing your social network and facilitating additional information sharing e Ektron CMS400 NET users can manage colleagues from the Workarea or the Web site Membership users can only manage colleagues through the Web site Managing Existing Colleagues on page 394 e View Pending Colleagues on page 403 e Viewing Sent Colleague Requests in the Workarea on page 404 Colleagues in the Workarea You can manage your colleagues in the Workarea by clicking the My Workspace folder button and expanding the Colleagues items From this area you can work with e Colleagues your colleagues See Also Managing Existing Colleagues on page 394 e Pending Colleagues users who have sent you a colleague request See Also View Pending Colleagues on page 403 e Sent Colleagues Requests colleagues requests you ve sent that have not been accepted See Also Viewing Sent Colleague Requests in the Workarea on page 404 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 3
439. menu and clicks the menu link Ektron CMS400 NET displays the menu in the selected language if it is available If a menu in that language is not available nothing appears Before creating or translating a menu its a good idea to create or translate all content that will be on the menu In this way you can link this content to the new menu However after creating a menu you can add new items to it Translating a Menu To translate a menu into any supported language follow these steps You can navigate to the menu via the Web site or from the Workarea Each procedure is described below By Navigating the Site Sign on to Ektron CMS400 NET select the menu s current language Navigate to the page that has the menu you want to translate a Click the menu and the Edit Menu option Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 466 Working with Menus The View Menu screen appears for the selected menu 6 From the Add drop down list select the language into which you want to translate the menu Ibikbielkbikbikilibik Sea Danish Lerman standard 7 The Add Menu screen appears Complete the screen for the menu in the selected language See Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 442 Click the Save button fa The View Menu screen reappears Now the View In drop down list displays the menu s new language Yiew Menu Italian menu view In ltalian Standard Title
440. ministrator Manual section Managing HTML Content gt Creating Updating Templates Category Assign taxonomy categories to this content See A so Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Taxonomy Editing HTML Content Ektron CMS400 NET HTML content can be in any of several statuses as described in Appendix A Content Statuses on page i You can only edit content for which you have permission and in one of the following statuses e published e checked in e checked out by you e submitted for your approval Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 52 Editing HTML Content NOTE If you check content out you a member of the Administrators group or a suer assigned the folder admin role must check it in before other users can edit it NOTE Editing content is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see one of the Edit options on the dropdown menu you do not have permission to do so See Also e Editing a Form on page 212 e Translating Content to Another Language on page 59 e Editing an Office Document on page 246 e Editing a Managed File on page 258 Steps in Editing HTML Content There are several ways to edit content e from a web page after you log in See Also Editing Content from a Web Page on page 53 Edit Edit in Context e from the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea See Also Editing Content from a Web Page on page 53 E
441. mments allow site visitors to interact with a blog by adding their thoughts about a blog post The blog administrator controls commenting by deciding who can add comments and if they require approval for publication See Also e Controlling Blog Comments on page 357 e Comments on the Site on page 359 e Comments in the Workarea on page 361 Controlling Blog Comments Ektron CMS400 NET provides three properties for controlling comments Use the Blog Properties screen to set them See Also Blog Properties on page 325 The following table describes these properties Ca aaa Enable Comments Allows user in Workarea and site visitor to add blog comments Also displays comments on site and in Workarea Note A member of the Administrators group can always add comments regardless of how this checkbox is set Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 357 Blogs aS Moderate Comments Determines if comments must be approved before they appear on site If this field is checked only users with permission to edit the post can approve comments see illustration of this permission below View Permissions for Folder Blog Allow this object to inherit permissions The content in this folder is private and can only view Advanced Permissions User or Group Mame Read Only Edit Add Delete F bob H HO H If users without this permission add comments they only appear on the Web site afte
442. mments window pops up You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affects the task Note Only the last approver in the approval chain sees this button ps Save and check in content This button does not submit the E Check In content into the approval process but rather lets other users change it mi Save the content without submitting it into the approval process Save If a user clicks save and then closes the editor other users cannot edit the content This buttons appears if you are the next approver in the approval list Click it to decline the changes made to the content Note If content has any active tasks a comments window pops up You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affects the task Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 173 Working with HTML Forms Close the editor without saving changes Next click the Save and Submit or Publish button Eh The form only appears on your Web site after it is published After you complete and save the form it may need to go through the approval process When that is complete add it to the site by assigning it to a page template See Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 196 Form Validation You can apply validation rules while creating or editing the following field types e text e password e textarea e calendar Validation rules ensure that the form information entere
443. more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Community Management gt Tags Metadata is more fully explained through the following topics e Entering Custom Metadata on page 81 e Entering Title and Keywords on page 88 Entering Custom Metadata Your system administrator defines the metadata that can be added to content The metadata being collected can be customized for each folder When you create or update content you can define metadata using fields that the administrator specified NOTE In order to add metadata to content an administrator must have created definitions for it in the language of the content For example each document stored in the Document Management functionality has a unique part number Your system administrator adds a custom search field called Part Number and specifies that only numbers can be inserted into the field When you add a document to Ektron CMS400 NET you access the content s metadata and insert the correct part number for the document illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 81 Adding or Editing Metadata Edit Content in Folder Content ba Lit lanl on Eg Title Sample Content Block English U 5 4 Content Summary Metadata Schedule Web Alerts Templates title Sample Content Block J current character count 20 SOO mas Collection None selected ID 1 Change Cl
444. move the cursor over it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 3 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET As a global leader ektron Medical strives to improve lives in its local and global WELCOME TO OUR SITE communities particularly with _ _ _ _ regard to increasing access to AY f or VE high quality healthcare for pe ERE ini Coanihekt th unde 5 It is af ce 4 Edit m comlL Edit J term Cz Th vi l de Eh view History Pf the Wi Bea a mployees de i Delete Ci z mM H Add Task th J Add Task a Properties Properties i di i I Workarea ee WI workarea ne a IC Logout Menu indicated by Menu indicated by gray colored border circle in top left corner You can perform Ektron CMS400 NET tasks from the control menu Menu options vary depending on the content s status your permissions etc The advantage of this feature is that you can see how a Web page will appear to site visitors See Also e Control Menu Options on page 4 e Hiding and Showing the Content Border on page 6 e Appendix A Content Statuses on page i explains the meaning of the border s color Control Menu Options Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 4 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET The following table describes the menu options that may appear Add Appears if you selected a language and the content is not available in that language Use this butt
445. mp library assets Display content summary X X X optional Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 435 Working with Collections Collection Display additional content X information comment last modified date start date end date user who last edited it ID number path relative to your site s root List Taxonomy Summary Can be multi leveled ee Main purpose is navigation LX Main purpose is classification ee X For a detailed guide to Ektron CMS400 NET navigation see the Best Practice Navigation for your Web site pamphlet available from http dev ektron com uploadedFiles Resources navigations20best 20practice pdf Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 436 Working with Menus Working with Menus IMPORTANT Ektron CMS400 NET s Menu feature lets users create and maintain a dropdown menu system for your Web site The menu options can link to content library assets external hyperlinks and submenus Below is a sample menu In this example delivered with Ektron CMS400 NET the menu appears when a site visitor moves the cursor over About Us on the home page However if a content contributor with permission to edit menus signs in to Ektron CMS400 NET then views the menu it has additional options for editing the menu or adding content If you chooses to hide the border that appears around content when you are logged in the Add and Edit opt
446. n oa oa O Change builtin user password IMPORTANT If you changed the builtin user password during the site setup you do not need to change it again See Editing Builtin on page iv for additional information Change the builtin user s password in the Workarea by following these steps 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to Settings gt Configurations gt Setup Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 i Securing Ektron CMS400 NET Click the Edit button Find the Built In User field In the Password and Confirm Password fields enter the new password 5 Click the Update button Remove Sample Users and Sample Membership Users Some sample users and sample membership users are included with CMS400 NET for evaluation and demonstration purposes These users should be removed when they are no longer needed CMS users have access to the Workarea They can be content authors administrators or even developers who need access to information in the Workarea These people count towards the number of users in your license Membership users are typically people who only interact with your Web site Membership users are a category of users who have limited privileges to Ektron CMS400 NET Unlike regular CMS users they cannot use the Workarea and do not count towards the number of users in your license Remove Sample Users and Sample Membership Users IMPORTANT Some users in this list might not appear in your User list
447. n 7 6 Revision 5 686 Inserting Images To make this change Use this field Adjust the alignment of the picture Alignment For more information see Aligning the Picture on page 688 WARNING If you substantially adjust the picture s height and or width the picture may be distorted when users view your Web page Pixels A pixel is a single point in a graphic image Computer monitors display pictures by dividing the screen into thousands of pixels arranged in rows and columns The pixels are so close together that they appear connected Below is an image shown at regular size and then enlarged so you can see the pixels that make up the picture regular size enlarged to show pixels Setting a Border To add a border around a picture enter the border s thickness in pixels in the Border Thickness field on the Picture Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 687 Inserting Images dialog box Layout Width Height Border Thickness o Alignment Not set al Reset Here is a picture with a 1 pixel border Here is the same picture with a 10 pixel vena c If the picture is not a hyperlink its border is black If the picture is also a hyperlink the border is the same color as a hyperlink for example blue or purple if visited Aligning the Picture To align a picture use the Alignment field on the Picture Properties dialog box Layout width fi B He
448. n CMS400 NET and it cannot be blank Password If desired enter a new password inio this field If you change your password you do not need to log out then log back in However the next time you log in you must use the new password Confirm Pwd Confirm your new password by retyping it into this field User Language Select a language in which to view Ektron CMS400 NET Click the black down arrow on the right circled below to see a list of choices User Language English US E Mail Address inet W Disable E M st Email Address Enter a new valid email address Notification email is sent to this address unless the Disable E mail Notification field is checked To understand how email notification operates within the content workflow see Example of an Approval Chain on page 94 Also this address identifies the user sending Instant email See Also Sending Instant Email on page 25 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 473 Updating Your User Profile Fed Powerit Content and Forum Determines which editor will be used when this user Editor e replies to a Discussion Board See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Discussion Boards gt Using Discus sion Boards on your Web Site edits content if Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea or after signing into your Web site ifthe user is operating a Windows computer and the system administrator has set UserPreferred is the value of the
449. n CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 131 Searching the Workarea Column Description Header Language The locale id value of the content s language For a reference list of these values see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Appendix C List of Supported Languages Appendix C List of Supported Languages on page 1378 Status A one character abbreviation of the content item s status See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page i NOTE If you install Ektron CMS400 NET then later select a different database to search you must run c Program Files Ektron releasenumber utilities software searchconfig SearchConfig e xe against the new database This program gets all required data from the new database Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 132 Content Workflow Reports Content Workflow Reports The Reports folder contains various content reports For information about them see the Content Reports section of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 133 Library Folder Library Folder The library folder stores images files quicklinks and hyperlinks that can be inserted into editor content Before you can insert them into content you must copy them from your computer to a larger file server computer that everyone editing your site can access This chapter explains how to copy such files and insert
450. n CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 70 Scheduling Content to Begin and End Each scenario is now explained Setting the Go Live Date on New Content When you set a go live date on new content it becomes viewable on the specified date and time as long as it completes the approval chain If a site visitor accesses the page that contains the content before then he sees only the template If a logged in CMS user browses your Web site he sees a grey border around the content until the date specified If he clicks within the grey border he can use the Preview option to see the new content Setting the Go live Date on Existing Content When you set a go live date for changes to existing content and it completes the approval chain a logged in CMS user sees a grey border around the content until the date specified When you view content on the Web site you see the previously published version When the go live date occurs the new content replaces the previous version and its status changes to Active setting an End Date on Content To set an end date for content follow these steps Edit content See Editing HTML Content on page 52 Click the Schedule tab Click the calendar icon next to the End Date field Start Date None End Date None Ea 4 Acalendar pops up 5 Select the date and time you want the content to be removed from the Web site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5
451. n My Workspace gt gt Photos You can change the folder where images are stored in My Workspace gt gt Photos by moving the content from one folder to another In addition to moving images you can copy them to another folder To accomplish either of these actions follow these steps 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Photos 2 Select the folder from which to move or copy the images 3 Click the drop down triangle to the right of the image title 4 From the drop down list select Copy to Buffer 5 Select the folder to which the content will be moved 6 Click the Manage link 7 Click the Move Items Ea or Copy button B 8 A dialog box appears asking you to confirm the move or copy action 9 Click OK 10 The page refreshes and the moved or copied image appears in the new folder Sharing Content in My Workspace gt gt Photos The Photos area of My Workspace allows you to add and remove images you want share with your colleagues You can share content with the Public Colleagues Selected Colleagues or keep the content private You apply sharing options to folders not to individual content To share a folder follow these steps 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Photos 2 Click the Manage Folder button amp 3 The Add Folder box appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 415 My Workspace 4 Click the Share Folder button qj 5 The Shar
452. n page 358 Editing a Comment From the Content area navigate to the blog 2 Click the Comments icon to the left of the post whose comment you want to edit 3 Locate the comment you want to edit 4 Click edit Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 363 Blogs 5 The Edit Comment screen appears For a description of the fields on this screen see gt The Comment Form on page 360 Note that Edit Comment screen provides an additional field State This field lets the submitting user set the comment s state to approved or pending Approved comments appear on the site immediately Pending comments must be approved before they appear To learn about the approval process for pending comments see Moderate Comments on page 358 Deleting a Comment Once a comment is deleted you cannot retrieve it From the Content area navigate to the blog 2 Click the Comments icon to the left of the post whose comment you want to delete 3 Click delete 4 Adialog box appears Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 Click OK to delete the comment Approving a Comment Comments can require approval if e they are submitted from the Web site and Moderate Comments is checked in the blog s folder properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 364 Blogs e auser submits the comment from the Workarea set its state to Pending Only users with permission to edit content posts within the
453. n page 486 e Form Elements Toolbar on page 492 Table of Toolbar Buttons eWebEdit400 s toolbar buttons are explained below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 486 Toolbar Buttons Button Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Ctrl A Select all content p Cut Ctrl X Remove selected text and graphics Place that data into temporary memory also known as the clipboard If you later cut or copy more information onto the clipboard the new information overwrites the original information Ctrl C Copy selected text and graphics into Copying from Other temporary memory Leave selected data Applications on where it is page 493 If you later cut or copy more information into memory the original information is lost A Ctrl V Insert the most recently cut or copied text Copying from Paste and graphics at the current cursor Microsoft Word on location page 493 Enl Designed for pasting Microsoft Word Copying from Paste from Word content this button strips fonts and Microsoft Word on Cleaning Fonts amp classes For example if you use the page 493 Styles Paste button Word content contains these tags lt p class MsoNormal style MARGIN Oin Oin Opt gt lt span style BACKGROUND lime mso highlight lime gt lt font size 3 gt lt font face Times New Roman gt But if you paste that content using this button only lt p gt tags are preserved
454. n step 2 are overwritten by step 3 It is important to establish procedures that avoid such problems Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 252 Using the Document Management System Saving an Office Document as a Web Page When saving a Word document after you choose Save as from Word s File menu there are two choices for saving as html NOTE When saving an Excel document Save as Web Page htm html is the only option e save as Web Page e save as Web Page Filtered Sinale File Web Page mht ie nim NOTE For a description of the differences between these options see htip office microsoft com en us help HP030852781 033 aspx Ektron recommends save as Web Page Filtered because the resulting HTML is almost identical to the original document The save as Web Page is not a good option because its HI ML content does not match the original document and may cause problems when being edited Handling Images Embedded within a Word Document If you save an Office document that includes images they appear when anyone is editing the document as well as when it appears on your Web site In addition the images are saved to the corresponding Ektron CMS400 NET Library folder In this way other Ektron CMS400 NET users can apply the images to HTML content as needed See Also Library Folder on page 134 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 253 Using the Document Manag
455. n view all tasks created via form submission in the Smart Desktop See illustration below See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 17 Content Awaiting Approval O L Content Currently Checked Out 6 Tasks 2 Form Submission Tasks 1 iew All Tasks OE Se Eso re ere ere eo ee es i ise Socer Blank Form Wot Started Normal Not Specified Everyone E admin Not Specified Fe Content To Expire 0 Ektron CMS400 NET users and administrators can also view and update tasks assigned to them via the Task screens on the Smart Desktop See Viewing a Task on page 307 and Viewing a Task s History on page 317 Task Information The task created upon form submission has the following information Form title as entered by the author Assigned to As set up by the user who created or edited the form Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 198 Working with HTML Forms Ftd Vawe Assigned by User who created or last edited form Task Form Submission Task Category Category Task type Form Submission Task Created by User who created or last edited form Not specified Start date Not specified Description Data from form form name was received on date time form description Name of every field on the form value submitted by user into that field email Automatically Generated Upon Form Submission Viewing Form An email is automatically sent to every user na
456. nd Background Color Background Image From File The following table lists the fields on this dialog box and refers you to the section that explains each field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 734 Field s Rows Spanned Columns Spanned Word Wrap Horizontal Alignment Vertical Alignment Background Color Background Image Use Default Color Border Color Lets you specify If the cell spans two or more rows If the cell spans two or more columns The minimum cell width Whether text moves down to the next line when it reaches the specified width of a cell The alignment of data across a cell The alignment of data up and down within a cell The cell s background color if you want it to be different from the table s background color A background image for the cell Apply the table border color to this cell border Apply a color other than the table border color to this cell border The Table Context Sensitive Menu The following menu appears when you right click the mouse while the cursor is in a table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus For more information see Spanning Rows or Columns on page 761 Spanning Rows or Columns on page 761 Specifying the Width of a Cell on page 753 Word Wrap on page 68 Setting Horizontal Alignment on page 763 Set
457. nd Sett nA amici 4 C Administrator Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 242 Using the Document Management System 4 The Map Network Drive screen appears Click Sign Up for Online Storage or Connect to a Network Server 5 A wizard screen appears Click Next 6 Another wizard screen appears Click Choose another network location Click Next 7 A third wizard screen appears Enter the path to your Ektron CMS400 NET site followed by the ekdavroot folder For example http server23 CMS400 ekdavroot Click Next Add Network Place Wizard What is the address of this network place Type the address of the Web site FTP site or network location that this shortcut will open Intemet or network address View some examples WARNING If your computer runs Microsoft Vista and you see this error message The folder you entered does not appear to be valid Please choose another refer to this Ektron KB article http dev ektron com kb_article aspx id 151 76 8 A login screen appears see below Enter your Ektron CMS400 NET username and password Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 243 Using the Document Management System Connect to icestorm Deo sale Ti The server icestorm at EktronOMS400Server requires a Username and password User name f admin we Remember my password Cancel 9 Another wizard screen appears Name the folder You will use this name to id
458. ne 535 Modifying Table Properties cccsssecsssseeeeseeseenseseeneeseees 539 D leting a Table eltaedee st snstiapectsitaate sac ere unica unnan 541 Inserting a Table Within a Table ccccccsssseesesseeeeeneeeeeneeeeens 541 Choosing the Number of Rows and Column 542 Specifying Table VIG iaicctecseticirierriiieicnemnneiiinnele 544 Specifying Horizontal Alignment ccssssseessseeseeseeeees 548 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 vi Table BackgroundS ss sssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 550 Setting Table Borders cccssssecccssseesesenseesceesseeeeeeseeseeensees 557 Working with Table Cells ccssssecsssseeceeseeseeseeseeneeees 562 Selecting Cells to Modify cccssseeessssseeeceesseeeseeneeeseennees 562 Specifying the Height and Width of a Cell 0000000 564 Deleting a Peepers omer ene inet tn ge i 565 Specifying a Cell s Background Color cccccsssseeeseesseeeeensees 566 Specifying a Background Image for a Cell csssseeeseeees 567 Spanning Rows or Columns cccscseeeeseeseeeeeenseeseeeseeesenens 568 Aligning Text Within a Cell cccccecssssseeseeseeeseeseeeseeeenees 570 ERS oo A E T A A A 571 Merging Two Cells assnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn 572 ONG N E AA 573 Setting Cell Padding and Spacingd
459. net Explorer If the eWebEditPro XML editor is one of several fields on a page and your browser is Internet Explorer move to eWebEditPro XML by pressing lt Tab gt until the cursor lands in the editor To move from the editor to the next field press lt Ctrl gt lt Tab gt Using Netscape If the eWebEditPro XML editor is one of several fields on a page and your browser is Netscape your Webmaster needs to create custom toolbar buttons that let you move into and out of the editor This procedure is described in the eWebEditPro XML Developer s Reference Guide Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 791 Section 508 Compliance Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse As explained in Customizing Your Toolbar on page 652 the eWebEditPro XML toolbar consists of one or more toolbar menus Menus have buttons that you click with the mouse to perform actions such as copying text This section explains how to perform those actions without using the mouse 1 With the cursor in the eWebEditPro XML editor press the application key Eh 2 Amenu appears Menus Cut Copy Paste Paste Text Select All Clean HTML Hyperlink Insert HTML ow View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Picture Insert Custom Tag 3 Press the down arrow key to select Menus Menus becomes highlighted Menus Cut Dinar 4 Press lt Enter gt A new menu lists all toolbar menus available to yOu Ektron CMS400 NET U
460. new collection See Creating a Collection on page 423 And if you have a large number of collections you can use the Search box to help find collections of interest Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 420 Working with Collections Viewing a Collection To view a collection follow these steps 1 Select a collection using the procedure described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 418 or Finding a Collection Using the Collections Folder on page 419 2 The View Collection screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 421 Working with Collections View Collection About Us Title Home About Us Awards and Honors Board of Directors Products GH fn Gi fi Ga More info Title About Us ID f Template Last User To Edit Application Administrator Last Edit Date 2 13 2007 Date Created 3 3 2006 Description Status A Include Subfolders Approval is reguired Quickdeploy This Collection Title ID Language ID URL Link B Home 33 1033 CMS400Demo dynamic aspx id 33 E About Us 35 1033 CMS5400Demo aboutus aspx id 35 The screen displays each item in the collection To learn more about a collection click More Info When you do the lower section of the screen displays the following information about the collection e title e description Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 422 Work
461. ng Files on page 147 e Library Link Searching on page 149 e Adding a Library File to Content on page 150 For a definition of the term files see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 134 Copying Files to the Library Files must be copied to the Ektron CMS400 NET library before users can insert them into content To copy a file to the library follow these steps WARNING Ektron recommends using the Document Management system to add files Unlike library files DMS files can be part of an approval chain maintain a history are searchable and can have a summary schedule metadata taxonomy categories etc TECHNICAL NOTE Microsoft lets users upload files of any name However Internet Explorer security blocks files whose name contains an ampersand amp colon or percentage sign Source htto support microsoft com kb 826437 en us To allow these characters add the following registry key to your Web server then reset IIS Reg Key DWORD HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft ASP NET VerificationCompatibility 1 1 Inthe Workarea browse the library folder and select a folder to which you want to copy a file NOTE When you copy a file to a folder only users with permissions to that folder can insert the file into content 2 A list of files in that folder appears 3 Click the Add Library button F 4 The Add File screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 143 L
462. ng HTML Forms gt Forms Must Use Template with FormBlock Server Control Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 630 Working with HTML Forms 2 Fromthe View menu click Language and select the language in which to create the form 3 Click the New gt HTML Form Survey 4 The New Form screen appears New Form Select a form from below or begin with a blank form Next you ll be able to customize all aspects of the form so that it collects exactly the information you re looking for Blank Form Design a new form Blank Survey Design a new survey Standard Poll Design a new poll Compose Email ch NOTE When you choose Standard Poll or Blank Survey the number of steps in the Forms Wizard changes from five steps to four steps This happens because the Assign Tasks step is removed 5 Choose Blank Survey You can click the preview icon next to any sample form to preview it before choosing it 6 Click the Next button Enter or edit the form s Title and Description e Title used to reference the survey within the Workarea required e Description an extended description of the survey 8 Click the Next button 9 This screen lets you determine what happens after the site visitor completes the survey The choices are e Display a message See Composing the Postback Message on page 585 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 631 Working
463. ng the Editor for Ektron CMS400 NET Users on page 482 More specifically eWebEdit400 lets you perform Web page editing functions such as e copy content from any Windows based application e cut copy and paste e find and replace text e check spelling e change font style size attributes bold italics underline and color e begin lines with bullets or numbers e adjust indentation e right center or left justify text and images e adda bookmark hyperlink image or table e view your text as WYSIWYG or HTML code e insert or clean HTML source code You gain access to these functions from the toolbar at the top of the editor or from a menu that appears when you right click the mouse inside the editor Also if you create and maintain HTML forms this chapter describes how to do that using eWebEdit400 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 484 Introduction to eWebEdit400 Using eWebEdit400 eWebEdit400 is like many other word processing applications You type text and then use toolbar buttons illustrated below and menu options to change the text s appearance or perform functions on tt such as spell checking Apply CSS Cl Paragraph Sit B J U 4 x MXM 7 G ag fo eee ee amp a To learn more about using eWebEdit400 see these topics e Toolbar Buttons on page 486 e Copying from Other Applications on page 493 e Finding and Replacing Text on page 495 e Checking Spelling on page
464. nk check 66 overwrite 66 preview 66 publish 66 remove 66 reorder 66 restore 66 save to database 66 search 67 show calendar 67 submit 67 view date 67 view difference 67 view history 67 view published 67 view staged 67 WYSIWYG view as toolbar and menu option 644 X XSLT removing from XML content block 114 Y yellow content border color meaning i Z zoom in WeblmageFX command 724 zoom out WebIlmageFX command 725 viii
465. nn nenene i Additional Information ccccscceseeeseecnseeenesensecnsesenesenssenseees iv Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET 1 What is a Content Block ccccsseseeseenseeesenneeessonseeeseenseessoees 1 Working with Content from your Web Site ccccsssesseeeeees 2 Types OF Content iscsi cecssarscscsavancinnasawencennmecariavsuneusenensdeaveucenamnmetuuas 8 Workflow in Ektron CMS400 NET ccssscessssseeeseeesenseneenees 9 Editing COUNT s S 10 The Lifecycle of Content cccccsssseesceeseeeseesseeseeeseeeseeeeeenees 11 BO CHUNG mand OU remrem 12 ProrogUISiIOS scisiocuicickasa aa 12 Logging into the Sample Web Site ccccssseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 le Pie Wosia 14 Logging Out of the Sample Site cccccessssseeeeesseeeeeenneeeenens 15 The Workarea and Smart Desktop 16 Accessing the Workarea cccccesscseseceeeseeeeseeeseeseaneeeaeeeeaneesenes 16 Understanding the Smart DeSktop cccessseseeesseeseeeeenseeeeeees 17 Navigating Within the Smart DeSktop c cssssseesseeseeeeeees 20 Sending Instant Email cscceeesessseeseesseeeecenneeeseenseeseenneees 25 Working with Folders and Content 28 Viewing a OIG CM sececitesicnninncinsirenerorenesresensicnesnnnsaeerncinene 30 New Menu ccccecececeecececeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeesusaueeeeeususeueeeususeueueuseeuseneeeueas 32 View MEMU saran
466. no search criteria and get a list of all HTML and Form content on your site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 125 Searching the Workarea However if you enter search text the search only finds items that include the search text and satisfy other criteria on the screen The Noise File Ektron CMS400 NET has a noise file that screens from the search every single letter of the alphabet as well as common words Examples of common words are about after all and also Avoid entering such words into the Search Text field because the search ignores them For information on managing the noise files see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Searching Your Web Site gt Query Language gt Rules for Formulating Queries Specifying Match Criteria NOTE This field is only applicable if you entered one or more words in the Search Text field From this dropdown list select criteria for how the search word or words must appear within the content of the files being searched Search Text All the words All the words i Any of the words Title Exact Phrase Content ID Comments Your choices are described below A search returns content that has For more information see All the words all words in the search field All the Words on page 127 Any of the words any word in the search field Any of the Words on page 127 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revi
467. ns Display or suppress formatting characters that do not appear when content is published cr Display hide Invisible Elements Display a dialog that lets you change the appearance of the HTML source code View Preferences Display a dialog box that shows your version of About eWebEditPro XML and your license keys eWebEditPro XML lt Delete Delete selected content Ty Underline Ctrl U Make the text underlined 2 Remove alignment oe Remove alignment settings applied to selected content M Bookmark Create a bookmark See Also Using Bookmarks on e page 771 Horizontal Line a Insert a horizontal line Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 650 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Ctrl P Print the editor content Print B Ctrl A Select all content Select All z Deselect all selected content Select None Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 651 Customizing Your Toolbar The eWebEditPro XML toolbar consists of one or more menus Each menu has one or more buttons You can recognize the beginning of a menu by the double vertical bars circled in the illustration BB AMa Sloal ee 2S mB Bl ie Apply Style Normal gt Times New Roman 3 12 pt bi A aa BR i This sample toolbar has four menus Your Webmaster determines e which menus are available to you e which buttons appear on each menu and the sequen
468. ns 318 viewing 307 options 308 sorting options 311 template link field on Add Edit Menu screen 445 text aligning 647 in columns 729 within a cell 763 direction menu 648 indenting 646 remove formatting 646 replacing 666 searching 666 selecting 639 WeblmageFX command 721 title bar displaying button text 476 toolbars buttons 64 640 collections 423 customizing 652 eWebEdit400 486 floating buttons 4 redisplay 657 restore 657 trademark character inserting 644 toolbar and menu option 644 translate toolbar and menu option 643 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 vii twain acquire WeblmageFX command 723 twain source WeblmageFX command 723 U underline toolbar option 650 undo toolbar option 642 WeblImageFX command 724 uppercase words spell checking 673 URL link field on Add Edit Menu screen 444 users email address editing 473 language editing 473 profile customizing work page height 476 customizing work page size 475 customizing work page width 475 landing page after login 476 see profile set Smart Desktop as start location 476 V validation HTML form 174 596 version number viewing 647 650 vertical flip WeblmageFX command 724 view content difference 101 103 button floating toolbar 6 screen first use 110 view date toolbar button 67 view difference toolbar button 67 view history button floating toolbar 6 toolbar button 67 view preferences toolbar button
469. nserts the item into the library then into the content 1 o p a Se ON N Invoke the editor by adding or editing content in Ektron CMS400 NET Place the cursor where you want the library item to appear Click the library button f The library opens Navigate to the folder that will contain the file after you insert it From the File types dropdown select the type of file you want to insert See Also Terms Used in this Chapter on page 134 Click the Add Library button fi 8 Anew screen appears Browse to the file you want to insert 11 12 Or you can click the search button jt to search for a file to insert Enter a Description for the file If metadata is required for the library item you must complete it Metadata fields may appear in the lower section of the screen Click the Add Library button R The file is inserted into the selected library folder and the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 152 Library Folder Hyperlinks For a definition of the term hyperlinks see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 134 Adding Hyperlinks You must copy hyperlinks to the library before content creators can insert them into content To copy a hyperlink to the library follow the procedure described in Copying Files to the Library on page 143 The only difference is that you insert a hyperlink instead of a file Viewing Hyperlinks To view a hyperlink
470. nt document management web content management Management cms gt Description cantent Ektron s web Content Management and Doc Management software products manage web content and documents with wysIwy XHTML HTML editors offering easy to use browser based web authoring and soalutians for web content management and document management gt On this Web page notice the keywords are included in the meta tag and the title is in HTML tags These appear according to how the administrator sets up the metadata definitions Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 89 Approving Declining Content Approving Declining Content Your site administrator establishes an approval chain for each folder or even specific content items The approval chain is a list of people or groups who must approve new or edited content before it is published to the Web site If a user group is part of an approval chain any member of the group can approve the content The administrator also determines the sequence of approvers in the chain When a new or edited content is submitted to the approval chain it is reviewed by users who may e change it e approve or decline it e publish it to the Internet it is published when the last user approves it The chart below illustrates the approval process Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 90 Approving Declining Content Approval Chain Publish to Web site You
471. nt To create new content follow these steps Log in to Ektron CMS400 NET as a SportsWriter 2 Create content as described in Adding HI ML Content on page 48 3 Click the Submit button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 94 Approving Declining Content 4 The content is placed into the approval chain The next user in the chain receives an email saying the content is ready for approval Request for content approval File Edt view Tools Message Help Ee ana amp d w wla x sg Reply Reply Al Forward Print Delete Previous Next Addresses From Webmaster yourcompany com Date Friday May 03 2002 4 16 PM To SportsEditon yourdomain com Subject Request for content approval The content Red Sox Win World Seres has been submitted tor your approval by Sports Writer To locate the content the folder path in your workarea 1s Sports The following lnk will take you to the submutted content block on the Web site http 192 168 0 156 CMS200Samplefndex asp 7id 17 Please Mote You must loan and select the preview icon to view the changes The content was submitted for approval on 03 May 2002 4 16 19 PM Approvals SportsEditor Editorln Chief Comment NOTE Emails are only sent if your Administrator enables them The content contributor Sports Writer has completed his role in the approval chain but continues to receive emails notifying him of c
472. nt toolbar button 66 HTML 782 editors introduction 481 email address user editing 473 instant modifying 27 requirements 26 sending 25 where available 26 notification disabling 475 end date setting for content 71 end time calendar event 282 286 eWebDiff window 107 eWebEdit400 alignment toolbar buttons 491 anchor tag toolbar button 488 bold toolbar button 489 bookmarks 520 bullet toolbar button 491 cells background color 566 background color deleting 567 background image deleting 568 background image inserting 567 border size 562 deleting 565 merging 572 padding and spacing 574 splitting 571 text alignment 570 width 564 copy information from other applications 493 toolbar button 487 cut toolbar button 487 email links 530 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 finding text 495 font background color toolbar button 490 color toolbar button 490 relative size toolbar button 489 size absolute toolbar button 490 style toolbar button 490 form elements toolbar 492 horizontal line toolbar button 488 HTML viewing 532 hyperlink toolbar button 488 hyperlinks 524 creating 524 editing 528 entering manually 525 preventing 529 removing 528 testing 526 to a bookmark in another web page 527 images deleting 518 inserting 503 indent toolbar button 491 insert symbol toolbar button 489 introduction 484 italic toolbar option 489 library toolbar button 488 number toolbar button 490 paragraph style toolbar button
473. nt System DMS lets you import Microsoft Office files along with other types of files into Ektron CMS400 NET Non Office files are known as managed files Collectively these files are known as assets After being saved to Ektron CMS400 NET assets can be updated and tracked like HTML and XML content If you re familiar with how content is handled most of what you know applies to assets For example assets e can be stored in folders with other content or in separate folders that you create just for them e are assigned content ID numbers e can have summary metadata comment task schedule and taxonomy information e inherit permissions and approvals from their folder properties e progress through the workflow check out check in publish e retain a history so you can restore earlier versions e can be searched e support foreign language editions e can have a task assigned to them e appear on content reports e update the Smart Desktop listing of files awaiting approval checked out tasks to expire When an asset is imported to the CMS then saved a copy of it is saved to the Document Management server Then whenever a user edits and saves the asset a new copy is stored In this way you can review and if needed restore a prior version Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 224 Using the Document Management System This chapter explains the Document Management Functionality through the following topics e
474. nt resides in the folder you selected before launching the search or one of its subfolders To search the entire Web site begin the search at the root folder e satisfies text and or query entered in the search box no value returns nothing The text inserted in the search field can appear in the content summary or metadata See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Searching Your Web Site gt Query Language Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 118 Searching the Workarea e satisfies content type criterion if chosen see below These are described in Search Screen Options on page 119 Search Content Folder Search Published Advanced Search Basic Search Sie Jy _Searek Site HTML Documents Images Multimedia Forums Search Screen Options Search Screen Finds submitted text in these content types Option Content from all options listed below e HTML e Smart Form XML Note Finds field values but not field labels This has not changed since prior releases e HTML Form e Blog entries not comments Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 119 Searching the Workarea Search Screen Finds submitted text in these content types Option Documents e MS Office document includes Powerpoint Excel Note The search finds text within Visio documents if the Visio IFilter has been installed on the server See Installing the
475. nu command a blank editor appears and you can use the File gt Open command to choose an image Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 695 Editing Images Once the image is in WeblmageFX you can use the buttons and menu options to edit it The rest of this chapter describes those buttons and menu options Saving the Image When you finish editing the image you can insert it into the content by pressing the Exit button Als Alternatively you can save the image to a local or network folder using the Save button eel When you insert the image into the content WeblmageFX checks the file extension If the image is a gif file it is saved as a png file in your temporary directory For example test gif is saved as C Documents and Settings your user name Local Settings Temp test png Any other file type is saved in your temporary directory without changing the file extension unless you use the Save As option For example you save test jpg as test png Assigning a Name to a New Image If you create an image in WebImageFX and then exit WebImageFX and return to eWebEditPro XML the system assigns the image a random name such as WIF50A jpg lf you want to assign a different name and or folder to the image use the Save as command See Also Save As on page 719 Toolbar Buttons and Menu Commands The following tables list each toolbar button and menu command They are followed by a more detailed d
476. nu item and follow the steps to add it Assign this type of content to For details see the menu Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 449 Any library asset images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu ltem on page 451 External hyperlink Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 451 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 452 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module To add a menu item via the Menus module follow these steps 1 From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus 2 Click the menu that you want to add a menu item to Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 447 Working with Menus 3 Inthe View Language dropdown list select the language of the menu 4 To add anew item to the selected menu or any submenus on it move the cursor over the menu item and click Add from the popup menu NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with View Menu O ped D Delete Ty 1 5 The Add New Item screen displays a list of items that you can add to the menu Use to the table below to select the type of menu item and follow the steps to add it Menu item type For more information see Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page
477. ny sup page ces ported type Multiple DMS Several Office documents Adding Documents Using the Multiple Documents managed files multimedia files DMS Documents Option on page 236 Collection Collection Working with Collections on page 417 View Menu The View Menu provides the following functions All types Displays all content types of selected language Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 33 Viewing a Folder HTML content Limits folder display to selected content tyoe For example choose View gt DMS HTML Form Survey Document and see only managed DMS Document assets in the folder other content types which includes Office e Suppressed Documents Man This is especially helpful if the folder has aged Files Multime a lot of items and you are looking for dia Open Office only one type of content Note that the icon for the selected type appears to the left of View as illustrated Language Limits display of content within folder to one language Also sets language of new items you create or upload into the folder Menus Lets user view and work with menus Working with Menus on assigned to this folder page 437 Collections Lets user view and work with Collections Working with Collections on assigned to this folder page 417 Archived Content Lets user view and work with content that Setting Archive Options on passed its scheduled End Date and page 72 whose archive
478. o make the task even easier Ektron CMS400 NET provides sample forms that you can start with then customize As explained in Mailto or Database Form on page 214 form data can be emailed and or saved to a database Forms created using the procedure described below are saved to a database by default but not emailed To change either setting use the Edit Properties screen See Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 207 To create a new form follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a form in another language by copying an existing form and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 927 NoTE For the steps to create a new poll see Working With Polls on page 217 For the steps to create a new Survey see Creating a Survey on page 222 Choose a content folder 2 Fromthe View menu click Language and select the language in which to create the form 3 Click the New menu gt HTML Form Survey Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 161 Working with HTML Forms 4 The New Form screen appears New Form eTe r aan nate aa at Save e J Aili ie hy ern aan tpl teh ast m m o m l m m m m e m e e Sel a form from below or begin with a blank form Next yo customize all aspects of the form so that it collects exactly the information you re looking for Blank Form Design a new form Blank Survey Desi
479. o the user You are added to Pending Colleagues list of the user to whom the request was sent See Also View Pending Colleagues on page 403 Until the user accepts the colleague request he appears on your Sent Colleagues Request List See Also Viewing Seni Colleague Requests in the Workarea on page 404 Once a user accepts the colleague request he is added to your colleagues list and you are added to his Colleagues list Removing Colleagues If you would like to end your association with another user you can remove the colleague To do that in the Workarea follow these steps Navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Colleagues Click in the check box to the far left of each colleague you want to remove Selecting the check box in the title row selects all colleagues zak Friends aa Avatar Name First Name Last Name C 2 JE John Edit Click the Remove button U A dialog box asks you to confirm that the colleague is to be removed Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 402 My Workspace The page refreshes and the user is removed from your colleagues list Selected Colleagues You can designate any user as a Selected Colleague This means he can view documents in your favorites that regular colleagues cannot view To make someone a Selected Colleague follow these steps 1 Navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Colleagues 2 Place a check mark ne
480. o to the page on which you determine the form s response If this is a new form it is page 3 of the Forms Wizard Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 586 Working with HTML Forms To modify an existing form select the form s folder then the form Next select Edit and click the Post back message tab 2 Select Redirect form data to an action page Edit Content in Folder Content bia ore fs rS fa E ns rt iat On be v A nearh fe ary RAA ma rae wats a A at ria r virkis Ork f sorsia Wna fa aS atoni E Paa A R O Pe y PA ae A E a eT eae r Se mend 1S SS 1 oS es eS ee Pe bee See eB ae aE FS in Se eel ee ee Sea Ade OR Oe Se ATASA SRE ae Se aR Oe Ea A ee aR ail Sg ee ih Raat aif T T MAT y Breakroom Survey Title English U 5 3 Form Post back message Schedule Comment Web Alerts Display a message Redirect to a file or page Redirect form data to an action pag Report onthe form ame Window File or page 3 Click the icon next to File or page The Hyperlink Manager dialog appears Click the URL button 5 The library appears In the left panel select the folder that contains the hyperlink 6 Inthe right panel select Hyperlinks from the file type dropdown 7 Select the hyperlink whose name was given to you by your system administrator Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 587 Working with HTML Forms lt A C
481. o use the Crop command follow these steps 1 Select an area of an image that you want to keep 2 Press the Crop button t 3 Everything outside the selected area is removed Delete Standard Toolbar Button Pad Description Removes a selected area of an image You must select an area before you delete it The deleted area is not saved for later pasting In contrast if you use the Cut command you can later paste the cut area Dimensions Standard Toolbar Button Description Lest you change an image s width and or height which are defined in pixels Maintaining Aspect Ratio Use this check box to change an image s size while maintaining its aspect ratio Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 707 Editing Images Perr berg EES W Maintain Aspect Ratio l Irem h 1 I hel Onn Aspect ratio is the ratio of an image s width to height For example if a graphic has an aspect ratio of 2 1 its width is twice as large as its height If you check the Maintain Aspect Ratio box just specify a new width the height is calculated automatically Dialog Box w Dimensions OF x Dimensions New Width 21 g Mew Height 74 Maintain Aspect Ratio Current Width 218 Curent Height i4 ones _ Exit Standard Toolbar Button pe Description Save the change in the WeblmageFX and return to eWebEditPro XML where the updated image appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 R
482. o you visit the Ektron Medical site Daily Weekly Monthly Semi Annually Yearly Vote Editing a Poll from the Web Site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 629 Working with HTML Forms To edit an poll on a Web site follow these steps WARNING Ifyou are logged into the site and create a new poll by right clicking on a poll selecting New the existing poll is replaced by the new one 1 Log on to the Ektron CMS400 NET Web site 2 Right click the poll you want to change and click Edit TAKE A SURVEY Where did you hear about Ektron Medical E New Poll pelos O Friend 7 7 F Th view History CoWorker 0 Delete O Newsgroup lA 6 othe I Add Task Properties Submit Form P eS Workarea Logout 3 Make changes to the poll using the Forms editor 4 Submit the poll to the Approval Process Creating a Survey To create a new survey follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a survey in another language by copying an existing form and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 927 Note For the steps to create a new poll see Working With Polls on page 626 For the steps to create a new form see Creating a New Form on page 582 1 Consult with your Ektron CMS400 NET administrator about the folders in which you should create polls See A so Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managi
483. ollowing tab appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 610 Working with HTML Forms Text Field x General Validation Font Name Unassigned e Font Size Unassigned a Bold Unassigned 4 Italic Unassigned Text Alignment Unassigned Text Line Unassigned Font Color ma Background Color ili Use the tab to assign the following formatting attributes to a response field e Font style and size e Bold and italic e Text alignment especially helpful for formatting dollar amounts in a plain text field e Underline or strikethrough e Font color and or background color Inserting a Choices Field Use a Choices field when you want a site visitor to select from a predetermined list You can allow a site visitor to select only one or more than one choice You can also determine the list s items and appearance To insert a choices field follow these steps 1 Enter a field label For example Country Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 611 Working with HTML Forms 2 Click the Choices field button See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 593 3 The following dialog appears Choices Field General Data Style Descriptive Name List Custom Allow Selection Appearance O Only one Vertical List More than one Horizontal List _ A selection is required List Box First item is not a valid selection O Drop List d It
484. omparing Versions of Content ee Compare visual Compares content as it would appear ona aspect Web page Compare source Displays compared content as source HTML code Whitespace Options Ignore All Blank whitespace characters are ignored Smart Detect One or more consecutive whitespace characters are treated as a single separation sequence That is multiple whitespace characters are ignored Detect All Blank whitespace characters are treated as any other character Other Options Ignore Case Determines whether comparison is case sensitive For example if you check this box the strings Bob and BOB are not highlighted because their only difference is the case of the characters Ignore Format Determines whether comparison ignores Attributes changes in text formatting attributes HTML Visual Analysis only After updating setup information click OK to save changes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 108 Comparing Versions of Content Content Area The content area displays the content comparison 4 CMS Compare Microsoft Internet Explorer Welcome to RC international EC a is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and lve RC ri EC ational has become one of the leading manufactures of RC racing and flying vehucles sport and the enthusiasts who play it has endeared our products to the RO commumty We wil improve our affordable products and hope you
485. on 5 567 Working with Table Cells Deleting a Background Image Place the cursor within the table Right click the mouse Select Set Cell Properties Delete the value in the Background Image field Click Update ae YY Spanning Rows or Columns You can create a table cell that stretches across more than one row or column In the following table notice how the Sports Teams row spans three columns Sports Teams Baseball Team Hockey Team White Sox Black Hawks You can also create a column that spans several rows as illustrated below Notice that Boston spans three rows Colleges C Boston Boston College Northeastern University Boston University Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 568 Working with Table Cells Colleges of Spanning More than One Row or Column To have a table cell soan more than one row or column follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell that will span rows or columns Right click the mouse Click Merge Cells Horizontally or Merge Cells Vertically from the menu e Merge Cells Horizontally merges the cell in which the cursor resides with the cell to its right e Merge Cells Vertically merges the cell in which the cursor resides with the cell below NOTE You can also merge cells on the Table Design tab of the Table Wizard Table Wizard ka HA Table Design MAENE Properties g Cell Properties 4 A Columns Fl som Ektron CMS4
486. on about the content Field Description The title assigned to the content Content ID The ID number assigned to the content The ID number is used to retrieve content from a database Content language The content s language Status The current status of the content See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 45 Viewing Content See Last User to Edit The last user to edit this content Action on End Date What happens to the content when its end date and time are reached See Also Setting Archive Options on page 72 Date Created When the content was created Approval Method Whether all approvers must sign off on content before it is published managed by your system administrator Approvals The users in the approval chain for this content See Also Approving Declining Content on page 90 Smart Form Configuration The Smart Form applied to the content This is typically managed by your system administrator See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Section Managing Content Folders gt Smart Forms Template The template currently assigned to the content This is typically managed by your system administrator See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing HTML Content gt Creating Updating Templates The folder path to the content s folder A slash represents the Conten
487. on is created and named ektronlogo 1 png If someone later saves that image in another content block or even another section of the same content that version is named ektronlogo 2 png Also whenever someone edits and saves the image a new version is created and assigned the next highest number These edits have no effect on the original image stored in the library The following table explains the toolbar buttons After changing the image click the Save button 4 to finalize changes Description For more information see Exit without saving changes Crop image that is remove a portion of it Cropping an Image on Drag the box around the area you want to keep page 518 and click Done Change image size Resizing the Image on page 515 Rotate image Rotating an Image on page 517 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 514 Working with Images Description For more information see Adjust brightness Adjusting Brightness on page 516 NOTE If you begin editing an image then click the cancel button and later try to edit that image you may see a small red x instead of the image This problem only occurs if your browser is Internet Explorer To remedy the problem go to Tools gt Internet Options gt Browsing History gt Settings or Temporary Files gt Settings in Internet Explorer 6 Set Check for newer versions of stored pages to Every Visit Resizing the Image
488. on to copy existing content into new content and translate it to the new language Approve Approve or decline a request to Approving Declining Content publish or delete content on page 90 Assign Task Assign a task to a user Managing Tasks on page 293 Delete Open View Content page From it Viewing Content on page 40 you can delete the content Edit Check out content for editing open in Edit Option on page 56 separate window Hide Border Hide the colored border around Hiding and Showing the content when a user is logged in Content Border on page 6 Important When you hide the border the Add and Edit buttons for menus are also hidden Logout Log out of Ektron CMS400 NET Logging Out of the Sample view of Web site Site on page 15 New Poll Create new poll or survey Creating Polls and Surveys on E page 216 B pe Preview content before it is published Site Preview on page 14 E Open content s View Content page Viewing Content on page 40 HHE Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 5 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Button Name Description More Information Show Border View Content Difference Show a colored border around Hiding and Showing the content when you are logged in Content Border on page 6 Important When you hide the border the Add and Edit buttons for menus are also hidden Display differences between a Comparing Versions of previous
489. onnel hd Fa View in Microsoft Office H P View Properties Save As i Edit in Microsoft Office 2 Edit Properties Check Out and Save As zB Submit 4d Delete See Also Dropdown Menu Options on page 37 Notes on Working with Microsoft Office Documents e Prerequisites Your computer has MS Office Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 230 Using the Document Management System Internet Explorer to work with Office documents within Ektron CMS400 NET NOTE While you cannot edit within Ektron CMS400 NET using Firefox you can save an Office document to your computer edit it then drag and drop the updated version to Ektron CMS400 NET e Verify the following settings for every Office document type that you work with Open Windows Explorer Click Tools gt Folder Options gt File Types Click an Office file type you work with for example DOC Microsoft Word Document Click the Advanced button Change the checkboxes at the bottom of the screen so they look like this _ Confirm open after download d Always show extensio Browse in same window Click OK e Problems can arise if you try to open a document created with Office 2007 and your computer has an earlier version of Office The best solution is to upgrade your computer to Office 2007 If you cannot do this the next best option is to install Microsoft Windows Compatibility Pack See htips ww
490. ontained in the Photos area To add subfolders follow these steps 1 In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Photos 2 Click the Manage Folder button J 3 The Add Folder box appears 6 When the page refreshes it opens to the newly added folder Edit a Folder Name in My Workspace gt gt Photos Sometimes it becomes necessary to change the name of folder in the My Workspace gt gt Photos area To accomplish this follow these steps 1 In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Photos Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 411 My Workspace 2 Click the folder s Edit button gz This button is located to the left of the folder s title Photos am subcategories 3 The Edit Folder box appears Name est Folder 4 Change the name of the folder 5 Click the Save button Save When the page refreshes it opens to the folder with changed name Deleting a Folder in My Workspace gt gt Photos You can delete obsolete folders from My Workspace gt gt Photos To delete a folder follow these steps NOTE You can not delete the top level folder aloums CAUTION Deleting a folder permanently deletes all images as well as its subfolders 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Photos Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 412 My Workspace 2 Click the folder s Edit button gz This button is located to the left of
491. ontains the menu Click View gt Menus 3 Click the menu you want to edit Move the cursor over the menu that you want to edit Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 455 Working with Menus 5 Click Edit from the popup menu NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 6 The Edit Menu screen is displayed 7 Change the fields in Edit Menu screen by referencing Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 442 8 Click the Save button 1E Editing a Menu via Menus Module To edit a menu via the Menus Module follow these steps From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus Click the menu you want to edit Move the cursor over the menu that you want to edit oe I Click Edit from the popup menu NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 5 The Edit Menu screen is displayed 6 As necessary update the fields in Edit Menu screen by referencing Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 442 7 Click the Save button 1 Editing a Menu via Navigation Link on a Web Page To edit a menu via a navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Navigate to t
492. ontent Office or View Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 Vill Appendix A Content Statuses Staged Content A staged version of content is one that is not published It can be content that is checked in or content that is approved with a pending a start date Staging lets you make changes to content while keeping it from the Web site until you are ready to publish it See Also After you select the content you have the following options on page 43 Appendix A Content Statuses on page i Workflow in Ektron CMS400 NET on page 9 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 IX What s New in the 7 6 Release What s New in the 7 6 Release e You can modify images within eWebEdit400 See Editing an Image on page 513 e You can apply tags to content and library items e Two new eWebEdit400 toolbar buttons let you paste from Word stripping out classes and fonts and paste plain text See Toolbar Buttons on page 486 e In Release 7 6 5 a new Web site Edit in Context option offers content authors quick access and editing within the page But it has a limited set of editing functions See Editing Content from a Web Page on page 53 and Edit in Context on page 54 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 i What s New in the 7 6 Release Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 ii Index Note All eWebE
493. ontent Alignment gt 4 Dimensions Hecht Background Image Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 566 5 6 Working with Table Cells A color selection box appears Click a color to apply to the cell s background Deleting a Cell s Background Color To delete a cell s background color click the square in the top left corner of the Background area circled below Addition KIO K r OO Specifying a Background Image for a Cell Specifying a Table s Background Image on page 555 explains how to apply a background image to a table You can also apply a background image to a cell To insert an image into a cell follow these steps 5 Place the cursor within the table Right click the mouse Select Set Cell Properties In the Background Image field click the ellipsis button to open the Library From there select an image for the cell s background See Also Library Folder on page 134 Click Update Note that when you apply a background image to a cell If the cell is larger than the image the image repeats until it fills the cell lf the cell is smaller than the image the top left corner of the image appears in the top left corner of the cell The rest of the image fills as much of the cell as possible Make sure the image does not obscure a user s ability to read the cell text if any exists Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revisi
494. option is either Archive and remove from site or Archive and remain on Site Folder Properties Only system administrators see this The Ektron CMS400 NET option It lets you assign folder Administrator Manual section properties such as which users can edit Managing Content gt a folder s content Managing Content Folders gt Folder Properties Delete Menu This menu lets you perform the following functions Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 34 Viewing a Folder Menu option Lets you For more information see Delete this Delete current folder and all of its content Deleting a Folder on page 40 folder Note You cannot delete the Root folder Delete content Delete one or more content items in Deleting Content on page 60 folder Action Menu This menu lets you perform the following functions Export for Prepare content for translation by a Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator translation translation agency Manual section Multi Language Support gt Using the Language Export Feature Search content in the Workarea Searching the Workarea on page 117 Workarea Content Menu The View Contents of Folder screen features a context sensitive dropdown menu of options you can perform for a content item Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 35 Viewing a Folder Products fel Where did you hear abo The options depend on
495. or completing the form Form on page 619 presses this button the form s field values are set to their state when the form first loaded Insert Submit Button with Submit as its text Inserting or Editing Buttons on the When a site visitor completing the Form on page 619 form presses this button the data on this screen is submitted to your Web server After you complete the form you have the following options Postback Message See Composing the Postback Message on page 585 Metadata Edit the metadata for the form See Also Adding or Editing Metadata on page 80 Assign start or end dates or both for when the form is published to Web site See Also Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 68 Enter history comment to indicate changes made to the form Templates The template assigned to the form Technical note HTML forms must reside in a folder whose template uses the FormBlock server control See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Creating Updating Templates Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 594 Working with HTML Forms Category Any taxonomy categories assigned to the content See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Taxonomy Web Alerts Assign or update Web Alert information for the form See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Web Alert Feature Web Alert Feature on page 1063 A Submit content into approval proc
496. orking with Tables Color Basic colors EE EHHH Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor 3 Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Assigning Border Size You can also adjust the size of a table border Size is measured in pixels one pixel 15 pixel table border table border The border size only adjusts a table s exterior border it has no effect on the border between cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 559 Working with Tables To assign a border size to your table follow these steps Place the cursor within the table Right click the mouse Select Set Table Properties Click the Table Properties tab Enter a number of pixels into the Border field circled below oe oe a ad Table Properties Faies tues ii kd i Accessibility Border px Yo LL PX o If you set a table s border size to zero 0 but wish to view boundary lines while editing see Assigning an Internal Table Border on page 557 Determining Which Table Border Lines Appear You may want to suppress some table borders For example the table below only shows horizontal lines n Fox 27 225 000 2 N StepUp2 the Streets BV 19 666 000 To modify which border lines appear follow these steps Place the
497. orm s response If this is a new form it is page 4 of the Forms Wizard To modify an existing form select the form s folder then the form Next select Edit and click the Post Back Message tab 2 Select Redirect to an action page and forward form data Edit Content in Folder Content Title Breakroom Survey English U S Post back message Web Alerts Display a message Redirect to a file or page OmRedirect form data to an action page Report on the fom Wine File or page Ie l 3 Click the icon next to File or page 4 The Hyperlink manager dialog appears 5 In the URL field enter the path to the custom action page For example site root folder customaction aspx Do not get a quicklink from the library 6 Press OK Making Form Results Available to Site Users When you create polls and surveys you can choose to display the results after site users submit data The results can be displayed in the same window or output to a new window In addition you can choose how to chart the data For a description of chart types see Chart Types on page 167 To show site visitors the results follow these steps 1 Go to the page on which you determine the form s response If this is a new form it is page 4 of the Forms Wizard Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 165 Working with HTML Forms To modify an existing form select the form s folder then the f
498. orm Next select Edit and click the Post Back Message tab 2 Select Report on the form Edit Content in Folder Content eee ree Title Breakroom Survey English U S Display a message Redirect to a file or page Redirect form data to an action page e e came Window 3 Choose whether you want the results to appear in the Same Window or a New Window 4 Choose the style of the report Edit Content in Folder Content English l We Form Post back message Display a message Redirect to a file or page Redirect form data to an action page Report onthe form Same Window Comment Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 166 Working with HTML Forms Chart Types The following table describes the types of charts available Data Table The poll or survey answers are displayed with the percentage of users 30 18 21 who responded to 29 22 25 each item 0 26 30 259 31 or over Age range 4 responses Bar Chart The poll or survey answers are Age range 4 responses displayed with a bar graph Use this chart type when you want a quick visual representation of the responses Pie Chart Displays a standard pie chart Poll or Poll My favorite feature survey answers are My favorite feature in Ektron CMS400 NET color coded and the ae percentage of p i B Approval Process 11 people who chose
499. ormation The person who created or last edited the blog post Post Time and Date The date and time the blog post was created or last edited Status The status of the blog post For example if the blog post is checked in the status is I See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 352 Blogs From this screen you can perform all functions with a blog post that you can with content You can give it a Summary add metadata associate a task assign Web Alerts etc You must have Edit permission for the blog to perform these functions WARNING You can also add a history comment to the blog post by clicking the Comment tab This is not the same as adding a comment to a blog post on a site When you add a history comment it has the same properties as a comment associated with content Adding a Blog Post NOTE Tobe able to add a blog post you must have Add permission onthe blogs Standard Permissions screen Follow these steps to add a blog post 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to the blog folder Click New gt HTML Post Or From the Web site open the menu for the blog then choose New Post NOTE To add a blog post from the Web site you must be logged in 2 When the Add Content screen appears use the editor to create the blog post You create a blog post the same way you create content See Also Adding HTML Content on page 48 IMPORTANT If you are u
500. orted by rank Criteria used to calculate rank include the e number of occurrences of the search term Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 121 Searching the Workarea e proximity of search term to beginning of file e proximity of search term to other occurrences of the term e whether the term is in the title The Advanced Search Tab The Advanced Search within the Workarea finds content that satisfies these criteria IMPORTANT The Advanced search finds content whether or not it is marked Searchable e user must have read only or greater permission for content s folder e matches selected language if site is multi lingual e satisfies criteria entered on the screen see below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 122 Searching the Workarea Search Content Folder Search Published Adwa nced Search Content lForms M Assets J Include Archived All the words Match Partial Words oe Date Created between None and None Date Modified between None and None Status Any The Advanced Search Tab helps you find Ektron CMS400 NET content by specifying the following criteria All fields are optional However the search only finds content that satisfies all criteria e the kind of content you want to search for example HTML content forms assets e asearch word or words Unlike the Search Published tab you cannot use a query e h
501. ote If you edit the content you need to resubmit it to the approval chain View View in View all information about content Office or View Properties Marked for Deletion Content Content that is marked for deletion has been requested to be removed from the Web site by a user When content is marked for deletion it passes through the approval chain like content that is submitted for publishing When the content completes the approval chain it is deleted from the Web site See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 94 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 vii Appendix A Content Statuses The table below describes the toolbar buttons ep Approve the deletion request Note If you are the last user in the approval chain the content is deleted when you click this Decline Refuse the deletion request This sends the content back into a checked in status Save As Save copy of file to your computer See Also Saving an Office for assets Document on page 251 only View View information about content Pending Start Date Content Content that is pending a Go Live date has been approved but its start date and time have not occurred yet Button Description Check out the content and edit it Only the user who submitted the content has this option Note If you edit the content you need to resubmit it to the approval chain View View in View all information about c
502. other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 11 The Edit Menu Item screen lets you assign additional information to the menu item such as the target window See Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 442 12 Continue to add new items to the menu as needed Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Item To add a library asset as a menu item via a content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 446 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 447 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link ona Web Page on page 448 Click the radio button next to Library Asset 3 Click the Next button The Add New Item screen appears Enter a title for the library asset that will be on the menu Click Browse Library The library screen opens In the right frame select the type of asset to insert image hyperlink etc NOTE To insert assets the menu s folder must contain library assets However you can insert library assets from other folders for which you have permission 8 Selecta library asset and click the Insert button 9 The Add New Item screen reappears 10 Click the Save button E Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item To add an external hyperlink as a menu item via a content folder or the Menus module follow these steps E
503. ow the search words must match the content in order for a document to be found e whether the title is searched e whether the comments are searched Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 123 Searching the Workarea e arange of created or modified dates e the editor who updated the content most recently e the content s status e any searchable metadata assigned to the folder See Also e Using the Advanced Search on page 124 e Specifying the Kind of Content to Search on page 125 e Specifying a Search Word or Phrase on page 125 e The Noise File on page 126 e Specifying Match Criteria on page 126 e Additional Search Criteria on page 128 e Custom Fields on page 129 Each feature is explained below NOTE To help track search activity the Search Phrase Report provides a count of all words and phrases searched within a date range In Ektron CMS400 NET this report is available from the Smart Desktop gt Reports For documentation of this report see Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports Search Phrase Report Using the Advanced Search When performing a search enter one or more words into the text box select search preferences then click the Search buiton You can use an asterisk as a wildcard character in other words to stand for any character For example the phrase CMS 00 returns topics that include the following text CMS400 CMS300 CMS200
504. ow these steps 1 Select the source text or image Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 776 Using Hyperlinks 2 Click the Hyperlink button B The Hyperlink dialog box appears Hyperfink gt Hyperlink Information OK Tea http Cancel Link https Bookmark Text Target Frame Quick Link select link O00000 3 Click the down arrow to the right of the Quicklink field A list of Web pages that your Web master has pre loaded appears 4 Click an item from the list to select it 5 If desired you can use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 774 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 6 Click OK Entering a Hyperlink Manually To create a hyperlink follow these steps 1 Select the source text or image Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 7 7 Using Hyperlinks 2 Click the New Hyperlink button i The Hyperlink dialog box appears Hyperlink Hyperlink Information Type http Link http Bookmark Test Target Frame Quick Link select link 3 Click in the Link field after nttpy Then enter the address of the destination Web page For example to enter a hyperlink to the ektron Web site enter www ektron com 4 lf desired you can
505. owing groups of information about a blog e Editing a Blog s Properties vs Adding a Blog on page 325 e Blog Folder Properties on page 326 e Metadata on page 328 e Blog Subjects on page 329 e Web Alerts on page 333 e The Blog Roll on page 334 e Permissions and Approvals on page 341 e Purge History on page 343 Editing a Blog s Properties vs Adding a Blog When you edit a blog s properties and settings more properties and settings are available than when you created it This is done to save time when adding multiple blogs to a site The table below shows which properties or settings are available when adding and editing a blog Blog Properties and Settings Availability Property or Setting Available When Available When Adding a Blog Editing a Blog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 325 Blogs Property or Setting Available When Available When Adding a Blog Editing a Blog Blog Title Tagline of Visible Posts Comment Control Update Service Style sheet filename for this folder Smart Forms Metadata Subjects Web Alerts Blog Roll Permissions Approval Chain Template filename for this folder Blog Folder Properties The following table shows the fields on the Blog s Properties tab To edit these properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 326 Blogs from the Workarea navigate to the blog folder cl
506. ox is auto filled with task types associated with that category See Also Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 301 Task Type Select the Task Type for this task You must specify a Task Category before you assign a task type See Also Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 301 Add By clicking the Add link you can add Task Categories and Task Types See Also Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 301 Note If you Add a Task Category or Task Type while adding a task the task information Task Title Assigned To Language etc entered will be lost when the screen refreshes Edit By clicking the Edit link you can edit the Task Type chosen in the Task Type drop down box See Also Editing a Task Type on page 303 Note If you edit a Task Type while adding a task the task information Task Title Assigned To Language etc entered will be lost when the screen refreshes State Choose a status for the task Your choices are Not Started In Progress Completed Waiting on Someone else Deferred If the task is not linked to content you can assign it to any state However if you later link the task to content via the Content link above the state switches to Not Started The state appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by state Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 297 Managing Tasks f ess Start Date Using the calendar button choose
507. p Docs Mar 2005 Mar 2005 11 Mar 2005 To sort by Task Type click the drop down box and choose a Task Type Words in bold Italics are Task Categories You cannot sort by Task Categories Sorting Tasks By Column On every View Tasks page you can sort the information by most columns Information can be sorted by the following Title Alphabetically by title of associated content By task state from first to last Priority By task priority High appears first followed by Normal then Low Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 311 Managing Tasks Due Date By due date beginning with dates closest to today Assigned To Alphabetically by user to whom the task is assigned Note Once set a task s assigned to user does not change throughout the life of the task Assigned By Alphabetically by user who assigned the task Last Added Comment Alphabetically by the most recently created task comment Create Date By date task was created beginning with dates closest to today emailing Tasks You can email the contents of any Task screen emailing tasks works the same as emailing reports See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Content Reports gt Common Report Topics gt emailing Reports Editing a lask You can change task information such as e Title e Assigned to e Language e Content e Priority e Task Category Ektron CMS400 NET User Manu
508. pe for example images select the type and enter nothing in this field Description Search If you check this box the search considers the library item s description when returning search results Otherwise the search ignores the description For example if you enter Ektron into the keyword field the search returns all library files that include that string Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 140 Library Folder SS Filename Search If you check this box the search considers the file name when returning search results Otherwise the file name is not considered by the search For example if you enter ppt into the keyword field the search returns all files that include that string Such as all Powerpoint presentations Only search items The search only considers library assets that were last modified by last edited by myself you One or more of the search criteria set by your system administrator in the Metadata Definitions screen NOTE Some search field check boxes are circles while others are squares If the box is a circle you can only choose one option If it is a Square you can choose as many as you want The search displays library items that meet the search criteria on the search results screen You can click any item to view its properties such as Library ID number Last Edit Date and Description Displaying Search Results Search results appear in this order e images e files
509. pears only when a site visitor who is not a regular user or membership user is adding a comment If a regular user or membership user adds a comment their name and email address is taken from their user profile Email The email address of the person submitting the comment This information is required Note This text box appears only when a site visitor who is not a regular user or membership user is adding a comment If a regular user or membership user adds a comment their name and email address is taken from their user profile A URL for the person s web site Comment Section A text area to insert comments about the post Post Comment button Post a comment by clicking this button 7 Depending on the comment s settings it either Post Comment posts immediately or is submitted for approval See Also Controlling Blog Comments on page 357 Comments in the Workarea In the Workarea you can add view approve edit and delete comments for a blog post The comment link illustrated below indicates the number of comments To work with comments navigate to the blog folder and click the comment link next to a blog post Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 361 Blogs Blog 2 Yievw Posts in Blog Cc ay a T Tra n B Welcome to ektron Medical Last Edited by Application Administrator on 3 1 2006 3 46 59 P Status A Hi Comments 1 This leads you to Vie
510. pears within the Text field where you can change it Then press the Change button restore the terms to their default settings by pressing the Default button change the sequence of terms by selecting one then pressing the up and down arrows 4 e f related content metadata is available for the content its name appears followed by None Selected ID Change Clear Click Change to display a window of choices For example if the related content type is a collection all collections appear in the popup Select the appropriate data for this content Selected items appear in the bottom of the screen You can reorder them by selecting an item then clicking the up and down arrows To remove items from the bottom of the screen select them and click the delete 1 button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 85 Adding or Editing Metadata Select Collection Title ID Description Path Homepage Ads 4 Homepage News 6 y About Ls Y List of contacts at Ektron CMS4000Demo54bout contacts 10 Medical Ls Staff Select Metadata 2 re v Title a a e About Us t Homepage News lf the related content type is either content item or library image hyperlink or file the following window appears when you click Change Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 Adding or Editing Metadata ee oa Library Folder CMS400Demo quicklinks O Blogs fils tN PO E E OI E iN S I
511. place dialog box appears Find And Replace Fodwh WE Replace With o Match whole word only Replace E meen is Replace All Direction C Up Down Cancel You can use this dialog box to simply find text or to find text and replace it with other text Each option is explained below NOTE You can also use this dialog to delete text that appears repeatedly To do so follow the directions in Finding and Replacing Text on page 667 and enter nothing in the Replace With field See Also e Finding Text on page 666 e Finding and Replacing Text on page 667 e Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 667 Finding Text 1 Inthe Find What field type the text that you want to find in the content 2 Set dialog box options see Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 667 3 Click Find Next to find the next occurrence of the find text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 666 Finding and Replacing Text Finding and Replacing Text 1 Inthe Find What field type the text that you want to find 2 Inthe Replace With field type the text to replace the find text 3 Set dialog box options see Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 667 4 If you want to replace all occurrences of the find text with the replace text click Replace All NoTE You can undo replacements one at a time using the Undo button i replace only the highligh
512. plained below If you want the destination page to appear Click this in the Target Frame field In a new browser window on top of the current New Window _blank browser In the same position within the browser window Same Window _self The new window replaces the current one Note this is the default If your page contains frames in the frame that Parent Window _parent contains the frame with the hyperlink If your page contains frames in the full display Browser Window _top area replacing the frames If your page contains frames in the frame with the Enter the name of the frame specified name Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 774 Using Hyperlinks Use hyperlinks to let a user jump from any word phrase or image to another Web page The page can be within your network that is on an intranet or anywhere on the internet NOTE If you want to create jumps within a file see Using Bookmarks on page 771 For example if your Web page includes a jump to the Ektron Web site you would enter the text to indicate the jump for example Ektron Web Site then create a hyperlink to www extron com When users see Ektron Web Site in a different color they can click the text to jump to the site Although most jumps go to the top of another Web page you can also jump to a bookmark within a Web page This section explains e Creating a Hyperlink on page 775 e Testing a Hyperlink
513. play of all folders to icons double click the down arrow circled below To switch back to full buttons double click the up arrow circled above You can also switch the display of folders one at a time by clicking the up or down arrow As an alternative method of switching the display you can 1 Place the cursor on the bar above the display of top level folders The bar has several dots in the middle Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 22 The Workarea and Smart Desktop 2 When the cursor turns to a double headed arrow drag it to the bottom bar To return the display to full buttons drag the same bar above Hide the Left Panel of the Workarea You can hide the left frame of the Workarea to provide more space for working in the right frame Below is an example of the Workarea with a minimized left frame Note that you cannot see the folder display in the left frame View Content saci Content Block L Tai Erg S fe ME ai er j Ei l View English U S A ad select Content Summary Metadata Comment al Category Ektron T Server Controls Developer productivity is a critical issue among Web teams Faced with the challenge of reduced IT budgets smaller teams and compressed schedules to roll out new Internet and intranet sites and rich Web applications developers need every advantage tilted in their favor to help their organizational Web strategies succeed Ekt
514. po111147812046505 gt Exporting a Form s Raw Data After you run a report you can export its data to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file xls for further analysis If a form uses an XML structure each XML tag becomes a column header in the spreadsheet To export form data follow these steps 1 Access the View Form Reports screen for the report you want to export as described in Viewing Form Reports on page 199 2 Click the Export Reports button 21 3 A File Download dialog box is displayed Choose the option that best suits your needs Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 205 Working with HTML Forms 4 After the data is exported you can analyze and modify the xls file Viewing Form Information You can view e information about a form e information about a form s properties Viewing a Form s Information After a form is created you can view its information in the Forms folder To view a form follow these steps Access the folder that contains the form you want to view Click the form you want to view The View Form screen displays Click the Form Properties tab Ye ey S The following table explains the information on the screen e Description Extended description for the form Form Data The type of form data Mail or Database See Also The Structure of Form Data on page 160 Form Submissions The maximum number of times a user can submit the form
515. ppears p M m Click the Accessibility button NoTE Your system administrator can add or remove the Accessibility button from the Insert Table dialog Size Cancel Roms Columns Accessibility r N aE a r Ss ee 7 The Accessibility dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 796 Section 508 Compliance Accessibility EI Heading Rove 0 Heading Columns 0 Cancel Summary en Caption Horizontal Caption Alignment ne Vertical Caption Alignment ne Accessibility Dialog Respond to the fields in the dialog They are described below a a Heading If you want your table to have a horizontal header enter Rows the number of rows that it should occupy Beginning with the top all cells in the specified number of rows are designated as table headers Heading If you want your table to have a header enter the Columns number of columns that it should occupy Beginning with the left column all cells in the specified number of columns are designated as table headers Summary If desired enter the table summary Non visual browsers can use the summary to explain the contents of the table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 797 Section 508 Compliance Field Description O Caption If desired enter the table caption The caption appears centered below the table when viewed Horizontal If desired enter the caption s hor
516. pport Language Support for blogs and blog posts work the same way as it does for folders and content See the Administrator Manual section Multi Language Support gt Working with Multi Language Content for an explanation on working with multiple languages Deleting a Blog NOTE _ To delete a blog you must have permission to Delete Folders onthe blogs Advanced Permissions screen Deleting a blog removes the blog and all posts comments and quicklinks for the blog WARNING After a blog is deleted you cannot retrieve its posts comments or quicklinks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 343 Blogs The following steps explain how to delete a blog 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder Or From the Web site Open the menu for the blog and click Properties NOTE To delete a blog from the Web site you must be logged in 2 Click the Delete gt This Blog 3 Adialog box appears Microsoft Internet Explorer Are you sure you want to delete this folder 9 7 This will also delete all content quickinks associated with the content and subfolders Continue 4 Click OK to delete the blog searching Blogs Searching blogs works the same as searching HTML content See the following topics for an explanation of using the Search feature e The Administrator Manual chapter Searching Content on the Web Site e Searching the Library on page 138 subscribing Unsubscr
517. press this command several times to continue to increase magnification See Also Zoom Out on page 725 Reset Zoom Ratio on page 717 Zoom Out Standard Toolbar Button Decrease an image s magnification You can press this command several times to continue to decrease magnification See Also Zoom In on page 724 Reset Zoom Ratio on page 717 specifying Color Depth To specify an image s color depth that is the number of colors available to an image specify a bit depth The color depth is derived from the bit depth Here are the bit depth values Bit depth Color depth 2 colors 256 colors 16M colors Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 725 Introduction to Tables Sometimes the information on your Web page looks better when displayed on a table Here is an example Baseball Team Hockey Team White Sox Cubs Black Hawks This section explains e Creating a Table on page 727 e Deleting a Table on page 728 e Inserting a Table within a Table on page 729 See Also e Table Dialog Boxes and Menus on page 730 e Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 737 e Working with Table Cells on page 753 e Section 508 Tables on page 794 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 726 Introduction to Tables Creating a Table To create a table click the table button then click Insert Table from the menu When you do the Insert
518. pts the visitor to download your product e Redirect to form data to an action page See Redirect to an Action Page and Forwarding Form Data on page 586 e Report on the form See Making Form Results Available to Site Users on page 588 10 Now that you have completed information about the form you can enter the form s content This procedure is described in Creating a Form s Content on page 591 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 584 Working with HTML Forms Composing the Postback Message The postback message can contain text or graphics just like any other HTML content Typically tt acknowledges a site visitor s completion of the form For most sample forms provided sample text appears in the editor Modify it as you wish using Ektron CMS400 NET s editor to change the style sheet class insert library items etc Inserting Fields into the Postback Message You can also insert fields into the Postback Message that retrieve form information For example your postback message may be Thank you Full Name for completing the Form Title gt When the postback message appears it looks like this Thank you Jay Kohler for completing the breakroom survey When you click the Post back message tab and select Display a message the Merge Field button appears on the toolbar Title Whitepaper Request English U S Form Post back message Metadata A Display a mess
519. r Fd Data Design Mode Button only appears when eWebEditPro XML configuration enables the Data Designer feature Switches to Data Entry Mode Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Using the Data Designer ia Data Entry Mode Button only appears when eWebEditPro XML configuration enables the Data Designer feature E y Display the page content as WYSIWYG aie What You See Is What You Get WYSIWYG is the ability to see in the editor what will appear when user views the Web page Display the page content as HTML Viewing and Editing lt 3 a View as HTML HTML on page 781 Insert a blank space character Although you can add spaces in the editor using the lt space gt bar on the keyboard those spaces are ignored when the content is displayed by a browser e Copyright Registered Insert registered trademark symbol Trademark Insert copyright symbol a Insert trademark symbol Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 644 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only i Insert special characters such as and __ a NN from a drop down list Special Characters To view the list click the black down arrow Remove all style information applied to selected text You apply styles using the Style dropdown list For example Before Fi Remove Style lt P class note gt This is initial
520. r 9 Content Last User To Edit 2dministrator Application Last Edit Date 9 19 2005 2 55 05 PM Date Created 1 11 2005 3 04 34 PM Description Marketing description of Ektron s relationship with its partners Preview Ektron Partners and Customers The table below describes each field on the screen Field Deseripton Title assigned by user who copied or edited it Filename and location on the server Library ID ID number assigned by Ektron CMS400 NET when file was originally copied Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 145 Library Folder Field Deseripton Parent Folder File s parent folder Users need permissions to this folder to insert the file into content If the file can be displayed in your browser a preview of it appears at the bottom of the screen If it cannot display in the browser a link to preview it in its host application appears instead NOTE You may need to download some files before you can be view them for example mdb mp3 zip etc The following table describes the buttons on the View Library Item screen Edit the items title and description Editing a File on page 147 Overwrite the library item Overwriting Files on page 147 Find content linked to the library item Library Link Searching on page 149 Delete library item Deleting Library Items on page 150 ee ee Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 146 Library Folder E
521. r The address is selected Press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt to copy the address into the Windows clipboard Go to eWebEditPro XML 6 Select the text or image from which you want to jump to the bookmark 7 Click the Hyperlink button The hyperlink dialog box appears 8 Move the cursor to the Link field 9 Press lt Ctrl gt lt V gt to paste the address you copied in Step 4 into the Link field 10 Click OK Editing a Hyperlink If you need to change a hyperlink s destination Web page or target frame follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 779 Using Hyperlinks 1 Click the Hyperlink button i The hyperlink dialog box appears Edit the Link or Target Frame field as needed 3 Press OK Removing a Hyperlink lf you want to remove the hyperlink from text or an image select the text or image and press the Remove Hyperlink button Bs Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink lf you enter a URL or an email address into eWebEditPro XML it automatically becomes a hyperlink To prevent this enter an extra Space in the URL or address For example instead of entering sales ektron com enter sales lt blank gt ektron com Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 780 Working with HTML eWebEditPro XML creates pages for display on the World Wide Web or an intranet These pages use HTML hypertext markup language to format text and images for display in a brows
522. r that enables anyone to author XML data Anyone can create forms that capture and validate structured data based on specific criteria right from the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea Non technical users can use share and extend Smart Form data across Web sites applications and organizations Examples of the nearly limitless forms creation uses include e HR forms on intranets automate expense reports purchase requests employee self evaluations e Government convert paper based forms to XML e Healthcare create and maintain patient records e Insurance build and deploy claims forms e Retail manage parts and inventory on an online catalog Ektron Smart Forms support organizations requirements to create information once then deliver it to multiple channels with ease Publish it to Web sites RIA Adobe Flex Silverlight Phones and print Smart Forms Ektron CMS400 NET administrators create configurations that is templates on which XML Smart Forms are based Then they assign selected Smart Form configurations to appropriate folders For details on this process see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Working with Smart Forms For example your organization uses Smart Forms to collect and display job posting information In this case an administrator creates a configuration and assigns it to the Careers folder Then Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 263 Working wi
523. r Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 490 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Begin the line on which the cursor rests or all selected lines with a bullet Note The Bullet toolbar button applies a bullet to each paragraph If you want to switch to regular that is non bulleted paragraphs click the button a second Increase or decrease the current line s distance from the left margin Indent Insert a table Working with Insert table Tables on page 535 b Insert a new row above current one that P A canvas is the one in which the cursor currently resides OR ics caw below Insert a new row below current one that me Geno nee is the one in which the cursor currently resides ost Insert column left Insert a new column to the right of the Wl ain Insert column right current one gt Delete row Align paragraph so that it is arranged evenly on the left side uneven on Left Center and Right the right Justify in the center of each line evenly on the right side uneven on the left evenly on right and left side Use the last button to remove justification Insert a new column to the left of the current one Delete current row Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 491 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only 4p Delete current column
524. r being approved by someone with permission to edit the post If someone has edit post permission and authenticates before submitting a comment it is approved automatically Appearance of Unapproved Comments On the Workarea s View Posts in Blog screen an unapproved comment is indicated by a red flag Fl comments L3 On the View Comments for Post screen an unapproved comment is indicated by a yellow border Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 358 Blogs Lc e Require Authentication Determines if a user must be authenticated that is logged in as a CMS400 user or membership user to add comments via the Web site Comments by default are fully controlled This means they are enabled must be approved and a site visitor must be authenticated to create them lf comments are enabled but not moderated any site visitor can add a comment If you don t want censorship this is the way to go WARNING While you can delete a comment at any time if comments are not moderated they appear on your site as soon as a site visitor submits them However to make sure comments on your site meet certain criteria moderate them The following topics are explained in this section e Comments on the Site on page 359 e Comments in the Workarea on page 361 Comments on the Site On the site comments for a blog post appear when one of the following blog post items is clicked e the Comments link e
525. r identifying information that you give us NOTE You can also click the content title to access the View screen After you select the content you have the following options Your options depend on your permissions and the status of the content Button or Description For more information see Tab Properties Content View the content s properties Properties on page 45 tab Properties Content tab View Content Displays content BC Summary Edit Summary Edit content s summary Adding a Content Summary tab on page 76 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 43 Viewing Content Tab Metadata tab Edit Metadata Edit content s metadata Adding or Editing Metadata on page 80 Alias tab Edit Alias e View and edit the content The Ektron CMS400 NET item s primary alias Administrator Manual section URL Aliasing gt Manual e View all secondary aliases Aliasing Comment View Comment View comments on changes tab made when editing content This comment also appears on the View Content and Content History screens Use it to help distinguish one version from another Tasks tab Add edit tasks Add or edit tasks for this content Managing Tasks on page 293 Web Alerts Add edit Web Add or edit Web Alerts for this Ektron CMS400 NET tab Alerts content Administrator manual chapter Web Alert Feature Templates tab Add edit The template currently assigned The Ektron CMS400 NET T
526. r needed or do not belong to the calendar they were added to To delete a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for the date that contains the event you want to delete as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 280 2 Click the event you want to delete 3 The Edit Calendar Event screen appears 4 Click the Delete button E 5 A confirmation message appears 6 Click OK Deleting a Recurring Calendar Event You can delete a single event in a recurring series or all events in the series Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 291 Working with Calendars Deleting a Single Recurring Event 1 a ee e Access the View Calendar Events screen for the date that contains the event you want to delete as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 280 Click the event you want to delete The Edit Calendar Event screen appears Click the Delete Content button 1 A confirmation message appears Click OK Deleting All Events in a Recurring Series 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for any date that contains an events in the series that you want to delete as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 280 Click the event in the series that you want to delete The Edit Calendar Event screen appears Click the Delete This and Associated Recurring Events button i A confirmation message appears Click OK Ektron CMS400
527. r selects this item and saves the page enter music here Item Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen Text After you insert this field onto the screen you can use eWebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify its size font color and other attributes Item List This section of the screen displays the items that you enter in the Value and Text fields Buttons near the bottom of the screen let you remove items from this list as well as rearrange them Move Up Move Down Remove Place a check in the box of any item to be checked by default on the data entry screen If you do the user can accept the default or uncheck the item by clicking in the checkbox Note that if Only One is selected under Allow selection above only one item can be selected Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 190 Working with HTML Forms Inserting a Select List Field Use a Select List field when you want the site visitor to select from a predetermined list of choices Although similar to the choices field when you insert a Select List field the site visitor only sees the first option in a drop down box Age range i alert He must click the down arrow to see the remaining values and select one ge range Select So the Select List field occupies less room on the screen than a choices field Also the site visitor can only choose on item on the list In contrast you can allow a
528. rance of the Metadata screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 83 Adding or Editing Metadata Metadata Comment tithe current character count 0 2000 max keywords Not Included Included content management system Search Data wellness No Selection Required fields Image Data Image CMS400Developer Change Remove 4 Edit the metadata Note that e Required field labels are red and marked with an asterisk You must place at least one response in such fields before you can save the metadata e Your system administrator may prevent you from editing a field In this case the field has a gray background and you cannot place the cursor there Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 84 Adding or Editing Metadata e Fields may appear in two columns In this case the system administrator provides a list of terms that you can apply to the content You can select terms from the list or enter free text One column is labeled Not Included and the other Included Move terms between lists by clicking the Add and Remove buttons e You may see alist of terms in one box and a field labeled Text to its right keywords document management a Te o With such a list you can add a new term by typing it into the Text field and clicking Add remove any term by selecting it and clicking Remove modify any term by selecting it It ap
529. ransparent flashvars viewkey tcf0s facatdd ea45513 srce http wew tangle com flash swf flyplayer swf gt lt embed gt lt pD gt With CMS400 NET s new toolbox of pre built reusable data bindak empowers developers working in Visual Studio NET to rapidly integrate templates and sites lt p gt Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 534 Working with Tables Sometimes the information on your Web page looks better when displayed on a table Here is an example Baseball Team Hockey Team White Sox Cubs Black Hawks This chapter explains everything you need to about working with tables It explains e Creating a Table on page 535 e Deleting a Table on page 541 e Inserting a Table within a Table on page 541 e Modifying Table Properties on page 539 e Working with Table Cells on page 562 e Section 508 Tables on page 576 Creating a Table When creating a table you need to specify a number of rows and columns A row is a horizontal series of cells while a column is a vertical series Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 535 Working with Tables j Rows lt Columns If you know how many rows and columns the table will be enter those numbers If you don t know the exact number when you create the table estimate how many you need You can easily add or remove rows and columns later There are two ways to create a table If your table will be
530. rate from the Content folder structure and its files Assets and HTML content in this list have the same properties and actions available to those found in the Content folder structure For example you view edit delete and copy content and assets From the Documents area you can add a folder see Adding Folders to My Workspace gt gt Documents on page 373 edit a folder s name see Edit a Folder Name in My Workspace gt gt Documents on page 374 delete a folder see Deleting a Folder in My Workspace gt gt Documents on page 376 drag and drop an asset see Adding Assets to My Workspace gt gt Documents on page 377 create an HTML file see Creating HTML Content in My Workspace gt gt Documents on page 378 move a content item to another folder see Moving and Copying Content in My Workspace gt gt Documents on page 380 select whether to share the folder with the Public Colleagues Selected Colleagues or keep the folder private see Sharing Content in My Workspace gt gt Documents on page 382 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 372 My Workspace a Documents ZiM i Workspace ainiin ATI BAAT NAANA T AEAT AIET UETA AEA E E AEDE Workspace Requirements 1 6 Community Groups D ae Pate No subcategory exists ae Colleagues 4 Journal 7 4 A The requirements of the project will be announced soon 4 Message Board H5 Messaging ig 6 Photos
531. rated below appear below the Start Date and End Date fields on the content s Schedule screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 72 Scheduling Content to Begin and End Action on End Gate Archive and remove from site expire C Archive and remain on site C Add to the CMS Refresh Report Each option is explained below Archive Options Can site visitors view content Can users view and edit upon expiration content within Ektron CMS400 NET upon expiration Archive and remove from Yes within its folder by clicking site expire the View gt Archive Content option Archived content can be found via the Workarea Advanced search if the Archived check box is checked Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 73 Archive and remain on Site Add to CMS Refresh Report Scheduling Content to Begin and End Can site visitors view content upon expiration Content appears in a List Sum mary if the ListsSummary con trols content ype property is set to Archive_Content If content is an HTML form the response page option appears For example if the form displays a message after the user com pletes it that message appears See Also A new screen lets you determine what happens after the site visitor completes the form The choices are on page 162 e Content is found by the search Workarea and site Content is visible within its taxon omy display Content is
532. rd toolbar button again 9 If you change your mind and decide to restore the content to the way it was before you edited it in Word press the undo button 3 lf you want to restore the Word changes after pressing Undo press the redo button ca Uploading an Image in a Microsoft Word Document If you insert an image into the Word content and then paste that content or save it the following dialog box appears The box lists all images in the content and asks if you want to copy them from your computer to your organization s Web server Files Waiting for Upload Files for Upload Upload Now Upload Later Cancel Preview a delaull WooadgioveN et 20027 E Ed Bow hote I f Woodgrove a SAA Bank About Estimated Upload Time 00 00 2 If you are ready to publish your Web content and want to display the image click Update Now If you plan to add more content later you can click Upload Later and upload all images at that time Editing XML Documents If your organization has implemented eWebEditPro XML you cannot edit XML documents using Microsoft Word This is because Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 676 Editing in Microsoft Word Word does not support XML editing If a full XML document is loaded the Word button m is disabled lf a Word document includes some custom XML tags the following dialog appears warning you about the problem Edit in ford WAR
533. re in the editor It is added after you click the Post button ee eer Posted Tuesday October 17 2006 3 58 PM 7 2006 This is a test reply to the Test Topic John Edit Technical Editor Ektron Inc Select from a predefined list of Tags that describe yourself Or create a new tag by clicking the Click To Add A New Tag link Placing a check mark in the check box next to a tag activates it for your profile Disable Email Check this box if you do not want to receive notification email Notification Work Page Size Your system administrator may let you change the work page values If he does the following fields are editable Otherwise you can only view the fields Width If desired change the width of the screen in which Ektron CMS400 NET appears The width in pixels must be between 400 and 2400 This field accommodates users who have larger monitors and or prefer a smaller resolution such as 1280 x 1024 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 475 Updating Your User Profile Ca If desired you can change the height of the screen in which Ektron CMS400 NET appears The height in pixels must be between 300 and 1800 This field accommodates users who have larger monitors and or prefer a smaller resolution such as 1280 x 1024 Display button text in Check this box if you want any button s caption text to appear in the screen the title bar title s bar whenever a user moves the mouse over the button Note
534. reement As another example you could provide instructions for completing the screen Invisible Check to make this field hidden This option lets you store unseen information in each document An example might be putting a version number on the form If you apply this property to a form the Allow multiple lines and Cannot be changed fields are automatically checked and cannot be unchecked Also the Validation tab is disabled Password field Use a password field when you want the user to enter a password A password is like a text field but the user s entry is disguised This prevents an onlooker from seeing the password Password Passwords cannot exceed 18 characters Learn About Fields on the Text Field Dialog Validation Tab Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 600 Working with HTML Forms Fields on the Text Field Dialog Validation Tab Text Field General Validation Data Style Validation No validation Select Message Replace Expression as Ee ee BE USTOM wv a lid A CHN e p Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field See Validation Options on page 602 Your system administrator determines whether a user can save an invalid document Message Enter text that appears on the screen if a site visitor s response violates the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is telephone number the error message could be Please enter 7 or
535. reen gt Task Type Availability 4 Enter your information 5 Click Save hd 6 Your new Task Category and Task Type appear in the drop down boxes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 302 Managing Tasks Task Type Availability Task types can be hidden from users by clicking the Not Available check box in the Add Task Type and Edit Task Type screens By making Task Types not available you can make the Task Type unavailable without deleting it Editing a Task Type From the Add Task screen you can edit a Task Type This will allow you to change the Task Type name Task Type description and Task Type availability To edit a task type follow these steps 1 Goto the Add Task screen as described in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 295 Choose a Task Category and the Task Type to edit Click Edit next to the Task Type dropdown box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 303 Managing Tasks Task Title Assigned To Language Content Priority Task Category State Start Date f Due Date Description 4 The Edit Task Type screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 304 Managing Tasks Edit Task Type 7 2 Task Type Task Type Description Documents that need to be reviewed Task Type Availability Not Available From this screen you can edit the following e Task Type e Task Typ
536. reen click the check box in the header row illustrated below Cha a Title CID State Prion Prep to Move Downstairs On Hold Low Displays these tasks Action you can perform from view screen All tasks assigned to you that are in one Click on task to view it of the following states Add a task not started active awaiting data Sort tasks by column on hold Sort tasks by Task Type reopened pending Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 308 Managing Tasks Displays these tasks Action you can perform from view screen Assigned To Me All open tasks assigned to you Click on task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Assigned By Me All open tasks you assigned to yourself or Click on task to view it others Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Created by Me All open tasks you created Click on task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Assigned to User All open tasks assigned to a user you Select any user and view select all tasks assigned to that user To do so select new user from Assign to User drop down list and click Get Tasks Click on task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Not Started All whose state is Not Started Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 309 M
537. reen appears Add a Blog to folder Blog A a Blog Name S Blog Title sd visibility Comments Enable Comments Moderate Comments Require Authentication 5 Fill out the Properties tab according to the table below Field Description Blog Name The name of your blog as it appears in the content folder tree Blog Title The title of your blog as it appears on the Web site Visibility Choose whether the site is private or public Any site visitor can view the blog Private A site visitor must log in to view the blog This includes membership and Ektron CMS400 NET users Comments Choose how to handle comments by checking the appropriate boxes For more information see Controlling Blog Comments on page 357 6 On the Subjects tab add subjects to the blog For more information on blog Subjects see Blog Subjects on page 329 7 Onthe Blog Roll tab add blog sites that you want blog readers to visit For more information on blog rolls see The Blog Roll on page 334 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 324 Blogs IMPORTANT See Editing a Blog s Properties vs Adding a Blog on page 325 for additional properties that are only available when editing a blog s properties Blog Properties NOTE To be able to edit blog properties you must have permission to Edit Folders on the blog s Advanced Permissions screen By clicking the blog properties button gf you can change the foll
538. ried Protestant Chri Displays the results of the form in an XML format The following information is included e lt Title gt title of the form block IMPORTANT With polls you can create a new poll question to replace an existing poll question By default the poll still has the same Title ID and other properties You can change the title of a new poll question when you are editing the poll Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 204 Working with HTML Forms e lt Description gt description of the form e lt SubmittedData gt information that was submitted Sample of Submitted Data as XML lt Form gt lt Title gt Where did you hear about Ektron Medical lt Title gt lt Description gt Poll for finding out where visitor s heard about our site lt Description gt lt SubmittedData gt lt Date value 2006 05 16T17 25 35 25 16 2006 5 25 35 PM lt Date gt lt User id 1 member false gt lt Hame gt lt FirstName gt Application lt FirstName gt lt LastName gt Administrator lt LastName gt lt Name gt lt Username gt admin lt Username gt lt Email gt lt Email gt lt User gt form data id 250 gt lt ektpol11147812046505 gt Navigation 2 lt ektpol11147812046505 gt lt Data gt lt SubmittedData gt lt SubmittedData gt lt Date value 2006 05 16T16 48 22 55 16 2006 4 48 22 PM lt Date gt lt Data form data id 245 gt lt ektpol11147812046505 gt Everything 4 lt ekt
539. rk with content from the Web site or after logging into the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea See Also e Working with Content from your Web Site on page 2 e The Workarea and Smart Desktop on page 16 Working with Content from your Web Site Ektron CMS400 NET provides three types of dropdown menus that let you edit content e Workarea Content Menu available within the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea lets you edit content from the View Contents of Folder screen See Also Workarea Content Menu on page 35 NOTE The Web site menus do not appear if you are in site preview mode See Also e Web Site Server Control Menu available after signing into an Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Lets you edit content from any server contro on a Web page To display this menu click the triangle to right of content see below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 2 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET I LATEST NEWS Ektron Rated Positive Ektron Inc a Healthcare Framework a Publish hospitals m health insu di Delete indexed cor 1 e Web Site Content Menu available after signing into an Ektron CMS400 NET Web site See Also gt The Web Site Content Menu on page 3 The Web Site Content Menu After you sign in to an Ektron CMS400 NET Web site notice that most areas of a Web page are surrounded by a border or display a Silver Access Point in the top left corner The border might only appear as you
540. rname and password This is a serious security issue as you lose the ability to accurately keep track of who is doing what in your Web site s environment The use of a group user account Is a violation of Ektron CMS400 NET s license agreement Additional Information You do not need to make these changes if you are using the CMS400 for demonstration or evaluation purposes These changes should be completed once the decision is made to purchase the product and go live with your site IMPORTANT Ektron recommends creating your own Administrator user and deleting the Admin user IMPORTANT Ektron recommends deleting any users from the CMS400 that are not needed on the system The Everyone Group By default the root folder in Workarea provides the Everyone Group with all permissions except Overwrite Library Ektron Inc recommends reviewing the permission needs of the Everyone Group when you add a folder For information on Permissions see the Administrator Manual section Managing User and Permissions gt Setting Permissions Editing Builtin IMPORTANT The builtin user does not appear in the Users list This user appears on the application setup screen To change the builtin account information follow these steps 1 In the Workarea click Settings gt Configuration gt Setup Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 iv Securing Ektron CMS400 NET Click the Edit button Locate the Built In U
541. ron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 355 Blogs Deleting a Blog Post NOTE Tobe able to delete a blog post you must have Delete permission on the blog s Standard Permissions screen The following steps explain how to delete a blog post 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder Or From the Web site open the menu for the blog then choose Properties Next choose the post NOTE To delete a blog post from the Web site you must be logged in 2 From the menu click the Delete gt Posts 3 The Delete Blog Post screen appears Delete Contents of Folder Life Story _ Title ID Status Date Modified Last Editor F The Story of My Life 395 Approved 2 1 2006 5 16 58 PM Administrator F Writing a Masterpiece 396 Approved 2 1 2006 1 06 34 PM Administrator 4 Click the check box next to each post you want to delete To select all posts click the check box next to Title 5 Click the Delete Contents button ff A dialog box appears Microsoft Internet Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 356 Blogs 7 Click OK to delete the selected posts Blog Comments WARNING Do not confuse blog comments with history comments You can add a history comment to the blog post by clicking the Comment tab This is not the same as adding a comment to a blog post on a site When you add a history comment it has the same properties as a comment associated with content Blog co
542. ron CMS400 NET delivers that advantage It now offers eight visual drag and drop template development components that enable developers to assemble Web sites up to four times faster than working In J2EE To minimize the left frame click the white X near the top of the left frame Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 23 The Workarea and Smart Desktop D 92 768 0 2712 ACME The left frame remains minimized until you move the cursor to the left of the bar circled below ili ali Fe FAS wi wis j i nage ri a i Pierced FORM aren 3 ni meas q E L Axi SN n AN i ii a cicada at MA a a a tad ba si ifr sie AREEN Mond ayr Nove m View Content Sample Content Block Cy ts 0 GS a amp A Me lt amp view English US add selec Content a Comment eea Catego Ektron ny he Server Controls Developer productivity is a critical issue among Web teams Faced with the challenge of reduced IT budgets smaller teams and compressed schedules to out new Internet and intranet sites and rich Web applications developers nee every advantage tilted in their favor to help their organizational Web strategie succeed Ektron CMS400 NET delivers that advantage It now offers eight visual drag a drop template development components that enable developers to assemble sites up to four times faster than working in J2EE lt UU Using Autohide The Workarea screen also p
543. rovides an autohide feature which quickly switches between full right frame view and combination right left frame view When autohide is turned on the left frame is minimized unless you place the cursor to the left of the bar circled above If you place the cursor there the left frame appears As soon as you move the cursor back to the right frame the left frame disappears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 24 The Workarea and Smart Desktop To turn on the autohide feature click the push pin icon near the top of the left frame ix When you do the push pin turns 90 degrees to indicate autohide is on To turn off autohide move the cursor to the left frame and click the push pin icon When you do the push pin returns to its original position sending Instant Email Ektron CMS400 NET lets you send email instantly to a user or user group from many screens available from the Smart Desktop Your ability to send instant mail is indicated by a small mail icon next to a user or group name indicated in red below View All Approvals Title Request Type Start Date Submitted by Trinity In Line Pipe Publish None Specified Edit John When you click a user group name or email icon the email screen appears as shown below Once you complete the screen and click Send an email is sent to designated users Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 25 The Workarea and Smart Desktop To jedi
544. rovision or of the right to enforce such provision If you fail to comply with any term of this License YOUR LICENSE IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED This License represents the entire understanding between the parties with respect to its subject matter YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT THAT YOU UNDERSTAND THIS AGREEMENT AND UNDERSTAND THAT BY CONTINUING THE INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE BY LOADING OR RUNNING THE SOFTWARE OR BY PLACING OR COPYING THE SOFTWARE ONTO YOUR COMPUTER HARD DRIVE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT S TERMS AND CONDITIONS YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT EXCEPT FOR WRITTEN SEPARATE AGREEMENTS BETWEEN EKTRON AND YOU THIS AGREEMENT IS A COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE RIGHTS AND LIABILITIES OF THE PARTIES Copyright 1999 2008 Ektron Inc All rights reserved LA10031 Revision 2 0 Securing Ektron CMS400 NET security Checklist The following is a checklist of things an Administrator must do to secure Ektron CMS400 NET Change the Admin and Builtin Users Passwords Make sure you change the password for the Admin and Builtin user To change the Admin user s password navigate to O Change Admin user password Change the Admin user s password in the Workarea by following these steps In the Workarea navigate to Settings gt Users Click the Admin user Click the Edit Users button In the Password and Confirm Password fields enter the new password 5 Click the Save butto
545. rrence of a term place the cursor at the top of the content before beginning the search If you begin the search somewhere other than the top of the page use the Direction field to search from the current location to the top or bottom of the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 497 Finding and Replacing Text Find VESTEA Find Find Next Search Entire text Selection only To search from the Click this option in the cursor location to the Direction field Considering the Case of a Search Term By default the search ignores the case upper or lower of a search term In other words if you enter Bob in the Find field the search finds bob Bob BOB etc If you want the search to be case sensitive use the Match case check box If you enter Bob in the Find field and place a check in the Match case box the search only stops at Bob not bob or BOB Find AGTA Fined o Search Direction Entire text Up 1 Match case Match whole words only Whole Word Match Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 498 Finding and Replacing Text By default the search finds any occurrence of the text that you type into the Find field For example if you enter the the search finds the word the as well as those letters embedded in other words such as others and theater lf you want the search to find only whole word occurrences of the text in the Find field click t
546. rrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Custom See Custom Validation on page 605 Message Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s response does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is Cannot be blank the error message could be Please enter a response By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion Use this field to customize it Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Fields on the Calendar Field Dialog Data Style Tab See Fields on the Text Field Dialog Data Style Tab on page 610 Editing a Form Field To edit a form field follow these steps 1 Click inside the field It becomes surrounded with small squares 2 Click the toolbar button that corresponds to the field type See Also The Form Toolbar Options on page 593 3 The dialog appears for that field type Edit as needed See Also Form Fields on page 596 5 Press OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 618 Working with HTML Forms Inserting or Editing Buttons on the Form A form typically includes one or more buttons which let a site visitor submit a completed form Absence Report Form Name o Employee 1D Dep
547. rs and save it in an XML format Online forms polls or surveys designed to collect information from site visitors and save itin an HTML format See details below Files normally created and edited using Microsoft Office Files created outside of Ektron CMS400 NET such as PDFs and jpeg files You cannot create or edit these files within Ektron CMS400 NET you can only store them Files that run in a media player such as sound and movie files For more information see For information on using Ektron CMS400 NET s editor see Introduction to eWebEditPro XML on page 633 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Section Managing Content Folders gt Smart Forms Working with HTML Forms on page 158 Working with Microsoft Office Documents on page 229 Working with Managed Files on page 255 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing Assets gt Managing Multimedia Assets When creating new content you must assign a type Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET si Discussion Board I Community Folder HTML Content HTML FormSurvey j DMS Document Collection I Menu As you can see the New menu lists all types of content you can work with Workflow in Ektron CMS400 NET Organizations typically want a Web site that is updated frequently with the latest information They
548. rt and end date can relieve you of much work by managing how long a version of content is viewable on your Web site You can also set options for what happens to a content version upon reaching its end date How Does It Work When you create or modify content you can select a go live date and time If you do and the content makes it through the approval chain Ektron CMS400 NET publishes the content to the live site at that time For example your company is having a sale of the century ina month and everything is ready except the announcement You decide to update your Web site to let the public know about the sale With this feature you create the Web content now and set it to go live a week before the sale The Ektron Windows Service manages these changes to your site See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing your CMS400 System gt Ektron Windows Service This topic is explained through the following subtopics e Setting a Start Date on page 69 e Setting an End Date on Content on page 71 e Setting Archive Options on page 72 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 68 Scheduling Content to Begin and End setting a Start Date To set a start date follow these steps 1 Access the editor by adding new content or editing existing content 2 If adding new content enter a title and the content 3 Click the Schedule tab Edit Content in Folder
549. rticles INFO Release notes for evVebEditPro ML v4 2 INFO Release notes for eyvWebEditPro 4 2 INFO eWWebEditPro 3 amp 4 JavaScript Object Model This section explains how to create collections Your system administrator then creates or updates a Web page to display the collections using the Collection server control or ecmCollection function Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 417 Working with Collections NOTE Your system administrator must assign to you permission to work with collections For details see the Collections chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual This section explains how to find create and manage collections through the following subtopics e Finding Collections on page 418 e Viewing a Collection on page 421 e Creating a Collection on page 423 e Editing Content in a Collection on page 431 e Reordering Collections List on page 432 e Editing Collection Information on page 432 e Deleting a Collection on page 433 e Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 433 e Comparison of Collections Menus Taxonomy and the List Summary Features on page 435 Finding Collections Every collection is assigned to a folder To find the collections assigned to any folder navigate to it and click the Collection button B For more information see Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 418 S
550. rties dialog and delete the image path circled below Image AIQNMent x Image Sre hitp ektsqa7a CMS400Developeruploadedin Horizontal Snacine E Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 519 Using Bookmarks Use a bookmark to let a user jump from any word or phrase to another place in the same content block On your Web page text appears in a different color to indicate the bookmark Bookmarks are particularly helpful if your page is very long For example if your Web page contains minutes from several meetings the top of the page could list the meeting dates You could then assign a hyperlink to each date and a bookmark to each set of minutes The user sees that a date is in a different color so clicks it to jump using the bookmark to the correct minutes Creating a Bookmark on page 520 describes how to set up a bookmark within a file You can also set up hyperlink to e another Web page This procedure is described in Using Hyperlinks on page 775 e a bookmark within another Web page This procedure is described in Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page on page 778 Creating a Bookmark When creating a bookmark you must specify a e source the text a user clicks to move to the bookmark e bookmark the destination to which the cursor jumps when a user clicks the source To continue with the above example a meeting date is the source and the meeting m
551. rview 160 582 reports exporting 205 reports viewing 199 624 structure of data 160 582 toolbar 215 625 toolbar options 170 593 validation 174 596 viewing 206 624 properties 206 viewing 155 forum signature defining 475 freehand WeblmageFX command 709 G gray content border color meaning i green content border color meaning i H height work page customizing for user 476 help online accessing 478 hide borders toolbar button 650 history button view floating toolbar 6 content accessing from Web page 56 112 accessing via Workarea 58 112 viewing 67 window 112 horizontal flip WeblmageFX command 710 horizontal line inserting toolbar button 650 HTML cleaning 783 editing 782 inserting 782 saving Office document as 252 view as toolbar and menu option 644 viewing 781 hyperlink edit toolbar and menu option 643 remove toolbar and menu option 643 hyperlinks 775 adding as menu option 451 creating 775 definition 134 editing 779 entering manually 777 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 library adding 153 adding to content 153 editing 153 viewing 153 preventing 780 removing 780 testing 778 to a bookmark in another web page 8 to content block finding 66 using a Quicklink 776 Ignore All field eWebDiff 108 Ignore Case field eWebDiff 108 Ignore Format Attributes field eWebDiff 108 image extensions library setting 138 image info WeblmageFX command 710 image upload from Mi
552. s Phase 3 Ektron CMS400 NET users can add Blog Posts on page 348 blog posts either from the Workarea or the Web site Depending on the user s permissions the post is either published immediately or submitted to the blog s approval chain Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 322 Blogs pem mn e Phase 4 The blog post is published Now site Blog Comments on visitors can view it and possibly add page 357 comments Depending on the blog s comment settings they either appear immediately or must be approved first The following sections explain using the blog feature in the Workarea e Adding a Blog on page 323 e Blog Properties on page 325 e Blog Subjects on page 329 e The Blog Roll on page 334 e Language Support on page 343 e Searching Blogs on page 344 e Subscribing Unsubscribing to a Blog on page 344 e Deleting a Blog on page 343 e Blog Posts on page 348 e Blog Comments on page 357 e Adding or Editing Blog posts with Windows Live Writer on page 365 Adding a Blog NOTE Tobe able to create a blog you must have permission to Add Folders on the _ blog s Advanced Permissions screen To add a blog follow these steps 1 Go to the Workarea s Content folder 2 Click the folder in which the blog will reside 3 Click New gt Blog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 323 Blogs 4 The Add a Blog sc
553. s View language Add Add select select language language Description View task information Add a new form Download form data to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet View submitted form data can select range of dates Access view properties for the content If you can view forms in more than one language select a language from the drop down list Lets you copy current form into new block and translate it to selected language Creating Polls and Surveys Polls and surveys are a type of form All of the same functionality is available and applies WARNING NOTE Working with HTML Forms More Information Creating a New Form on page 161 Exporting a Form s Raw Data on page 205 Viewing Form Reports on page 199 Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 207 Translating Content on page 927 For complete understanding of Forms polls and surveys you should read the entire chapter Working with HTML Forms on page 158 A poll is generally one question and appears on a site for a very short time an hour or a day A survey is usually multiple questions and appears on your site for a longer time than a poll For information on scheduling when your polls and surveys appear on the site see Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 68 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 216 Working with HTML Forms With polls and surveys
554. s not get changed After it is moved you need to update the default template called in the contents quicklink To update the default template for one or more quicklinks follow these steps 1 Inthe library access the quicklinks folder containing quicklinks you want to update Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 156 Library Folder 2 Click the Update Quicklinks button 3 The Update URL Link Template Quicklinks screen is displayed 4 Check the quicklinks you want to update NOTE Check the box in the table header to select or deselect all 5 Inthe To text field enter the name of the template you want to apply to the selected quicklinks 6 Click the Update Quicklinks button to update the changes A confirmation message is displayed 7 Click OK to continue The selected quicklinks are updated to use the specified template Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 157 Working with HTML Forms IMPORTANT This section describes creating forms with eWebEditPro XML If you are using _ the eWebEdit400 editor see Working with HTML Forms on page 580 Ektron CMS400 NET provides powerful online form capabilities allowing you to create an online dialog with visitors Now anyone in your organization not just a developer or Webmaster can create and deploy Web forms to capture visitor information Support marketing strategies by getting feedback on their needs Follow up on their
555. s format totals for choice and select type fields the number of times each choice was selected Only choices that were selected at least once appear Sample Summary of Selected Choices Format General Demographic Survey Field Yalue Count Age range ae 26 30 31 40 Annual Income 30 000 39 999 40 000 49 999 70 000 79 999 Education Level High School GEC Master s Degree Father s Education Level High School GED Master s Degree Some College Gender Female Male Household Income 100 000 149 000 30 000 39 999 60 000 69 999 Marital Status Legally Separated Married Single Mothers Education Level High School GED Master s Degree Face African American e e reel relel reje Mrelj re re re e Mrelrel rere re Native American Wihite l Table of Values Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 202 Working with HTML Forms The table of values shows the following information for each completed form e a checkbox that lets you delete the response e an internal identification number of the response e the name of the user who submitted the form if he signed in to Ektron CMS400 NET beforehand If the user did not sign in anonymous appears e date response was submitted e descriptive name of each form field appears in the column header the value entered for each field appears below the header Sample of Table of Values Format General Demographic Survey Delete
556. s in the Workarea This list contains the following information i Avatar An image representing the user Display Name The user s display name as it appears in blogs forums posts and message board comments The user s first name The user s last name Inviting Non Site Users to Become Colleagues and Join the Site IMPORTANT The default From email address used to send all invitations is invitation example com Ektron Inc strongly recommends that your site administrator change this address for use with your site See Also The Setup Manual section Managing the web config File gt Settings in the web config File gt ek_InvitationFromEmail You can invite people who are not part of CMS400 community to become your colleagues and members of the site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 395 My Workspace Invite New Colleagues a Recipient email addresses Optional message Hello I am sending you this email because I would like Send Invitations To invite a non site user to become your colleague follow these steps 1 2 oe E ie In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues Click on the Colleagues link Click the Invite button ER The Invite New Colleagues screen appears In the Recipient email addresses box enter emails for the people you wish to invite Separate addresses using either commas spaces semicolons or new lines Enter a messag
557. s sole and exclusive remedy is repair of all or any portion of the Software If such remedy fails of its essential purpose Customer s sole remedy and Ektron s maximum liability shall be a refund of the paid purchase price for the defective Products only This limited warranty is only valid if Ektron receives written notice of breach of warranty within thirty days after the warranty period expires 5 Limitation of Warranties and Liability THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE SOLD AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES AS TO THE PERFORMANCE MERCHANTIBILITY DESIGN OR OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE NO WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IS OFFERED EXCEPT AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 4 ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS AND IMPLIED ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED NEITHER COMPANY NOR ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF BUSINESS OR GOODWILL LOSS OF DATA OR USE OF DATA INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS NOR FOR ANY OTHER INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND UNDER OR ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT HOWEVER CAUSED WHETHER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY BREACH OR REPUDIATION OF CONTRACT TORT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF COMPANY OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS 6 Additional Terms and Conditions apply When using the CMS400 map control Subject to the terms and conditions of the Map provider Microsoft Virtual Earth or Google maps Microsoft Virtual Eart
558. s tab Select the cells that you want to change Hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while selecting nA ee oe i As you select a cell its color changes from light to dark gray Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 563 Working with Table Cells Table Wizard E Table Design F E Table Properties ff Cell Properties Content Alignment Background nimen lt ions Additional 6 Make changes to fields on the lower part of the Cell Properties tab The fields are described later in this section 7 Click OK Specifying the Height and Width of a Cell As described in Specifying Table Width on page 739 there are several ways to set the width of a table Within a table you can also specify the height and width of an individual cell When you set a cell width there is no guarantee that the cell will occupy that width when displayed in a browser This is because the cell is part of a column and changes to other cells in the column can affect the cell whose width you set Setting cell width only guarantees that the cell will not be ess than the width you specify lf you want to ensure that a cell s size does not change set all cells in a column to that width To specify a cell s height and width follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 564 Working with Table Cells 1 Place the cursor in the cell whose height or width you want to set Right click the mouse Clic
559. s text is Event Type Your system administrator can edit the text Event Types Available A green check x means you can add event types to the calendar Event Types Required A green check means that when entering a calendar event you must assign an event type to it Instructions If this calendar uses event types text appears at the bottom of the screen that explains how to use the event type selection box By default this text is Select Event Type to View Select Event Type To View Select Event Type To View Enon Al m orp Holid Trade Show Your system administrator can change this text Show All Label If this calendar uses event types the list of event types appears at the bottom of the screen On top of the list is text indicating that all event types will appear on the calendar By default this text is Show All select Event Type To View oh aw All Company Holiday Trade Show Pesos ee Se coee ee ES eek Your system administrator can change this text Long Description Lets the user enter additional text while adding a calendar event Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 275 Working with Calendars SS Folder Name Name of content folder to which the calendar is assigned for permission purposes You can only add edit or delete events for calendars in folders to which you have been granted permission Folder Path Complete path to the calendar s content folder The View C
560. scape File Edit View Go Communicator Help 4 a a Reload Home Search Netscape Setting Table Width by Percentage To specify table width by percentage choose Percent in the layout section of the Insert Table dialog box Then specify the percentage at the Width field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 741 Manipulating Your Table s Format Insert T able Size Bows 2 2 Columns Layout 100 C Not Specified i Percent i Pixels ri ee E ener te P Specifying Table Width by Pixels Specify table width by pixels if you want the table to remain the same size if a user resizes the browser For example if you specify that a table is 610 pixels wide and the user s browser is set to low resolution 640 x 480 pixels the table occupies the full width of the browser when it is maximized If the user resizes the browser so that it only occupies the left half of the screen only the left half of the table appears A scroll bar appears at the bottom of the browser The user must move the scroll bar to see the rest of the table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 742 Manipulating Your Table s Format Netscape File Edit View Go Communicator Help Y N Reload Home 5 earch N etscape Back Table Properties If you set table width by pixels do not set it to more than 610 pixels Otherwise the table will not fully display on a mon
561. scottsblog com Short Description Test site for Scott s blog Relationship co worker sibling Edit Remove Roll Link Link Name Toby Tylers Blog URL http www tttestsblog com Short Description Test site for Toby s blog Relationship frend colleague 7 A dialog box appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 340 Blogs Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 Click OK if you want to remove the blog roll link NOTE Continue to remove subjects by clicking the Remove link 9 Click Save M Permissions and Approvals Permissions for blogs work like folder permissions The same functionality and features are available For more information on working with permissions and approvals see the Administrator Manual sections Setting Permissions and Setting Approval Chains User Blog Permission Approval Table Permissions that affect this Permissions that affect this function when performed function when performed from from Web Site Workarea View Published blogs are viewable by Blog properties standard permission any site visitor View Only Add Not available Blog properties advanced permission Add Folders Edit Not available Blog properties advanced permission Edit Folders Delete Not available Blog properties advanced permission Delete Folders Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 341 Blogs Permissions that affect this Permissions that affect this
562. scsseseeeseeeeseeeseeeneeeeeens 495 Checking Spelling c ccsccccssseecseseecesnseeceseeseenssessensesseees 500 Working with mages cccccsscsesseeeseeeseeenseeesseenseeeaeeoeeeeenees 903 Inserting an Mage asnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn na 503 Inserting an Image THUMDNAIL cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 505 Editing an Image s Properties ccsssecseesseeeeseeeeeneeeenseenes 506 Editing an Mage eee nee ee ene nls ene Ensen eee eee eee eer 513 Deleting an Image from Content ccceccseeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeneeneeeees 518 Using BookMarks ssiisissseisiii 520 Creating a BOOKMARK ccccssssececesseescenseeeseesseeeseeneesseoees 520 Using HyperlinkS asssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn na 524 Creating a Hyper link ccccccssssececcesseescsseeeseesseeseenseesseoees 524 Testing a Hyperlink ssssasssennnann 526 Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page 527 Editing a Hyperlink sissen 528 Removing a Hyperlink sssssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 528 Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink 0 529 Inserting email Links assnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 530 WOrkMO Wiin FUE NIL soaa 532 Working with Tables ccccseeseseeseeseeeseeeeseseesseseeneeeeneees 535 Creating a Table ansnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn
563. search for To search using the Advanced tab follow these steps 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Colleagues Click the Search button im Click the Advanced Search tab Select the criteria by which to filter the search results Click Add Filter to add additional filters Enter text in one of the text boxes o o e amp Ph Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 400 My Workspace 7 Click the Search button Using Community Search Results After you click the Search button all users and groups who match the search term appear This list shows an avatar display name and status for each user or group Advanced Search Status Sent a colleague request Add as Colleague You are the leader of this community group The Status column indicates whether the user is already a colleague or if you can add them as a colleague It also lets you join a Community Group if you are not already a member Click the Add as Colleague link to send the colleague request or the Join this Group link to join the community group Send a Colleague Request Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 401 My Workspace To send a colleague request to another user in the Workarea follow these steps 1 Search for a user as described in Searching for Ektron CMS400 NET Users and Members on page 396 Click the Add as Colleagues link A colleague request is sent t
564. ser Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 615 Working with HTML Forms 2 Click the Calendar field button T3 See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 593 3 The following dialog appears Calendar Field General Validation Data Style Tool Tip Text Default value Respond to the fields on the screen See Also e Fields on the Calendar Field Dialog General Tab on page 616 e Fields on the Calendar Field Dialog Validation Tab on page 617 e Fields on the Calendar Field Dialog Data Style Tab on page 618 Fields on the Calendar Field Dialog General Tab SS Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 624 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 616 Working with HTML Forms SS Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Default If you want to set a default date enter it here The site visitor can change the value default value while completing the screen Validation Select the kind of valida
565. ser Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 792 Section 508 Compliance lf your Webmaster has given you access to all standard toolbar menus the menu looks like this Edit View As Paragraph Format Format Special Characters Form Elements Table Position Objects Test Direction Customize 5 Press the down arrow key to select the toolbar menu that has a button that you want to use 6 Anew menu appears listing all options on the selected menu The following menu displays what might appear if you select the Edit Menu Your Webmaster determines which menu options are available Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 793 Section 508 Compliance Cut Copy Faste Faste Text Replace Find Nest Pririt Undo Redo Check Spelling Check Spelling 4s fou Type Bookmark Hyperlink Remove Link HA Picture Table Edit in ord 7 Press the down arrow key until the desired option is highlighted Then click the option to perform the action Section 508 Tables You can apply the following information to any table to make it 508 compliant Heading Rows Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 797 Heading Columns Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 797 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 794 Section 508 Compliance Summary Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 797 Caption Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dia
566. ser field Edit the built in user information by changing the username and password 5 Click the Update button f NOTE If you cannot sign in to Ektron CMS400 NET because the builtin user password was changed and you don t know the new password use the BuiltinAccountReset exe utility This resets your Ektron CMS400 NET user password to Builtin Builtin This utility is located in c Program Files Ektron CMS400versionnumber Utilities ServerControlWS asmx Best Practice For improved security Ektron recommends renaming or removing the Web services file when you move it to your production server After installation this file is named ServerControlWS asmx and resides in the webroot siteroot Workarea folder ServerControlWS asmx is the Web service that lets the server controls talk to Ektron CMS400 NET The path is coded in the web config file This is how it appears lt Web Service URL for Server Controls design time gt lt add key WSPath value http localhost CMS400Developer Workarea ServerControlWS asmx gt You will need to edit this line if you change the location or name of the ServerControlWS asm x file Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 V Securing Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 vi Table of Contents Securing Ektron CMS400 NET ccsseceseeceseceeeeeneeenees i Security CheckliSt nannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
567. shed Published This Content The version you are comparing the currently published content against IMPORTANT If there is no difference between the versions you see Content is Identical The View Content Difference feature is explained through the following topics Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 102 Comparing Versions of Content e When Can I Compare Content on page 103 e Accessing the View Content Difference Feature on page 103 When Can Compare Content The View Content Difference feature is available when e you are viewing a version of content e a staged version of that content is available See Also Siaged Content on page ix Learn About Accessing the View Content Difference Feature Accessing the View Content Difference Feature To Access the View Content Difference feature follow these steps Navigate to the content whose versions you want to compare 2 Click View Properties 3 Click the History button T The View Content History screen appears See Also Comparing Historical Versions on page 115 4 Click a version that you want to compare with the most recently published version 5 Click the View Content Difference toolbar button ER The View Content Difference Feature NOTE Use this procedure if your computer is 32 bit and the Ektron CMS400 NET server is 64 bit The View Content Difference feature highlights changes that were made to s
568. shed Web Page When you finish this exercise your simple Web page will look like this S 2BGH88 oc Fs Er Be Eee amp Apply Style Normal Times New Roman 3 12 pt A aa E7 UAA This is some sample content You can make the text bold a e or underlined with the push of ab also easily add hyperlinks e You can bean alne with bullets Finally you can change the text to a large SIze Notice that this page has the following elements e The second sentence includes bold italic and underlined text e The third sentence includes a hyperlink text that will jump to another Web page when the user clicks on it e The fourth sentence begins with a bullet e The last sentence has some very large 18 point text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 635 Creating a Simple Web Page Creating a Sample Web Page To create this page follow these steps Enter the First Two Sentences 1 Open eWebEditPro XML Your Webmaster installs eWebEditPro XML on your computer and determines which fonts and sizes are available Your system may not match the example below Type the first two sentences This is some sample content You can make text bold italic and underlined with the push of a button Double click the word bold to select it Then click the Bold button B to apply bold to the word Double click the word italic Then click the Italic button to apply italic to the word Dou
569. sing subjects or tags they can be assigned to a blog post by clicking the Summary tab and choosing a subject For more information on subjects see Blog Subjects on page 329 For more information on Tags see Tags on the Summary Page on page 354 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 353 Blogs rts Description Categories BB BE 48 4 om Y wo Bal Oar C Music L Sports Ei Appli Style Normal imes New Roma A a nbsp amp TM f a Teall HI WW il Hl Hl a I 1 1 enter multiple tags comma delimited 3 Ifthe user creating the post is a member of the blog s approval chain it is published immediately If not it is surrounded by a yellow border and a member of the approval chain must approve it before it can appear on the Web site For more information on working with permissions and approvals see the Administrator Manual section Setting Approval Chains E world Fopulation to reach 6 5 Billion Last Edited by bobuser bobuser on 6 2 2006 1 33 05 PM Status 5 Ho Comments 4 Once the post is published it appears within the blog on the Web site Tags on the Summary Page You can add tags to a blog post to further define information about the post for blog search engines For example you create a blog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 354 Blogs post about your favorite band Ektronica and enter
570. sion 5 126 Searching the Workarea see Exact Phrase all words in the order specified in the search field Exact Phrase on page 127 Content ID has the submitted ID number Content ID on page 128 Match Criteria Examples The examples below assume you entered these words into the Search Text field e partners e content e Monday e employee e green All the Words All Words is an and function The search returns only content that has the words partners and content and Monday and employee and green The words can be in any order within the file Any of the Words Any Word is almost the opposite of All of the Words It is an or function When you select this option the search returns all files that have at least one of the words entered in the search text field In other words it returns files with the word partners or content or Monday or employee or green Exact Phrase Exact Phrase returns content that have all five words in the order specified in the search text field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 127 Searching the Workarea A better example would be to search for a phrase such as Content Management Solution The search yields only content with that exact phrase Content ID You can find content by its ID number To do so select Content ID from the drop down box below the Search Text field Then enter the ID number in the Search Text field and click Search
571. ss lt Cirl gt lt V gt to paste the address you copied in Step 4 into the Link field 12 Click OK Editing a Hyperlink If you need to change a hyperlink s destination Web page or target frame follow these steps Select the hyperlinked text Right click your mouse Click Set Link Properties The Hyperlink Manager dialog appears Ce Se YS Edit the fields as needed Several fields are explained in Entering a Hyperlink on page 525 6 Press OK Removing a Hyperlink If you want to remove a hyperlink from text select the text and press the Remove Link button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 528 Using Hyperlinks Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink If you enter a URL or an email address into ewebEdit400 it automatically becomes a hyperlink To avoid this select the text and click the Remove Link toolbar button 4 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 529 Inserting email Links You can easily insert email links into your content Such links provide an easy way for your site visitors to communicate with your organization An email link resembles a hyperlink But when a site visitor clicks the link instead of opening a different Web page his email application is launched At ektron Medical people with some off conditions Some ex g cancer immune disol H o We do this by apply i is TS ee devices pharmaceu ain i D
572. sssesseeseeenseeees 432 Deleting a Collection sisscsccanenciatecinvncdatiatacinentuarncenenscanentwontupninnes 433 Working with Collections in a Multi Language System 433 Comparison of Collections Menus Taxonomy and the List Summary Features esp secascntsnsnsencncesacsancnccsaciansusccentancusscarenuanaceans 435 Working with Menus ccccccesseesceeseessensenseenseeeeseeees 437 The Structure of Menus and Menu Items ccecsecsenseeeees 439 Access to the Menus Feature ccscsscsessseseeseeseeneeneenseneenes 439 Managing DAO TUS ccs cese sta deavatec weno vetancendesazimewederntcnismtemawtenonientaaee 440 Ektron CMS400 NET System Management 470 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 V Updating Your User Profile ccsseeeseseeeeeeeeseneees 470 Tiel lt a g cy en ca Sheree etter ten entre een rent a Teens er 478 Accessing Online Hel p ccssssccsesseesesseeseeneeeeeseeseeneeseeseeses 478 Accessing Online Manuals cccccssseesseseesesseeseeneesenseeees 479 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Editors 481 Setting the Editor for Ektron CMS400 NET Users 482 Introduction to eWebEdit400 484 TOGID AN BUNS irasci 486 Copying from Other Applications cccsssesssseeeeeeseeenees 493 Copying from Microsoft Word cccsseseeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeees 493 Finding and Replacing Text ccccs
573. st have the same properties and actions available to those found in the Content folder structure For example you view edit delete and copy Photos From the Photos area you can add a folder see Adding Folders to My Workspace gt gt Photos on page 411 edit a folder s name see Edit a Folder Name in My Workspace gt gt Photos on page 411 delete a folder see Deleting a Folder in My Workspace gt gt Photos on page 412 drag and drop an asset see Adding Assets to My Workspace gt gt Photos on page 413 move a content item to another folder see Moving and Copying Content in My Workspace gt gt Photos on page 415 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 410 My Workspace e select whether to share the folder with the Public Colleagues Selected Colleagues or keep the folder private see Sharing Content in My Workspace gt gt Photos on page 415 Photos can be displayed on the site when a developer adds the PhotoGallery server control to a Community Web site For additional information on the PhotoGallery server control see the Developer Manual section Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Server Controls gt Community Platform Server Controls gt PhotoGallery Server Control Adding Folders to My Workspace gt gt Photos You can add subfolders in the Photos area to help you sort images into categories The subfolders represent a taxonomy of the items c
574. t Reason for Absence O Floating Holiday Vacation Sick Day Date s of Absence None Until None Total Days Absent with pay without pay Comments eWebEdit400 s form toolbar has three buttons that you can place on a form circled below The buttons are described below BRA aAG9 7 88 88 O a SS Cl Normal B 7 U x xX a Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 se ho F F eee aa es Mali alte 9 wy 619 Working with HTML Forms Toolbar Description Button Insert Submits form information to your Web server By default it has no text To learn how to add button text see Editing a Button s Properties on page 620 Reset Changes a form s field values back to their state when the form first loaded Submit Submits form information to your Web server Its default text is Submit Editing a Button s Properties After you insert a button you may want to enter or change its properties such as its text height and width To edit a button s properties follow these steps 1 Click the button so that it is selected A selected button is surrounded by small squares as shown below 2 Below the editor screen several fields appear as shown below E O d Submit jo O O O ff Name Width Value Classname Apply CSS CI a Sd etight 22px Tom _ 3 Update the button fields as needed Fd a Give the button a unique name If needed gi
575. t folder Rating Ektron CMS400 NET provides a Content Rating feature that lets site visitors rate any content item on a scale of 1 to 10 If this feature is enabled for the content item the average numerical rating appears See A so Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing Content gt Content Rating Content Searchable True appears if the content can be found when someone searches your Web site However even if content is not searchable the Workarea Advanced search still finds it See Also The Advanced Search Tab on page 122 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 46 Viewing Content Expanding the Content Area You can vertically expand the content area of the screen This gives you more space to work on content To expand the content portion of the Workarea click the up arrow a highlighted below tent in Folder About Us ql aata P a i a Li j i boti re a Ly bis i is LOLs rare bi rere UL re AA i ra al bs eae L Lis ru pa Ls rere Li Lis Tu a Oe i us a ae rey r OT rout Us English U S Summary Metadata Sc Sa eee eee epee eel A B F amp M EEATT a ily Style Normal BZU A d p ee mei PRee Ao e obal leader ektron Medical strives to improve lives in its local and global mities particularly with regard to increasing access to high quality healthcare for erved populations It is a commitment to the long term sustainable wel
576. t already have an account with an existing blog service create one now Edit Proxy Settings Click Next Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 367 Blogs Stee Windows Live Writer Setup Screen In the Select Provider widow Welcome to Windows Live Writer Beta choose Custom e Metaweblog AP AA Select Provider from the Type of this weblog that you are using dropdown Windows Live Writer was not able to automatically detect your blog box settings Please select the type of blog that you are using to continue Type a ist Remote posting URL for your weblog emDogs CMS400Demo Workarea Blogs emirpc aspx In the Remote posting URL for Y Welcome to Windows Live Writer Beta your weblog E textbox add a link to E zi Select Provider the xmlrpc aspx file itis for the site The default location for Windows Live Writer was not able to automatically detect your blog the file in the demo settings Please select the type of blog that you are using to continue site iS http lt your site gt CMS400Min Workarea Blogs Type of aba that you are using xmlrpc aspx Remote posting URL for your weblog Click Next emDogs CMS400Demo Workarea Blogs xmirpc aspx Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 368 Blogs Step Windows Live Writer Setup Screen When the Weblog Configuration Welcome to Windows Live Writer Beta Complete window a appears Addablog Wi Web
577. t ektron com From jeditt ektron cam Subject Content Trinity In Line Fipe Times New Roman 3 12 pt 7 A oy E 7 U EBom Yee John Edit UEL bttp 192 166 0 17 CME S005 amplefndex asp tid 22 Send Erna Cancel Conditions for Instant eMail e You must have a valid email address set up in the user profile If not email icons do not appear in Ektron CMS400 NET See Also Updating Your User Profile on page 470 e Your system administrator must enable the feature Where Instant email is Available Instant email is available from several screens that display users and user groups Typically you click a user name or the email icon to launch an email Screens in the following Ektron CMS400 NET features support instant email e Smart Desktop e Tasks e Approvals e Reports e User and user group setup Wherever instant email is available one of the email icons appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 26 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Modifying Instant eMail When the email screen appears the following information is copied from Ektron CMS400 NET into the email Source of Default Information Editable User you selected to receive the email If the user does Yes not have valid email address an error message appears If desired you on the screen see below If you then insert a valid can add email address the email is sent recipients by typing them we eee teria ieee
578. t its information for example the URL and template link e Translate it e Delete it e Add or remove items e Change the sequence of menu items e Edit menu items e For submenus add remove items change sequence of menu items edit menu information edit menu items Managing Menus Ektron CMS400 NET gives you the flexibility to add edit view and delete a menu The following sections explain how to do that e Adding a New Menu on page 441 e Adding a Menu Item on page 446 e Adding New Content to a Menu via Navigation Link on a Web Page on page 454 e Editing a Menu on page 455 e Editing a Menu Item on page 457 e Viewing a Menu on page 460 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 440 Working with Menus e Reordering Menu Items on page 463 e Deleting a Menu on page 464 e Deleting a Menu Item on page 465 e Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page 466 Adding a New Menu You can create a menu by navigating to a folder or by choosing Modules gt Menus from the left frame of the Workarea If you choose Modules gt Menus you cannot select the menu s folder it is automatically assigned to the root folder In contrast if you create a menu after choosing a content folder it is assigned to the selected folder Adding a Menu via Content Folder Navigate to a content folder 2 The current language appears as a flag next to the screen title
579. t more pleasing to the eye Here is an example NOTE If you apply a dark background color to a table you may want to apply a light foreground color to the text Use the font color button fh to change the text color To assign a background color to your table click the Background Color field on the Insert Table dialog box Custom Background Background Color W Unassigned When you click that field a color dialog box appears Click the color that you want to apply to the background of the table Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 746 Manipulating Your Table s Format Basic colors EE EHHH Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor 3 Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Deleting a Table s Background Color To delete a table s background color click the Unassigned box in the Custom Background area of the Insert Table dialog box Custom Background Background Color M Unassigned Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 747 Manipulating Your Table s Format Specifying a Background Image for a Table If you want a background image to appear in all table cel
580. t visitors of your blog to also visit Below is an example of a blog roll on a Web page Pie THE Gikeiaer amp F Susi Darri pert bare ear nothing Adding a Blog Roll Link Follow these steps to add a blog roll link NOTE To add a blog roll link from the Web site you must be logged in 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 334 Blogs open the menu for the blog click Properties 2 Click View gt Folder Properties 3 Click the Edit Properties button L 4 On the Blog Roll tab click Add New Roll Link Add a Blog to folder Blog 5 The Add Blog Roll Link form appears Add a Blog to folder Blog Properties Subjects Blog Roll Remove Roll Link URL http aoc Description dd New Roll Link Remove Last Roll Link 6 Fill out the form according to the table below Feld Description Link Name Describes the link in the blog roll The URL of the blog you are adding to the blog roll It must begin with http Short Description Add a short description of the site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 335 Blogs SSS Relationship Enter the relationship of the blog roll link to you or to the site For example brother Click Edit for a pop up screen that helps you choose the site s relationship The table below explains each relationship type T
581. table to be resized as the user resizes the browser NOTE In order for the table to resize with the browser the Word Wrap attribute must be turned on in all table cells For details see Word Wrap on page 573 For example if you specify that a table is 100 wide and high and your browser displays 14 inches across when it is maximized the table fills the screen except for the browser border Netscape File Edt View Go Communicator Help n A a A 3 S Back Reload Home Search Netscape Print Security Shop Table Properties If you resize the browser to half the screen the table will be about 7 wide You still see both columns but some of the data is moved down Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 545 Working with Tables Netscape File Edt View Go Cormmunicator Help a wd Back Forward Reload Home Search Netscape ao Setting Table Width or Height by Percentage To specify table width by percentage follow these steps AE a o E Place the cursor within the table Right click the mouse Select Set Table Properties Click the Table Properties tab In the Dimensions section of the Table Properties tab specify the percentage at the Width or Height field Follow the number with the percent sign as shown below Table Wizard E Table Design Ti Sd Table Properties Dimensions Hecht i Lavout Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 R
582. table at the top of the window From this window you can add another comment and update an existing one See the next section for more details Viewing a Comment After a comment is inserted into content it can be viewed by any user who can edit the content To view a comment follow these steps 1 Edit the content that contains the comment 2 Within the content double click the comment icon 2a ay ee AS SB St asl Ce E A eae E i i By ll RAC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and live RC ra las become one of the leading manufactures of RC racing 3 The Comments window opens Adding Another Comment To comment on an existing comment follow these steps 1 Access the View Comment window for the comment as described in Viewing a Comment on page 803 Insert the comment Click the Insert button The comment is saved and added to the top row of the comment table 5 Click the Close button Updating a Comment You can change a comment if needed To update a comment follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 803 Inserting Comments within Content 1 Access the View Comments window for the comment that needs to be updated 2 Click the Date Time link of the comment you want to edit Date Time Added By Comments 23 5 ep co pplication ems 09 57 Sia aa now here s a comment on that cor 23 5ep ee Application 2004 09 54 m
583. taken from the Last Name field on the User Information screen The search returns all items last edited by that user that satisfy the other criteria Status The content status See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page Note Although you can search for content by any status the search results display only the most recently published version If a version has never been approved nothing appears Custom Fields Custom fields are defined by your system administrator and applied to content by its author or editor They are custom defined so would be different for every site The custom search fields appear below the Status field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 129 Searching the Workarea Result Display Options At the top of the Advanced Search Tab a pull down list lets you choose the how to display the search results View option Description If the item is content or a form display a thumbnail of it If the item is an asset display a generic icon that indicates asset type In both cases to the right are the item s title summary last edited user date and time You can click the title to display the item inside the View Contents screen From there you can perform all available functions on the item Note Graphical search results require the Internet Explorer browser version 6 or greater Search Content Folder Graphical Text Sample HTML content C
584. ted below 1 X Smart Desktop For admin od Community ka m E A Content S Reports 4 Messaging Tasks Content Reports amp B Forum Topics and Posts 0 Content Awaiting Approval 0 Messaging L Content Currently Checked Out 7 Content Reviews 1 YT Content Flags 0 Content To Expire 0 Popular reports and tasks this section also displays content black information ii Commerce 5 Recent Orders 0 Top level folders Submission Tasks 1 A Orders On Hold 0 e The right frame displays Content awaiting approval content you need to approve before it proceeds to the next approver or is published if you are the final approver See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Approvals Reports Content currently checked out all content in a checked out status This content cannot be edited by other users until the user who checked it out or the system administrator checks it in See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Checked Out Report A list of tasks assigned to you See Also Managing Tasks on page 293 Any form submission tasks assigned to you See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 197 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 18 The Workarea and Smart Desktop The Content to Expire Report See A so
585. ted term with the replace text click Replace find the next occurrence of the find text and optionally replace it with the replace text click Find Next change the highlighted term using the editor exit the Find and Replace dialog move to the term and edit as needed To restart the search press the Find Next button A 5 Continue to find and optionally replace or edit until you reach the end of the text Additional Options on the Dialog Box The dialog box also lets you do the following e Specifying a Search Direction on page 667 e Considering the Case of a Search Term on page 668 e Whole Word Match on page 669 Specifying a Search Direction The search begins where the cursor is when you click Find Next To make sure you locate every occurrence of a term place the cursor at the top of the content before beginning the search If you begin the search from somewhere other than the top of the page use the Direction field to search from the current location to the top or bottom of the file Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 667 Finding and Replacing Text Find And Replace Find hat HE S Find Next Replace with P Match whole word only Match case Direction C Up f Down Replace Replace All Cancel EER To search from the Click this option in the cursor location to the Direction field Considering the Case of a Search Term
586. tent authoring and publishing Ektron s easy to use affordabl full featured content management systems address tr organizational need of simplifying dynamic Web content management With Ektron s browser based solutions busin eee eee ee Se ee ee te ee CPST coated ee ere ee See eee See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 94 Each toolbar button is described below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 vi Appendix A Content Statuses aon tome m B Approve Approve and publish the content to the Web site Note Only the last approver in the chain has this option See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 94 Decline Refuse to publish the submitted content and change its status to checked in Note Only members of the approval chain have this option This button rejects the changes and keeps the current version live on Web site The approver is prompted to enter a reason for the decline After the decline option is completed e The author who made the change is notified by email e The content is removed from the Approval Chain If an author updated content then submitted it for approval the updated content remains in the file If you do not want it to remain choose the Edit option Approvers are prompted to publish or decline content changes as well as requests to delete content Check out the content and edit it Only the user who submitted the content has this option N
587. tent Folder oe a TS 6 Access the Contents folder from the left side of your Workarea Open the folder that contains the content Click the content associated with the task Click the Tasks tab The page lists all tasks assigned to the content Select a task From the view task page you can add a comment to the task See Adding Comments to Tasks on page 313 for more information Viewing a Task from the Tasks Folder To view a task from the Tasks folder follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 307 Managing Tasks 1 From the Smart Desktop select the Tasks folder See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 17 Click the task you want to view 3 The View Task screen is displayed From here you can perform these tasks e Editing a Task on page 312 e Deleting a Task on page 316 e Adding Comments to Tasks on page 313 See Also Task View Options on page 308 Sorting Tasks By Task Type on page 311 Sorting Tasks By Column on page 311 Managing Tasks on page 293 emailing Tasks on page 312 Task View Options Beneath the main task module folder several view screens display all tasks filtered by specified categories After viewing tasks in any category most screens let you perform an action on the tasks the actions are included in the table below For example you can change a tasks state to another state To select all tasks ona sc
588. tent within the editor View Content About Us YRogaG Adre jz English U S Add select language Content ieee Comment Tasks Category Web Alerts Asa EET leader ektron emr strives to improve lives in its local and alobal communities particularly with regard to increasing access to high quality healthcare for underserved populations It is a commitment to the long term sustainable well being of the communities in which employees live and work The editor resembles popular word processing software You can enter text then select it and click a button to change its display properties For example you can make text bold change the color or copy and paste it You can also insert images tables links to other Web pages and check spelling See Also ntroduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Editors on page 481 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 10 Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET The Lifecycle of Content After you edit content you typically submit it for approval to one or more individuals who oversee changes to your Web site These people can review edit and approve the change When the last approver signs off the new content becomes available on the Web site In some cases you are one of the content approvers In this case you receive an email notifying you that content needs approval You look it over change it as needed then pass it on to the next approver If you
589. terms and conditions 1 Right to use The Software is licensed for use only in delivered code form Each copy of the Software is licensed for use only on a single URL Each license is valid for the number of seats listed below the Basic Package Any use of the Software beyond the number of authorized seats contained in the Basic Package without paying additional license fees as provided herein shall cause this license to terminate Should CUSTOMER wish to add seats beyond the seats licensed in the Basic Package the CUSTOMER may add seats on a block basis at the then current price for additional seats see product pages for current price The Basic Packages are as follows Ektron CMS400 NET Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron eWebEditPro Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron eWebEditPro XML Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL For purposes of this section the term seat shall mean an individual user provided access to the capabilities of the Software The CUSTOMER may not modify alter reverse engineer disassemble or decompile the Software This software product is licensed not sold 2 Duration This License shall continue so long as CUSTOMER uses the Software in compliance with this License Should CUSTOMER breach any of its obligations hereunder CUSTOMER agrees to return all copies of the Software and this License upon notification and demand by Ektron 3 Copyri
590. ternal Table Border A table s internal border is either on or off You cannot specify other attributes To turn a table s internal border off or on follow these steps NOTE If the table s border is on these steps turn it off If it is off they turn it on 1 Place the cursor inside the table 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Show Hide border Assigning External Table Border Attributes You can modify these external border attributes e color see Assigning Table Border Color on page 558 e size thickness see Assigning Border Size on page 559 e line selection see Determining Which Table Border Lines Appear on page 560 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 557 Working with Tables Assigning Table Border Color This section explains how to change the color of a table s border see example below TIE Rica Bermuda 1 To assign the color of your table s border follow these steps Place the cursor within the table Right click the mouse Select Set Table Properties Click the Table Properties tab Click the Border Color drop down circled below oe oe iy o F Table Properties Seke u Border 6 Acolor selection box appears Click a color to apply to the table s border Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 558 W
591. th HTML Forms SSS Send data in XML A green check means email data will be in a structured XML Format packet A red X means the email data will be in a standard mailto format For more information see Sending Data as XML in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Forms chapter Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form In the Mail Properties section of the Edit Form screen you can select email addresses submitted on the form to be inserted into these Mail Property fields e To e From e CC So instead of entering a static email address it can be dynamically retrieved from the user s form submission For example you want to retrieve the from field of an email from the information a user enters when completing the form To do this use the OR to addresses in field dropdown lists circled below These lists contain fields that dynamically retrieve data from the submitted form Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 209 Working with HTML Forms Title Compose Email Description Write and send an email message Form Data Mail Database Assign Task To unassigned Select User or Group ID 399 Mail Properties To for to addresses in field Mo field sele From p rom iz CC Jr to addresses in field OC emall addres Mual J L Note that the To and CC fields can accept fields whose validation type is email address or email address list On the other hand
592. th XML Smart Forms users authorized to create content in that folder see the Job Postings Smart Form on the folder s New menu shown below i Blog 4 Hi Discussion Board q Community Folder iH aE t Ta Catalog HTML Content HTML Form Survey Smart Form _ DMS Document bers Bi Multiple DMS Documents The user can create a Smart Form based on that configuration Here is what the Smart Form might look like when it is first created Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 264 Working with XML Smart Forms Edit Content in Folder Careers Bene mee aes mene EN Ne ee eT Ne Ne Title fee nalish U 5 Content Searchable Summary Alias Comment SY enega gga a C Fha aAA R Apply CSS Cl Paragraph Sit B J U A x X a E a Ed i FE a h gt F BBS H Position code Re ibilities After the form is completed submitted for publication and approved it can appear on your Web site Note that the user completing the Smart Form cannot change the template he can only complete its fields Completing a Smart Form s Fields The following indicators on the Smart Form data entry screen provide clues about the kind of information you can enter Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 265 Working with XML Smart Forms Indicator Meaning A response is required Date field Click the icon to pop up a calendar and select a date Image field
593. th the latest medical science we are able to provide solt make a difference in people s lives Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page Sometimes the destination Web page contains bookmarks and you want to jump from your page to a bookmark on another page Bookmarks are described in Using Bookmarks on page 520 To create a hyperlink that jumps to another page s bookmark follow these steps Open a browser and your Web site Go to the Web page that contains the bookmark link Click the bookmark that you want to jump to For example on the illustration below the text Benefits to Partners jumps to a bookmark further down the page PARTNER PROGRAM OVERYIEW Welcome Executive Summary Ektron Partner Programs Ektron Technology Partners Benefits to Partners Ektron Products Partners in Learning Program Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 527 Using Hyperlinks 4 When you click the bookmark its full address appears in the browser address bar This bookmark s address looks like this http www example com single aspx id 35 Benefits2 5 Click the address bar The address is selected 6 Press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt to copy the address into the Windows clipboard Go to eWebEdit400 Select the text or image from which you want to jump to the bookmark 9 Click the Hyperlink button The hyperlink dialog box appears 10 Move the cursor to the Link field 11 Pre
594. that lets you remove the item from the server This feature is available to help reduce disk space taken up by these files Before removing an image or file from your server you should review all content with links to it and remove or update the link To delete an item from the library follow these steps 1 Access the View Library Item for any type of library item as described in Viewing Files on page 145 2 Click the Delete button Ti 3 The Delete Library Item screen is displayed If appropriate check the box next to Remove from the server see above 5 Click the Delete button fi Adding a Library File to Content After a file is copied to the library users can add it to content See Adding a Library File to Content on page 151 You can also insert an item into the library while adding it to content See Adding a File to the Library and Inserting it into Content on page 152 If you insert an image file it appears within the content If you add any other type of file the file name appears as a hyperlink within the content When a site visitor viewing that page clicks the hyperlink the inserted file is launched Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 150 Library Folder Adding a Library File to Content 1 Invoke the editor by adding or editing content in Ektron CMS400 NET 2 Place the cursor within the content where you want the library file to appear Click the library b
595. the word Update describing the button in the illustration below If you do not check this box the screen s title remains in the title bar when the user moves the mouse over the button as illustrated below Edit User jedit Landing Page after If you want one page in your Web site to appear after sign in enter the login URL to that page You might select a page that leads to a group of pages that you maintain If you don t know the URL navigate to the page go to the browser address bar and select the text following the directory in which Ektron CMS400 NET resides For example if the browser address bar says http www example com customers aspx id 945 you would enter customers aspx id 945 here Set smart desktop as If you want the Smart Desktop to appear as soon as you enter the the start location in the Workarea click inside this check box Workarea See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 17 If you leave this check box blank when you enter the Workarea you go to the folder of the content specified at the Landing Page after login field Inherit Task This area indicates your task permissions and whether you inherit them Permissions From from user groups to which you belong User Groups For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Managing Tasks section Task Permissions Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 476 Updating Your User Profil
596. the From field can only accept fields whose validation type is email address that is a single email address To set this up follow these steps 1 Add a form field whose Validation type is Email address or Email address list The field prompts the user completing the form to enter his email address Label the field something like Enter your email address TIP If the field allows more than one address add on screen instructions to separate each address with a semicolon Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 210 Working with HTML Forms Plain Text Field Descriptive Name email address Field Mame email_address Tool Tip Text vemail address Default value Validation Please submit your emal address submit Survey Validation Email address list Error Message E mail address list Go to the Edit Form screen gt Mail Properties section 3 Move to the field labeled From At the dropdown list following OR to addresses in field select the field you created in Step 1 Now when a user completes the form the value he enters in the field created in Step 1 is used for the email s From address Retrieving Form Data Into the Subject and Preamble Fields You can retrieve data from a submitted form directly to the form s Subject and Preamble fields The subject is a standard mail field and the preamble is text that appears at the beginning of the email For example
597. the folder s title Photos est folder 0 3 The Edit Folder box appears Name est Folder Click the Delete button Delet A dialog box appears asking you to confirm deleting the folder Click OK The page refreshes and the folder is removed ot oe oS Adding Assets to My Workspace gt gt Photos To add an image to My Workspace gt gt Photos follow these steps In the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt gt Photos 2 Select a folder where the image will be added If you want to create a new folder see Adding Folders to My Workspace gt gt Photos on page 411 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 413 My Workspace 3 Click the Add Image button E 4 The Add Asset Photo Data box appears Add Assets Photo Data Fill out the description and then click next to drag and drop image s Fill in the description of the image optional 6 Select a Maximum Width Choices are 250 800 1000 1400 or 1600 pixels 7 Enter a map address associated with image For example 542 Amherst Street Nashua NH 03036 8 Click Next 9 The Drag and drop upload box appears 10 Drag and drop an image in the box 11 A status box appears and shows the file being uploaded Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 414 My Workspace 12 Once the upload is complete the page refreshes and the asset appears in the file list Moving and Copying Content i
598. the form may provide a list of your products While the user is completing the form he selects a product that he is interested in The product then becomes the subject line of the email Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 211 Working with HTML Forms NOTE Since a Textarea field can span multiple lines it can only be used with the preamble However a plain text field can be used with both the subject and preamble To retrieve data dynamically from a form field into the email s subject line or preamble follow these steps 1 Adda form field that collects the information you want to insert into the email s subject line or preamble See Also Inserting Form Fields on page 171 2 Go to the Edit Form screen gt Mail Properties section See Also Editing a Form on page 212 3 Move to the field labeled Subject or Preamble 4 At the dropdown list following OR use text in field select the field you created in Step 1 Editing a Form After you create a form it can easily be edited if information needs to be changed You can update the following information by following the procedure below e the form fields e post back message e metadata e schedule e comments e Web Alerts However to edit a form s Title Description form data or task values use the Edit Properties screen To edit a form follow these steps 1 Access the View Form screen for the form you want to edit as described
599. the image 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Set Image Properties NOTE You can also view and adjust some image properties at the bottom of the Edit Content screen as shown below ja O fa Apply cssci x x 29 0 4 4 s RR PEG Ss At ektron Medical we focus on assisting people with some of the most g i Mg ye BAa GI o F bh S amp SE i Weer i i il Ht Hl complex conditions Some examples are hemophilia cancer immune disorders and kidney disease We do this by applying our expertise in medical devices pharmaceuticals and biotechnology to make a meaningful difference in patients lives With the latest technologies in medical science we are able to r provide solutions that make a difference in people s lives Our projects have been very successful with Ektron s new project management starter application er J O O JCONDITIONS O J d O Width 50 Alignment Classname Apply CSS Clr Set Image Properties Height 11 Border color Border Width ToolTip The following explains the fields on the Image Properties dialog a ee Border Width Set the width of the image s border in pixels See Also Setting a Border on page 510 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 507 Working with Images See Border Color To set the color of the image s border click the X circled below When you do a palette of colors appears Click the border color from the palette Add
600. the task history shows when and by whom the task was created when it changed to Active when it was linked to content when its state changed when it was approved etc You can view the task s history until the task is purged To view a task s history follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View Task screen as explained in Viewing a Task on page 307 2 Click the History button Qf The history of task events appears example below ry for review today Date 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 Initiator Activity Information jedit Creation jedit Other Task Assigned to All Authors jedit Content Linked Plastic Molder 123013 jedit Start Date Changed Date Set to 17 Sep 2004 jedit Due Date Change Date Set to 22 Sep 2004 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 317 Managing Tasks Task Module Toolbar The following table explains the toolbar buttons available while managing tasks Add Comment Add a comment to the task Adding Comments to i Tasks on page 313 Add Task Access the Add Task screen from the Task Module Toolbar View Content page on page 318 Add Task Access Add Task screen from task Creating a Task via module folder the Task Folder on page 295 Delete Task Delete a task Deleting a Task on page 316 Edit Task Edit a task Editing a Task on page 312 ce Update Save task information View Task View task information Viewin
601. the user entering table text presses lt Enter gt That keystroke causes text to move down to the next line Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 573 Working with Table Cells By default all cells have the Word Wrap feature turned on Turning Word Wrap On and Off To turn Word Wrap on or off for a cell follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Set Cell Properties The Cell Properties dialog box appears O e D m a To turn off Word Wrap click the No Wrapping checkbox Cell Properties H Cell Properties Content Alignment ks z Background k J Dimensions Additional Height Id widths Background Image 6 Click Update Setting Cell Padding and Spacing Cell padding is the space between a cell s data and its border 1 the Y pixel Cell spacing is the space between a cell and surrounding cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 574 e entire Assigning Cell Padding and Spacing Working with Table Cells To assign cell padding and spacing to your table follow these steps Place the cursor in the table Right click the mouse Click Set Table Properties oa Se ly The Table Properties dialog appears Click the Table Properties tab In the Cell Padding and Cell Spacing fields enter the number of pixels E Table Design Table Properties Dimensions Width 7
602. the value Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field See Validation Options on page 180 If you assign to this field any value other than No validation the field is initially surrounded by red dashes in Data Entry mode If the user s response does not meet the validation criterion the field remains surrounded by red dashes The system administrator determines whether or not the user can save an invalid document If you want to change the visual indicator that a field s response is invalid see the following Ektron CMS400 NET KB article htip dev ektron com kb_article aspx id 7070 Error Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s Message response to this field does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is telephone number the error message could be Please enter 7 or 10 digits It would appear if the user entered for example S061882 By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Validation Options Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version
603. ting Vertical Alignment on page 764 Specifying a Cell s Background Color on page 5 Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 759 Setting a Cell s Border Color on page 756 735 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus re el 2 LS All items on this menu are described in The Context Sensitive Menu on page 661 except Tables which is described in The Insert Table Menu on page 730 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 736 Manipulating Your Table s Format This section explains how to manipulate your table s format by specifying e anumber of rows and columns e awidth e horizontal alignment e a background color or image e border color and size NOTE You can also apply most of these properties to individual cells within a table See Working with Table Cells on page 753 for details e Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns on page 737 e Specifying Table Width on page 739 e Specifying Horizontal Alignment on page 744 e Table Backgrounds on page 745 e Setting Table Borders on page 749 Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns Use the Size section of the Insert Table dialog box to specify the number of rows and columns in the table Insert Table Size Bows 2 Columns 2 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 737 Manipulating Your Table s Format A row is a horizontal series of cells while a column is a vertical
604. ting a Form s Properties See Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 207 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 213 Working with HTML Forms Mailto or Database Form The Forms feature lets you create a mailto or a database form to use on your Web site When creating or editing a form you must specify the type of form you are creating The options are e Send it via email e Store it in a database e Send it via email and store in a database See Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 207 for information about toggling this option on and off Advantages of a Mailto Form By creating a mailto form any email generation is done on the server side not on the client This means that site visitors can submit email whether or not the client has email software Storing Form Data in a Database By storing form data in the Ektron CMS400 NET database you can keep information submitted by site visitors and view reports on that information You can also export the form data to a spreadsheet Deleting a Form You can easily delete forms that are no longer needed NOTE Deleting a form also deletes its associated content and information To delete a form follow these steps 1 Access the View Form screen for the form you want to delete 2 Click the Delete Form button H 3 A confirmation message is displayed 4 Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 214
605. tion rules ensure that the information entered by site visitors meets your criteria For example a validation rule specifies that a response to the Telephone field is 10 digits If the response does not conform an error message indicates the problem The input must conform before the form can be submitted For a list of validation rule types see Validation Options on page 602 When Validation Rules are Applied Validation rules are applied when a site visitor submits an entire form not when the input is entered If an invalid response is found the error message that you define appears The site visitor must change his response to conform to the validation rule When he does the next field is checked and if that is invalid its error message appears etc NOTE If you want to change the visual indicator that a field s response is invalid see the following Ektron CMS400 NET KB article http dev ektron com kb_article aspx id 7070 TIP If you apply validation rules to more than one field include the field name in the error message For example enter The name field only allows text This is good practice because error messages only appear after a form is submitted If the message does not identify the field the user may not know which field needs correction Form Fields You can insert the following types of fields onto an HTML form e Inserting a Checkbox Field on page 597 e Inserting a Text Field on page
606. tion to apply to this field The choices are e No validation response is not checked e Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked If you assign Cannot be blank the field is surrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Custom See Custom Validation on page 605 Error Enter text that appears if a site visitor s response does not satisfy the Message validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is Cannot be blank the error message could be Please enter a response By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion Use this field to customize its text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Fields on the Calendar Field Dialog Validation Tab Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 617 Working with HTML Forms Field Description Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 624 Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field The choices are e No validation response is not checked e Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked If you assign Cannot be blank the field is su
607. tive Hame Field Hame Tool Tip Text List Allow selection f Onl one More than one A selection is required ltem List Working with HTML Forms Field 1 Field Field 1 Custom Appearance f Vertical List C Horizontal List C List Box fi Value 1 Check tem to be selected by default Move Up Move Down Remove Ok Fields on the Choices Dialog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 188 Working with HTML Forms w col Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 199 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 List Custom You create your own set of choices Use the Item and Item List fields to do this Note If after seeing the following predefined choices you want to customize the choices available to site visitors return to this field replace the value with Custom then define the ranges you want in the Item field Age Ranges Use the predefined choices for age ranges You can see t
608. to a large size Select the words large size se ee Click the down arrow to the right of the font size list When you do the list of available fonts appears 5 Click 5 18 pt 6 Notice that large size is now much larger than the other text Congratulations You have just created your first Web page with eWebEditPro XML You have learned how to apply bold italic and underlining create a hyperlink add a bullet to a line and change the size of the text This sample used only a few of the many features available The following sections explain the rest of the details about using the product Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 638 Toolbar Buttons This section explains how to use the buttons and drop down lists on the toolbar The toolbar is the row of buttons across the top of the editor window illustrated below g E CESI TLEER T L EEE Bi Apply Style Normal BZ UAA g5 joonbsp TM j js Hc e The buttons let you perform functions such as cutting and pasting text inserting images and creating tables ikl I III ut u Wi I Mt All buttons may not appear Your Webmaster determines which buttons appear on your toolbar Also you can customize your toolbar so that it contains only the buttons you use See Customizing Your Toolbar on page 652 This section explains e Selecting Text on page 639 e Applying Formatting Attributes to Text on pa
609. to display this form on a Web page He cannot use a Poll Server Control when redirecting to an action page e Redirect to a file or page Identify a file or a page on your Web site that is launched when the visitor completes the form An example of a file is a white paper a common file format is PDF that the visitor requested An example of a page is one that lets the visitor download your product e Redirect to an action page and forward form data See Redirect to an Action Page and Forwarding Form Data on page 164 e Report on the form See Making Form Results Available to Site Users on page 165 10 Now that you have completed information about the form you can enter the form s content This procedure is described in Creating a Form s Content on page 168 Composing the Postback Message The postback message can contain text or graphics just like any other HTML content Typically tt acknowledges the site visitor s completion of the form For most sample forms provided sample text appears in the editor Modify it as you wish using Ektron CMS400 NET s editor to change the font size style color insert library items etc Inserting Fields into the Postback Message You can also insert fields that retrieve form information upon its submission Use the Insert Fields pull down to do this illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 163 Working with HTML Forms Bus
610. toolbar button 65 checked in content definition iii checked out content definition v choose color WeblmageFX command 702 choose font WeblmageFX command 703 cleaning HTML 783 collaboration content 801 collections adding content 427 changing sequence of links 66 compared with menu and List Summary 435 creating 423 creating new content for 429 default template 425 definition 417 deleting 433 editing content blocks 431 finding 418 folder using to find collection 419 information editing 432 multi language 433 removing content 431 reordering content blocks 432 toolbar button 65 toolbar buttons 423 using default template or quicklinks 425 viewing 421 color background cell applying 757 deleting 758 table applying 746 deleting 747 cell border 756 default 735 content block border meaning i depth specifying 725 font changing 645 picture border 688 table border 749 default 733 columns eWebEdit400 table deleting columns 543 table adding 738 deleting 738 spanning 761 specifying 737 comments adding another 803 adding to a task 313 inserting into content 801 updating 803 viewing 803 Compare source code field eWebDiff 108 Compare visual aspect field eWebDiff 108 comparing content 101 103 content area explained 109 Diff tab 109 how status affects comparison 105 published tab 110 setup window 107 staged tab 110 toolbar 106 view tabs 109 when available 103 104 window explanation 105 content see also
611. tor Asset First use Check out and Save As or Save As to save asset to your computer and edit it Then use Edit to replace version in Ektron CMS400 NET Edit Office document within Ektron CMS400 NET which launches Office Edit item s Ektron CMS400 NET information such as Summary Metadata Schedule and Taxonomy After you complete the edit screen you proceed to the View Content screen From here you can perform additional content activities such as move copy delete and view history Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 Approving Declining Content on page 90 Deleting a Single Content Item on page 61 Deleting an Office Docu ment on page 248 Deleting a Managed File on page 259 Editing HTML Content on page 52 Editing a Form on page 212 Editing a Managed File on page 258 Editing an Office Document on page 246 After you select the content you have the following options on page 43 38 Viewing a Folder Option Allows you to For more information see Force Check Only appears if user is a member of the In Administrator group or assigned the folder admin role and content is checked out Allows an admin to check in content even though he is not the one who checked it out Publish Accept changes to content and publish it to the ee site Request Allows either admin user or non admin user with Check In edit permission for the
612. translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 927 Note For the steps to create a new form see Creating a New Form on page 161 For the steps to create a new survey see Creating a Survey on page 222 Choose a content folder 2 Fromthe View menu click Language and select the language in which to create the poll 3 Click New gt HTML Form Survey The New Form screen appears New Form tet ee e Caan ee a e Select a form from below or begin with a blank form Next you ll be able to customize all aspects of the form so that it collects exactly the information you re looking for Blank Form Design a new form Blank Survey A Design a new survey Standard Poll Design a new poll Compose Email ch NOTE If you choose Standard Poll or Blank Survey the number of steps in the Forms Wizard changes from five to four This happens because the Assign Tasks step is removed 5 Choose Standard Poll You can click the preview icon amp next to any sample form to preview it before choosing it 6 Click the Next button 7 Enter or edit the form s Title and Description Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 218 Working with HTML Forms e Title used to reference the poll within the Workarea required e Description an extended description of the poll Click the Next button 9 This screen lets you add a poll question and possible replies
613. u created and other content E Flo RELI IC O Syndication if Contact Ektron 1 Login Information 2 in New Content Block 1 13 Click the Add button 4 to add the content to the collection Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 430 Working with Collections Editing Content in a Collection After a collection is created you can add or remove links to and from it Adding Content to the Collection For information about adding content links to a collection see Assigning Content to the Collection on page 427 Removing Content from the Collection To remove a content link from a collection follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 418 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 421 3 Click the Remove button The Delete Items from Collection screen appears Check boxes next to links that you want to delete Select All Clear All Title ID UR Home Page Content 1 ict Support Page 8 ct i Plastic Molder 123 i3 cr RC Cheetah 5 cl RC Redstar 7 JCI M Contact Ektron i5 J L New Content Block 17 jc Click Select All to select all boxes Click Clear All to remove all check marks 6 Click the Delete button 7 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 431
614. ual Version 7 6 Revision 5 621 Working with HTML Forms To set up a task that it is assigned to users or groups whenever a site visitor completes the form follow these steps Note You should be familiar with tasks before beginning this procedure See Also Managing Tasks on page 293 1 If you are creating a new form assign the task at Step 3 of the Forms Wizard If you are editing a form assign the task on the form s Edit Properties screen In both cases you identify only users and groups to whom the task will be assigned whenever a site visitor completes the form Ektron CMS400 NET assigns the remaining task information You complete the form and make it available on your Web site 3 A visitor to your site fills out and submits the form 4 A task is created and assigned to users and groups you identified in Step 1 5 Any Ektron CMS400 NET user can view all tasks created via form submission in the Smart Desktop See illustration below See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 17 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 622 Working with HTML Forms Smart Desktop for ADMIN owes ore owe ae ja p Content Currently Checked Out 6 Tasks 2 Form Submission Tasks 1 iew All Tasks Title ID State Priority Due Date Assigned To Assigned By Last Added Commi Blank Form Wot Started Normal Not Specified Everyone E admin Not Specified ES Content To Expir
615. ubfolders then click a subfolder to see its content The following graphic illustrates the location of Ektron CMS400 NET s major features from the Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 20 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS Workarea Site Map Smart Desktop Tasks 45 Reports content reports content folders community features ial Library Modules library folders Settings oModules Collections Settings Menus 5 Users aS Calendar E User Groups 3 amp Rol E Import XLIFF Files H Roles E Site Analytics 2 Help Business Rules 5 Taxonomy 1 Community Management Commerce HE Configuration From the Smart Desktop you can also e Modify the Display of Top Level Folders on page 21 e Hide the Left Panel of the Workarea on page 23 Modify the Display of Top Level Folders The display of top level folders can appear in two formats Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 21 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Format Illustration A full button with an icon and text B Content An icon on the bottom of the left frame The full display is easier to see but the icon format allows more space for the folder structure You can decide which option best Suits your needs Switching Between Full Buttons and Icons By default top level folders appear as full buttons To switch the dis
616. ubjects before clicking Save Removing Blog Subjects There are two ways to remove blog subjects Remove the last link that was added Remove any link in the list Each task is explained below Removing the Last Blog Subject Follow these steps to remove the last blog subject on the page NOTE To remove a blog subject from the Web site you must be logged in 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site open the menu for the blog click Properties Click View gt Folder Properties Click the Edit Properties button Click the Subjects tab Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 331 Blogs 5 Click Remove Last Subject 6 A dialog box appears 7 Click OK to remove the last subject NOTE You can continue to remove subjects at the end of the list by clicking the Remove Last Subject link 8 Click Save fA Removing a Blog Subject NOTE To remove a blog subject from the Web site you must be logged in 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site open the menu for the blog click Properties 2 Click View gt Folder Properties 3 Click the Edit Properties button L 4 Click the Subjects tab Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 332 Blogs 5 Click Remove next to the subject to be removed Edit Properties for the folder GBNB i E Subjects Add New Subject
617. ubset of form information Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 207 Working with HTML Forms e Title and Description e Database or Mail if form data is emailed whenever a site visitor submits it enter mail property information below See Mail Properties on page 208 e Autofill form values checked by default this allows the form s fields to fill automatically when a logged in site visitor has previously completed the form e Limit Submission when checked you can enter the number of times a user can submit a form in the Number of Submissions text field e Assign task to see Assigning a Task to a Form on page 197 e Form block s ID number e Mail Properties Mail Properties Email address to which the form is sent when submitted See Also Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form on page 209 Text that appears in the email s From field See Also Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form on page 209 Text that appears in the email s CC field See Also Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form on page 209 Subject Text that appears in the email s subject field See Also Retrieving Form Data Into the Subject and Preamble Fields on page 211 Preamble Beginning text of the email See Also Retrieving Form Data Into the Subject and Preamble Fields on page 211 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 208 Working wi
618. uicklinks only Form links only Files only Hyperlinks only Please check off the field that you wish to search in addition to the Title Description search Filename search Only search items last edited by myself Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 139 Library Folder The fields are described below e Enter Keyword s Specify one or more keywords that the search will use The search looks for keywords in the file s title The title is assigned by the user when the file is added to the library If a file s title matches the keywords the file appears on the search results screen The search also uses keywords to search through the file s e internal name for example airplane gif if the Filename Search checkbox is checked e description if the Description search checkbox is checked A keyword can be a complete or partial word But you can only enter a partial term for one word For example you can enter Adv and have the search return the content titled Adverse Drug Reactions But if you enter Adv Drug the search returns nothing You can enter several complete search terms but they must be in the correct sequence For example to find the topic titled Adverse Drug Reactions you can enter Adverse Reactions but cannot enter Reactions Adverse To find all files in a selected library folder enter nothing in this field Or to find all files in a selected library folder of a ty
619. ut the blog post on their site PingBack Pings back any URLs in the blog post Images add images to a blog post You add images to a blog post the same way you add them to content See Also Adding a Library File to Content on page 150 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 321 Blogs eS Blog Comments A Comments link appears at the end of the blog post The link includes a number in parentheses for example 3 This number denotes how many comments have been made Click this link to move to the comments page where you can read comments on the post and possibly enter your own Blog Roll Other blog sites that the blog s creator wants site visitors to view Blog Subjects Subjects associated with the blog If you click a subject links to all posts associated with the subject appear Calendar Indicates when blog posts were made This lets site visitors navigate your blog by clicking a day that has blog posts Blog Workflow The following table explains the workflow of a blog toe onan Phase 1 An administrator creates a blog in the Adding a Blog on Workarea During this phase he assigns page 323 blog subjects creates a blog roll and decides how comments are handled Phase 2 A developer adds the blog to a Web form The Developer Manual using the blog server control He then section Introduction to publishes the form Ektron CMS400 NET Server Controls gt Blog Server Control
620. utton ffi The library opens Navigate to the folder that contains the file you want to insert gt Library Library Folder Content images 3 Books a E AC limages vy gt Calendar mE IC ae Medi z CenturyMedicalServices ANM uploadedImages aimi2 gif H Contacts be fr ve ON DEMAND 5 0 Dynamic Content In Co trina ee FAO SSS CMS400 Logo uploadedimages cms400 50 qit 1 2 Form Example sates at ae teh iad Per Pee 44 gt IntranetBasic akon od VE ad Press Releases collection error gif 1 6ED6 4506 B441 0EECEO2D4FES gif 6 4h Purchase Orders explorerl GIF C B364 498C 9044 CBh00B366BF86 61F 6 replication juploadedimages replication gif G TE De E ete 6 From the file types dropdown list select the kind of file you want to insert 7 All library files of that type in the selected folder appear on the screen 8 Click the file you want to insert NoTE You can preview the file by clicking the preview button La 9 Click the insert button to insert the file Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 151 Library Folder 10 A hyperlink to the file appears in your content amp x X nbsp TM Punctuation rules You can click the link to open the file Adding a File to the Library and Inserting it into Content Use this procedure to insert an image into content that has not yet been copied to the library This procedure i
621. utton to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 711 Editing Images Open Standard Toolbar Button Description Select an image for editing The image can be on your computer or a local area network Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 712 Editing Images Load Image Ei ES Look ir E eweblmageE dit c E a Files of type JPEG Files ipa jpeg Cancel atis Mo Network F Open as read only 2 To change the type of file that appears in the window click the down arrow circled above to the right of the Files of type field Your system administrator determines which types of files you can edit Oval Standard Toolbar Button Description Draws an oval To use this command click the oval command drag the line and release the mouse To change the oval s line size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 713 Editing Images Dialog Box Attributes Paste as New Image Standard Toolbar Button Description After you copy or cut an image or an area of an image use paste as new image to insert it into a new file Before creating a new file WeblmageFX asks if you want to save changes to current file Pointer Selection Standard Toolbar Button Ka Descr
622. valent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Change the font style Verdana Your Webmaster determines which fonts are available For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing Ektron CMS400 NET gt Font Manager Font Style Note If more than one font appears ina selection the browser on the reader s PC tries to display text using the first font If the browser cannot find that font it tries to use the second etc Note Your system administrator can enable or disable the font toolbar buttons style size color and background color See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Modifying the Application Setup Screen gt Editor Options gt Enable Font Buttons lont e Change the font size in points Your p Font Size Webmaster determines which font sizes in points are available h he f lor A F nt Color Change the font color FEE p ckaround Change the background color of the J selected content Color Begin the line on which the cursor rests with a number If the line above this line is _ 2 Number not numbered assign this line 1 e numbered assign a number one more than the line above Note The Number toolbar button applies a number to each paragraph If you want to switch to regular that is non numbered paragraphs click the button a second time Ektron CMS400 NET Use
623. ve the button a unique ID Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 620 Working with HTML Forms ee Tooltip Enter or change the button s tooltip that is text that appears in a small window when someone hovers the mouse over the button Classname Enter or change the style sheet class assigned to the button Implementing a Form on a Web Page After you create the form you need to link it to another page on your Web site You would insert the link as you would any form link See Adding a Library File to Content on page 150 Next open your Web Site navigate to the host page and click the hyperlink to access the form Now you can test the form and make sure it works as you expected If needed you can return to edit mode change the form and test it again until you are happy with it Assigning a Task to a Form While tasks typically help Ektron CMS400 NET users track content activities you can also assign a task to users or user groups whenever a form is submitted For example your Web site offers a free product demonstration to anyone who completes a form Whenever a site visitor submits the form a task is assigned to your sales department s administrative assistant He uses the information on the form to schedule a demonstration The sales manager can review the task history to audit sales leads and ensure demonstration requests are being handled in a timely manner Ektron CMS400 NET User Man
624. w Comments screen Here you can view approve edit delete and add new comments NOTE To learn about recognizing unapproved comments and approving them see Controlling Blog Comments on page 357 See Also e Adding a Comment on page 362 e Editing a Comment on page 363 e Deleting a Comment on page 364 e Approving a Comment on page 364 Adding a Comment Note Tobe able to add a comment you must have Add permission on the blogs Standard Permissions screen To add a blog post comment from the Workarea follow these steps From the Content area navigate to the blog 2 Click the Comments icon to the left of the post that you want to comment on 3 Click New gt Comment The Add Comment screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 362 Blogs Add Comment J e a Comment Display John Wiliams Name Email jwilliamst example com URL http Post 370 What is Guillain Barre Syndrome GBS state Approved s Fending Comment For a description of the fields on this screen see The Comment Form on page 360 Note that Add Comment screen provides an additional field State This field lets the submitting user set the comment s state to approved or pending Approved comments appear on the site immediately Pending comments must be approved before they appear To learn about the approval process for pending comments see Moderate Comments o
625. w as HTML 3 Select the value in the Background Image field and press lt Backspace gt 4 Click OK setting Table Borders You can specify a border color or size for your table Assigning Border Color A table border is the line that separates the table from the rest of your Web page By default table borders are gray You can change the color of table borders Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 749 Manipulating Your Table s Format table border Waris checked cell border lf you want a table s border to disappear set it to the same color as the page s background color This technique is often used to format text on a Web page Assigning a Cell Border Color Each cell also has a border that separates it from the other cells and the table border By default a cell s border color matches the table border However you can individually change a cell border color see Setting a Cell s Border Color on page 756 To assign a color to your table s border click the Border Color field on the Insert Table dialog box Border Color aceea aa Border Size 5 When you click that field a color selection box appears Click the color that you want to apply to the table s border Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 750 Manipulating Your T
626. w microsoft com downloads details aspx Familyld 941B3470 3AE9 4AEE 8F43 C6BB74CD14668displaylang en Once installed you can work with Office 2007 documents even though you have an earlier version of Office e If you import an Excel spreadsheet then click it from its Ektron CMS400 NET folder you see Download this file name Click the download link to view the file Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 231 Using the Document Management System Importing Office Documents DMS can store and help you manage Office documents This section explains how to import any document into Ektron s Document Management System Ektron CMS400 NET provides several ways to import Microsoft Office documents They are described below WARNING You cannot simply place files in the siteroot assets or siteroot PrivateAssets folder then manage them using Ektron CMS400 NET You can only import documents using one of the methods listed below NOTE Only users with Add permission for a folder can import documents into it See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Setting Permissions Advantages Disadvantages For more information see New gt DMS Can enter Sum Slower when Adding Documents Document from View mary Metadata importing several Using the Multiple DMS Contents of Folders information etc for Office documents Documents Option on screen each document a page 236 Cannot maintain Can create unique
627. wear TU show you first There just ain t a way to see Who when why or what will be Til now is then it s a mystery A blessing and a curse Or something worse yeah re IH h B E ko k Posted by John Edit at 02 06 2006 04 10 16 PM Comments o i i me ta SL tes FF LPF oy based I m Posted by John Edit at o2 06 2006 04 10 16 PM Comments 2 Blog Looks good Make sure you me RE Posted by John Norman Howard email visit or 02 09 2006 01 57 PM Leave a comment Application Administrator Name required F mail required http URL Your Comment Bivi E Fost Comment Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 320 Blogs Blogs in the Workarea appear as a language bubble in the folder structure This distinguishes a blog folder from a content folder E Folders E i CMS400Deme O _Rotatingl mages C About Us _ Book Store 9 Conditions 4 tl The following table lists elements commonly found in a blog Daaa Gaona Blog Title The name of your blog as you want it to appear on the site For example My Life Story Blog Post The main entry for each topic A blog post is made up of several sub elements Headline the title of the post Commentary the details of the post Comment Link links to a comments page where site visitors can view or add comments TrackBack URL a URL visitors can use to notify you when they are talking abo
628. where you want to place the text 3 Click the mouse button and drag a rectangle in which to insert the text NOTE Make sure the rectangle is large enough to accommodate your text The rectangle disappears after you enter text 4 Type the text 5 Click outside the rectangle to close it 6 To change the text or its font size style color etc place the cursor over the text and right click the mouse The text attributes dialog appears Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 721 Editing Images Attributes Font Attributes Color Attributes Text Attributes Font Style b atang Bold fon S Mincho Size CPM ingLill fi 2 a5 imSun Arnal Ol Sample AaBbYyZz T Underline T Strikeout Cancel The following table lists functions you can perform with this dialog strikeout for example sample Font Attributes Strikethrough font color Color Attributes Primary Color if text wraps when it reaches the Text Attributes Wrap end of aline Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 722 Editing Images Twain Acquire Standard Toolbar Button T Description Perform a single page scan from a previously selected source See Also Twain Source on page 723 Importing Scanned Images WeblmageFX lets you acquire images from a scanner or digital camera that supports the Twain standard You select the source using Twain
629. will become an RC International member The following table describes the change indicators Plain black text Trinitys new pipe and Unchanged Yellow highlighted text Our dedication tothe Added View Tabs When viewing content in the View Content Difference feature there are three view modes explained below Diff Compares published version of content to staged version Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 109 Comparing Versions of Content Published Displays currently published version Staged Displays the staged version of content See Also Staged Content on page 691 To switch between views click the corresponding View tab First Use of the View Content Difference Feature The first time the View Content Difference screen is used on a client machine a simple installation program is performed Click Yes when the following screen appears Security Warning x Do you want to install and run Ektron ewebDiff signed on 19 2004 4 40 PM and distributed by Ektran Ire Publisher authenticity vented by YVernSign Class 3 Code Signing 2001 CA Caution Ektron Inc asserts that this content is safe ou should only install view this content if you trust Ektron Ine to make that assertion C Always trust content from Ektron Ine More Info When the installation program completes close and reopen the View Content Difference feature Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Rev
630. with HTML Forms e Redirect to a file or page Use the Library Identify a file or a page on your Web site that is launched when the visitor completes the form An example of a file is a white paper a common file format is PDF that the visitor requested An example of a page is one that lets the visitor download your product e Redirect to an action page and forward form data See Redirect to an Action Page and Forwarding Form Data on page 586 e Report on the form See Making Form Results Available to Site Users on page 588 10 Click the Next button 11 A screen indicates that you have entered basic information about the survey and should click the Done button to enter the survey s content This procedure is described in Creating a Form s Content on page 591 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 632 Introduction to eWebEditPro XML eWebEditPro XML is a browser based Web content editor designed for dynamic Web sites It lets you create and publish your own Web content in any language supported by the operating system and your Web site More specifically eWebEditPro XML lets you perform Web page editing functions such as e copy content from any Windows based application e use Microsoft Word to edit Web content e cut copy and paste e find and replace text e check spelling e edit an image e change font style size attributes bold italics underline and color e begin
631. word A user s password entry cannot exceed 18 characters To insert a password field follow these steps 1 Place a plain text field lab onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 170 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 182 Working with HTML Forms Descriptive Hame Fidi Field Name Fed Tool Tip Text Field Default value Pe Validation validation No validation Error Message Fields on the Password Dialog SaaS eee Descriptive Name Enter a description of the field This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 199 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 183 Working with HTML Forms Pe cc Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Default value If you want to set a default value for this field enter it here Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field The c
632. word When you do its spelling options appear e lf you are done before fixing every misspelled word click Finish spell checking from the toolbar circled below If you do your changes are saved and you return to edit mode ve focus on asisting people with some of the most complex 3 nples are hemophilia cancer immune disorders and kidney he J r y applying our expertise in medical devices pharmaceutical Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 501 1 words are indicated with a red wave underscore make a meaningful difference in patents lives With the medical science we are able to provide solutions that make s lives Our projects have been very successful with Ektron s Checking Spelling e lf you want to exit the spell checker and ignore all changes you have made since beginning it click Cancel circled above at any time Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 502 Working with Images eWebEdit400 makes it easy to insert images in to your content First you import the image into library or as a Ektron CMS400 NET asset Then add it to the content Next you can edit its properties such as border width and color spacing width and height etc For more information see e Inserting an Image on page 503 e Inserting an Image Thumbnail on page 505 e Editing an Image s Properties on page 506 e Editing an Image on page 513 e Deleting an Image from Cont
633. ws Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user Start Time If you want to enter a start time click the clock icon S to display a clock From it select a start time End Time If you want to enter an end time click the clock icon EY to display a clock From it select an ending time for the event Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 282 Working with Calendars i Display the times Check this box if you want the calendar to display the event s start and end for the event times illustrated below company meeting Locationimontreal room Start 1 00 PM jEnd 2 00 Pi T The time also appears on the event detail if this box is checked Company meeting Friday April 01 2005 Location Montreal Room Start 1 00 PM End 2 00 PM Hyperlink You can link a Web page to this calendar event The Web page could contain more information about the event directions to it etc If you insert a hyperlink when this event appears on the calendar the reader can click the event to jump to that page To enter any page on the internet enter its Web address For example www example com To link to content on your Web site click the library button fi This type of link is known as a Quicklink The Quicklinks dialog appears and you can navigate to the content The last published version of link
634. x appears Enter the name of the bookmark The bookmark can include the following non alphabetic characters amp 94 Bookmark Bookmark name October_2000_minutes 4 Click Add 5 The editor screen returns The bookmark does not appear on the page Select the source text or image Click the Hyperlink button jg 7 The Hyperlink dialog box appears Click the down arrow to the right of the Quicklink field and click the bookmark you created in Step 3 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 7 2 Using Bookmarks he z Rey ooo me SCS selectii OOOO O select link this page Uctober 2000 minutes this page Top 9 If desired you can use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 774 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 10 Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 773 Using Bookmarks Changing the Destination Window While defining hypertext you can use the Target Frame field on the Hyperlink dialog box to change the window in which the destination page appears Hyperlink Information 0 i Car Link tp Bookmark Test Same Window self Parent Window _ parent Quick Link select The possible values that you can enter into the Target Frame field are ex
635. xample of a poll Note that when a site visitor hovers over the poll the question also appears as ToolTip text I TAKE A SURVEY Where did you hear about Ektron Medical Online Friend Where did you hear about Ektron Medical OcoWo Options are required Newsgroup Other Submit Form This subsection contains the following e Creating a New Poll in the Workarea on page 626 e Replacing a Poll from the Web Site on page 628 e Editing a Poll from the Web Site on page 629 Creating a New Poll in the Workarea To create a new poll follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a poll in another language by copying an existing poll and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 927 NoTE For the steps to create a new form see Creating a New Form on page 582 For the steps to create a new Survey see Creating a Survey on page 630 1 From the View menu click Language and select the language in which to create the poll Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 626 Working with HTML Forms 2 Click New gt HTML Form Survey 3 The New Form screen appears New Form a Se C5 J Each Next ga Cancel Select a form from below or begin with a blank form Next you ll be able to customize all aspects of the form so that it collects exactly the information you re looking for Blank Form Design a new form Blan
636. xt to any user you want to make Selected My Friends ID ME es ai Avatar Display First Name Last Name a aie Name L 5 2 JE John Edit 3 Click the Update Selected Colleagues button kd View Pending Colleagues Pending Colleagues are users that have sent you a colleague request which you havent accepted yet To view pending colleagues in the Workarea navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Pending Colleagues From this area you can accept and decline colleague requests See Accepting a Pending Colleague Request on page 403 and Declining a Pending Colleague Request on page 404 Accepting a Pending Colleague Request Accepting a colleagues request adds the user to your colleagues list This allows you to access additional information on their profile page To accept a pending colleague request follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 403 My Workspace 1 Navigate to My Workspace gt Colleagues gt Pending Colleagues 2 Place a check mark in the check box next to each colleague whose request you want to accept 3 Click the Approve New Colleague button WF The page refreshes and the users are removed from the Pending Colleagues list and added to the Colleagues list See Also Viewing the Existing Colleagues List on page 395 Declining a Pending Colleague Request Declining a colleague request allows you cancel another users colleague request Once you decl
637. xt to content to add to the collection You can only add content from the selected folder or its subfolders Subfolders are available if the Include subfolders checkbox is checked for the collection Click a subfolder to view its content To return to the parent folder click the folder with the up arrow W NOTE If you select content from a subfolder click the Add button to add selected content to the collection Navigating between subfolders deselects content 9 Click the Add button FLA See Also Creating a Collection on page 423 Working with Collections on page 417 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 428 Working with Collections Creating New Content for a Collection You can create new content while adding content links to a collection To add content follow these steps 1 Access the View Collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 418 Access the View Collection Screen for a collection as described in Viewing a Collection on page 421 If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support select the language of the collection Click the Add button cp The Add Items to Collection screen appears If your collection includes subfolders and you want to add the content to one of them navigate to that subfolder Otherwise proceed to the next
638. y File Name Path TestImage siteroot uploadedilmages case jpg case filename 150 siteroot uploadedIlmages case filename 150 jpg case filename 50 siteroot uploadedIlmages case filename 50 jpg Viewing Images To view an image follow the procedure described in Viewing Files on page 145 The only difference is that you view an image instead of a file Editing Image Titles To edit an image s title follow the procedure described in Editing a File on page 147 The only difference is that you edit an image s title instead of a file title Overwriting Images When an image in the library becomes out of date or if the wrong version of an image was copied you may overwrite that image with a new or correct version Overwriting images minimizes disk space and the number of copied library images NOTE Overwriting images is a permission that your system administrator may or may not assign to you To overwrite an image follow the procedure described in Overwriting Files on page 147 The only difference is that you overwrite an image instead of a file NOTE You can only overwrite an image with another image of the same extension that is gif gt gif not jpg gt gif Adding Images to Your Content Once an image is added to the library users can add it to content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 154 Library Folder To add an image to content follow the procedure described in
639. you can choose individual files or a folder If you choose a folder its structure is recreated in Ektron CMS400 NET even if it is several levels deep 1 From the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea select the Content tab 2 Select the Ektron CMS400 NET folder in which you want to place the documents See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 28 NOTE You cannot drag and drop a file into a folder for which XML Smart Forms are required 3 The default language appears next to the screen title To create the documents in a different language click View gt Language and select the language 4 Click the Add Assets button circled below Footer 1 E o E farm data awrnart al 5 The drag and drop window appears Drag and drop documents below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 238 Using the Document Management System NOTE If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET with the FireFox browser for the first time see Installing FireFox Plug In on page 227 6 Resize Ektron CMS400 NET so that it occupies the left half of the screen 7 Open Windows Explorer Resize it so it occupies the right half of the screen 8 Find the folder or assets you want to upload 9 From Windows Explorer select then drag and drop the folder or assets onto the drag and drop window Workarea Friday October 26 2007 ix gt See re eee ae ee re E Leer eee eee oes E moeutoknn
640. you cannot later change the menu s name 8 To have the menu appear on your toolbar click in the small box to the left of the menu name 9 Click the Commands tab 10 Add buttons to the menu following the procedure described in Using the Customize Toolbar Dialog Box on page 656 Moving a Menu Off the Toolbar You can move a menu from the toolbar to anywhere else on the screen even if eWebEditPro XML does not occupy the entire screen You can also change the orientation of a menu that is not on the toolbar from a horizontal to vertical To move a menu follow these steps 1 Place the cursor on the double vertical bars that indicate the SE DE GE oh beginning of the menu Click the mouse 3 Hold down the mouse button and drag the menu to the new location You can move the menu anywhere on the screen 4 After you place the menu where you want it release the mouse button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 659 Customizing Your Toolbar Changing the Menu s Orientation To change the menu s orientation follow these steps Drag the menu from the toolbar 2 Move the cursor to the bottom of the menu until it becomes a double headed arrow illustrated below ee SEB daM om Ye wee AS 3 Drag the cursor to the lower left As you do the menu s orientation changes from horizontal to vertical illustrated below 2 520p H lt 5 T m mi A a kJ
641. you get this result lf Word Wrap is turned off text stays on one line until the user entering table text presses lt Enter gt That keystroke causes text to move down to the next line By default all cells have the Word Wrap feature turned on To turn Word Wrap on or off for a cell follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu a Se The Cell Properties dialog box appears Click or off the Word Wrap checkbox and click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 768 Working with Table Cells Cell Properties Span Rows Spanned Columns Spanned Layout wadth M Word Wrap setting Cell Padding and Spacing Cell padding is the space between a cell s data and its border 1 the pixel Cell spacing is the space between a cell and surrounding cells e entire Assigning Cell Padding To assign cell padding to your table click the Cell Padding field on the Insert Table dialog box Enter the number of pixels Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 769 Working with Table Cells Assigning Cell Spacing To assign cell spacing to your table click the Cell Spacing field on the Insert Table dialog box Enter the number of pixels Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 770 Using Bookmarks Use a bookmark to let a user
642. you want to set Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu IP Sy E The Cell Properties dialog box appears Cell Properties Span Rows Spanned Columns Spanned Layout f Not Specified Percent fie Wher Wafram C Pisels 6 In the layout section of the dialog box enter the cell width at the Width field You can enter the width in pixels or percentage These choices are explained in Specifying Table Width on page 739 7 Click OK Inserting a Cell To insert a cell follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 754 Working with Table Cells 1 Move the cursor to the right of where you want the new cell to appear 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Insert Cell from the menu The new cell appears to the left of the cell in which the cursor resides when you click Insert Cell The cursor cell and all cells to its right shift right to make room for the new cell In this example the cursor was in cell b when the user clicked Insert Cell Before Pb eooo C CC Deleting a Cell To delete one or more cells follow these steps Move the cursor to the first cell you want to delete 2 To delete only that cell proceed to the next step To delete several contiguous cells select them Contiguous cells can cross rows 3 Right click the mouse 4 Click Delete Cells from the menu Any cells to the right of
643. ype of Description Relationship URL Check this box if the address is owned by the same person or company Friendship What level of friendship do you have with the person who owns the site Choose one e Contact e Acquaintance e Friend e None Physical Check this box if you have physically met the person who owns this blog Professional Does the person who owns this site have a work level relationship with you Select all that apply e Co worker e Colleague Geographical Select one e co resident e neighbor e none Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 336 Blogs Type of Description Relationship If the site owner is family what is the relationship Select one Child Parent Sibling Spouse Kin None Romantic What are your feelings toward the owner of the site Check all that apply Muse Crush Date Sweetheart 7 Click Close NOTE Add as many links to the blog boll as you would like Just click Add a New Roll Link To remove a blog roll link see Removing a Blog Roll Link on page 338 8 Click Save M Editing a Blog Roll To edit a blog roll link follow these steps NOTE To edit a blog roll link from the Web site you must be logged in 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site open the menu for the blog click Properties 2 Click View gt Folder Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 7 6 Revision 5 337 Blogs

Ektron CMS400 User Manual - Ektron Product Documentation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents